autocad mep 2015 for designers
DESCRIPTION
ggjTRANSCRIPT
![Page 1: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/1.jpg)
![Page 2: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/2.jpg)
![Page 3: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/3.jpg)
AutoCADMEP2015forDesigners
CADCIMTechnologies525St.AndrewsDrive
Schererville,IN46375,USA(www.cadcim.com)
ContributingAuthor
ShamTickooProfessor
DepartmentofMechanicalEngineeringTechnologyPurdueUniversityCalumetHammond,Indiana,USA
AutoCADMEP2015forDesignersShamTickoo
NOTICETOTHEREADERPublisherdoesnotwarrantorguaranteeanyoftheproductsdescribedinthetextorperformanyindependentanalysisinconnectionwithanyof the product information contained in the text. Publisher does not assume, and expressly disclaims, any obligation to obtain and includeinformationotherthanthatprovidedtoitbythemanufacturer.The reader isexpresslywarned toconsiderandadoptall safetyprecautions thatmightbe indicatedby theactivitieshereinand toavoidallpotentialhazards.Byfollowingtheinstructionscontainedherein,thereaderwillinglyassumesallrisksinconnectionwithsuchinstructions.Thepublishermakesnorepresentationorwarrantiesofanykind,includingbutnotlimitedto,thewarrantiesoffitnessforparticularpurposeormerchantability,norareanysuchrepresentationsimpliedwithrespecttothematerialsetforthherein,andthepublishertakesnoresponsibilitywithrespecttosuchmaterial.Thepublishershallnotbeliableforanyspecial,consequential,orexemplarydamagesresulting,inwholeorpart,fromthereader’suseof,orrelianceuponthismaterial.
![Page 4: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/4.jpg)
www.cadcim.com
CADCIMTechnologies525StAndrewsDriveSchererville,Indiana46375,USAwww.cadcim.comCopyright©2015byCADCIMTechnologies,USA.Allrightsreserved.PrintedintheUnitedStatesofAmericaexceptaspermittedundertheUnitedStatesCopyrightActof1976.Nopartofthispublicationmaybereproducedordistributedinanyformorbyanymeans,orstoredinthedatabaseorretrievalsystemwithoutthepriorpermissionofCADCIMTechnologies.ISBN978-1-936646-72-2
CADCIMTechnologies
DEDICATION
Toteachers,whomakeitpossibletodisseminateknowledgetoenlightentheyoungandcuriousminds
ofourfuturegenerations
Tostudents,whoarededicatedtolearningnewtechnologiesandmakingtheworldabetterplacetolivein
THANKS
TothefacultyandstudentsoftheMETdepartmentofPurdueUniversityCalumetfortheircooperation
ToemployeesofCADCIMTechnologiesfortheirvaluablehelp
![Page 5: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/5.jpg)
CADCIM Technologies provides effective and affordable virtual online training on various softwarepackages including Computer Aided Design and Manufacturing (CAD/CAM), computer programminglanguages,animation,architecture,andGIS.Thetrainingisdelivered‘live’viaInternetatanytime,anyplace,andatanypacetoindividualsaswellasstudentsofcolleges,universities,andCAD/CAMtrainingcenters.Themainfeaturesofthisprogramare:
TrainingforStudentsandCompaniesinaClassroomSettingHighly experienced instructors and qualified engineers at CADCIM Technologies conduct the classesunder the guidance ofProf. ShamTickooofPurdueUniversityCalumet,USA.This teamhas authoredseveral textbooks that are rated “oneof thebest” in their categories and areused invarious colleges,universities,andtrainingcentersinNorthAmerica,Europe,andinotherpartsoftheworld.
TrainingforIndividualsCADCIMTechnologieswithitscosteffectiveandtimesavinginitiativestrivestodeliverthetraininginthecomfortofyourhomeorworkplace, therebyrelievingyoufromthehasslesof traveling to trainingcenters.
TrainingOfferedonSoftwarePackagesCADCIMTechnologiesprovidesbasicandadvancedtrainingonthefollowingsoftwarepackages:
CAD/CAM/CAE:CATIA,Pro/ENGINEERWildfire,CreoParametric,SolidWorks,Autodesk Inventor,Solid Edge, NX, AutoCAD, AutoCAD LT, Customizing AutoCAD, AutoCAD Electrical, EdgeCAM,AutoCADMEP,AutoCADPlant3D,AutodeskSimulationMechanical,andANSYS
ComputerProgramming:C++,VB.NET,Oracle,AJAX,andJava
AnimationandStyling:Autodesk3dsMax,3dsMaxDesign,Maya,Softimage,andAliasDesign
ArchitectureandGIS:AutodeskRevitArchitecture,AutoCADCivil3D,AutodeskRevitStructure,RevitMEP,STAAD.Pro,Primavara,MSPandAutoCADMap3D
Formoreinformation,pleasevisitthefollowinglink:http://www.cadcim.com
![Page 6: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/6.jpg)
TABLEOFCONTENTSDedicationiiiPrefacexiv
Chapter1:IntroductiontoAutoCADMEPIntroductionGettingStartedwithAutoCADMEPAutoCADMEPInterfaceComponentsNewTabCreateLearnDrawingAreaCommandWindowViewCubeIn-canvasViewportControlsApplicationStatusBarDrawingStatusBarInvokingCommandsinAutoCADMEPCommandLineRibbonApplicationMenuToolPalettesMenuBarShortcutMenuAutoCADMEPDialogBoxesStartingaNewDrawingOpenaDrawingUseaTemplateStartfromScratchUseaWizard
SavingWorkPlacesListFileNameFilesoftypeSaveinViewsCreateNewFolder
![Page 7: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/7.jpg)
UponelevelSearchtheWebToolsDrop-Downlist
AutoSaveBackupFilesChangingAutomaticTimedSavedandBackupFilesintoAutoCADMEPFileFormatUsingtheDrawingRecoveryManagertoRecoverFilesEPDBackupFiles
ClosingaDrawingOpeninganExistingDrawingOpeninganExistingDrawingUsingtheSelectFileDialogBoxOpeninganExistingDrawingUsingtheStartupDialogBoxOpeninganExistingDrawingUsingtheDragandDropMethod
QuittingAutoCADMEPCreatingandManagingNewWorkspaceCreatingaNewWorkspacesModifyingtheWorkspaceSettings
AutoCADMEP’SHelpAutodeskExchangeAppsInfoCenterBarAdditionalHelpResourcesSelfEvaluationTest
Chapter 2: Getting Started with AutoCADMEPIntroductionWorkflowSpecifyingtheHVACParametersStartingaProjectLinkingSystemFiletotheArchitecturalPlanSpecifyingSpacesandZonesCalculatingLoads
ProjectBrowserCreatingaNewProjectFile
ProjectNavigatorProjectTabConstructTabViewsTabSheetsTab
SpaceCreatingSpacesEditingSpaces
ZoneWorkspaces
![Page 8: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/8.jpg)
HVACPipingElectricalPlumbingSchematicArchitectureCustomize
Self-EvaluationTestReviewQuestions
Chapter 3: Working with ArchitectureWorkspaceIntroductionArchitectureWorkspaceCreatingWallsWallCurtainWallCurtainWallUnit
CreatingDoorsDoorOpeningDoor/WindowAssembly
CreatingWindowWindowCornerWindow
CreatingRoofsandSlabsRoofSlabRoofSlab
CreatingStairsandRailingsStairRailingStairTower
Creatinggrids,Beams,Columns,andBracesEnhancedCustomGridCustomGridConvertColumnGridColumnCustomColumnBeamBrace
CreatingPrimitivesBoxPyramidCylinder
![Page 9: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/9.jpg)
RightTriangleIsoscelesTriangleConeDomeSphereArchGableBarrelVaultDrapeDoric
Tutorial1Tutorial2Self-EvaluationTestReviewQuestionsExercise1
Chapter4:CreatingtheHVACSystemIntroductionEquipmentAirHandlerAirTerminalFanDamperVAVUnitEquipment
DuctLineSizingtheDuctLineRoutingtheDuctLine
DuctDuctFlexDuct
DuctFittingDuctFittingDuctCustomFittingDuctTransitionUtility
Tutorial1Self-EvaluationTestReviewQuestionsExercise1
Chapter5:CreatingPipingSystemIntroductionAddingEquipmentHeatExchangerPump
![Page 10: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/10.jpg)
TankValveEquipment
CreatingPipelinesPipeParallelPipe
AddingPipeFittingsPipeFittingPipeCustomFitting
CreatingaCustomMulti-viewPartTutorial1Self-EvaluationTestReviewQuestionsExercise1
Chapter6:CreatingPlumbingSystemIntroductionPlumbingWorkspaceFilterPumpShowerSinkWaterClosetandUrinalEquipment
PlumbingLinePropertiesPalettePlumbingFittingPropertiesPalette
Tutorial1Self-EvaluationTestReviewQuestionsExercise1
Chapter 7: Creating Electrical SystemLayoutIntroductionAddingEquipmentGeneratorJunctionBoxSwitchboardEquipment
PanelDescriptionStyleAligntoObjects
![Page 11: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/11.jpg)
RotationJustificationPresetElevationElevationSystemCreatecircuitsCircuitSettingsNameRatingVoltagephase-to-neutralVoltagephase-to-phasePhasesWiresMaintypeMainsize(amps)Designcapacity(amps)PaneltypeEnclosuretypeMountingAICratingFedfromNotes
DeviceDescriptionStyleLayoutmethodAligntoobjectsRotationJustificationPresetElevationElevationSystemIDInserttagElectricalProperty
CableTraySystemElevationHorizontalVerticalWidthHeightUseRise/RunUseRouting
CableTrayFitting
![Page 12: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/12.jpg)
WireDescriptionStyleSegmentHeightOffsetRadiusPresetElevationElevationSystemShowcircuitsfromthepanelsCircuitConnectedcircuitsConnectedloadHotsizeNeutralsizeGroundsizeNewRunConduitRoutingpreferenceNominalsizeSpecifycutlengthCutlengthJustifyHorizontalOffsetVerticalOffsetSlopeFormatSlopeBendAngleBendRadiusConnectionDetailsPreferencesStyle
ParallelConduitsConduitFittingDescriptionSystemPartCurrentSizeNominalDiameterOtherDimensionsRolloutElevationSpecifyrotationonscreenRotationConnectionDetails
![Page 13: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/13.jpg)
CircuitManagerCreateNewCircuitCreateMultipleCircuitsDeleteCircuitShowCircuitedDevicesCircuitReportCutCircuitCopyCircuitPasteCircuitCalculateWires
Tutorial1Self-EvaluationTestReviewQuestionsExercise1
Chapter8:RepresentationandSchedulesIntroductionCreatingVerticalSectionEnableLiveSectionDisableLiveSectionToggleBodyDisplayReverseGenerateSection
CreatingHorizontalSectionCreatingaSectionLineCreatingElevationLineCreatingHiddenLineProjectionSlicingthemodelRefreshingSectionsandElevationsinaBatchInsertingDetailComponentsEditDatabaseAddGroupAddComponentEditDelete
CreatingSchedulesAirTerminalDevicesScheduleFanScheduleVAVFanPoweredBox(ElectricHeat)ScheduleSpaceEngineeringScheduleDuctQuantityScheduleDuctFabricationContractScheduleTablePipe&FittingSchedule
![Page 14: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/14.jpg)
PipeQuantityMechanicalPumpScheduleMechanicalTankScheduleDeviceScheduleLightingDeviceScheduleConduit&FittingScheduleElectrical&MechanicalEquipmentSchedule3-PhaseBranchPanelSchedule1-PhaseBranchPanelScheduleDistributionBoardScheduleSwitchboardSchedulePanelSchedulePlumbingFixtureSchedulePlumbingFixture&PipeConnectionScheduleWaterHeater(Gas)ScheduleDoorScheduleDoorSchedule-ProjectBasedWindowScheduleRoomScheduleSpaceSchedule-BOMASpaceInventoryScheduleWallScheduleScheduleStylesTableEditing
Tutorial1Self-EvaluationTestReviewQuestionsExercise1
Chapter9:WorkingwithSchematicsIntroductionSchematicWorkspaceEquipmentSchematicSymbolSchematicLineSchematicLineStylesSchematicRepresentationofanExistingSystem
Tutorial1Self-EvaluationTestReviewQuestionsExercise1
Chapter10:ProjectStartingaNewProjectFile
![Page 15: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/15.jpg)
CreatingCategoriesintheProjectCreatingArchitecturalDrawingsCreatingHVACDrawingsCreatingPipingDrawingsCreatingElectricalDrawingsIndexI-1
PrefaceAutoCADMEP2015AutoCADMEP, also known as AMEP, is based on the AutoCAD Architecture platform. Here, MEPstandsforMechanical,Electrical,andPlumbing.ThesoftwarehasalltherequiredfeaturesforcreatingaMechanical,Electrical,andPlumbingsystem.ItincludesallthefeaturesoftheAutoCADplatformsuchasBlocks, Layers, 3D Models, and so on. It also includes architectural features such as walls, doors,windows,andsoon.In AMEP, you can add objects with actual parameters to the project. These objects are available invariouscategoriesofAutoCADMEPlibraryandcanbecustomizedaccordingtotherequirementsoftheusers.AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers textbook is written with the intention of helping the readerseffectivelyusethedesigninganddraftingtoolsofAutoCADMEP2015.Thistextbookprovidesasimpleand clear explanation of tools that are commonly used in AutoCAD MEP 2015. After reading thistextbook,youwillbeabletodesignHVACsystem,pipingsystem,plumbingsystem,andelectricallayoutof a building. The chapter on schematics will enable the users generate the schematic drawings of asystemforeasyrepresentation.Theexamplesandtutorialsusedinthistextbookensurethattheuserscanrelatetheknowledgefromthistextbookwiththeactualindustrydesigns.Themainfeaturesofthistextbookareasfollows:•TutorialApproachThe author has adopted the tutorial point-of-view and the learn-by-doing approach throughout thetextbook.Thisapproachguidestheuserseasilyunderstandtheprocessofdesigninganddraftingwiththehelpoftutorials.
•Real-WorldProjectsasTutorialsTheauthorhasusedabout9real-worldmechanicalengineeringprojectsas tutorials in this textbook.Thisenablesthereaderstorelatethetutorialstotheengineeringindustry.Inaddition,thereareabout7exercisesthatarealsobasedonthereal-worldengineeringprojects.
![Page 16: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/16.jpg)
•TipsandNotesAdditionalinformationrelatedtovarioustopicsisprovidedtotheusersintheformoftipsandnotes.
•HeavilyIllustratedTextThetextinthisbookisheavilyillustratedwithabout400linediagramsandscreencaptureimages.
•LearningObjectivesThefirstpageofeverychaptersummarizesthetopicsthatarecoveredinthatchapter.
•Self-EvaluationTest,ReviewQuestions,andExercisesEvery chapter endswith a Self-Evaluation Test so that the users can assess their knowledge of thechapter. The answers to Self-EvaluationTest are given at the end of the chapter.Also, theReviewQuestionsandExercisesaregivenattheendofeachchapterandtheycanbeusedbytheInstructorsastestquestionsandexercises.
SymbolsUsedintheTextbookNoteTheauthorhasprovidedadditionalinformationrelatedtovarioustopicsintheformofnotes.TipTheauthorhasprovidedalotofusefulinformationtotheusersaboutthetopicbeingdiscussedintheformoftips.NewThisiconindicatesthatthecommandortoolbeingdiscussedisnew.EnhancedThisiconindicatesthatthecommandortoolbeingdiscussedisenhanced.FormattingConventionsUsedintheTextbookPleaserefertothefollowinglistfortheformattingconventionsusedinthistextbook.•Namesoftools,buttons,options,andpalettesarewritteninboldface.•Namesofdialogboxes,drop-downs,drop-downlists,listboxes,areas,editboxes,checkboxes,radiobuttons,andpalettesarewritteninboldface.
•Valuesenteredineditboxesarewritteninboldface.•Namesandpathsofthefilesarewritteninitalics.Example:TheWalltool,theOKbutton,theLeftoption,andsoon.Example: The Detail Component Manager dialog box, the Walls drop-down, the Width edit box in thePROPERTIESpalette,theSchematicCurvecheckbox in theDrafting Settingsdialogbox, theKeyboard entryradiobuttonoftheUserPreferencestabintheOptionsdialogbox,andsoon.
![Page 17: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/17.jpg)
Example:Enter5intheRadiuseditbox.Example:C:\amep\c03,c03tut03.dwg,andsoon
NamingConventionsUsedintheTextbookToolIfyouclickonaniteminaRibbonandacommandisinvokedtocreate/editanobjectorperformsomeaction,thenthatitemistermedastool.Forexample:ToCreate:Linetool,Dimensiontool,WalltoolToModify:Movetool,Explodetool,RotatetoolAction:ZoomAlltool,Pantool,CopytoolIfyouclickonanitemintheRibbonandadialogboxisinvokedwhereinyoucansettheproperties tocreate/editanobject,thenthatitemisalsotermedastool,refertoFigure1.Forexample:AirHandlertool,Pumptool,JunctionBoxtool
ButtonTheiteminadialogboxthathasa3DshapelikeabuttonistermedasButton.Forexample,OKbutton,Cancelbutton,Applybutton,andsoon.DialogBoxThenamingconventionsusedforthecomponentsinadialogboxarementionedinFigure1.
![Page 18: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/18.jpg)
Figure1ThecomponentsofadialogboxTOOLPALETTEAtoolpaletteistheoneinwhichasetofcommontoolsaregroupedtogetherforperforminganaction.For example, TOOL PALETTES - PIPING, TOOL PALETTES - ARCHITECTURAL, TOOLPALETTES-HVAC,andsoon,refertoFigure2.
FIGURE2TOOLSINTHETOOLPALETTES-ARCHITECTURALPROPERTIESPaletteThePROPERTIES palette looks similar to the tool palette but in this palette, only the properties of the
![Page 19: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/19.jpg)
objects are displayed. You can edit these properties as per your requirement. Figure 3 shows thePROPERTIESpalettedisplayedafterselectingawallfromthedrawingarea.
Figure3PropertiesinthePROPERTIESpaletteFreeCompanionWebsiteIthasbeenourconstantendeavortoprovideyouthebesttextbooksandservicesataffordableprice.Inthis endeavor, we have come out with a Free Companion website that will facilitate the process ofteachingandlearningofAutoCADMEP.Ifyoupurchasethisbook,youwillgetaccesstothefilesontheCompanionwebsitebyvisitingwww.cadcim.com.Thefollowingresourcesareavailableforthefacultyandstudentsinthiswebsite:FacultyResources•TechnicalSupportYoucangetonlinetechnicalsupportbycontactingtechsupport@cadcim.com.
•InstructorGuideSolutionstoallreviewquestionsandexercisesinthetextbookareprovidedinthisguidetohelpthefacultymemberstesttheskillsofthestudents.
•PowerPointPresentationsThecontentsof thebookare arranged inPowerPoint slides that canbeusedby the faculty for theirlectures.
•PartFilesThepartfilesusedinillustrations,tutorials,andexercisesareavailableforfreedownload.
Note that you can access the faculty resources only if you are registered as faculty atwww.cadcim.com/Registration.aspx
![Page 20: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/20.jpg)
StudentResources•TechnicalSupportYoucangetonlinetechnicalsupportbycontactingtechsupport@cadcim.com.
•PartFilesThepartfilesusedinillustrationsandtutorialsareavailableforfreedownload.
StayConnectedTo get the latest information about our textbooks, videos, teaching/learning resources, and other suchupdates, follow us on Facebook (www.facebook.com/cadcim) and Twitter (@cadcimtech). Formoreinformation about our latest video tutorials, you can also subscribe to our YouTube channel(www.youtube.com/cadcimtech).Youcanaccessadditionallearningresourcesbyvisitinghttp://allaboutcadcam.blogspot.com.Ifyoufaceanyprobleminaccessingthesefiles,[email protected]@[email protected]
Preface
![Page 21: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/21.jpg)
Chapter1
IntroductiontoAutoCADMEP
![Page 22: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/22.jpg)
LearningObjectivesAftercompletingthischapter,youwillbeableto:•StartAutoCADMEP•UsethecomponentsoftheAutoCADMEPinterface•InvokeAutoCADMEPcommandsfromthekeyboard,menu,toolbar,shortcutmenu,TOOLPALETTES,andribbon•UsethecomponentsofdialogboxesinAutoCADMEP•Startanewdrawing•Saveaworkusingvariousfile-savingcommands•Closeadrawing•Openanexistingdrawing•ExitAutoCADMEP•UsevariousoptionsofAutoCADMEPhelp
INTRODUCTIONAutoCADMEPisbasedontheAutoCADArchitectureplatform.SinceitbelongstotheAutoCADfamily,ithasallthefeaturesofAutoCADsuchasBlocks,Layers,3DModels,andsoon.Also,thesoftwarehasalltheimportantarchitecturalfeaturessuchas,walls,doors,windows,andsoon.AutoCADMEPisalsoreferred to as AMEP where MEP stands for Mechanical, Electrical, and Plumbing. Therefore, thesoftwarehasalltherequiredfeaturesforcreatingaMechanical,Electrical,andPlumbingsystem.Inthischapter,youwill learn tostartAutoCADMEPandusevariouscomponentsdisplayed in theAutoCADMEPinterface.GETTINGSTARTEDWITHAUTOCADMEPWhenyou installAutoCADMEP2015on your system, three shortcuts pointing to theAutoCADMEP2015 - English (Global), AutoCADMEP 2015 - English (US Imperial), and AutoCADMEP 2015 -English(USMetric)willbecreatedonthedesktop.YoucanstartAutoCADMEPbydouble-clickingonanyof these three icons. Ifyoudouble-clickonAutoCADMEP2015-English (US Imperial), theunitsavailable in drawing will be in Inch, Feet, andMile. If you double-click on AutoCADMEP 2015 -English(USMetric), theunitsavailableinthedrawingwillbeinMillimeter,Centimeter,andMeter.Ifyoudouble-clickonAutoCADMEP2015-English(Global),AutoCADMEPwillstartusingtheglobaltemplate.
NoteIn this textbook, the global unit system is followed, so you need to start AutoCADMEP 2015 bydouble-clickontheAutoCADMEP2015-English(Global)iconfromthedesktop.AUTOCADMEPINTERFACECOMPONENTSTheinitialAutoCADMEPinterfacecomprisesofdrawingarea,commandwindow,menubar, titlebar,severaltoolbars,modelandlayouttabs,andStatusBar,refertoFigure1-1.Thetitlebarislocatedonthe
![Page 23: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/23.jpg)
top of the interface screen and displays AutoCAD logo and the name of the current drawing. Othercomponentsarediscussednext.
Figure1-1AutoCADMEPinterfacecomponentsNewTabInAutoCADMEP2015, theNewTab is displayedwith the startup interfacewindow. It only appearswhenall thedrawingtemplatesareclosedorwhennodrawingisopen.Itcontainstwoslidingframes,CreateandLearn.Theseframesarediscussednext.CREATEWhenyouclickontheCREATEslidingframe,theCREATEpagewillbedisplayed.IntheCREATEpage,youcanaccesssamplefile,recentfiles,templates,productupdates,andcanconnectwiththeonlinecommunity.TheCREATE page is divided into three columns:GetStarted,RecentDocuments, andConnect,asshowninFigure1-2.
![Page 24: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/24.jpg)
Figure1-2ThestartupinterfacewindowofAutoCADMEP2015withtheCREATEpageLEARNWhenyouclickontheLEARN slidingframe, theLEARNpagewillbedisplayed.Thispagecontainsinformationonnewlyintroducedtools,securityupdates,andsoononAutoCADMEP2015.YouaccesstheLEARNpagebyclickingonLEARNbuttononthe leftat thebottomof thepage.It isdividedintothreecolumns:What’sNew,GettingStartedVideos,andSecurityUpdateswithOnlineResources,asshowninFigure1-3.
Figure1-3ThestartupinterfacewindowofAutoCADMEP2015withtheLEARNpage
DrawingArea
![Page 25: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/25.jpg)
ClickontheStartDrawingbuttonundertheGetStartedcolumnintheCREATEslidingframetoopenthe drawing area. The drawing area covers amajor portion of the screen. In this area, you can drawobjectsandusethecommands.Todrawtheobjects,youneedtodefinethecoordinatepoints.Positionofthepointingdevice isrepresentedonthescreenbythecursor.There isacoordinatesystemiconat thelowerleftcornerofthedrawingarea.Thedrawingareaalsohasthestandardwindowsbuttonssuchasclose,minimize,andmaximizeonthetoprightcorner.Thesebuttonshavethesamefunctionsasforanyotherstandardwindow.CommandWindowThecommandwindowatthebottomofthedrawingareahasthecommandbarwhereyoucanenterthecommands.Italsodisplaysthesubsequentpromptsequencesandthemessages.Youcanchangethesizeofthe window by placing the cursor on the top edge (double line bar known as the grab bar) and thendragging it. This way you can increase its size to see all the previous commands you have used. Bydefault, the command window displays only three lines. You can also press the F2 key to displayAutoCADTextwindow,whichdisplaysthepreviouscommandsandprompts.
ViewCubeViewCubeisavailableonthetoprightcornerofthedrawingareaandisusedtoswitchbetweenstandardandisometricviewsorrollthecurrentview.In-CanvasViewportControlsIn-CanvasViewportControlsisavailableonthetopleftcornerofthedrawingscreen.Itenablesyoutochangetheview,visualstyleaswellastheviewport.ApplicationStatusBarTheApplicationStatusBarislocatedatthebottomoftheinterface.Thisbarisalsoreferredtoasthestatusbar.Itcontainssomeusefulinformationandbuttons,refertoFigure1-4,thathelpyouinchangingthestatusofsomeAutoCADMEPfunctions.Youcantogglebetweentheonandoffstatesofmostofthesefunctionsbyusingthecorrespondingoption.YoucancustomizetheApplicationStatusBarbyusingtheCustomizebuttonavailableontherightontheStatusBar.SomeoftheoptionsintheApplicationStatusBararediscussednext.
![Page 26: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/26.jpg)
Figure1-4TheApplicationStatusBar
DrawingCoordinatesThe information about the coordinates is displayed at the lower left corner of the Status Bar. TheCOORDS systemvariable controls the display type of the coordinates. If the value of theCOORDSvariableissetto0,thecoordinatedisplayisstatic,thatis,thecoordinatevaluesdisplayedintheStatusBarwillchangeonlywhenyouspecifyapoint.IfthevalueoftheCOORDSvariableissetto1or2,thecoordinatedisplaywillbedynamic.Whenthevariableissetto1,AutoCADMEPconstantlydisplaystheabsolute coordinates of the cursor with respect to the UCS origin. The relative polar coordinates(length<angle)aredisplayedwhenyouareinanAutoCADMEPcommandandtheCOORDSvariableissetto2.ClickontheDrawingCoordinatesareatotogglethecoordinatestatusfromontooffandviceversa.ModelorPaperspaceTheModelorPaperspacebuttonisusedtotogglebetweenthemodelspaceandthepaperspace.GRIDMODETheGRIDMODE button is used to toggle the display of the grid lines on and off on the screen. InAutoCADMEP, thegrid linesareusedas reference lines todrawobjects.TheF7functionkeycanbeusedtoturnthegriddisplayonoroff.SNAPMODEOnchoosingthisbutton,youcanmovethecursorinfixedincrements.TheF9keyactsasatogglekeytoturnthesnapofforon.InferConstraintsIfthisbuttonischosen,thensomeofthegeometricconstraintswillbeautomaticallyappliedtothesketchwhileitisdrawn.DynamicInputTheDynamicInputbuttonisusedtoturntheDynamicInputmodeonoroff.Turningitonfacilitatesthe
![Page 27: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/27.jpg)
heads-updesignapproachbecauseallcommands,prompts,anddimensionalinputswillnowbedisplayedin the drawing area and you do not need to look at theCommand prompt all the time.This saves thedesigntimeandalsoincreasestheefficiencyoftheuser.IftheDynamicInputmodeisturnedon,youwillbe able to enter the commands through thePointerInput boxes, and the numerical values through theDimensionalInput boxes.Youwill also be able to select the command options through theDynamicPromptoptionsinthegraphicswindow.ToturntheDynamicInputmodeonoroff,usetheF12key.ORTHOMODEOn choosing theORTHOMODE button, you can draw lines at right angles only.You can use the F8functionkeytoturntheorthomodeonoroff.PolarTrackingThePolarTracking button is used to turn the polar tracking on. If you turn the polar tracking on, themovementofthecursorisrestrictedalongapathbasedontheanglesetasthepolarangle.YoucanalsousetheF10functionkeytoturnonthisoption.Notethatturningthepolartrackingon,automaticallyturnsofftheorthomode.IsometricDraftingInAutoCADMEP2015,youcancreateanisometricdraftingbyusinganyworkingplane.Toactivatearequiredworkingplane,choosetheIsometricDraftingbuttonfromthestatusbar.Onchoosingthisbutton,a flyout will be displayed with the isoplaneLeft, isoplaneTop, or isoplane Right option. You canchoosetherequiredoptionfromthisflyouttoactivatetherespectiveworkplane.ObjectSnapTrackingThisbuttonisusedtoturntheobjectsnaptrackingonoroff.Onchoosingthisbutton,theinferencinglineswillbedisplayed.Inferencinglinesaredashedlinesthataredisplayedautomaticallywhenyouselectasketchingtoolandtrackaparticularkeypointonthescreen.YoucanalsochoosetheF11functionkeytoturnonorofftheobjectsnaptracking.ObjectSnapOnchoosingtheObjectSnapbutton,youcanusetherunningobjectsnapstosnapontoapoint.YoucanalsousetheF3functionkeytoturntheobjectsnaponoroff.ThestatusofOSNAP(offoron)doesnotpreventyoufromusingtheimmediatemodeobjectsnaps.Show/HideLineweightThisbuttonisusedtoturnonoroffthedisplayoflineweightsinthedrawing.Ifthisbuttonisnotchosen,thedisplayoflineweightwillbeturnedoff.TransparencyThisbuttonisusedtoturnonoroffthetransparencysetforadrawing.YoucansetthetransparencyinthePropertiespanelorinthelayerinwhichthesketchisdrawn.SelectionCyclingOn choosing this button, you can cycle through and select the overlapping objects close to the other
![Page 28: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/28.jpg)
entities.Onselectinganentitywhenthisbuttonischosen,theSelectionlistboxwillbedisplayedwithalistofentities.3DObjectSnapOn choosing this button, you can snap the key point on a solid or a surface.You can also use the F4functionkeytoturnonoroffthe3Dobjectsnap.DynamicUCSThisbuttonisusedtoenableordisabletheuseofdynamicUCS.AllowingthedynamicUCSensuresthattheXYplaneoftheUCSgetsdynamicallyalignedwiththeselectedfaceofthemodel.YoucanalsousetheF6functionkeytoturntheDynamicUCSbuttononoroff.FiltersobjectselectionInAutoCADMEP2015,youcanfilterobjectsbyusingtheFiltersobjectselectionbutton.Ifyouwanttoselectonlyvertex,edge,face,solidhistory,orthedrawingviewcomponentsofa3Dobjectthenyoucanchoose therequiredoptionfromtheflyoutwhich is invokedbyclickingon thesmallarrowlocatedonright of the Filters object selection button. You can also select multiple objects using the selectionwindow.TheDrawingViewComponentsoptionisusedtoselectthecomponentsofanassemblyorthepartsinamulti-body. Using this option, you can select components either individually, or through windowselection.YoucanalsoclearthefiltersbychoosingtheFilterobjectselectionbuttonagain.ShowgizmosYoucanmove, rotate,andscalea3Dobjectbychoosing theShowgizmosbuttonfromtheStatusBar.WhenyouclickonthesmallarrowavailablenexttotheShowgizmosbutton,aflyoutisdisplayedwiththeMoveGizmo,RotateGizmo,andScaleGizmooptions.ShowannotationobjectsThis button is used to control the visibility of the annotative objects that do not support the currentannotationscaleinthedrawingarea.AddScalestoannotativeobjectswhentheannotativescalechangesIfthisbuttonischosenthentheannotationscalesthataresetcurrenttoalltheannotativeobjectspresentinthedrawingareappliedautomaticallytothedrawing.AnnotationScaleofthecurrentviewTheannotationscalecontrolsthesizeanddisplayoftheannotativeobjectsinthemodelspace.Whenyouchoosethisbutton,aflyoutwillbedisplayedshowingalltheannotationscalesavailableforthecurrentdrawing.WorkspaceSwitchingWhen you choose this button, a flyout is displayed. You can use the options in this flyout to switchbetween different workspaces like HVAC, Piping, Electrical, and so on. You can also customize a
![Page 29: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/29.jpg)
workspaceorcreateanewworkspacebyusingtheoptionsinthisflyout.AnnotationMonitor
Figure1-5Thenon-associativeannotationTheAnnotationMonitorbuttonisusedtoturntheAnnotationMonitoronoroff.Ifitisturnedon,allthenon-associativeannotationswillgethighlightedwithabadgeplacedonthem,asshowninFigure1-5.Inthisfigure,alineleaderisnotassociatedwithline.CurrentdrawingunitsTheCurrent drawing units button displays and controls the units of drawing.When you choose thisbutton,aflyoutisdisplayed.Thisflyoutshowsalltheunitsystemsavailableforthedrawing.QuickPropertiesOnchoosingthisbutton,thepropertiesoftheselectedsketchedentitywillbedisplayedinapanel.ReplaceZvaluewithcurrentelevationThis toggle button is used to replace the elevation valuewith the specifiedZ value.When this togglebuttonischosen,thecomponentsarecreatedontheplanehavingtheelevationequaltotheZvalueenteredforthepreviouslycreatedcomponent.ElevationTheelevationicondisplaysavalueofthecurrentelevation.Tospecifyelevation,clickontheelevationvaluedisplayedintheApplicationStatusBar;theElevationOffsetdialogboxwillbedisplayed.YoucansettheelevationeitherbyspecifyingtheZoffsetvalueorbypickingapointfromthedrawing.HardwareAccelerationThisbuttonisusedtosettheperformanceofthesoftwaretoanacceptablelevel.CatalogStatusThisbuttonisusedtocheckthestatusofequipmentintheMEPdatabase.Ifthedatabaseisnotupdatedthenyoucanregeneratethedatabasebyusingthisbutton.Todoso,double-clickontheCatalogStatusbuttonintheApplicationStatusBar;youwillbepromptedtospecifythenameofcatalogforwhichyouwant to regenerate the database.There are five catalogs inAutoCADMEP:Cabletray,Conduit,Duct,
![Page 30: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/30.jpg)
Mvpart,andPipe.Youcanupdateanyof thecatalogsbyspecifying itsnameoryoucanupdateall thecatalogsbyspecifyingAllatthecommandprompt.CleanScreenThisbuttonisusedtodisplaytheexpandedviewofthedrawingareabyhidingallthetoolbarsexceptthecommand window, Status Bar, and menu bar. The expanded view of the drawing area can also bedisplayed by using the CTRL+0 keys. Choose theClean Screen button again to restore the previousdisplaystate.
Tip.YoucanincreasethedisplayareaofthescreenbypressingtheCTRL+0keysorbychoosingView>CleanScreenfromthemenubar.Notethatthe0keyonthenumerickeypadofthekeyboardcannotbeusedfortheCleanScreenoption.YoucanalsochoosetheCleanScreenbuttonintheApplicationStatusBartohideallthetoolbars.CustomizationThisbuttonisusedtoaddorremovetoolsintheApplicationStatusBar.Plot/PublishDetailsReportAvailableThis icon is displayed in theApplication StatusBar when a plotting or publishing activity is beingperformedinthebackgroundoriscompleted.Whenyouclickonthisicon,thePlotandPublishDetailsdialogbox,whichprovidesthedetailsabouttheplottingandpublishingactivity,willbedisplayed.YoucancopythisreporttotheclipboardbychoosingtheCopytoClipboardbuttonfromthedialogbox.DrawingStatusBarTheDrawingStatusBarisdisplayedinbetweenthedrawingareaandthecommandwindowbydefault,refertoFigure1-6.TheannotatedDrawingStatusBarisshowninFigure1-7.ThebuttonsavailableintheDrawingStatusBararediscussednext.
Figure1-6TheDrawingStatusBarDisplayConfigurationWhenyouclickonthisbutton,aflyoutwillbedisplayedwithMEPDesignasthedefaultconfiguration.Variousoptionsavailableinthisflyoutareusedtocontrolthelevelofdisplayoftheobjectscreatedinthedrawingareawhenviewedfromdifferentdirections.Theoptionsintheflyoutarearrangedaccordingtotheir area of application. For example, the options related to theElectrical workspace are arranged
![Page 31: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/31.jpg)
together.
Figure1-7TheannotatedDrawingStatusBarGlobalCutPlaneThisoptionisusedtospecifythecutplaneheightanddisplayrangefortheobjectsinthedrawingarea.IfyouclickonthevaluedisplayednexttoGlobalCutPlaneintheDrawingStatusBar, theGlobalCutPlanedialogboxwillbedisplayed,asshowninFigure1-8.
Figure1-8TheGlobalCutPlanedialogbox
SurfaceHatchToggleUsingthisbutton,youcanturnon/offthedisplayofthesurfacehatchinthedrawingarea.
LayerKeyOverridesTheLayer Key Overrides button is used to enable or disable the overrides applied on the layersavailable in the drawing file.Whenyou click on this button, theLayerKeyOverrides dialog box isdisplayed, refer to Figure 1-9. Using the options available in this dialog box, you can configure thepresetsforanyofthelayersavailableinthedrawing.Also,youcanenableordisabletheoverridesforanyofthelayeravailable.
![Page 32: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/32.jpg)
Figure1-9TheLayerKeyOverridesdialogbox
ManageXrefsTheManageXrefsiconisdisplayedintheDrawingStatusBarwheneveranexternalreferencedrawingis attached to the selected drawing. This icon displays a message whenever the Xreffed drawing isreloaded.TofinddetailedinformationregardingthestatusofeachXref in thedrawingandtherelationbetweenvariousXrefs,clickontheManageXrefsicon;theEXTERNALREFERENCESpalettewillbedisplayedshowingthedifferentXrefobjects.IsolateObjectsWhenyouclickonthisbutton,aflyoutisdisplayed.Therearetwobuttonsinthisflyout:IsolateObjectsandHideObjects.UsingtheIsolateObjectsbutton,youcanisolatetheselectedobjectssothatonlytheselectedobjectswillbedisplayedinthedrawingarea.Iftherearesomeobjectsalreadyisolated,thentheIsolateObjectsbuttonwillbedisplayedasaredbulbintheDrawingStatusBar.Toendisolationordisplay a hidden object, click this button again and choose theEndObject Isolation option. To hideobjects,choosetheHideObjectsoptionfromtheflyout.DrawingStatusBarMenuThis button is available in the right of theDrawing Status Bar. When you click on this button, theDrawingStatusBarmenuwillbedisplayed,asshowninFigure1-10.YoucanhideordisplayanyofthebuttonsintheDrawingStatusBarbyusingtherespectivecheckboxinthemenu.
![Page 33: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/33.jpg)
Figure1-10TheDrawingStatusBarmenu
InvokingCommandsinAutoCADMEPOn starting AutoCADMEP, when you are in the drawing area, you need to invoke AutoCADMEPcommandstoperformanyoperation.Forexample,todrawapipeline,enterthePIPEADDcommandatthecommandpromptandthendefinethestartpointandtheendpointofthepipe.Similarly,ifyouwanttoeraseobjects,youmustinvoketheERASEcommandandthenselecttheobjectsforerasing.InAutoCADMEP,youcaninvokethecommandsbyusing:CommandLineRibbonApplicationmenuTOOLPALETTESMenubarShortcutmenuToolbarCommandLineYoucaninvokeanyAutoCADMEPcommandfromtheCommandlinebytypingthecommandnameandthen pressing ENTER. As you type the first letter of the command, AutoCADMEP displays all theavailable commands startingwith the letter typed. If theDynamicInput is on and the cursor is in thedrawingarea,bydefault,thecommandwillbeenteredthroughthePointerInputbox.ThePointerInputboxisasmallboxdisplayedontherightofthecursor.However,ifthecursoriscurrentlyplacedonanytoolbar ormenu bar, or if theDynamic Input is turned off, the commandwill be entered through theCommandprompt.Beforeyouenteracommand,theCommandpromptisdisplayedasthelastlineinthecommandwindowarea.Ifitisnotdisplayed,youmustcanceltheexistingcommandbypressingtheESC(Escape)key.ThefollowingexampleshowshowtoinvoketheLINEcommandusingthekeyboard:Command:LINEorL(Liscommandalias)
RibbonIn AutoCADMEP, you can also invoke a tool from theRibbon. When you start the AutoCADMEPsession for the first time, by default theRibbon is displayed below theQuickAccessToolbar. TheRibbonconsistsofvarioustabs.Thetabshavedifferentpanelswhichinturnhavetoolsarrangedinrows.Forexample,thetoolsforcreating,modifying,andannotatingtheobjectsareavailableintheAnnotatetabinpanelsinsteadofbeingspreadoutintheentiredrawingareaindifferenttoolbarsandmenus,refertoFigure1-11.
![Page 34: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/34.jpg)
Figure1-11TheRibbonwiththeAnnotatetabchosenSomeofthetoolshavesmallblackdownarrows.Thisindicatesthatthetoolshavingsimilarfunctionsaregroupedtogether.Tochooseatool,clickonthedownarrow;adrop-downwillbedisplayed.Choosetherequired tool from the drop-down displayed. Note that if you choose a tool from the drop-down, thecorrespondingcommandwillbeinvokedandthetoolthatyouhavechosenwillbedisplayedinthepanel.Forexample,todrawacircleusing2points,clickonthedownarrownexttotheCircle,Center,RadiustoolintheDrawpaneloftheHometab;aflyoutwillbedisplayed.ChoosetheCircle,2-Pointtoolfromtheflyoutandthendrawthecircle.YouwillnoticethattheCircle,2-PointtoolisdisplayedinplaceoftheCircle,Center,Radiustool.
Choosethedownarrowtoexpandthepanel.Youwillnoticethatapushpinisavailableattheleftcornerofthepanel.Clickonthepushpintokeepthepanelintheexpandedstate.Also,someofthepanelshavean inclinedarrowat the lower-right corner.Whenyou left clickonan inclinedarrow,adialogbox isdisplayed.Youcandefinethesettingofthecorrespondingpanelinthedialogbox.Youcanreorderthepanelsinthetab.Todoso,pressandholdtheleftmousebuttononthepaneltobemovedanddragittotherequiredposition.YoucanalsoundocktheRibbon.Todoso,right-clickontheblank space in theRibbon and choose theUndock option; theRibbon gets undocked.You canmove,resize,anchor,andauto-hidetheRibbonusingtheshortcutmenuthatwillbedisplayedwhenyouright-clickon theheadingstrip.Toanchor the floatingRibbon to the leftor rightof thedrawingarea in thevertical position, right-click on the heading strip of the floatingRibbon; a shortcutmenu is displayed.Choosethecorrespondingoptionfromthisshortcutmenu.TheAuto-hideoptionwillhidetheRibbonintotheheadingstripandwilldisplayitonlywhenyoumovethecursoroverthisstrip.YoucancustomizethedisplayoftabsandpanelsintheRibbon.TocustomizetheRibbon,right-clickonanyoneofthetoolsinit;ashortcutmenuwillbedisplayed.Onmovingthecursoroveroneoftheoptions,aflyoutwillbedisplayedwithatickmarkbeforealloptionsandthecorrespondingtaborpanelwillbedisplayedintheRibbon.Select/clearappropriateoptiontodisplay/hideaparticulartaborpanel.ApplicationMenuTheApplicationmenuisavailableatthetop-leftoftheAutoCADMEPwindow.ItcontainssomeofthetoolsthatarealsoavailableintheQuickAccessToolbar.ClickthedownarrowontheApplicationmenutodisplaythetools,asshowninFigure1-12.Youcansearchacommandusingthesearchfieldonthetopof theApplicationmenu. To search a tool, enter the complete or partial name of the command in thesearchfield;therelevanttoollistwillbedisplayed.Ifyouclickonatoolfromthelist,thecorrespondingcommandwillgetactivated.
![Page 35: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/35.jpg)
Figure1-12TheApplicationmenu
By default, theRecentDocument button is chosen in theApplication menu. Therefore, the recentlyopeneddrawingswillbedisplayed.Ifyouhaveopenedmultipledrawingfiles,choosetheOpenbutton;thedocumentsthatareopenedwillbelistedintheApplicationmenu.Tosetthepreferencesofthefile,choose theOptions button available at the bottom of theApplication menu. To exit AutoCADMEP,choosetheExitAutoCADMEP2015buttonnexttotheOptionsbutton.
TOOLPALETTESTheTOOLPALETTESinAutoCADMEPhelpsyoutoplaceandsharehatchpatternsandblocksinthecurrentdrawinginaconvenientway.Bydefault,theTOOLPALETTESaredisplayedontheleftinthedrawingarea.IftheTOOLPALETTESarenotdisplayedthenchooseToolsfromtheToolsdrop-downin theBuild panel of theHome tab in theRibbon or choose theCTRL+3 keys to display theTOOLPALETTES.YoucanresizetheTOOLPALETTESusingtheresizingcursorthatisdisplayedwhenyouplacethecursoronthetoporbottomextremityoftheTOOLPALETTES.TheTOOLPALETTESwillbediscussedindetailinlaterchapters.MenuBarYoucanalsoselectcommandsfromthemenubar.Menubarisnotdisplayedbydefault.Todisplaythemenubar,choosethedownarrowintheQuickAccessToolbar;aflyoutisdisplayed.ChoosetheShowMenuBaroptionfromit;themenubarwillbedisplayed.Youcaninvokeacommandbyleft-clickingonamenu.InAutoCADMEP,therearefourmenusavailable:File,Window,Help,andExpress.TheFile,Window,andHelpmenusaredisplayedinthemenubaronlywhenthereisnodrawingopeninAutoCADMEP. TheFile menu has the options to manage the drawing file. Using the options available in theWindowmenu,youcanclosethecurrentsession,switchbetweentwosessions,orcandisplaymultiplesessionsinthedisplaywindow.TheoptionsintheHelpmenuareusedtodisplaythehelpdocumentation.TheExpressmenuwillbedisplayedwhenyouareinthedrawingenvironment.IthasdifferentoptionssuchasBlocks,Text,Layouttools,Dimension,Selectiontools,Modify,Draw,Filetools,Webtools,
![Page 36: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/36.jpg)
Tools,Weblinks,ExpresstoolsFAQ,andHelp.ThevariousoptionswhicharepresentintheExpressmenuareusedforperformingoperationstogetthedesiredresults.
ShortcutMenuAutoCADMEPhasprovidedshortcutmenusasaneasyandconvenientwayofinvokingtherecentlyusedtools. These shortcut menus are context-sensitive, which means that the tools present in them aredependentontheplace/objectforwhichtheyaredisplayed.Ashortcutmenuisinvokedbyright-clickingandisdisplayedatthecursorlocation.Youcanright-clickanywhereinthedrawingareatodisplaythegeneral shortcutmenu. Itgenerallycontainsanoption to select thepreviously invoked tool againapartfromthecommontools,refertoFigure1-13.
Figure1-13Partialviewofshortcutmenuwiththerecentlyusedcommands
Ifyouright-clickinthedrawingareawhileacommandisactive,ashortcutmenu,withtheoptionsrelatedtothatparticularcommand,willbedisplayed.Figure1-14showstheshortcutmenuwhentheDucttoolisactive.
![Page 37: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/37.jpg)
Figure1-14ShortcutmenudisplayedwhentheDUCTtoolisactiveIfyouright-clickontheNewTab,ashortcutmenuwillbedisplayedthatcontainstheoptionsforcreatingnewdrawings,refertoFigure1-15.
Figure1-15ShortcutmenufortheNewTabYoucanalsoright-clickonthecommandwindowtodisplayashortcutmenu.ThismenudisplaysthesixmostrecentlyusedcommandsandsomeofthewindowoptionslikeCopyandPaste,refertoFigure1-16.ThecommandsandtheirpromptentriesaredisplayedintheHistorywindow(previouscommandlinesnotvisible)andcanbeselected,copied,andpastedinthecommandlineusingtheshortcutmenu.Asyoupresstheuparrowkey,thepreviouslyenteredcommandsaredisplayedinthecommandwindow.Oncethedesiredcommandisdisplayedatthecommandbar,youcanexecuteitbysimplypressingtheENTERkey.YoucanalsocopyandeditanypreviouslyinvokedcommandbylocatingitintheHistorywindowand then selecting the command lines. After selecting the desired command lines from the Historywindow,right-clicktodisplayashortcutmenu.ChooseCopyfromthemenuandthenpastetheselected
![Page 38: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/38.jpg)
linesattheendofthecommandline.
Figure1-16CommandlinewindowshortcutmenuYoucan right-clickon thecoordinatedisplayareaof theApplicationStatusBar to display a shortcutmenu.Thismenucontainstheoptionstomodifythedisplayofcoordinates,asshowninFigure1-17.
Figure1-17TheStatusBarshortcutmenuAUTOCADMEPDIALOGBOXESTherearecertaincommands,whichwheninvoked,displayadialogbox.Whenyouchooseaniteminamenu, a dialog box is displayed. For example,when you chooseNew from theFilemenu, theSelectTemplatedialogboxisdisplayed.In theApplicationmenu,whenyouchoosean itemitmaydisplayadialogboxalthoughtherearenoellipseswiththatitem.Forexample,whenyouchooseOptionsfromtheApplicationmenu,theOptionsdialogboxisdisplayed.Adialogboxcontainsanumberofpartslikethedialog label, radio buttons, text or edit boxes, check boxes, slider bars, image boxes, and commandbuttons. These components are also referred to as tiles. Some of the components of a dialog box areshowninFigure1-18.
![Page 39: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/39.jpg)
Figure1-18ComponentsofadialogboxYoucanselectthedesiredtileusingthepointingdevice,whichisrepresentedbyanarrowwhenadialogbox is invoked.The titlebardisplays thenameof thedialogbox.The tabsspecify thevarioussectionswithagroupofrelatedoptionsunderthem.Thecheckboxesaretoggleoptionsformakingaparticularoptionavailableorunavailable.Thedrop-down listdisplaysan itemandanarrowon the rightwhichwhenselecteddisplaysalistofitemstochoosefrom.Youcanmakeaselectionintheradiobuttons.Onlyonecanbeselectedatatime.Thepreviewdisplaysthepreviewimageoftheitemselected.Thetextboxisanareawhereyoucanenteratextlikeafilename.Itisalsocalledaneditbox,becauseyoucanmakeany change to the text entered. In some dialog boxes, there is the [...] button, which displays anotherrelateddialogbox.Therearecertainbuttons(OK,Cancel,andHelp)atthebottomofthedialogbox.Thenameimpliestheirfunctions.Thebuttonwhichishighlightedisthedefaultbutton.TheHelpbuttoninthisdialogboxisusedtodisplayhelponthevariousfeaturesofthedialogbox.
STARTINGANEWDRAWINGApplicationMenu:New>DrawingCommand:NEWQuickAccessToolbar:NewMenuBar:File>NewYoucanopenanewdrawingusing theNew tool in theFilemenu.Whenyou invoke theNew tool, bydefault theSelect template dialog boxwill be displayed, as shown in Figure 1-19. This dialog boxdisplaysa listofdefault templatesavailable inAutoCADMEP2015.Thedefault selected template isAecbModel(GlobalCtb).dwt,whichstartstheAutoCADMEPenvironmentwithglobalunitsystem.Youcanselectanyother template tostartanewdrawing.Thedrawingwilluse thesettingsof theselectedtemplate.Youcanalsoopenanydrawingwithoutusinganytemplateeitherinmetricorimperialsystem.Todoso,choosethedownarrowontherightoftheOpenbuttonfromtheSelectTemplatedialogboxandselect theOpenwithnoTemplate-Metricoptionor theOpenwithnoTemplate-Imperialoptionfromtheflyout.
![Page 40: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/40.jpg)
Figure1-19TheSelecttemplatedialogbox
You can also open a newdrawing using theUseaWizard andStart fromScratch options from theCreateNewDrawingdialogbox.ToinvoketheCreateNewDrawingdialogbox,enterSTARTUP inthecommandwindowandthenenter1asthenewvalueforthissystemvariable.InvoketheNewtool;theCreateNewDrawingdialogboxwillbedisplayed,asshowninFigure1-20.Theoptionsinthisdialogboxarediscussednext.
![Page 41: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/41.jpg)
Figure1-20ThedefaulttemplatesdisplayedintheCreateNewDrawingdialogboxonchoosingtheUseaTemplatebutton
Note
If youhavestartedanewAutoCADMEPsessionwith theSTARTUP variable set to1 then theStartupdialogboxwillbedisplayed.TheoptionsintheStartupdialogboxaresameasthatoftheCreateNewDrawingdialogboxwiththeonlydifferencethatintheStartupdialogbox,theOpenaDrawingbuttonwillbeactivated.
OpenaDrawingBydefault,thisoptionisnotavailable.YoucanaccessthisoptiononlywhenyoustartanewsessionofAutoCADMEP. You can open a drawing by using theOpen button which is discussed later in thischapter.UseaTemplateWhenyouchoosetheUseaTemplatebuttonfromtheCreateNewDrawingdialogbox,AutoCADMEPdisplaysalistoftemplates,refertoFigure1-20.ThedefaultselectedtemplatefileisAecbmodel(globalctb).dwt.You can select any of the template files from the list. The new drawingwill have the samesettings as specified in the template file.Thepreviewof the template file selected is displayed in thedialog box.You can also define your own template files that are customized to your requirements.Todifferentiatethetemplatefilesfromthedrawingfiles,thetemplatefileshavea.dwtextensionwhereasthedrawingfileshavea.dwgextension.Anydrawingfilecanbesavedasatemplatefile.YoucanusetheBrowsebuttontoselectothertemplatefiles.WhenyouchoosetheBrowsebutton,theSelectatemplatefiledialogboxisdisplayedwiththeTemplatefolderopen,displayingallthetemplatefiles.StartfromScratchWhenyouchoosetheStartfromScratchbutton,refertoFigure1-21,AutoCADMEPprovidesyouwithoptions to start a new drawing that contains the default AutoCADMEP setup for Imperial orMetricdrawing.IfyouselecttheImperialoptionfromtheDefaultSettingsarea,thelimitsare12X9,textheightis0.20,anddimensionsandlinetypescalefactorsis1.
![Page 42: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/42.jpg)
Figure1-21TheCreateNewDrawingdialogboxwithStartfromScratchbuttonselected
UseaWizardTheUseaWizard button allowsyou to set the initial drawing settings before actually starting a newdrawing.WhenyouchoosetheUseaWizardbutton,theQuickSetupandAdvancedSetupoptionsaredisplayedintheSelectaWizardarea,refertoFigure1-22.IfyouselecttheQuickSetupoption,youcanspecifytheunitsandthelimitsoftheworkarea.IftheAdvancedSetupoptionisselected,thenyoucansettheunits,limits,andtheothertypesofsettingsforadrawing.Theseoptionsarediscussednext.
Figure1-22ThewizardoptionsdisplayedonchoosingtheUseaWizardbutton
AdvancedSetupThis option allows you to preselect the parameters of a new drawing such as the units of linear and
![Page 43: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/43.jpg)
angular measurements, type and direction of angular measurements, approximate area desired for thedrawing,precisionfordisplayingtheunitsafterdecimal,andsoon.WhenyouselecttheAdvancedSetupwizardoptionfromtheCreateNewDrawingdialogboxandchoosetheOKbutton,theAdvancedSetupwizardisdisplayed.TheUnitspageisdisplayedbydefault,asshowninFigure1-23.
Figure1-23TheUnitspageoftheAdvancedSetupwizard
This page is used to set the units for measurement in the current drawing. The different units ofmeasurement that you can choose from are Decimal, Engineering, Architectural, Fractional, andScientific.Youcanselecttherequiredunitofmeasurementbyselectingtherespectiveradiobutton.Youwill notice that the preview image is modified accordingly. You can also set the precision for themeasurementunitsbyselectingitfromthePrecisiondrop-downlist.
ChoosetheNextbuttontoopentheAnglepage,asshowninFigure1-24.YouwillnoticethatanarrowappearsontheleftofAngleintheAdvancedSetupwizard.Thissuggeststhatthispageiscurrent.
![Page 44: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/44.jpg)
Figure1-24TheAnglepageoftheAdvancedSetupwizard
This page is used to set the unit for angular measurements and its precision. The units for anglemeasurement are Decimal Degrees, Deg/Min/Sec, Grads, Radians, and Surveyor. The units for anglemeasurement can be set by selecting any one of these radio buttons as required. The preview of theselected angular unit is displayed on the right of the radio buttons. The precision format changesautomaticallyinthePrecisiondrop-downlistdependingontheanglemeasuringsystemselected.Youcanthenselecttheprecisionfromthedrop-downlist.The next page is theAngleMeasure page, as shown in Figure 1-25. This page is used to select thedirectionofthebaselinefromwhichtheangleswillbemeasured.YoucanalsosetyourowndirectionbyselectingtheOtherradiobuttonandthenenteringthevalueintheeditboxdisplayedbelowit.ThiseditboxgetsactivatedonlywhenyouselecttheOtherradiobutton.
![Page 45: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/45.jpg)
Figure1-25TheAngleMeasurepageoftheAdvancedSetupwizard
ChooseNexttodisplaytheAngleDirectionpagetosettheorientationfortheanglemeasurement,refertoFigure1-26.Bydefault theanglesarepositive ifmeasured inacounterclockwisedirection.This isbecause theCounter-Clockwise radiobutton is selected. Ifyou select theClockwise radiobutton, theangleswillbeconsideredpositivewhenmeasuredintheclockwisedirection.
Figure1-26TheAngleDirectionpageoftheAdvancedSetupwizard
Tosetthelimitsofthedrawing,choosetheNextbutton;theAreapagewillbedisplayed,asshowninFigure1-27.Youcanenterthewidthandlengthofthedrawingareaintherespectiveeditboxes.
![Page 46: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/46.jpg)
Figure1-27TheAreapageoftheAdvancedSetupwizard
NoteEvenafteryouincreasethelimitsofthedrawing,thedrawingdisplayareadoesnotincrease.YouneedtoinvoketheZoomAlltoolfromtheNavigationBartoincreasethedrawingdisplayarea.
QuickSetupWhenyouselecttheQuickSetupoptionfromtheCreateNewDrawingdialogboxandchoosetheOKbutton,theQuickSetupwizardisdisplayed.Thiswizardhastwopages:UnitsandArea.TheUnitspageisopenedbydefault,asshowninFigure1-28.TheoptionsintheUnitspagearesimilartothoseintheUnitspageoftheAdvancedSetupwizard.Theonlydifferenceisthatyoucannotsettheprecisionfortheunitsinthiswizard.
![Page 47: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/47.jpg)
Figure1-28TheUnitspageoftheQuickSetupwizard
ChooseNexttodisplaytheAreapage,asshowninFigure1-29.TheAreapageoftheQuickSetup issimilartothatoftheAdvancedSetupwizard.Inthispage,youcansetthedrawinglimits.
Figure1-29TheAreapageoftheQuickSetupwizard
Tip.WhenyouopenanAutoCADMEPsession,adrawingwillbeopenedautomatically.ButyoucanopenanewdrawingusingtheoptionssuchasStartfromScratchandUseaWizardfromtheStartupdialogboxbeforeenteringintoAutoCADMEPenvironment.Asmentionedearlier, thedisplayof theStartupdialogbox is turnedoffbydefault.Refer to thesectionofStartingaNewDrawing toknow
![Page 48: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/48.jpg)
howtoturnonthedisplayofthisdialogbox.SAVINGWORKTheQSAVE,SAVEAS,andSAVEcommandsallowsyoutosaveyourwork.WhenyouchoosetheSavetoolfromtheQuickAccessToolbar,theQSAVEcommandisinvoked.Ifyouaresavingthedrawingforthe first time in the present session, theSAVEAS command will be invoked in place of theQSAVEcommandandyouwillbepromptedtoenterthefilenameintheSaveDrawingAsdialogbox,asshowninFigure1-30.You can enter the name for the drawing and then choose theSave button. If you havemodifiedadrawingfile,choosetheSavetooltosaveit;thesystemsavesthefilewithoutpromptingyoutoenterafilename.Thisallowsyoutodoaquicksave.WhenyouchooseSaveAsfromtheApplicationmenuorchoosetheSaveAstoolfromtheQuickAccessToolbar,theSaveDrawingAsdialogboxwillbedisplayed,refertoFigure1-30.Evenif thedrawinghasbeensavedwithafilename,usingthistoolyoucanspecifyanewnameforthedrawing.Youcanalsousethistoolwhenyoumakecertainchangestoatemplateandwanttosavethechangedtemplatedrawingbutleavetheoriginaltemplateunchanged.
Figure1-30TheSaveDrawingAsdialogboxTheoptionsintheSaveDrawingAsdialogboxarediscussednext.PlacesListAcolumnoficonsisdisplayedontheleftsideofthedialogbox.Theseiconscontaintheshortcutstothefoldersthatarefrequentlyused.Youcanquicklysaveyourdrawingsinoneofthesefolders.TheHistoryfolderdisplaysthelistofthemostrecentlysaveddrawings.Youcansaveyourpersonaldrawingsinthe
![Page 49: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/49.jpg)
DocumentsorFavoritesfolder.TheFTPfolderdisplaysthelistofvariousFTPsitesthatareavailableforsavingthedrawing.Bydefault,noFTPsitesareshowninthedialogbox.ToaddanFTPsitetothedialogbox,choosetheToolsbuttonontheupper-rightcornerofthedialogboxtodisplayashortcutmenuandselectAdd/ModifyFTPLocations.TheDesktopfolderdisplaysthelistofcontentsonthedesktop.TheBuzzsawiconsconnectyoutotheirrespectivepagesontheWeb.YoucanaddanewfolderinthislistforaneasyaccessbysimplydraggingthefolderontothePlaceslistarea.Youcanrearrangeallthesefoldersbydraggingthemandthenplacingthematthedesiredlocations.Itisalsopossibletoremovethefolders, which are not in frequent use. To do so, right-click on the particular folder and then selectRemovefromtheshortcutmenu.Now,youcanalsosavethedocumentonAutodeskCloud.Theoptionforsavingthedocumentisdiscussednext.TheAutodesk360iconisavailableonthetopleftintheSaveDrawingAsdialogbox,refertoFigure1-30.It isusedtosharedataonlinewiththeuserswhohaveanAutodeskaccount.Whenyouchoosethisbutton,theAutodesk-SignInwindowwillbedisplayed.Now,youcansignintouploadyourdocumentorfileinAutodeskCloud.FilenameTosaveyourwork,enterthenameofthedrawingintheFilenameeditboxbytypingorbyselectingitfromthedrop-downlist.Ifyouhavealreadyassignedanametothedrawing,itwillbedisplayedintheeditboxasthedefaultname.Ifthedrawingisunnamed,thedefaultnameDrawing1willbedisplayedintheFileNameeditbox.FilesoftypeTheoptionsintheFilesoftypedrop-downlistareusedtospecifythedrawingformatinwhichyouwanttosavethefile,refer toFigure1-31.Forexample, tosave thefileasanAutoCAD2007drawingfile,selectAutoCAD2007/LT2007Drawing(*.dwg)fromthedrop-downlist.
Figure1-31TheFilesoftypedrop-downlist
SaveinThe current drive and path information is listed in theSave indrop-down list.AutoCADMEPwillinitiallysavethedrawinginthedefaultfolder,butifyouwanttosavethedrawinginadifferent folder,youhavetospecifythepath.Forexample,tosavethepresentdrawingashouseintheC1folder,choose
![Page 50: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/50.jpg)
thearrowbuttonintheSaveindrop-downlisttodisplaythedrop-downlist.SelectC: fromthedrop-downlist;allfoldersintheCdrivewillbelistedintheFilelistbox.Double-clickontheC1folder,ifitis already listed there orcreatea new folderC1 by choosing theCreateNewFolderbutton. Selecthousefromthedrop-downlist,ifitisalreadylistedthere,orenteritintheFilenameeditboxandthenchoose the Save button. Your drawing (house) will be saved in theC1 folder (C:\C1\house.dwg).Similarly,tosavethedrawingintheDdrive,selectD:fromtheSaveindrop-downlist.
Tip.Thefilenameyouentertosaveadrawingshouldmatchitscontents.Thishelpsyoutorememberthedrawingdetailsandmakesiteasiertorefertothemlater.Also,thefilenamecanbe255characterslongandcancontainspacesandpunctuationmarks.
ViewsTheViews drop-down list has the options for the type of listing of files and displaying the previewimages,refertoFigure1-32.
Figure1-32TheViewsdrop-downlist
List,Details,andThumbnailsOptionsIfyouchoosetheDetailsoption,itwilldisplaythedetailedinformationaboutthefiles(size,type,date,andtimeofmodification)intheFileslistbox.Inthedetailedinformation,ifyouclickontheNamelabel,thefilesarelistedwiththenamesinalphabeticalorder.Ifyoudouble-clickontheNamelabel,thefileswillbelistedinreverseorder.Similarly,ifyouclickontheSizelabel,thefilesarelistedaccordingtotheirsizeinascendingorder.Double-clickingontheSizelabelwilllistthefilesindescendingorderofsize.Similarly,youcanclickontheTypelabelortheModifiedlabeltolistthefilesaccordingly.IfyouchoosetheListoption,allfilespresentinthecurrentfolderwillbelistedintheFilelistbox.IfyouselecttheThumbnails option, the list box displays the preview of all the drawings, alongwith their namesdisplayedatthebottomofthedrawingpreview.Also,thepreviewofthefileisdisplayedinthePreviewimagebox.CreateNewFolderIfyouchoosetheCreateNewFolderbutton,AutoCADMEPcreatesanewfolderwiththenameNewFolder.ThenewfolderisdisplayedintheFilelistbox.Youcanchangethenameofthefolderifrequired.UponelevelWhen you choose theUp one level button, the folders that are up by one level are displayed. Forexample,ifyouareintheSamplesubfolderoftheAutoCADMEP2015folder,thenchoosingtheUponelevelbuttonwillopentheAutoCADMEP2015folder.
![Page 51: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/51.jpg)
SearchtheWebWhenyouchoosethisbutton,theBrowsetheWeb-Savedialogboxisdisplayed.Usingtheoptionsinthisdialogbox,youcanaccessandstoreAutoCADMEPfilesatanonlinelocation.YoucanalsousetheALT+3keystobrowsetheWebwhenthisdialogboxisavailableonthescreen.ToolsDrop-DownListTheAdd/ModifyFTPLocationsoptionintheToolsdrop-downlistisusedforaddingormodifyingtheFTPsites.ThesesitescanthenbebrowsedfromtheFTPshortcutinthePlaceslist.TheAddCurrentFoldertoPlacesandAddtoFavoritesoptionsaddthefolderdisplayedintheSaveineditboxtothePlaces list or to the favorites folder, respectively. TheOptions option displays theSaveasOptionsdialogboxwhereyoucan save theproxy imagesof thecustomobjects. Ithas theDWGOptions andDXFOptionstabs.TheSecurityOptionsoptiondisplays theSecurityOptionsdialogbox,which isusedtoconfigurethesecurityoptionsofthedrawing.AUTOSAVEAutoCADMEP allows you to save yourwork automatically at specific intervals. To change the timeintervals, choose the Options button from the Application Menu; the Options dialog box will bedisplayed. In thisdialogbox, enter thedurationafterwhich the filewillbe savedautomatically in theMinutesbetweensaves textboxintheFileSafetyPrecautionsareaof theOpenandSave tab.Thisduration depends on the power supply, hardware, and type of drawings. AutoCAD MEP saves thedrawingwith the file extension .sv$. You can also change the time interval by using theSAVETIMEsystemvariable.
Tip.Althoughtheautomaticsavefeaturesavesyourdrawinguptoacertaintimeinterval,youshouldnotcompletelydependon itbecause theprocedure forconverting thesv$ file intoadrawing file iscumbersome. Therefore, it is recommended that you save your files regularly using theQSAVE orSAVEAScommands.BACKUPFILESIf a drawing file already exists and you use Save or Save As tool to update the current drawing,AutoCADMEPcreatesabackupfile.AutoCADMEPtakesthepreviouscopyofthedrawingandchangesit from .dwg to .bak. The updated drawing is saved as a drawing file with the .dwg extension. Forexample,ifthenameofthedrawingismyproj.dwg,AutoCADMEPwillchangeittomyproj.bakandsavethecurrentdrawingasmyproj.dwg.ChangingAutoSavedandBackupFilesintoAutoCADMEPFileFormatInsomecases,youmayneedtochangetheformatofautosavedandbackupfilesintoAutoCADMEPfileformat.TochangethebackupfileintoanAutoCADMEPfileformat,openthefolderinwhichyouhavesaved thebackupor theautosavedfileusing theWindowsExplorer.ChooseOrganize>Folderand
![Page 52: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/52.jpg)
SearchOptions fromthemenubartoinvoketheFolderOptionsdialogbox.ChoosetheView tabandunder the Advanced settings area, clear the Hide extensions for known file types check box, ifselected.Exit thedialogbox.Rename the automatic saveddrawingor thebackup filewith a differentname and also change the extension of the drawing from .sv$ or .bak to .dwg. After you rename thedrawing,youwillnoticethattheiconoftheautomaticsaveddrawingorthebackupfileisreplacedbytheAutoCADMEP icon. This indicates that the auto saved drawing or the backup file is changed to anAutoCADMEPdrawing.UsingtheDRAWINGRECOVERYMANAGERtoRecoverFilesThefilesthataresavedautomaticallycanalsoberetrievedbyusingtheDrawingRecoveryManager.You canopen theDRAWINGRECOVERYMANAGER by choosingDrawingUtilities >Open theDrawingRecoveryManagerfromtheApplicationMenuorbyenteringDRAWINGRECOVERYatthecommandbar.Incaseofasystemcrash,theDrawingRecoverymessageboxwillbedisplayedonstartingAutoCADMEPagain,refertoFigure1-33.Themessageboxinformsyouthattheprogramunexpectedlyfailedandyou can open themost suitable among the backup files created byAutoCADMEP.Choose theClosebutton from theDrawingRecoverymessage box; theDRAWINGRECOVERYMANAGER will bedisplayedontheleftofthedrawingarea,asshowninFigure1-34.
Figure1-33TheDrawingRecoverymessagebox
![Page 53: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/53.jpg)
Figure1-34TheDRAWINGROCOVERYMANAGER
NoteTheDRAWINGRECOVERYMANAGERwillbeavailableonlywhentheautomaticsavefeatureisactive.TheBackupFilesrolloutliststheoriginalfiles,thebackupfiles,andtheautomaticallysavedfiles.Selectafile;itspreviewwillbedisplayedinthePreview rollout.Also, the informationcorrespondingto theselectedfilewillbedisplayedintheDetailsrollout.Toopenabackupfile,double-clickonitsnameintheBackupFiles rollout. Alternatively, right-click on the file name and then chooseOpen from theshortcutmenu. It is recommended thatyousave thebackup fileat thedesired locationbeforeyoustartworkingonit.
EPDBackupFilesTheElectrical ProjectDatabase is used tomanage all drawings related to the electrical circuits for aproject.Asyoucreateandmodifyelectricalcircuitsforaproject,youcanusethecircuitmanagertoviewandmanagepanelandcircuit information.Bydefault,AutoCADMEPcreatesabackupofall theEPDfiles.ThesebackupfilesareusedwhentheEPDfilesgetcorruptduetosystemcrashorwhenfilesgetincorrectlylinked.YoucanspecifythenumberofdatabackupfilesintheElectricalPreferencesdialogboxdisplayedonchoosing theElectricalbutton in thePreferences panel from theManage tabof theRibbon.Youcancreateupto99backupfilesforasingleElectricalProjectDatabase.CLOSINGADRAWINGYoucanusetheCLOSEcommandtoclosethecurrentdrawingfilewithoutactuallyquittingAutoCADMEP.Todoso,chooseClose>CurrentDrawingfromtheApplicationMenuorenterCLOSEat thecommandbar;thecurrentdrawingfilewillbeclosed.Ifmultipledrawingfilesareopen,chooseClose>AllDrawingsfromtheApplicationMenu.Ifmultipledrawingfilesofasingleprojectareopen,choose
![Page 54: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/54.jpg)
Close > All Project Drawings from theApplicationMenu. If you have not saved the drawing aftermakingthelastchangestoitandyouinvoketheCLOSEcommand,AutoCADMEPdisplaysadialogboxthatallowsyou tosave thedrawingbeforeclosing.Thisdialogboxgivesyouanoption todiscard thecurrent drawing or the changesmade to it. It also gives you an option to cancel the command. Afterclosing thedrawing, if you are still inAutoCADMEP fromwhereyou canopen a newor an alreadysaveddrawingfile.YoucanalsousetheClosebutton(X)inthedrawingareatoclosethedrawing.NoteYoucancloseadrawingevenifacommandisactive.
OPENINGANEXISTINGDRAWINGYoucanopenanexistingdrawingfilebyusingoneofthefollowingthreemethods:byusingtheSelectFiledialogbox,byusingtheCreateNewDrawingdialogbox,andbydragginganddropping.OpeninganExistingDrawingUsingtheSelectFileDialogBoxIfyouarealreadyinthedrawingeditorandyouwanttoopenadrawingfile,choosetheOpentoolfromtheQuickAccessToolbar;theSelectFiledialogboxwillbedisplayed.Alternatively,invoketheOPENcommand todisplay theSelectFiledialogbox, refer toFigure1-35.Youcanselect thedrawing tobeopenedusingthisdialogbox.Thisdialogboxissimilartothestandarddialogboxes.Youcanchoosethefileyouwanttoopenfromthefolderinwhichitisstored.YoucanchangethefolderfromtheLookindrop-downlist.Youcanthenselectthenameofthedrawingfromthelistboxoryoucanenterthenameofthedrawing fileyouwant toopen in theFilename editbox.After selecting thedrawing file,youcanchoosetheOpenbuttontoopenthefile.
![Page 55: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/55.jpg)
Figure1-35TheSelectFiledialogbox
Whenyouselectafilename,previewoftheselectedfileisdisplayedinthePreviewbox.Youcanalsousethisboxtoidentifythecontentsofadrawing.YoucanalsochangethefiletypebyselectingitintheFilesoftypedrop-downlist.Apartfromthedwgfiles,youcanopenthedws(standard),dwt (template)filesorthedxffiles.YouhaveallthestandardiconsinthePlaceslistthatcanbeusedtoopendrawingfilesfromdifferent locations.Whenyouclickon thedownarrowadjacent to theOpenbutton,adrop-downlistisdisplayed,asshowninFigure1-36.Youcanchooseamethodforopeningthefileusingthisdrop-downlist.Thesemethodsarediscussednext.
Figure1-36TheFilesoftypedialogbox
OpenRead-OnlyToviewadrawingwithoutmodifyingit,selecttheOpenRead-Onlyoptionfromthedrop-downlist.Ifyou try to save the opened drawing with the original file name, AutoCADMEP warns you that thedrawing file iswrite protected.However, you can save the edited drawingwith a different file nameusingtheSAVEAScommand.Thiswayyoucanpreserveyourdrawing.
![Page 56: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/56.jpg)
PartialOpenThePartialOpen option enables you to open only a selected view or a selected layer of a selecteddrawing.Thisoptioncanbeusedtoeditsmallportionsofacomplicateddrawingandthensaveitwiththe complete drawing.When you select thePartialOpen option from theOpen drop-down list, thePartialOpen dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 1-37, which contains different views andlayersoftheselecteddrawing.WhenyouselectacheckboxforalayerandthenchoosetheOpenbutton,onlytheobjectsdrawninthatparticularlayerforthedrawingaredisplayedinthenewdrawingwindow.Youcanmakethechangesandthensaveit.
Figure1-37ThePartialOpendialogbox
LoadingAdditionalObjectstoPartiallyOpenedDrawingOnce you have opened a part of a drawing and made the necessary changes, you may want to loadadditionalobjectsorlayersontheexistingones.Todoso,enterPARTIALOADatthecommandbar;thePartialLoaddialogboxwillbedisplayed,which is similar to thePartialOpen dialogbox.Youcanchooseanotherlayerandtheobjectsdrawninthatlayerwillbeaddedtothepartiallyloadeddrawing.
Note1.ThePartialLoadoptionisnotenabledintheFilemenuunlessadrawingispartiallyopened.
2.Loadingadrawingpartiallyisagoodpracticewhenyouareworkingwithobjectsonaspecificlayerinalargecomplicateddrawing.
3.IntheSelectFiledialogbox,thepreviewofadrawingwhichwaspartiallyopenedandthen
![Page 57: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/57.jpg)
savedisnotdisplayed.
Tip.Ifadrawingwaspartiallyopenedandsavedpreviously, it ispossible toopen itagainwith thesame layers and views. AutoCADMEP remembers the settings thereforewhen you open a partiallyopeneddrawing,adialogboxisdisplayedaskingforanoptiontofullyopenitorrestorethepartiallyopeneddrawing.SelectInitialViewSelect theSelectInitialView checkbox if youwant to loada specificview initiallywhenAutoCADMEPloadsthedrawing.Thisoptionwillwork,if thedrawinghassavedviews.Thisisgenerallyusedwhileworkingonalargecomplicateddrawing,inwhichyouwanttoworkonaparticularportionofthedrawing.Youcansavethatparticularportionasaviewandthenselectittoopenthedrawingnexttime.Youcansaveadesiredview,byusingtheVIEWcommand.Ifthedrawinghasnosavedviewsthenonselectingthisoption,thelastviewwillbeloaded.IfyouselecttheSelectInitialViewcheckboxandthentheOKbutton,AutoCADMEPwilldisplaytheSelectInitialViewdialogbox.Youcanselecttheviewnamefromthisdialogbox,andAutoCADMEPwillloadthedrawingwiththeselectedviewdisplayed.OpeninganExistingDrawingUsingtheStartupDialogBoxIf you have set theSTARTUP system variable value as1, theStartup dialog boxwill be displayedwhenever you start a newAutoCADMEP session. The first button in this dialog box is theOpen aDrawing button. When you choose this button, a list of the most recently opened drawings will bedisplayedforyoutoselectfrom,refertoFigure1-38.TheBrowsebuttondisplaystheSelectFiledialogbox,whichallowsyoutobrowsetoanotherfile.
Figure1-38Listoftherecentlyopeneddrawings
NoteThedisplayofthedialogboxesrelatedtoopeningandsavingdrawingswillbedisabled,iftheSTARTUPandtheFILEDIAsystemvariablesaresetto0.
![Page 58: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/58.jpg)
OpeninganExistingDrawingUsingtheDragandDropMethodYoucanalsoopenanexistingdrawinginAutoCADMEPbydraggingitfromtheWindowExploreranddroppingitintoAutoCADMEP.Ifyoudroptheselecteddrawinginthedrawingarea,thedrawingwillbeinsertedasablockandasaresultyoucannotmodifyit.But,ifyoudragthedrawingfromtheWindowExploreranddropitanywhereotherthanthedrawingarea,AutoCADMEPopenstheselecteddrawing.QUITTINGAUTOCADMEPYoucanexit theAutoCADMEPprogrambyusing theEXITorQUIT command.Even if youhave anactive command, you can chooseExit AutoCADMEP 2015 from theApplicationMenu to quit theAutoCADMEPprogram.Incasethedrawinghasnotbeensaved,adialogboxisdisplayedwiththeYesandNobuttons.ChoosetheYesbuttontosavethedrawing.NotethatifyouchooseNointhisdialogbox,allthechangesmadeinthecurrentlisttillthelastsavewillbelost.YoucanalsousetheClosebutton(X)ofthemainAutoCADMEPwindowtoendtheAutoCADMEPsession.CREATINGANDMANAGINGWORKSPACESAworkspaceisdefinedasacustomizedarrangementofRibbon,toolbars,menus,andwindowpalettesintheAutoCADMEPenvironment.Youcancreateyourownworkspaces,inwhichonlyspecifiedtoolbars,menus,andpalettesareavailable.WhenyoustartAutoCADMEP,bydefault,theHVACworkspaceisthecurrentworkspace.YoucanselectanyotherpredefinedworkspacefromtheflyoutdisplayedonchoosingtheWorkspaceSwitching fromtheApplicationStatusBar, refer toFigure1-39.Youcanalsoset theworkspacebyusingtheWORKSPACEcommand.
Figure1-39Thepredefinedworkspaces
CreatingaNewWorkspaceTocreate anewworkspace, customize theRibbon and invoke thepalettes to bedisplayed in thenewworkspace. Next, select the Save Current As option from the flyout displayed on choosing theWorkspaceSwitchingbuttonfromtheApplicationStatusBar;theSaveWorkspacedialogboxwillbedisplayed, as shown in Figure 1-40.Enter the name of the newworkspace in theName edit box andchoosetheSavebutton.
![Page 59: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/59.jpg)
Figure1-40TheSaveWorkspacedialogbox
Thenewworkspace is now the currentworkspace and is added to thedrop-down list in the title bar.Similarly, you can create workspaces based on your requirement and switch from one workspace toanotherbyselecting thenamefromthe flyoutdisplayedonchoosing theWorkspacesSwitching buttonfromtheApplicationStatusBar.ModifyingtheWorkspaceSettingsAutoCADMEPallowsyoutomodifytheworkspacesettings.Todoso,selecttheWorkspaceSettingsoption from the flyout displayed on choosing theWorkspaces Switching button from theApplicationStatus Bar; theWorkspace Settings dialog box will be displayed, as shown in Figure 1-41. AllworkspacesarelistedintheMyWorkspacedrop-downlist.YoucanmakeanyoftheworkspacesasMyWorkspacebyselectingitintheMyWorkspacedrop-downlist.TheoptionsintheWorkspaceSettingsdialogboxarediscussednext.
Figure1-41TheWorkspaceSettingsdialogbox
MenuDisplayandOrderAreaTheoptions in this area areused to control thedisplay and theorder of displayofworkspaces in theWorkspace Switching drop-down list. By default, workspaces are listed in the sequence of theircreation.Tochangetheorder,selectaworkspaceandchoosetheMoveUporMoveDownbutton.Tocontrol the display of the workspaces, you can select or clear the check boxes. You can also add aseparatorbetweenworkspacesbychoosingtheAddSeparatorbutton.Aseparatorisalinethatisplaced
![Page 60: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/60.jpg)
betweentwoworkspacesintheflyoutdisplayedonchoosingtheWorkspacesSwitchingbuttonfromtheApplicationStatusBar,asshowninFigure1-42.
Figure1-42TheflyoutdisplayedonchoosingtheWorkspacesSwitchingbutton
WhenSwitchingWorkspacesAreaBy default, theAutomatically save workspace changes radio button is selected in this area, so thechanges made in the current workspace will be automatically saved when you switch to the otherworkspace.IfyouselecttheDonotsavechangestoworkspace radiobuttonthenwhileswitchingtheworkspaces,thechangesmadeinthecurrentworkspacewillnotbesaved.Therefore,whenyouinvokethisworkspaceagain,itwilldisplaywithdefaultsettings.AUTOCADMEP’SHELPYoucangettheon-linehelpanddocumentationabouttheworkingofAutoCADMEP2015commandsbyusing the options from theHelpmenu in the title bar, refer to Figure1-43.You can accessAutoCADMEP’shelpbypressingtheF1functionkey.OnpressingtheF1functionkey,theAutoCADMEP2015-Helpwillbedisplayed,asshowninFigure1-44.TheentirehelpdocumentationonAutoCADMEP2015isavailableonthispage.Youcansearchforinformationaboutanycommandortoolonthispage.Youcanaccessthispagewithouttheinternetconnectionalso.But,ifyouwanttousetheofflinehelpthenyouneedto download the help file first. You can download the offline help from Autodesk website. SomeimportantoptionsintheHelpmenuarediscussednext.
![Page 61: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/61.jpg)
Figure1-43TheHelpmenu
Figure1-44TheAutodeskAutoCADMEP2015-Help
CustomerInvolvementProgramThisoptionin thehelpmenuisusedtoshare informationaboutyoursystemconfigurationandusageofAutodesk products. The collective information is used byAutodesk for the improvement of Autodesksoftware.
AboutAutoCADMEP2015This option gives you information about the release, serial number, licensed to, and also the legaldescriptionaboutAutoCADMEP.AUTODESKEXCHANGEAPPSAutodeskExchangeAppsenablesyoutocustomizeAutoCADMEP2015accordingtoyourrequirements.Inthiswindow,yougetvariousuniqueanddesignspecificapps.TheseappsallowyoutoconnecttotheAutoCADMEPnetwork,shareinformationanddesigns,andsoon.OnchoosingtheAutodeskExchangeAppsbuttonfromthetitlebar,theAutodeskExchange|Appswindowwillbedisplayedinyourdefaultbrowser,refertoFigure1-45.Youcandownloadanduseanyoftheappsdependingonyourrequirement.
![Page 62: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/62.jpg)
Figure1-45TheAutodeskExchange|AppswindowINFOCENTERBARAnInfoCenter bar is displayed at the top right corner in the title bar thatwill help you sign into theAutodeskOnlineservices,refertoFigure1-46.YoucanalsoaccessAutoCADMEPcommunitybyusingcertainkeywords.
Figure1-46TheInfoCenterbar
ADDITIONALHELPRESOURCES
•YoucangethelpforacommandbypressingtheF1keywhileworking.TheHelpHTMLpagecontaininginformation about the command is displayed. You can exit the dialog box and continue with thecommand.
•YoucangethelpaboutadialogboxbychoosingtheHelpbuttoninthatdialogbox.•AutodeskhasprovidedseveralresourcesthatyoucanusetogetassistancewithyourAutoCADMEPquestions.Thefollowingisalistofsomeoftheresources:
a.AutoCADMEPTechnicalAssistancewebsite:http://knowledge.autodesk.comb.AutoCADMEPDiscussionGroupswebsite:http://forums.autodesk.com• You can also get help by contacting the author, Prof. Sham Tickoo, at [email protected],[email protected],[email protected]
![Page 63: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/63.jpg)
SELF-EVALUATIONTESTAnswerthefollowingquestionsandthencomparethemtothosegivenattheendofthischapter:1.You can increase the display area of the screen by using theClean Screen button available in theApplicationStatusBar.(T/F)
2.TheAutoCADTextWindowisusedtowritetextinthedrawingarea.(T/F)3.TheIsolateObjectsbuttonisusedtodisplayorhidetheselectedobject.(T/F)4.TheCLOSEcommandisusedtoclosetheAutoCADMEPapplication.(T/F)5.Torestrictthemovementofcursoralongaspecificangle,youneedtoturnonthe__________snap.6.Usingthe__________command,youcanchangethetimeintervalofautomaticsave.7.TheStartupdialogboxisdisplayedwhentheSTARTUPvariableissetto__________.8.YoucansignintotheAutodeskOnlineServicesbyusingtheoptionsavailableinthe__________bar.AnswerstoSelf-EvaluationTest1.F,2.F,3.T,4.F,5.PolarTracking,6.SAVETIME,7.1,8.InfoCenter,
![Page 64: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/64.jpg)
Chapter2
GettingStartedwithAutoCADMEP
![Page 65: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/65.jpg)
LearningObjectivesAftercompletingthischapter,youwillbeableto:•Understandtheworkflowpath•UsetheProjectBrowser•Understandtheconceptofspace•Specifythespaceobjectsettings•Workwithspacestylesandtools•Understandtheconceptofzones•WorkspaceswitchinginMEP
INTRODUCTIONAutoCAD MEP, a software based on AutoCAD platform, is used to design, draft, and documentelectrical,mechanical,andpipingsystemofbuildings.Thefirststepwhilecreatingsuchasystemis tocreate a project.Thereafter drawings are added to this project to represent various components of thebuilding like electrical system, ducts, and so on. These drawings are then arranged according to theworkflowoftheproject.WORKFLOWWorkflowisasequenceofconnectedstepsrequiredtocreateaspecifictypeofsystem.Itisdependentonthesystemtobecreated.Forexample,foranHVACsystem,theworkflowisshowninFigure2-1.Thestepsinvolvedinthisworkflowarediscussednext.
![Page 66: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/66.jpg)
Figure2-1WorkflowforanHVACsysteminAutoCADMEP
SpecifyingtheHVACParametersIn this step, you need to specify all the parameters required to create an HVAC system. Some of theparameters are duct size, duct rise and drop, flow rate, cut length, and so on. On the basis of theseparameters,thehierarchyofdrawingsinprojectwillbedecided.StartingaProjectInthisstep,youneedtocreateaprojectfiletolinkthedrawingsofasystemtoeachother.Forexample,thedrawingsrelatedtoHVACsystemwillbeinterlinkedandwillbeinthesameproject.Asaresult,youcaneasilymanipulatetheparametersofthesystem.LinkingSystemFiletotheArchitecturalPlanTocreateanHVACsystem,youneedtohaveanarchitecturalplan.Inthisstep,youwilllinktheHVACsystemfiletothearchitecturalplanfileusingthePROJECTNAVIGATOR.Afterthecompletionofthisstep,youcanreroutetheHVAClinesaccordingtothearchitecturalplan.SpecifyingSpacesandZones
![Page 67: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/67.jpg)
In this step, you need to create spaces and zones using the tools available in AutoCADMEP. Thesespaces are used for exporting the building information related to the heating and cooling loads. Thespacesarefurtherdividedintozoneswhichrepresenttheactualheatingandcoolingloads.CalculatingLoadsInthisstep,youneedtocalculatetheheatingandcoolingloadsforthebuilding.ThesecalculationsareperformedbyusingtheanalysistoolsavailableinAutoCADMEP.NoteInthistextbook,theglobalunitsystemisfollowed,thereforeyouneedtostartAutoCADMEP2015bydouble-clickingontheAutoCADMEP2015-English(Global)iconavailableonthedesktop.
PROJECTBROWSERTheProjectBrowserisusedtomanageprojectfiles.Aprojectfilecontainstherecordofdrawingfilesrelatedtoacategory.Forexample,abuildingprojectfilemayhavearecordofdrawingfilesrelatedtopiping, electrical, anddifferent typesof floors.Youcancreate anewproject filebyusing theoptionsavailableintheProjectBrowser.Also,youcanconfigureanexistingprojectfile.TheProjectBrowsercan be invoked by entering thePROJECTBROWSER command at the command bar or by using theApplicationMenu.ToinvokeitfromtheApplicationMenu,hoverthecursorontheOpenoptioninthemenu;aflyoutwillbedisplayed.ChoosetheProjectbuttonfromtheflyout;theProjectBrowserwillbedisplayed,asshowninFigure2-2.IntheProjectBrowser,thelistofprojectsavailableintheselecteddirectoryisdisplayedintheleftpaneof theProjectBrowser.Tochange the currentdirectory, choose theMyProjects button from the leftareaofthedialogbox;adrop-downlistwillbedisplayedhavingshortcutstosomecommondirectoriessuchasDocumentsandDesktop.Usingtheseshortcuts,youbrowsetothedesireddirectoryandselectthecategoryasthecurrentdirectory;alltheprojectsavailableintheselecteddirectorywillbedisplayedinthe left pane of theProject Browser. In addition to the existing projects, you can also create a newprojectfilebyusingtheoptionsavailableintheProjectBrowser.Theproceduretocreateanewprojectfileisdiscussednext.CreatingaNewProjectFileAnewprojectfilecanbecreatedbyusingtheNewProjecttoolavailableatthebottomleftcorneroftheProjectBrowser.On choosing this tool, theAddProject dialog boxwill be displayed, as shown inFigure2-3.
![Page 68: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/68.jpg)
Figure2-3TheAddProjectdialogbox
There are three edit boxes available in this dialogboxnamely:ProjectNumber,ProjectName, andProjectDescription.TheProjectNumbereditbox isused tospecifyauniquenumberfor theprojectfile.TheProjectNameeditboxisusedtospecifythenamefortheprojectfile.TheProjectDescriptioneditboxisusedtospecifythedescriptionabouttheprojectfile.Youcanuseanyofstandardtemplatesfortheproject.Todoso,selecttheCreatefromtemplateprojectcheckboxfromtheAddProjectdialogbox;theeditboxwillbeactivatedbelowthecheckbox.Next,choosetheBrowsebuttonavailablenexttotheeditboxactivated;theSelectProjectdialogboxwillbedisplayed,asshowninFigure2-4.
Figure2-4TheSelectProjectdialogbox
![Page 69: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/69.jpg)
BrowsetothelocationwheretemplatefilesarestoredandthenchoosetheOpenbuttonafterselectingthedesired template file; the selected template filewill be used for the current project. Note that in thistextbook, the standard template used is Commercial Template Project (Metric).apj. To select thetemplate, browse to the location C:\ProgramData\Autodesk\MEP 2015\enu\Template\CommercialTemplateProject(Metric)andthenselecttheCommercialTemplateProject(Metric)templatefile.Next,choosetheOpenbutton;thepathoftheselectedfilewillbeaddedtotheeditboxdisplayedbelowtheCreatefromtemplateprojectcheckbox.SpecifythenameofprojectintheProjectNameeditboxandchoosetheOKbuttonfromtheAddProjectdialogbox;aproject filewith thespecifiednamewillbecreatedandalsoacopyofdrawingfilesinthetemplateprojectwillbecreatedinthenewprojectfolder.Theextensionoftheprojectfileis.apt.Now,closetheProjectBrowserbychoosingtheClosebutton.OnclosingtheProjectBrowser,thePROJECTNAVIGATORwillbedisplayed,refertoFigure2-5.
Figure2-5TheProjectNavigatorPROJECTNAVIGATORTHEPROJECTNAVIGATOR ISUSEDTONAVIGATETHEDRAWINGFILESOFAPROJECT.
USINGTHEPROJECTNAVIGATOR,YOUCANEDITORCREATEBUILDINGDRAWINGSAND
OTHERDOCUMENTATIONDATA.THEPROJECTNAVIGATORHASFOURTABS:PROJECT,CONSTRUCTS,VIEWS,ANDSHEETS.THESETABSAREDISCUSSEDNEXT.
ProjectTabTheProject tabhasthreeareas.Theseareasdisplaythetoplevelinformationoftheproject.ThetoolsavailableatthebottomofthePROJECTNAVIGATORareusedtoconfiguretheproject.TheoptionsavailableintheProjecttabarediscussednext.
CurrentProjectTheCurrentProjectareaisusedtostoretheprojectfilename,projectfilenumber,anddescriptionof
![Page 70: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/70.jpg)
theproject.
LevelsTheLevelsareacontainsinformationofvariouslevelsusedintheprojectfile.IncaseofAutoCADMEP,levelreferstofloor.Inthisarea,levelnamesaredisplayedintheNamecolumnandtheircorrespondingheightvaluesaredisplayedintheElevationcolumn.DivisionsAreaTheDivisionsareacontainsinformationofvariousdivisionsofthebuilding.Adivisionisthesegmentofabuildingalongthehorizontalplane.ProjectBrowserTheProject Browser tool is used to invoke the Project Browser dialog box. This dialog box hasalreadybeendiscussed.CloseCurrentProjectTheClose Current Project tool is used to close the current project file as well as the PROJECTNAVIGATOR.Thetoolpaletteopenedinthecurrentprojectwillalsogetclosed.ContentBrowserTheContentBrowsertoolisusedtodisplaytheAutodeskContentBrowser2015windowrelated tothecurrentlyloadedproject,refertoFigure2-6.Inthisfigure,thenameofthecurrentprojectisSampleProject - Project Standards. When you double-click on the project icon in theAutodesk ContentBrowser 2015 window, different components related to the current project are displayed in differentcategories,refertoFigure2-7.
Figure2-6TheAutodeskContentBrowser2015
![Page 71: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/71.jpg)
Figure2-7TheAutodeskContentBrowserdisplayingcomponentcategories
WhenyouclickonanyofthecategoriesshowninFigure2-7,thecomponentsrelatedtothatcategorywillbedisplayedinAutodeskContentBrowser2015.Youcan importanyof thecomponentsavailable inAutodeskContentBrowser2015totheTOOLPALETTES.Todoso,pressandhold the leftmousebuttonontheiiconofthecomponentandthendragittotheTOOLPALETTES,refertoFigure2-8.ThecomponentwillbeplacedintheTOOLPALETTES.
![Page 72: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/72.jpg)
Figure2-8ComponentbeingplacedintheToolPalettesRefreshProjectThe Refresh Project tool is used to refresh the current project. When a project file is usedsimultaneouslybymultipleindividualsonanetwork,thenthoseindividualsmaynotbehavingthelatestupdateddrawing.Insuchcases,itbecomesveryimportanttoupdatetheprojectfilebyusingtheRefreshProjectbutton.SynchronizeProjectsTheSynchronizeProjectstoolisusedtosynchronizethecurrentprojectwiththeAECprojectstandards.To synchronize the project, choose the Synchronize Projects tool available at the bottom of thePROJECTNAVIGATOR.Ondoing so, theAnalyzingProjectDrawingswindowwill be displayedshowingtheprogressofsynchronizationofdrawingfiles.Whenallthedrawingfilesaresynchronizedtothe AEC Project standards, the Synchronize Project with Project Standards dialog box will bedisplayed,asshowninFigure2-9.ThedrawingfilesavailableinthecurrentprojectaredisplayedintheHostDrawingcolumn of this dialog box. For every file, the status for the availability of the updatedversionisdisplayedintheStatuscolumnofthedialogbox.YoucansynchronizethedrawingfileswhichshowNewerVersionintheirStatuscolumn.Tosynchronizeadrawingfile,clickon itscorrespondingfieldintheActioncolumn;adrop-downlistwillbedisplayed.SelecttheUpdatefromStandardoptionfromthedrop-downlist;theselectedfilewillbesynchronized.Similarly,youcansynchronizemorethanonefileatatimebypressingandholdingtheCTRLkeywhileselectingthefiles.OnselectingtheUpdatefromStandardoptionforalltheselectedfiles,theupperhalfshowstheobjectsinthedrawingfileoftheproject that donotmatchwith theAECProject standards and canbeupdated from the standards.Thelowerhalf shows the files that arenot present in theproject standards and canbeskipped or ignoredwhilesynchronizingtheprojectbyselectingtheappropriateoptionfromtheActiondrop-downlist.
![Page 73: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/73.jpg)
Figure2-9TheSynchronizeProjectwithProjectStandardsdialogbox
ConfigureProjectStandardsTheConfigureProjectStandardstoolisusedtosetuptheprojectstandard.Theseprojectstandardsareused to synchronize the project drawings. When you choose this tool, theConfigure AEC ProjectStandardsdialog boxwill be displayed, refer to Figure 2-10. TheStandard Styles tab is chosen bydefaultinthedialogbox.YoucanstandardizeanyoftheobjectsavailableintheObjectslistofthistabby selecting the check box corresponding to the object in the dialog box. If you choose theSynchronization tab, threeradiobuttonswillbedisplayed:Automatic,Semi-automatic,andManual.TheManualradiobuttonisselectedbydefault.Asaresult,allthedrawingstandardsneedtobeappliedmanually.Projectdrawingswillnotbesynchronizedwiththeprojectstandards.Ifyouselect theSemi-automaticradiobutton,theprojectstandardswillbeappliedonlywhentheprojectdrawingisopened.Also,youwillbepromptedtoapplyprojectstandardoneachopenedprojectdrawing.IfyouselecttheAutomatic radio button, the project standards will be applied on each opened drawing without anyprompt.UsingtheoptionsintheAutoCADStandards tab,youcanloadanyAutoCADStandardfile toapplyasstandardontheprojectdrawings.
![Page 74: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/74.jpg)
Figure2-10TheConfigureAECProjectStandardsdialogbox
ConstructsTabThe options in theConstructs tab are used to modify the drawing files available in the project. OnchoosingtheConstructstab,thePROJECTNAVIGATORwillbemodified,asshowninFigure2-11.Someoftheoptionsinthistabhavealreadybeendiscussed.Theremainingoptionsavailableinthistabarediscussednext.
![Page 75: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/75.jpg)
Figure2-11ThePROJECTNAVIGATORwiththeConstructstabchosen
ConstructsAreaTheConstructsareahasallthedrawingsofthecurrentprojectarrangedinatreestructure.Inthetree,thedrawingfilesare divided into twomain categories:Constructs andElements , which are further categorized according to their purpose/function. Forexample,thearchitecturaldrawingsarestoredintheArchitecturalcategory.Youcanopenanyofthedrawingsavailableinthesefoldersbydouble-clickingonit.AddCategoryTheAddCategorytoolisusedtoaddanewcategoryinthePROJECTNAVIGATORtocategorizethedrawing files according to their usage. To do so, select a node from theConstructs rollout of thePROJECTNAVIGATORandthenchoosetheAddCategorytool;thecategorywillbeaddedundertheselectednode.AddConstructTheAddConstructtoolisusedtoaddanewconstructionintheproject.Whenyouchoosethistool,theAddConstructdialogboxwillbedisplayed,asshowninFigure2-12.Youcanadddescriptionaboutthenewconstruct,changethename,editcategory,andchangethe templateusingthefieldsavailable in thedialog box. In this dialog box, check boxes corresponding to each level of floor in the building areavailableintheAssignmentsarea.Selectthecheckboxescorrespondingtothelevelstowhichyouwanttoaddtheconstruction.Ifyouselectmultiplecheckboxesinthisdialogbox,thentheobjectscreatedintheconstructionwillspanbetweenthelevelsselected.Therefore,it isrecommendedtoselectonlyonecheckbox.Youcanopen thenewlycreatedconstructbyusing theOpenindrawingeditor checkbox.WhenyouselectthischeckboxandchoosetheOKbutton,theAddConstructdialogboxwillcloseandthenewlycreatedconstructionwillopeninAutoCADMEPforediting.AddElement
![Page 76: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/76.jpg)
TheAddElementtoolisusedtoaddanewelementtotheproject.Whenyouchoosethistool,theAddElementdialogboxwillbedisplayed.SpecifytherequiredparametersandchoosetheOKbutton;anewelementisaddedtotheElementscategory.YoucaneditthenewlyaddedelementbyselectingtheOpenindrawingeditorcheckbox.
Figure2-12TheAddConstructdialogboxShowExternalReferenceTheShowExternalReferencetoolisusedtodisplayexternalreferencesforanydrawinginthecurrentproject. When you select a drawing in the PROJECT NAVIGATOR and choose this button, theExternalReferences dialog box will be displayed, refer to Figure 2-13. In theDetails area of thisdialogbox,theinformationabouttheselecteddrawingisdisplayed.
![Page 77: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/77.jpg)
Figure2-13TheExternalReferencesdialogbox
ViewsTabOnchoosingthistab,thePROJECTNAVIGATORwillbemodified,refertoFigure2-14.TheoptionsintheViewstabareusedtoadd,modify,ordeleteageneralview,adetailview,orasectionviewintheproject.Someoftheoptionsinthistabhavealreadybeendiscussed.Theremainingoptionsinthistabarediscussednext.
![Page 78: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/78.jpg)
Figure2-14ThePROJECTNAVIGATORwiththeViewstabchosenViewsAreaIn thisarea,differentviewsof theprojectdrawingsaredisplayed ina tree structure.Theseviewsaredivided intodifferent categorieson thebasisof their applicationareas.For example, all thedrawingsrelatedtointeriorofthebuildingareavailableintheInteriorscategoryintheViewstree.Youcanopenanyofthedrawingviewsbydouble-clickingonit.
AddViewTherearethreetypesofviewsthatcanbeaddedtotheViewarea:Generalview,Section/Elevationview,andDetailview.TheAddViewtoolisusedtoaddanewviewtotheViewarea.OnchoosingtheAddViewtool,theAddViewdialogboxwillbedisplayed,asshowninFigure2-15.
Figure2-15TheAddViewdialogbox
There are three options available in this dialog box:AddaGeneralView,Add a Section/ElevationView,andAddaDetailView.Onchoosinganoption,therespectivedialogboxwillbedisplayed.Forexample,whenyouchoosetheAddaGeneralViewoption,theAddGeneralViewdialogboxwillbedisplayed,asshowninFigure2-16.
![Page 79: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/79.jpg)
Figure2-16TheAddGeneralViewdialogbox
Usingtheoptionsavailableinthisdialogbox,youcansetthegeneralpropertiesoftheview.Threepagesare available in this dialog box:General,Context, andContent.TheGeneral page is displayed bydefaultinthisdialogbox.Inthispage,youneedtoenterthegeneralinformationsabouttheview.Afterentering thegeneral information,choose theNext button; theContext pagewill bedisplayed, refer toFigure2-17.
![Page 80: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/80.jpg)
Figure2-17TheAddGeneralViewdialogboxwiththeContextpagedisplayed
Onthispage,youcanselecttheportionsofthebuildingthatyouwanttoincludeinthecurrentview.Todoso,youcanselectthecheckboxescorrespondingtotheportionsofthebuildingrequiredtobeincludedinthe current view. After selecting the check boxes, choose theNext button; theContent page will bedisplayed,refertoFigure2-18.
![Page 81: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/81.jpg)
Figure2-18TheAddGeneralViewdialogboxwiththeContentpagedisplayed
Inthispage,youcanselectthecheckboxescorrespondingtothoseelementsthatyouwanttodisplayinthecurrentview.Afterspecifyingtherequiredparameters,choosetheFinishbuttontoexitthedialogbox.ThenewlycreatedviewwillbedisplayedintheViewsareaofthePROJECTNAVIGATOR.RegenerateViewTheRegenerateViewtoolisusedtoregeneratealltheviewssothatyoucangettheupdatedversionofthedrawingviews.Thistoolisalsousedtoupdatethereferenceoftheviews.RepathXrefTheRepathXreftoolisusedtoreconnecttheexternalreferenceswhosenamesorlocationshavebeenchanged.
SheetsTabOnchoosingthistab,thePROJECTNAVIGATORwillbemodified,refertoFigure2-19.Theoptionsin theSheets tab are used to add, modify, or delete the sheets available in the project. Some of theoptionsinthisdialogboxhavealreadybeendiscussed.Theremainingoptionsarediscussednext.
Figure2-19ThePROJECTNAVIGATORwiththeSheetstabchosen
SheetSetViewAreaAllthedrawingsheetsavailableinthecurrentprojectaredisplayedintheSheetSetViewareainatreestructure.Youcanopenanyofthedrawingsheetsbydouble-clickingonit.AddSheetsTheAddSheetstoolisusedtoaddanewsheetintheproject.Todoso,choosethistool;theNewSheetdialogboxwillbedisplayed,asshowninFigure2-20.Inthisdialogbox,youneedtospecifythesheetnumber,sheettitle,andfilenameintheirrespectiveeditboxes.Onspecifyingthesheetnumberandthesheettitleintheeditboxes,adefaultfilenameisdisplayedintheFilenameeditbox.Youcanchangethis
![Page 82: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/82.jpg)
file name or retain it. The folder path and the template path for the current sheet are displayed in theFolderpathandSheettemplatefields,respectively.Thesefieldscannotbemodifiedinthisdialogbox.Afterspecifyingtherequiredparameters,choosetheOKbuttonfromthisdialogbox;thenewlycreatedsheet will be added in the project and will be displayed at the bottom of the list in thePROJECTNAVIGATOR.Youcaneditthissheetbydouble-clickingonit.
Figure2-20TheNewSheetdialogbox
PublishThePublishtoolisusedtopublishthecompletesheetsetinDWF,PDF,orDWFxfileformat.Topublisha sheet set, choose the Publish tool from the PROJECT NAVIGATOR; the AutoCAD MEP 2015messageboxwillbedisplayed,asshowninFigure2-21.ChoosetheOKbuttonfromthismessagebox;theSpecifyDWFxFiledialogboxwillbedisplayed,asshowninFigure2-22.ChoosetheSelectbuttonfromthisdialogbox;thePublishJobProgressmessageboxwillbedisplayed.
Figure2-21TheAutoCADMEP2015messagebox
![Page 83: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/83.jpg)
Figure2-22TheSpecifyDWFxFiledialogbox
Thismessageboxshowstheprogressofplotting/publishingofthedrawingsheets.Whentheprocessofpublishingcompletes,thePlotandPublishJobCompletemessagewillbedisplayedatthebottomrightcornerandtheplotfilewillbecreatedatthelocationspecifiedintheSpecifyDWFxFiledialogbox.Toviewthedetailsoftheplotfile,clickontheClicktoviewplotandpublishdetailslinkinthemessageboxdisplayedatthebottomrightcorneroftheapplicationwindow;thePlotandPublishDetailsdialogboxwillbedisplayedwiththedetailsoftheplotfile.
SPACESpaceisanentityusedinAutoCADMEPtofindouttechnicalinformationaboutaspecificsectionofanarchitecturaldrawingofaproject.Forexample,ifyouwanttomakeaspecificsectionofadrawingasanoffice,thenyouneedtoassigncorrespondingspacestyletothatsection.Thepropertiesofthatofficesuchasarea,airflow,height,equipment,andloadarestoredinthespacestyle.Toassignaspacestyletoanarea,youneedtocreateaspacefirst.Themethodtocreateaspaceisdiscussednext.
CreatingSpacesTocreateaspace,choosetheSpacetoolfromtheSpacedrop-downintheBuildpaneloftheHometaboftheArchitectureworkspace.Thistoolisalsoavailableintheotherworkspaces.YoucaninvokethistoolfromanyoftheworkspacesbyenteringtheSPACEADDcommandatthecommandbar.Ondoingso,the PROPERTIES palette will be displayed. By default, the Rectangle option is selected in thecommandbar.YouneedtoselectCreatetypefromcommandbar.Ondoingso,differentoptionswillbedisplayed.Select theInsertoption;a spaceofdefault sizewillbeattached to thecursor.Youneed toclick in the drawing area to specify the position of the space.As soon as you specify the position ofspace,youwillbeprompted tospecify the rotationvalue for thespace.Specify the rotationvalue; the
![Page 84: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/84.jpg)
spacewillbepositionedatthedefinedpoint.TheCommandpromptforcreatingthespaceisgivennext.ChoosetheSpacetool.Startcorneror[Name/STyle/Createtype/Height]:CSetcreatetype[Insert/Polygon/Generate]<Rectangle>:IInsertionpoint or [Name/STyle/Create type/Length/WIdth/Height/MOve/SIze/Dragpoint/MAtch]:Entertheco-ordinatesoftheinsertionpointorclickinthedrawingarea.Rotationor[Name/STyle/Createtype/Length/WIdth/Height/MOve/SIze/Dragpoint/MAtch/Undo]<0>:Entertherotationangleofthespace.Insertionpointor[Name/STyle/Createtype/Length/WIdth/Height/MOve/SIze/Dragpoint/MAtch/Undo]:TheoptionsavailableintheCommandpromptarediscussednext.NameTheNameoptionisusedtodefineanameforthespacecreatedbyusingtheSPACEADDcommand.Bydefault,theSpacenameisassignedtothenewlycreatedspace.STyleTheSTyleoptionisusedtochangethestyleofthespace.Bydefault,theStandardstyleisselected.YoucanchangethespacestylebyusingtheSPACESTYLEcommand.Thiscommandwillbediscussedlaterinthischapter.CreatetypeTheCreatetypeoptionisusedtochangethetypeofspacetobecreated.Thespacetobecreatedcanbea rectangle, a polygon, or it can be associative to the boundary objects. The Command prompt afterselectingtheCreatetypeoptionisgivennext.Startcorneror[Name/STyle/Createtype/Height]:CSetcreatetype[Insert/Polygon/Generate]<Rectangle>:According to the aboveCommandprompt, there are four options to create a space.These options arediscussednext.Insert:IfyouselecttheCreatetypecommandfrom theCommand bar, a list of optionswill be displayed.Choose theInsertoptionor press I and thenpress theENTERkey; the spacewill be created according to the targetdimensions specified in thedesignrulesofthespacestyle.Figure2-23showsaspacecreatedbyusingtheInsertoption.TheCommandpromptforcreatingaspacebyusingtheInsertoptionisgivennext.
![Page 85: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/85.jpg)
Figure2-23ThespacecreatedbyusingtheInsertoption
Insertionpointor[Name/STyle/Createtype/Length/WIdth/Height/MOve/SIze/Dragpoint/MAtch]:Specifytheinsertionpoint.Rotationor[Name/STyle/Createtype/Length/WIdth/Height/MOve/SIze/Dragpoint/MAtch/Undo]<defaultvalue>:Specifytherotationvalueforthespace.Insertionpointor[Name/STyle/Createtype/Length/WIdth/Height/MOve/SIze/Dragpoint/MAtch/Undo]:
Rectangle:Bydefault,thisoptionisselectedatthecommandbar.Youcanspecifythelengthandwidthofthespacetobeinsertedinthedrawingarea.Specifythefirstcornerpoint;theothercornerpointoftherectanglewillgetattachedtothecursor,asshowninFigure2-24.Also,youwillbepromptedtospecifytheendcornerpoint.Eitherclickinthedrawingareatospecifytheendcornerpointorentertheco-ordinatesoftheendcornerpoint.
Figure2-24Therectangularspacewithcursorattachedtothecornerpointoftherectangle
Polygon:Bychoosingthisoption,youcancreateapolygonalspacebymanuallydefiningthesegmentsofthepolygon.Youcancreateapolygontypespaceeitherbyusingthearcsorbyusingthelines.Figure2-25showsthepolygontypespacecreatedbyusingthearcsandFigure2-26showsthepolygontypespacecreatedbyusingthelines.
![Page 86: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/86.jpg)
Figure2-25Thepolygontypespacecreatedbyusingarcs
Figure2-26ThepolygontypespacecreatedbyusinglinesGenerate:Onchoosingthisoption,thespacecreatedwillbeassociativetotheboundaryobjects.Ifyoudo not have any objectwith its space boundaries defined orwith a valid space boundary, then theAnalyzingPotentialSpacesdialogboxwillbedisplayed,asshowninFigure2-27.YoucanuseallthevisibleobjectstocreateaboundingspacebychoosingtheUseallvisibleobjectstoboundspacesoptionfromthedialogbox.Youcanalsoselectanobjecttocreatetheboundspace.Todoso,choosetheSelectobjectsthatshouldboundspacesoptionfromthedialogbox.
Figure2-27TheAnalyzingPotentialSpacesdialogbox
![Page 87: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/87.jpg)
AfterselectingtheCreatetypeoptionfromthecommandbar,selecttheInsertoption.Thefollowingoptionsappearinthecommandbar.LengthTheLengthoptionisusedtochangethelengthofthespacetobecreated.Bydefault,thetargetdimensionofthespacestyleisusedasthelengthofthespace.TheCommandprompttochangethelengthisgivennext.
Insertionpointor[Name/STyle/Createtype/Length/WIdth/Height/MOve/SIze/Dragpoint/MAtch]:LLength<defaultvalue>:Enterthedesiredvalueoflength.WIdthTheWIdthoptionisusedtochangethewidthofthespacetobecreated.Bydefault,thetargetdimensionofspacestyleisusedasthewidthofthespace.TheCommandprompttochangethewidthisgivennext.Insertionpointor[Name/STyle/Createtype/Length/WIdth/Height/MOve/SIze/Dragpoint/MAtch]:WILength<defaultvalue>:Enterthedesiredvalueofwidth.HeightTheHeightoptionisusedtochangetheheightofthespacetobecreated.Bydefault,thetargetdimensionofspacestyleisusedastheheightofthespace.TheCommandprompttochangetheheightisgivennext.Insertionpointor[Name/STyle/Createtype/Length/WIdth/Height/MOve/SIze/Dragpoint/MAtch]:HLength<defaultvalue>:Enterthedesiredvalueofheight.MOveTheMOveoption isused tomove thespacecreated.Thisoption isavailableonly ifyouhavechosenInsertfromtheCreatetypeoptions.Aftermovingthespace,youcanalsorotatethespacebyaspecifiedangle.TheCommandprompttomovethespaceisgivennext.Insertionpointor[Name/STyle/Createtype/Length/WIdth/Height/MOve/SIze/Dragpoint/MAtch]:MOInsertionpointor[Name/STyle/Createtype/Length/WIdth/Height/MOve/SIze/Dragpoint/MAtch]:Specifytheinsertionpointbyclickingorenteringthecoordinates.Rotationor[Name/STyle/Createtype/Length/WIdth/Height/MOve/SIze/Dragpoint/MAtch/Undo]<0>:Specifytherotationanglebyclickingorenteringthevalue.SIzeTheSIzeoptionisusedtospecifythesizeofthespacetobecreated.ThisoptionisavailableonlyifyouhaveselectedInsertfromtheCreatetypeoptions.TheCommandpromptforspecifyingthesizeofthespaceisgivennext.
![Page 88: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/88.jpg)
Insertionpointor[Name/STyle/Createtype/Length/WIdth/Height/MOve/SIze/Dragpoint/MAtch]:SIInsertionpointor[Name/STyle/Createtype/Length/WIdth/Height/MOve/SIze/Dragpoint/MAtch]:Specifytheinsertionpointbyclickingorenteringthecoordinates.Newsizeor[Name/STyle/Createtype/Length/WIdth/Height/MOve/SIze/Dragpoint/MAtch/Undo]<10’-0”>:Specifytheinsertionpointbyclickingorenteringthedimensions.Rotationor[Name/STyle/Createtype/Length/WIdth/Height/MOve/SIze/Dragpoint/MAtch/Undo]<0>:Specifytherotationanglebyclickingorenteringthevalue.DragpointTheDrag point option is used to change the orientation of the space to be created. This option isavailableonlyifyouhaveselectedInsertfromtheCreatetypeoptions.TheCommandprompttochangetheorientationofthespaceisgivennext.Insertionpointor[Name/STyle/Createtype/Length/WIdth/Height/MOve/SIze/Dragpoint/MAtch]:DInsertionpointor[Name/STyle/Createtype/Length/WIdth/Height/MOve/SIze/Dragpoint/MAtch]:EnterDagainifyouwanttochangetheorientationorpressENTERtoexit.MAtchTheMAtch option is used tomatch the style of the newly created spacewith an existing space.ThisoptionisavailableonlyifyouhaveselectedInsertfromtheCreatetypeoptions.TheCommandprompttochangetheorientationofthespaceisgivennext.Insertionpointor[Name/STyle/Createtype/Length/WIdth/Height/MOve/SIze/Dragpoint/MAtch]:MASelectaspacetomatch:Selectthespacecreatedearliertouseitspropertiesfornewspace.Match[Style/Length/Width/Height]<All>:Enteranyoftheoptionsavailableintheprompttomatchtheproperties.Bydefault,theAlloptionisselected,soallthepropertiesofselectedspacearecopiedinthenewspace.Now,clickinthedrawingareatoplaceit.ArcThisoption is used to create an arc in a polygon type space. TheArc option is available onlywhenPolygonisselectedfromtheCreatetypeoptions.TheCommandprompttocreateapolygontypespaceusinganarcisdiscussednext.Insertionpointor[Name/STyle/Createtype/Length/WIdth/Height/MOve/SIze/Dragpoint/MAtch]:CSetcreatetype[Rectangle/Polygon/Generate]<Insert>:PStartpointor[Name/STyle/Createtype/Height/Arc]:AStartpointor[Name/STyle/Createtype/Height/Line]:Specifythefirstpointofthearc.Secondpointor[Name/STyle/Createtype/Height/Line/Undo]:Specifythesecondpointofthearc.Nextpointor[Name/STyle/Createtype/Height/Line/Undo]:Specifythethirdpointtocompletethearc.
![Page 89: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/89.jpg)
Second point or [Name/STyle/CReate type/Height/Line/Close/Ortho/Undo]: Specify the next point orenterCtoclosethearcforcreatingthespace.LineThisoptionisusedtocreateapolygonbyusingtheline.TheLineoptionisavailableonlywhenPolygonis selected from theCreate type options and thenArc is chosen in the next prompt. The Commandprompttocreateapolygontypespaceusinglinesisdiscussednext.Insertionpointor[Name/STyle/Createtype/Length/WIdth/Height/MOve/SIze/Dragpoint/MAtch]:CSetcreatetype[Rectangle/Polygon/Generate]<Insert>:PStartpointor[Name/STyle/Createtype/Height/Arc]:AStartpointor[Name/STyle/Createtype/Height/Line]:LStartpointor[Name/STyle/Createtype/Height/Arc]:Specifythestartpointofthepolygon.Nextpointor[Name/STyle/Createtype/Height/Arc/Undo]:Specifytheendpointofthefirstlineofthepolygon.Next point or [Name/STyle/Create type/Height/Arc/Ortho/Undo]:Specify the end point of the secondlineofthepolygon.Nextpointor[Name/STyle/CReatetype/Height/Arc/Close/Ortho/Undo]:SpecifythenextpointorenterCtoclosethepolygon.EditingSpacesYoucanperformvariouseditingoperationsonthecreatedspaces.Forexample,youcanchangethespacestyleordivideaspace.Whenyouselectaspacefromthedrawingarea,theSpacecontextualtabwillbeavailableintheRibbon,refertoFigure2-28.Theoptionsinthistabarediscussednext.
Figure2-28TheSpacecontextualtab
SelectSimilarTheSelectSimilartoolisusedtoselectallthosecomponentsfromthedrawingareawhichhavethesamestyleandlayerastheselectedobject.Theobjectswiththesamestyleandpropertiesbutdifferentlayerswillnotbeselectedbythistool.ObjectViewerTheObjectViewertoolisusedtodisplaytheselectedobjectinaseparate3Dpreviewwindow.Whenyouchoosethistool,theselectedobjectwillbedisplayedinaseparatewindow,asshowninFigure2-29.
![Page 90: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/90.jpg)
Figure2-29TheObjectViewerdialogbox
Various tools suchasParallel,Perspective,andZoomWindow are in themain toolbarof thisdialogbox.Thesetoolsareusedtochangethedisplayofview.IsolateObjectsDrop-downThisdrop-downisavailableintheGeneralpaneloftheSpacecontextualtaboftheRibbon.Thetoolsinthisdrop-downareusedtocontrolthevisibilityoftheobjects.Thesetoolsarediscussednext.
IsolateObjectsThistoolisusedtohideallthedeselectedobjectsfromthedrawingarea.
HideObjectsThistoolisusedtohidetheselectedobjectsfromthedrawingarea.
EndIsolationThistoolisusedtodisplayallthehiddenobjects.
EditinSectionThisdrop-downisavailableintheGeneralpaneloftheSpacecontextualtabintheRibbon.Thetoolsinthisdrop-downareusedtoeditthespacecreated.Thesetoolsarediscussednext.EditinSection
![Page 91: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/91.jpg)
Thistoolisusedtoeditanobjectinapredefinedsection.EditinElevationThistoolisusedtoeditthespaceatacertainelevationdistancefromtheselectedreference.
EditinPlanThistoolisusedtoeditthespaceatcertainplandistancefromtheselectedreference.
EditStyleThisdrop-downisavailableintheGeneralpaneloftheSpacecontextualtabintheRibbon.Thetoolsinthisdrop-downareusedtomodifythestyleofthespace.Thesetoolsarediscussednext.EditStyleByusingtheoptionsinthisdialogbox,youcanchangedifferentpropertiesoftheselectedspacesuchaslengthandwidthofthespace,targetarea,andvariousoffsetvalues.Whenyouchoosethistool,theSpaceStylePropertiesdialogboxwillbedisplayed,asshowninFigure2-30.Usingtheoptionsinthedialogbox,youcanmodifythestyleoftheselectedspace.
Figure2-30TheSpaceStylePropertiesdialogbox
SpaceStylesWhenyouchoosethistool,theStyleManagerdialogboxwillbedisplayed,asshowninFigure2-31.ThespacestylesavailableinthecurrentdrawingfilearedisplayedintheleftareaofthisdialogboxundertheSpaceStylescategory.Ifyouselectanyspacestylefromthisarea,theoptionstochangethespace style will be displayed in the right area of the dialog box. These options are similar to theoptionsdisplayedintheSpaceStylePropertiesdialogbox.
![Page 92: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/92.jpg)
Figure2-31TheStyleManagerdialogboxDisplayThemeStyleWhenyouchoosethistool,theStyleManagerdialogboxwillbedisplayed,asshowninFigure2-32.VariousthemestylesavailableinthedrawingaredisplayedintheleftareaofthisdialogboxundertheDisplayThemeStylescategory.Ifyouchooseathemestylefromthisarea,theoptionstochangethepropertiesoftheselectedthemearedisplayedintherightarea.Usingtheseoptions,youcanchangethepropertiesoftheselectedthemelikeitstitle,textstyle,symbol,andsoon.
![Page 93: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/93.jpg)
Figure2-32TheStyleManagerdialogboxwiththemestyleoptions
ZoneTemplatesTheZoneTemplates tool is used to change the properties of the selected zone template such as itscontents,modifiers,andname.Todoso,choosetheZoneTemplatestool;theStyleManagerdialogboxwillbedisplayed,asshownFigure2-33.
Figure2-33TheStyleManagerdialogboxwithZoneTemplatesselected
Various zone template styles available in thedrawing are displayed in the left areaof this dialog boxundertheZoneTemplatescategory.Whenyouchooseatemplatestylefromtheleftarea,theoptionsto
![Page 94: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/94.jpg)
changethepropertiesoftheselectedtemplatestylearedisplayedintherightarea.Using theseoptions,youcanchangethepropertiesoftheselectedtemplatestyle.Similarly,youcanchangethezonestylebyusingtheZoneStyletoolavailableinthesamedrop-down.
CopyStyleThistoolisusedtocreateacopyofthestyleoftheselectedobject.DimensionThistoolisusedtoaddAECdimensiontoanobject.Toaddadimension,choosethistoolandselecttheobjecttowhichyouwanttoadddimension;thedimensionwillbeattachedtothecursor.Now,youcanplacethedimensionatthedesiredlocation.
TagThis tool is used to add a tag to the object. To add a tag, chooseSpace >General >Tag from theRibbon;youwillbepromptedtoselectanobjectonwhichyouwanttoaddatag.Onselectingtheobject,thetagwillbeattachedtothecursor.Now,placethetagatthedesiredlocation.Whenyouclicktoplacethetag,theEditPropertySetDatadialogboxwillbedisplayed,asshowninFigure2-34.
Figure2-34TheEditPropertySetDatadialogbox
Using the fields available in this dialogbox, you can change the properties of the tag for the selectedobject.UpdateDrop-downThis drop-down is available in theModify panel. The tools available in this drop-down are used toupdate spaces.There are two tools available in this drop-down:SelectedSpace andAllAssociativeSpaces.TheSelectedSpacetoolisusedtoupdatetheselectedspace.TheAllAssociativeSpacestoolisusedtoupdateallthespacesassociatedwiththeselectedspace.
![Page 95: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/95.jpg)
EditinPlaceThistoolisusedtoeditanextruded3Dspace.Todoso,chooseSpace>Modify>EditinPlace fromtheRibbon;theEdit inPlace:SpaceBodyModifiercontextual tabwillbedisplayedandtheselectedspacewillbeconvertedintoafreeformspace.Now,usingtheverticesandcontrolpointsavailableinthefreeformspace,youcanedittheshapeandsizeofthespace.Whenyouhoverthecursoroverthecenterpointofaselectedface,aninformationboxwiththeeditingoptionswillbeattachedtothecursor,refertoFigure 2-35. You can cycle between various options to edit a space by pressing the CTRL key afterselectingthecenterpointofitscorrespondingface.
Figure2-35Theinformationboxshowingvariouseditingoptions
EditSurfacesThistoolisusedtoeditonlythefacesofthespace.ChooseSpace>Modify>EditSurfaces fromtheRibbon;theselectedspacewillbeconvertedintoafreeformspace.Now,usingthemidpointsofedges,youcaneditthefacesoftheselectedspace.Also,aplusiconwillbedisplayedatthebottomfaceofthespace,refertoFigure2-36.Usingthisplusicon,youcanaddwindowsanddoorstotheselectedspace.
Figure2-36Spacewitheditingpoints
EditVerticesThistoolisusedtoaddavertextotheselectededge.Todoso,chooseSpace>Modify>EditVerticesfrom theRibbon; the vertex will be attached to the cursor and you will be prompted to click in thedrawingareatoaddthevertex,refertoFigure2-37.Next,clickinthedrawingarea;thevertexwillbeaddedtothecorrespondingedge.Toremovethevertex,pressandholdtheCTRLorSHIFTkeyandthenclickonthevertextoberemoved.
![Page 96: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/96.jpg)
NoteTousetheEditinPlace,EditSurfaces,andEditVerticestools,youneedtoswitchtoisometricviewport.
Figure2-37Spacewithitsvertexattachedtothecursor
MakeAssociativeThistoolisusedtomaketheboundingobjectsassociativetotheselectedspace.Todoso,chooseSpace>Modify>MakeAssociativefromtheRibbon;theobjectsboundingthespacewillbecomeassociativewithit.Notethatformakingspaceassociativewiththeobject,theboundaryoftheobjectmustenclosetheselectedspace.CreatePolylineThistoolisusedtocreateapolylinearoundtheselectedspace.Tocreateapolylinearoundaselectedspace,chooseSpace>Modify>CreatePolylinefromtheRibbon;apolylinewillbecreatedaroundtheselectedspace.DivideSpaceTheDivideSpacetoolisavailableintheModifypaneloftheSpacetab.Thistoolisusedtodividetheselectedspacebyusingaline.InterferenceThetoolsavailableinthisdrop-downareusedtoaddorremoveaninterferenceconditionfromaselectedspace.RemoveVoidTheRemoveVoidtoolisusedtoremoveaselectedvoidfromthespace.Space/ZoneManagerTheSpace/ZoneManagertoolisavailableintheHelperspaneloftheSpace tab.Thistoolisusedtochangethepropertiesoftheselectedspaceorzone.
![Page 97: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/97.jpg)
ShowBoundariesTheShowBoundariestoolisavailableintheHelperspaneloftheSpacetab.Thistoolisusedtoshoworhidetheboundaryoftheselectedspace.Thistoolisavailableonlyforassociatedspaces.ZONEAzone is a groupof spaceswhich areused for a specific function; for example, a zone created for aspecific temperaturecondition.Youcancreateazoneorzonesbyusing theZone tool available in theSpacedrop-downoftheBuildpanelintheHome taboftheRibbon.Whenyouchoosethis tool,aboxwillgetattachedtothecursorandyouwillbepromptedtospecifythelocationwherethezonetagistobeinserted.Clickinthedrawingarea;thezonewillbecreatedandnameofthezonewillbedisplayedalongwiththebox.Bydefault,Zoneisdisplayedasthenameforthecreatedzone.YoucanchangethisnamebyusingtheName fieldinthePropertypalette.Youcaneditazonebyusingtheoptionsavailable in theZonecontextualtab.TheZonecontextualtabisdisplayedonselectingthezone.Theoptionsavailableinthistabhavealreadybeendiscussedthischapter.ResetAllThisoptionisusedtorevertallthechangestakenplaceduetothegripeditingofboundaries.Todoso,chooseSpace>Boundary>ResetAllfromtheRibbonandselectthespaceswhoseboundariesaretoberesettooriginalstate.WORKSPACESAworkspace is a combination ofmenus, toolbars,Ribbon, palettes, and control panels. It is used torepresentacustomizeddrawingenvironmentbasedontheuserrequirement.InAutoCADMEP,sixdefaultworkspaces are available in theWorkspaceSwitching flyout of theApplication StatusBar, refer toFigure2-38.TheseworkspacesareHVAC,Piping,Electrical,Plumbing,Schematic,andArchitecture.
Figure2-38TheWorkspaceSwitchingflyout
TheoptionsintheWorkspaceSwitchingflyoutarediscussednext.HVACThe tools in theHVAC workspace are used for designing heating, ventilation, and air conditioning
![Page 98: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/98.jpg)
system. Therefore, on invoking theHVAC workspace, the tools related to the HVAC design will bedisplayed.PipingThetoolsinthePipingworkspaceareusedforroutingandcreatingpipelinesinthebuilding.Toswitchto thisworkspace, choose thePiping option from theWorkspace Switching flyout; the options in theRibbon andTOOLPALETTESwill change according to theworkspace.Note that some options forplumbingarealsoavailableinthisworkspace.ElectricalThe tools in the Electrical workspace are used for creating electrical circuits, panels, devices,equipment, and cable trays. To switch to this workspace, choose the Electrical option from theWorkspaceSwitchingflyout;theoptionsintheRibbonandTOOLPALETTESwillchangeaccordingtotheworkspace.PlumbingTools available in thisworkspace are similar to the tools in thePiping workspace. The tools in thisworkspaceareusedforroutingandcreatingplumbinglinesinthebuilding.Toswitchtothisworkspace,choosethePlumbingoptionfromtheWorkspaceSwitching flyout; theoptions in theRibbonandToolPaletteswillchangeaccording to theworkspace.Someof theoptionsforpipingarealsoavailable inthisworkspace.Plumbingisconcernedwiththedrainageandotherwaterrelatedapplications,whereaspipinghasabroadapplicationareasuchasgassupplyandpetroleumlines.SchematicSchematics is the symbolic representation of an object. Using the Schematic workspace, you canrepresent MEP objects in the form of symbols. Some of the tools available in this workspace areschematiclinesandschematicsymbols.ArchitectureThe tools in theArchitectureworkspaceareused tocreatearchitecturalobjectssuchaswalls,doors,windows, and stairs.An architectural layout creates foundation for other domains like piping,HVAC,electrical,andsoon.Toswitchtothisworkspace,choosetheArchitectureoptionfromtheWorkspaceSwitchingflyout;theRibbonandTOOLPALETTESwillchangeaccordingly.You can switch between theworkspaces anytimeduring designing by using theWorkspace Switchingflyout. Also, you can customize any of the workspaces by using theCustomize tool available in theWorkspaceSwitchingflyout.Thistoolisdiscussednext.CustomizeTheCustomizetoolisusedtocustomizetheuserinterfaceofAutoCADMEP.OninvokingthistoolfromtheWorkspaceSwitchingflyout,theCustomizeUserInterfacedialogboxwillbedisplayed,asshowninFigure2-39.Theareasinthisdialogboxarediscussednext.
![Page 99: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/99.jpg)
Figure2-39TheCustomizeUserInterfacedialogbox
CustomizationinAllFilesTheoptionsinthisareaareusedtoselectthecustomizationfiletobeusedformodification.Also,youcanchangethepropertiesoftheselecteditemfromthisarea.Onselectinganoptionfromthisarea,therelatedpropertiesaredisplayedinthePropertiesareaavailableontherightofthisdialogbox.CommandListTheoptionsinthisareaareusedtocustomizetheselectedcommand.Onselectingacommandfromthisarea,theButtonImageareaisdisplayedat thetoprightcornerof thisdialogbox.Youcanchangetheiconusedfortheselectedbuttonbyusingtheoptionsavailableinthisarea.
PropertiesTheoptionsinthisareaareusedtochangethespecificationsoftheselectedoption.SELF-EVALUATIONTESTAnswerthefollowingquestionsandthencomparethemtothosegivenattheendofthischapter:1.TheextensionforAutoCADMEPprojectfilesis.apt.(T/F)2.Whilechangingthecurrentdirectoryofprojectfiles,youcancreateacategory.(T/F)3.ThePROJECTNAVIGATORisusedtomanagethedrawingfilesofaproject.(T/F)
![Page 100: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/100.jpg)
4.InAutoCADMEP,alevelreferstoa__________.5.The _____________ tool is used to display theAutodeskContent Browser related to the currentloadedproject.
6.Azoneisadivisionof___________whichisusedforaspecificfunction.7.The___________toolisusedtoaddaninstanceoftheselectedobjecttothedrawing.REVIEWQUESTIONSAnswerthefollowingquestions:1.TheSynchronizeProjects tool is used to synchronize the current projectwith the previous projectstandards.(T/F)
2.YoucancreateaspacebyusingtheSPACEADDcommand.(T/F)3.TheCustomizetoolisusedtocustomizetheuserinterfaceofAutoCADMEP.(T/F)4.Schematicsisthe___________representationofanobject.5.Youcanedita3Dextrudedspacebyusing____________tool.AnswerstoSelf-EvaluationTest1.F,2.T,3.T,4.floor,5.ContentBrowser,6.space,7.AddSelected
![Page 101: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/101.jpg)
Chapter3
WorkingwithArchitectureWorkspace
![Page 102: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/102.jpg)
LearningObjectivesAftercompletingthischapter,youwillbeableto:•Addcolumnsandgrids•Addwalls•Addwindowsanddoors•Addstairs,railings,andstairtower•Addroofsandslabs•Createlayouts
INTRODUCTIONInAutoCADMEP,beforedesigninganMEPproject,itsarchitecturalmodelisrequired.Anarchitecturalmodel consists of the following elements:Walls,Doors,Windows, Floors, Stairs, Roofs, Beams, andColumns.Italsoconsistsofstandardviews,sheets,andunits.YoucanaddtheseelementsintheprojectusingtheArchitectureworkspace.Inthischapter,youwilllearntousevarioustoolsandoptionstoaddandcreatearchitecturalelementsusingtheArchitectureworkspace.ARCHITECTUREWORKSPACEToworkwiththearchitecturalplans,youneedtoinvoketheArchitectureworkspace.Todoso,choosetheArchitectureoptionfromtheflyoutdisplayedonchoosingtheWorkspaceSwitchingbuttonavailablein the Application Status Bar; the tools required for performing architectural operations will bedisplayedintheRibbon,refertoFigure3-1.
Figure3-1TheRibbondisplayedoninvokingtheArchitectureworkspace
Theprocedureofcreatingvariouscomponentsofanarchitecturalstructuresuchaswall,door,window,grid,andsoonarediscussednext.
CREATINGWALLSWallsare thebuildingblocksofastructure.The tools tocreateawallareavailable in theWalldrop-downof theBuildpanel in theHome tabof theRibbon, refer toFigure3-2.Thereare three tools forcreatingwalls:Wall,CurtainWall,andCurtainWallUnit.Thesetoolsarediscussednext.
![Page 103: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/103.jpg)
Figure3-2TheWalldrop-downlistWallThistoolisusedtocreatethestraightandcurvedwalls.Tocreateawall,choosetheWalltoolfromtheWalldrop-downavailable in theBuildpanelof theHome tab in theRibbon;youwillbeprompted tospecify the start point of the wall. Also, the PROPERTIES palette will be displayed. The promptsequenceforcreatingawallbychoosingtheWalltoolisgivennext.Startpointor[STyle/Group/WIdth/Height/OFfset/Flip/Justify/Match/Arc]:SpecifytheStartpointofthewallsegment.End point or [STyle/Group/WIdth/Height/OFfset/Flip/Justify/Match/Arc]:Specify the end point of thecurrentwallsegmentandstartingpointofthenextwallsegment.Endpointor[STyle/Group/WIdth/Height/OFfset/Flip/Justify/Match/Arc/Undo]:Specifytheendpointofthecurrentwallsegmentandstartingpointofthenextwallsegment.Endpointor[STyle/Group/WIdth/Height/OFfset/Flip/Justify/Match/Arc/Undo/Close/ORtho close]: Specify the endpointofthecurrentwallsegmentandstartingpointofthenextwallsegment.Endpointor[STyle/Group/WIdth/Height/OFfset/Flip/Justify/Match/Arc/Undo/Close/ORthoclose]:NoteYou can also invoke the tools given in theRibbonby entering the corresponding command at thecommandprompt.There are various options available in the command prompt to change the properties of the wall.Alternatively, you can select these options from the shortcut menu displayed on right-clicking in thedrawingarea.Theseoptionsarediscussednext.STyleThisoptionisusedtochangethestyleofthewalltobecreated.YoucancreateawallstylebyusingtheStyleManagerwhichwillbediscussedlaterinthischapter.Bydefault,theStandardstyleischosenasthewallstyle.GroupThisoptionisusedtospecifythecleanupgroupforthewall.ThesecleanupgroupsarecreatedbyusingStyleManagerwhichisdiscussedlater.Whentwowallsofthesamegroupintersecteachother,theygetautomaticallycleanedupattheintersectionpoint,refertoFigure3-3.Figure3-4shows the intersecting
![Page 104: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/104.jpg)
wallsoftwodifferentgroups.
Figure3-3Theintersectingwallsofsamecleanupgroup
Figure3-4Theintersectingwallscreatedoftwodifferentgroups
WIdthThis option is used to specify the width of a wall. The width specified using this option will beapplicableforallthewallsthatarecreatedafterspecifyingthisvalue.Thepromptsequenceforchangingthewidthofawallisgivennext.Startpointor[STyle/Group/WIdth/Height/OFfset/Flip/Justify/Match/Arc]:WIWidth<240>:Specifythedesiredwidth.Startpointor[STyle/Group/WIdth/Height/OFfset/Flip/Justify/Match/Arc]:HeightThisoptionisusedtospecifytheheightofthewall.Theheightspecifiedusingthisoptionwillbeusedforallthewallstobecreatedafterwards.Toviewtheheightofwall,youneedtoswitchtotheisometricview.Thepromptsequenceforchangingtheheightofwallisgivennext.Startpointor[STyle/Group/WIdth/Height/OFfset/Flip/Justify/Match/Arc]:HHeight<3000>:Specifythedesiredheight.
![Page 105: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/105.jpg)
Startpointor[STyle/Group/WIdth/Height/OFfset/Flip/Justify/Match/Arc]:OFfsetThisoptionisusedtosetthedistanceofcenterlineofthewallfromthewalledge.Bydefaultthevalueissettozero.Figure3-5showsawallbeingcreatedusingtheOFfsetoption.
Figure3-5Thewallbeingcreatedwithcenterlineatitsdefaultposition
FlipThisoptionisusedtoflipthedirectionofwallcreationtoeithersideofthecursor.YoucanalsopresstheCTRLkeyoncetochangethedirectionofthewall.NoteTheFlipCommandworksonlyiftheJustificationoptionselectedfromthePROPERTIESpaletteiseitherLeftorRight.JustifyThisoptionisusedtoswitchthecursorpositiontotheright,center,andleftpointsofthewall.Whenyouchoose this option, four options will be available at the command prompt to justify the wall. ThecommandpromptforjustifyingthewallafterchoosingtheWalltoolisgivennext.Startpointor[STyle/Group/WIdth/Height/OFfset/Flip/Justify/Match/Arc]:JJustification[Left/Center/Right/Baseline]<Baseline>:Enterthejustificationoption.Startpointor[STyle/Group/WIdth/Height/OFfset/Flip/Justify/Match/Arc]:Thejustificationoptionsavailableatthepromptarediscussednext.LeftTheLeftoptionisusedtojustifythewallontheleftofthecursor.
CenterTheCenteroptionisusedtojustifythewallonthecenterofthecursor.RightTheRightoptionisusedtojustifythewallontherightofthecursor.BaselineTheBaselineoptionisusedtojustifythewallonthecenterofthebaseline.
![Page 106: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/106.jpg)
YoucanalsouseSHIFTtotogglebetweenthejustificationoptions.MatchThisoptionisusedtomatchthepropertiesofthewalltobecreatedwithanexistingwall.Onchoosingthisoption;youwillbepromptedtoselectawallwithwhichthepropertieswillbematched.Atthenextprompt,enterthepropertynamestobematched.Theoptionsavailableat thispromptareStyle,Group,Width,Height, Justify, andAll.After specifying the options, youwill be prompted to specify the startpointofthewall.Specifythestartpointandtheendpointofthewalltocreateawallhavingpropertiessimilartotheoneselectedformatching.ArcThis option is used to create awall in the shape of an arc. The command prompt for creating an arcshapedwallisgivennext.Command:WALLADDStartpointor[STyle/Group/WIdth/Height/OFfset/Flip/Justify/Match/Arc]:ArcStartpointor[STyle/Group/WIdth/Height/OFfset/Flip/Justify/Match/Line]:SpecifytheStartpointofthewallsegment.Midpointor[STyle/Group/WIdth/Height/OFfset/Flip/Justify/Match/Line]:Specify theMidpointof thewallsegment.Endpointor [STyle/Group/WIdth/Height/OFfset/Flip/Justify/Match/Line]:Specify theEndpointof thewallsegment.Midpointor[STyle/Group/WIdth/Height/OFfset/Flip/Justify/Match/Line/Undo/Close]:Specify the Mid point of thenextwallsegmentorenterClosetoclosethewallsegment.Endpointor[STyle/Group/WIdth/Height/OFfset/Flip/Justify/Match/Line/Undo/Close]:Specify the Mid point of thenextwallsegmentorenterClosetoclosethewallsegment.NoteIfthemidpointofanarcistakenintheoppositedirection,awallofinfinitelengthwillbecreated.LineThisoption isused tocreatestraightwalls.Thisoptionwillbeavailableat thecommandpromptonlywhentheArcoptionisactive.Thecommandpromptforcreatinganarcshapedwallisalreadydiscussed.UndoThisoptionisusedtoinvertthechangesmadebythepreviouscommand.UsingtheUndooption,youcaninvertthechangesmadebythewallcommandinthecurrentsession.CloseThisoptionisusedtocreateawallthatmakesaclosedboundarybyjoiningtheotherwalls.Whenyouchoosethisoption,awallconnectingthefirstandlastwallsiscreated.
![Page 107: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/107.jpg)
ORthocloseThis option is used to create two joining wall segments to make a closed boundary of walls. Thecommandpromptforcreatingawallusingthisoptionisgivennext.Command:WALLADDStartpointor[STyle/Group/WIdth/Height/OFfset/Flip/Justify/Match/Arc]:SpecifytheStartpointofthewallsegment.Endpoint or [STyle/Group/WIdth/Height/OFfset/Flip/Justify/Match/Arc]:Specify theEnd point of thewallsegment.Endpointor[STyle/Group/WIdth/Height/OFfset/Flip/Justify/Match/Arc/Undo]:SpecifytheEndpointofthewallsegment.Endpointor[STyle/Group/WIdth/Height/OFfset/Flip/Justify/Match/Arc/Undo/Close/ORthoclose]:ORthoPointonwall indirectionof close:Click on the direction inwhich youwant the twoperpendicularconnectingwallstomeet;thejoiningwallswillbecreated,refertoFigure3-6andFigure3-7.
Figure3-6Thecornerpointtobeselectedfortheperpendicularwalls
Figure3-7ThewallcreatedafterselectingthecornerpointusingtheORthocloseoptionYoucanalsochangethepropertiesofawallbyusingthePROPERTIESpalette.SelectthewallandthenenterthePRcommandatthecommandprompt;thePROPERTIESpalettewillbedisplayed,asshowninFigure3-8.Variousrolloutsavailableinthispalettearediscussednext.
![Page 108: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/108.jpg)
Figure3-8ThePROPERTIESpalettedisplayedonselectingawall
BASICRolloutTheoptionsavailableinthisrolloutareusedforbasicsettings.Therearethreeoptionsavailableinthisrolloutandtheyarediscussednext.GeneralTheoptions in this rolloutareused for specifyinggeneral settings suchas the layer,descriptionof thewall,andthesegmenttype.IntheStylePreviewareaofthisrollout,youcanchangethewallstyletypedirectly and see the preview of the wall style. You can also change the cleanup properties for theintersectingwallsbyusingtheoptionsinthisrollout.DimensionsThe options in this rollout are used to specify the height,width, and length of thewall.You can alsojustifythewallbyusingtheJustifyoptionavailableintherollout.
LocationTheoptionsavailableinthisrolloutareusedtochangetherotationangleandelevationofthewall.YoucanalsochangetheinsertionpointandtheorientationofwallbyusingtheLocationdialogboxwhichisdisplayedonchoosingtheAdditionalinformationoptionavailableinthisrollout.ADVANCEDRolloutTheoptionsavailableinthisrolloutareusedforchangingtheadvancedsettingssuchascleanups,styles,andworksheets.Theseoptionsarediscussednext.CleanupsTheoptionsinthisrolloutareusedforchangingthecleanupradiusforintersectingwalls.Youcanalso
![Page 109: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/109.jpg)
applyoverridesforthestartandendcleanupradiibyusingtheoptionsavailableinthisrollout.StyleOverridesTheoptionsinthisrolloutareusedtooverridethestartingandendingendcapstyles.YoucanalsosetthepriorityofawallwithrespecttoanintersectingwallbyusingthePriorityoverridesoptionavailableinthisrollout.WorksheetsTheoptionsinthisrolloutareusedtomodifythecross-sectionofthewall.Youcanalsospecifythestartpointandtheendpointofthemodifiersbyusingtheoptionsinthisrollout.CurtainWallThistoolisusedtocreateacurtainwall.Acurtainwallisanon-structuralwallwhichisusedtoavoidthe effectofweatheron thebuilding.Thiswall doesnot support any load in thebuilding.ThecurtainwallscreatedbyusingtheCurtainWalltoolcanbestraightorcurved.Thecommandpromptforcreatingacurtainwallisgivennext.Command:CURTAINWALLADDStartpointor[STyle/Height/Match/Arc]:Specifythestartpointofthewallsegment.End point or [STyle/Height/Match/Arc]:Specify the end point of the currentwall segment and startpointofthenextwallsegment.Endpoint or [STyle/Height/Match/Arc/Undo]:Specify the end point of the currentwall segment andstartpointofthenextwallsegment.Endpointor [STyle/Height/Match/Arc/Undo/Close/ORthoclose]:Specify theendpointof thecurrentwallsegmentandstartpointofthenextwallsegmentorenterClosetocreateaclosingwall.Theoptionsavailableatthecommandpromptarealreadydiscussed.YoucanalsousethePROPERTIESpalettetochangepropertiesofthecreatedwall.TheoptionsavailableinthePROPERTIESpaletteforacurtainwallarediscussednext.BASICRolloutThe options available in this rollout are used for basic settings.Most of the options available in thisrolloutaresameasdiscussedearlier.Restoftheoptionsarediscussednext.DimensionsTheoptionsinthisrolloutareusedtochangethebaseheight,length,startmiter,andendmiter.ADVANCEDRolloutTheoptionsavailable in thisrolloutareusedtochangetheadvancedsettings.Theoptionsavailable inthisrolloutarealreadydiscussed.CurtainWallUnitThistoolisusedtocreateaunitofcurtainwalls.Onchoosingthistool,youwillbepromptedtospecify
![Page 110: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/110.jpg)
the startpointof thewall.Specify the startpointof thewall;youwillbeprompted to specify theendpointofthewall.Specifytheendpointofthewall;youwillbepromptedtospecifytheheightofthewall.Onspecifyingtheheight,theCurtainWallUnitStylesdialogboxwillbedisplayed,asshowninFigure3-9.
Figure3-9TheCurtainWallUnitStylesdialogbox
Select a curtainwall unit style from the dialog box and choose theOK button; thewall unitwith thedefined specificationswill be created in the drawing area.Using thePROPERTIES palette, you canchangethepropertiesofacurtainwallunit.Theoptionsavailableforacurtainwallunitarethesameasdiscussedearlier.
CREATINGDOORSDoorsaremovablestructuresusedtoclosetheentranceofaroomorbuilding.ThetoolstocreateadoorareavailableintheDoordrop-downoftheBuildpanelintheHometaboftheRibbon,refertoFigure3-10. There are three tools available in the Door drop-down: Door, Opening, and Door/WindowAssembly.Thesetoolsarediscussednext.
Figure3-10TheDoordrop-downlistDoorThistoolisusedtocreatedoorsofaspecifiedprofile.Tocreateadoor,choosetheDoortoolfromtheDoor drop-down; thePROPERTIES palettewill be displayed, refer to Figure 3-11 and youwill beprompted toselectawalloragridassembly.YoucanpressENTERtocreateadoorasan individualentityoryoucanattachthedoorwithawall.Toattachadoortothewall,selectanexistingwall;youwillbeprompted toselectan insertionpoint.Select thedesiredpointon thewall; thedoorwillbecreated
![Page 111: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/111.jpg)
with the parameters specified in thePROPERTIES palette. The options available in theDimensionsrolloutofthepalettearediscussednext.
Figure3-11ThePROPERTIESpalettedisplayedonchoosingtheDoortool
StandardsizesThisdrop-downlistdisplaysvariousstandardsizescreatedbyusingtheStyleManager.YoucanchooseanyofthestandardsizesforthedoororyoucanspecifyacustomsizebyusingtheoptionsavailableinthePROPERTIESpalette.
Tip. To add an arched door, choose the Style Manager tool from the Style & Display panel intheManagetab;theStyleManagerwillbedisplayed.IntheStyleManager,createanewdoorstylewitharchshape.TheStyleManagerwillbediscussedinthelaterchapters.WidthThisoptionisusedtospecifythewidthofthedoor,refertoFigure3-12.Thisoptionisusedtocustomizeastandarddoor.Bydefault,thewidthspecifiedbyDoorstyleisdisplayedinthisfield.Youcanchangethevalueinthisfieldasperyourrequirement.
![Page 112: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/112.jpg)
HeightThisoptionisusedtospecifytheheightofthedoor,refertoFigure3-12.Thisoptionisusedtocustomizea standard door. By default, the height specified in theDoor style is displayed in this field. You canchangethevalueinthisfieldasperyourrequirement.
Figure3-12SpecificationsofanarcheddoorMeasuretoTheoptionsavailableinthisdrop-downlistareusedtospecifywhetherthewidthandheightofthedoorismeasuredfromtheinneredgeoftheframeortheouteredgeoftheframe.SwingangleThisoptionisusedtospecifythemaximumangleatwhichthedoorcanbeopened.You can change the parameters related to the location of a door by using the options available in theLocationrollout.SomeoftheoptionsavailableintheLocationrolloutofthepalettearediscussednext.OpeningPercentUsing this edit box,youcan specify theopeningpercentageof thedoor.Thisoptionwill be availablewhenyouselectthearchtypeorhalfroundtypedoor.VerticalalignmentTheoptions in thisdrop-downlistwillbeavailableonly if theselecteddoor isanchored.Using theseoptions,youcanspecifywhethertheheightofthedoorwillbemeasuredfromthethresholdofthedoororfromtheheadofthedoor.HeadHeight/ThresholdHeightTheHeadHeight orThresholdHeight option gets activated depending on the selectionmade in theVertical alignment drop-down list. Using these options, you can specify the height of door from thehead/threshold.
![Page 113: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/113.jpg)
RestoftheoptionsinthePROPERTIESpalettehavealreadybeendiscussed.OpeningThistoolisusedtocreateanopeningofaspecifiedprofileinthewall.Tocreateanopening,choosetheOpening tool from theDoordrop-down in theBuildpanelof theHome tab; youwill beprompted toselect awall or press ENTER. Select thewall onwhich youwant to create an opening; youwill bepromptedtospecifytheinsertionpoint.Clicktospecifytheinsertionpointonthewall;theopeningwillbecreated.Onselectinganopening,thePROPERTIESpalettewillbedisplayed,asshowninFigure3-13.SomeoftheoptionsavailableinthePROPERTIESpaletteareusedtochangethepropertiesofanopening.Theseoptionsarediscussednext.
Figure3-13ThePROPERTIESpalettedisplayedonselectinganopening
ShapeThisdrop-down list isavailable in theGeneral rolloutof theBasic rollout.Theoptions in thisdrop-downlistareusedtochangetheshapeoftheopening.Thereare13typesofpredefinedshapesavailableinthisdrop-downlistforcreatinganopening.YoucancustomizetheshapeofanopeningbyselectingtheCustomoptionfromthedrop-downlist.OnselectingtheCustomoption,theProfiledrop-downlistwillbedisplayedbelow theShape drop-down list.Youcancreate the selectedcustomprofilesofopeningusingthisdrop-downlist.Width
![Page 114: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/114.jpg)
ThisoptionfromtheDimensionsrolloutisusedtospecifythewidthofopening.HeightThisoptionfromtheDimensionsrolloutisusedtospecifytheheightofopening.
VerticalalignmentThis drop-down list is available in theLocation rollout. The options in this drop-down list will beavailableonlyiftheselectedopeningisanchored.Usingtheseoptions,youcanspecifywhethertheheightofopeningwillbemeasuredfromthesillleveloftheopeningortheheadoftheopening.Door/WindowAssemblyThistoolisusedtocreateadoororwindowassembly.Theassemblycontainsrequirednumberofdoors,windows,orboth.Tocreateadoor/windowassembly,choosetheDoor/WindowAssemblytoolfromtheDoordrop-downavailableintheBuildpaneloftheHometab;youwillbepromptedtoselectawall,agridassembly,orpressENTER.Selectawall;youwillbeprompted tospecify the insertionpoint fordoor/windowassembly.Clickatthedesiredpointonthewall;ananchoreddoor/windowassemblywillbecreated.TheoptionsavailableinthePROPERTIESpaletteforadoor/windowassemblyaresameasdiscussedearlier.CREATINGWINDOWWindowsareopeningsinawallordoortofacilitatethepassagetolight.Ifnotclosed,theyalsoallowairandsoundtopassthroughthewallordoor.InAutoCADMEP,windowsarecreatedbyusingthetoolsavailableintheWindowdrop-down.Thisdrop-downlistisavailableintheBuildpaneloftheHometab.Thetoolsavailableinthisdrop-downlistarediscussednext.WindowThis tool isused tocreateastandardwindow.Tocreateawindow,choose theWindow tool from theWindowdrop-downavailableintheBuildpaneloftheHometab;youwillbepromptedtoselectawall,agridassembly,orpressENTER.Selectawall;youwillbepromptedtospecifyaninsertionpoint.Clickonthewalltospecifythepoint;thewindowwillbecreatedatthespecifiedpoint.Clickonthewalltocreate more windows or press ENTER to exit the command. You can set the opening percentage ofwindowbyusingtheOpeningpercent fieldavailableinthePROPERTIESpalette.TheotheroptionsavailableinthePROPERTIESpalettehavealreadybeendiscussed.CornerWindowThistoolisusedtocreateawindowatthepointwheretwowallsmeet.Thiswindowcanonlybecreatedonacorneredwall.Tocreateacornerwindow,choosetheCornerWindowtoolfromtheWindowdrop-down available in the Build panel; you will be prompted to select a wall. Select a wall which isconnectedtotheotherwallatthecorner;youwillbepromptedtospecifytheinsertionpoint.ClickonthewalltoplacethewindowandpressENTERtoexitthecommand.Therearethreeconditionsforcreatingacornerwindow.Theyare:1.Thewallsmeetingtocreateacornermustbein“L”shape.
![Page 115: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/115.jpg)
2.Walljointsmustbecreatedbylinearwallsonly.3.Walljointsmustbecleanedproperly.VariousoptionsavailableintheDimensionsrolloutofthePROPERTIESpalettearediscussednext.StandardsizesThe options in this drop-down list are used to change the standard size of the corner window. ThestandardsizesaregeneratedbyusingtheStyleManager.Thepatternofsizedisplayedinthisdrop-downlistisgivennext.(Width1xWidth2)xHeightHereWidth1andWidth2representwidthofthewindowintwodifferentdirections,andHeightistheheightofwindowfrombottomedgetotopedge.WidthThisfieldshowsthetotalwidthofthewindow.ThisisthesumoftheWidth1andWidth2values.Youcannotchangethevalueofthisfield.Width1Thiseditboxisusedtochangethevalueofthewidthinthefirstdirection.Whenyouclickonthiseditbox,abuttonwillbedisplayedontherightoftheeditbox.Onchoosingthisbutton,youcanspecifythevalueofwidthbyselectingtwopointsinthedrawing.ThevaluechangedinthiseditboxisalsoreflectedintheWidthfieldandtheStandardsizesdrop-downlist.Width2Thiseditboxisused tochangethevalueofwidth in theseconddirection.Whenyouclickon thiseditbox,abuttonwillbedisplayedontherightoftheeditbox.Onchoosingthisbutton,youcanspecifythevalueofwidthbyselectingtwopointsinthedrawing.ThevaluechangedinthiseditboxisalsoreflectedintheWidthfieldandtheStandardsizesdrop-downlist.HeightThiseditboxisusedtochangethevalueofheightofthewindow.MeasuretoTheoptionsavailable in thisdrop-down listareused tospecifywhether thevalueofwidthandheightwillbemeasuredfrominsideoftheframeoroutsideoftheframe.OpeningmeasureTheoptionsavailableinthisdrop-downlistareusedtospecifythewidthmeasurementpattern.Therearethreeoptionsavailable in thisdrop-down list:Insideofopening,Outsideof opening, andCenter ofopening.Insideofopening
![Page 116: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/116.jpg)
Whenyouchoosethisoption,thewidthofthefirstsideofcornerwindowismeasuredfromtheinneredgeoftheothersideofthecornerwindow.OutsideofopeningWhenyouchoosethisoption,thewidthofthefirstsideofcornerwindowismeasuredfromtheouteredgeoftheothersideofthecornerwindow.CenterofopeningWhenyouchoosethisoption,thewidthoffirstsideofcornerwindowismeasuredfromthecenteroftheedgeofothersideofthecornerwindow.OpeningpercentUsingthiseditbox,youcanspecifytheopeningpercentageofthewindow.CREATINGROOFSANDSLABSThetoolstocreateroofsandslabsareavailableintheRoofSlabdrop-down,refertoFigure3-14.Thetoolsinthisdrop-downareRoofSlab,Roof,andSlab.Thesetoolsarediscussednext.
Figure3-14TheRoofSlabdrop-down
RoofSlabThistoolisusedtocreateasegmentofroof.Thissegmentdoesnothaveadirectconnectionwithotherentities.Tocreatearoofslab,choosetheRoofSlabtoolfromtheRoofSlabdrop-downavailableintheBuild panel of theHome tab; you will be prompted to specify the start point of the roof slab. Thecommandsequenceforcreatingaroofslabisgivennext.Specifystartpointor[STyle/MOde/Height/Thickness/SLope/OVerhang/Justify/MAtch]:SpecifytheStartpointoftheroofslab.Specifynextpointor[STyle/MOde/Height/Thickness/SLope/OVerhang/Justify/MAtch]:Specify thenextpointofthewallsegment.Specify next point or [STyle/MOde/Height/Thickness/SLope/OVerhang/Justify/MAtch/Undo/Orthoclose]:Specifythenextpointofthewallsegment.Specify next point or [STyle/MOde/Height/Thickness/SLope/OVerhang/Justify/MAtch/Undo/Orthoclose/Close]:SpecifythenextpointofthewallsegmentorENTERClosetoclosetheboundary.Specify next point or [STyle/MOde/Height/Thickness/SLope/OVerhang/Justify/MAtch/Undo/Orthoclose/Close]:SpecifythenextpointofthewallsegmentorENTERClosetoclosetheboundary.
![Page 117: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/117.jpg)
After selecting a roof slab, the PROPERTIES palette will be displayed, as shown in Figure 3-15.VariousoptionsavailableintheDimensionsrolloutofthispalettearediscussednext.
Figure3-15ThePROPERTIESpalettedisplayedonselectingaroofslab
ThicknessThiseditboxisusedtospecifythethicknessoftheroofslab.Whenyouclickonthiseditbox,abuttonisdisplayedontherightofit.Onchoosingthisbutton,youcanspecifythevalueofthicknessbyselectingtwopoints.VerticaloffsetThiseditboxisusedtospecifytheoffsetvalueoftheslabfromtheoriginalpositioninverticaldirection.Youcanalsospecifytheoffsetvaluebyselectingtwopoints.HorizontaloffsetThis edit box is used to specify the offset value of slab from the original position in the horizontaldirection.Youcanalsospecifytheoffsetvaluebyselectingthetwopoints.EdgesThisbutton isavailablebelow theHorizontaloffset editbox.Whenyouchoose thisbutton, theRoof
![Page 118: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/118.jpg)
SlabEdgesdialogboxwillbedisplayed,asshowninFigure3-16.Also,apreviewofthechangesmadein the edges are displayed in the Preview area on the right in the dialog box. You can change theparameterssuchasoverhangvalue,edgestyle,andedgecuttypebyusingthetabledisplayedontheleftinthedialogbox.Variouscolumnsavailableinthistablearediscussednext.
Figure3-16TheRoofSlabEdgesdialogbox
EdgeAlledgesof the selected roof slabaredisplayed in thiscolumnby their sequencenumbers.Whenyouselectanysequencenumber,itsrespectiveedgeishighlightedinthePreviewarea.A-OverhangUsingthefieldsavailableinthiscolumn,youcanchangetheoverhangvalue.Overhangistheareaofslabwhichisoutofthesupportboundary.EdgeStyleBy default, the values in this column are set toNONE.You can choose any predefined style for slabedges.YoucandefineanEdgeStylebyusingtheRoofSlabEdgeStylenodeintheStyleManager.
B-EdgeCutInthiscolumn,edgecutmethodsaredisplayed.Therearetwooptionsforedgecut:SquareandPlumb.TheSquareoption isused tocut theedgeperpendicular to the roof slabwhereas thePlumb option isusedtocuttheedgeperpendiculartotheground.
![Page 119: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/119.jpg)
C-AngleInthiscolumn,youcanspecifyananglefortheedge.Ifyouenterapositivevalue,thebottomedgewillextend.Ifanegativevalueisentered,thenthetopedgewillextend.RiseThiseditboxisusedtospecifythevalueofriseforaroofslab.Riseistheslopedifferencebetweenthestartandendedgesoftheslopeofroofslabalongverticaldirection.Youcanalsospecifythevalueofrisebyselectingtwopoints.Todoso,choosethebuttondisplayedattherightofthiseditbox;youwillbepromptedtoselectpoints.Selectthepointstospecifytherisevalue.RunThisfieldisusedtodisplaythevalueofrunforaroofslab.Runisthehorizontalspanoftheslope.Thevalueinthisfieldisgenerallyfixed.SlopeThis edit box is used to specify the valueof slope for a roof slab.Thevalueof slope is specified indegrees.AnychangeinthevaluespecifiedintheRiseorRuneditboxisreflectedintheSlopeeditbox.HoldfasciaelevationTheoptionsinthisdrop-downlistareusedtomanagethefasciaofroof.Therearethreeoptionsavailableinthisdrop-downlist:No,Byadjustingoverhang,andByadjustingbaselineheight.NoWhenyouchoosethisoption,thealignmentoffasciaisignored.ByadjustingoverhangWhenyouchoosethisoption,thefasciaisalignedwiththeroofslabbyadjustingtheoverhang.ByadjustingbaselineheightWhenyouchoosethisoption,thefasciaisalignedwiththeroofslabbyadjustingthebaselineheight.PivotPointXThiseditboxisusedtospecifythepositionofpivotpointofroofslabinXdirection.YoucancalculatethevalueofpositioninXdirectionbyusingtheQuickCalcbuttonavailableontherightoftheeditbox.Youcanalsouse thePickPoint tool to specify thepivotpoint locationwhich isdiscussed in thenextsection.PivotPointYThiseditboxisusedtospecifythepositionofpivotpointofroofslabinYdirection.Alternatively,youcanspecifythepositionofpointbyusingthePickPointtoolavailableontherightoftheeditbox.YoucanalsousetheQuickCalcbuttonasdiscussedearlier.PivotPointZThiseditboxisusedtospecifythepositionofpivotpointofroofslabinZdirection.Alternatively,you
![Page 120: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/120.jpg)
canspecifythepositionofpointbyusingthePickPointtoolavailableontherightoftheeditbox.YoucanalsousetheQuickCalcbuttonasdiscussedearlier.RoofThistoolisusedtocreateamulti-peakedroof.Tocreateamulti-peakedroof,invoketheRooftoolfromtheRoofSlabdrop-downavailableintheBuildpaneloftheHometab;youwillbepromptedtospecifythe roof points. Specify the roof points; the roof will be created with the specified roof points. ThePROPERTIESpaletteonselectingaroofwillbedisplayed,asshowninFigure3-17.
Figure3-17ThePROPERTIESpalettedisplayedonselectingaroof
TheoptionsavailableintheLowerSloperolloutofthePROPERTIESpalettearediscussednext.TheoptionsavailableintheGeneral,Dimensions,andLocationrolloutsaresameasdiscussedearlier.TheoptionsavailableintheLowerSloperolloutarediscussednext.PlateheightThiseditboxisusedtospecifytheheightofthebasepointofrooffromtheground.Youcanalsospecifytheplateheightbyusingtwopoints.Inthiscase,youneedtochoosethePickPointbuttonavailableontherightoftheeditbox.RiseThiseditboxisusedtospecifythevalueofriseforaroof.Riseisthedifferenceinstartandendedgesoftheslopeofroofalongverticaldirection.Youcanalsospecifythevalueofrisebyselectingtwopoints.Todoso,choosethebuttondisplayedattherightofthiseditbox;youwillbepromptedtoselectpoints.Selectanytwopointsonthescreentospecifytherisevalue.
![Page 121: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/121.jpg)
RunThisfieldisusedtodisplaythevalueofrunforaroof.Runisthehorizontalspanoftheslope.Thevalueinthisfieldisgenerallyfixed.SlopeThiseditboxisusedtospecifythevalueofslopeforaroof.Thevalueofslopeisspecifiedindegrees.AnychangeinthevaluespecifiedintheRiseeditboxorRuneditboxisreflectedintheSlopeeditbox.Youcanalsospecifytheplateheight,rise,andslopevaluefortheupperslopeoftheroof.Tospecifythevaluesfortheupperslope,youneedtoselecttheDoubleslopeoptionfromtheShapedrop-downlistintheDimensions rollout. On doing so, theUpper Slope rollout will be displayed. The options in thisrolloutaresimilartotheoptionsdiscussedforLowerSloperollout.SlabThis tool isused tocreateflat roofsor floors.Theroofsor floorscreatedbyusing this toolare in theformofasegment.Thissegmentdoesnothaveadirectconnectionwithotherentities.Tocreateaslab,choosetheSlab toolfromtheRoofSlabdrop-downavailableintheBuildpanelof theHome tab;youwillbepromptedtospecifythestartpointoftheslab.Thecommandpromptforcreatingaslabisgivennext.Specifystartpointor[STyle/MOde/Height/Thickness/SLope/OVerhang/Justify/MAtch]:SpecifytheStartpointoftheroofslab.Specifynextpointor[STyle/MOde/Height/Thickness/SLope/OVerhang/Justify/MAtch]:Specify thenextpointofthewallsegment.Specify next point or [STyle/MOde/Height/Thickness/SLope/OVerhang/Justify/MAtch/Undo/Orthoclose]:Specifythenextpointofthewallsegment.Specify next point or [STyle/MOde/Height/Thickness/SLope/OVerhang/Justify/MAtch/Undo/Orthoclose/Close]:Specifythenextpointofthewallsegment.Specify next point or [STyle/MOde/Height/Thickness/SLope/OVerhang/Justify/MAtch/Undo/Orthoclose/Close]:CSpecifystartpointor[STyle/MOde/Height/Thickness/SLope/OVerhang/Justify/MAtch/Undo]: Afterselectingaslab,thePROPERTIESpaletteisdisplayed,asshowninFigure3-18.Theoptionsinthepalettehavealreadybeendiscussed.
![Page 122: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/122.jpg)
Figure3-18ThePROPERTIESpalettedisplayedonselectingaslab
CREATINGSTAIRSANDRAILINGSStairsarethestructuresthatconnectonefloortoanother,thusenablingeasymovement.Railingsarethestructures which act as support or barrier on the stairs. The options to create stairs and railings areavailableintheStairdrop-down.Theseoptionsarediscussednext.StairThis tool isusedtocreaterectangularstairs.Therearevariousshapesofstairssuchasstraight,multi-landing, spiral, L-shaped, and U-shaped. While going on a curved path, the stairs can have curvedlanding.Insuchcases,theedgesofstairscanalsobecurved.Tocreateastair,choosetheStairtoolfromtheStairdrop-downavailableintheBuildpaneloftheHome tab;youwillbepromptedtospecifythestartpointofthestairs.Specifyapointasthestartpointofthestairs;youwillbepromptedtospecifytheendpointofthestairs.Specifyapointastheendpointtocompletethestairs.Whilespecifyingtheendpoint,youcanspecifythelandingatdesiredpositionbutthispositionmustbewithinthespecifiedlimits.The limitofa stair iscountedby thevaluespecified in theRisercount editbox.ThePROPERTIESpalette after choosing the Stair tool is displayed, as shown in Figure 3-19. Some important optionsavailableintheGeneralrolloutofthepaletteonchoosingthistoolarediscussednext.
ShapeTheoptionsavailable in thisdrop-down listareused tospecify theshapeof thestairs.Thereare four
![Page 123: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/123.jpg)
optionsavailable in thisdrop-downlist;U-shaped,Multi-landing,Spiral,andStraight.Theseoptionsarediscussednext.
Figure3-19ThePROPERTIESpalettedisplayedonchoosingtheStairtool
U-shapedUsingthisoption,youcancreateU-shapedstairs,refertoFigure3-20.Inthistypeofstairs,thetworowsofstairsrunparallelandmeetattheendpointsbyahalf-landing.Multi-landingUsingthisoption,youcancreatestairshavingmultiplelandings,refertoFigure3-20.Youcanprovidequarterlandingorhalflanding.Thislandingcanbeflatorcanhaveaturn.SpiralUsingthisoption,youcancreatestairsintheshapeofspiral,refertoFigure3-20.Inthistypeofstairs,the steps of stair revolve about a common center point from bottom to top. Spiral stairs can be inclockwisedirectionorcounter-clockwisedirection.StraightUsingthisoption,youcancreatestraightstairs,refertoFigure3-20.Inthistypeofstairs,thestepsarecreatedonastraightpaththatisinclinedtothehorizontalplane.TurntypeThisdrop-downlistisdisplayedonlywhenU-shapedorMulti-landingisselectedfromtheShapedrop-downlist.Theoptionsavailableinthisdrop-downlistareusedtodefinethetypeoflandingorturningfor
![Page 124: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/124.jpg)
theU-shapedormulti-landingstairs.Therearefouroptionsavailable in thisdrop-downlistwhicharediscussednext.
1/2landingUsingthisoption,youcancreatetheU-shapedormulti-landingstairshavingaflatlandingofuser-definedlength,refertoFigure3-21.1/2turnUsing thisoption,youcancreate theU-shapedormulti-landing stairshaving steps at the turn, refer toFigure3-21.Notethat theremustbeat least threesegments inthestairsanddirectionof turnofall thesegmentsmustbethesame.1/4landingThisoptionisavailableonlywhenMulti-landingisselectedfromtheShapedrop-downlist.Whenyouselect this option, thewidth of landing created at turnwill be equal to thewidth of the stair, refer toFigure3-21.Generally,thesetypeofstairshavetwoormorestepsjoinedtothesquarelanding.
![Page 125: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/125.jpg)
![Page 126: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/126.jpg)
Figure3-20VarioustypeofstairsavailableinAutoCADMEP
1/4turnThisoptionisavailableonlywhenMulti-landingisselectedfromtheShapedrop-downlist.Whenyouselectthisoption,theresultingstairswillhavestepsattheturn,refertoFigure3-21.Thesestairscanturninbothdirections.
Figure3-21Stairswithdifferentturningtypesselected
WinderStyleThisdrop-downlist isavailableonlywhen1/2turnor1/4turn isselectedfromtheTurntypedrop-downlist.ThereisasingletypeofwinderstyleavailableinAutoCADMEP:Balanced.TheBalancedwinderstyleisusedtodistributestepsofstairsevenlythroughouttherun.
![Page 127: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/127.jpg)
HorizontalOrientationThisdrop-downlistisdisplayedonlywhenU-shapedorSpiral isselectedfromtheShapedrop-downlist.Theoptionsavailableinthisdrop-downlistareusedtodefinethedirectionofturnofstairs.Therearetwooptionsavailableinthisdrop-downlist:ClockwiseandCounterclockwise.Usingtheseoptions,youcanselecttheclockwiseorcounterclockwisedirectionofturnofthestairs.VerticalOrientationTheoptionsinthisdrop-downlistareusedtospecifytheverticaldirectionofthestairs.Therearetwooptions available in this drop-down list:Up andDown.TheUp option is selectedwhen you need tocreatestairsfromlowerfloortohigherfloor.TheDownoptionisselectedwhenyouneedtocreatestairsfromhigherfloortolowerfloor.TheoptionsintheGeneralrolloutarealsousedtocontroltheshapeofstairs.Someimportanttermsusedfor defining the size of stairs are displayed in Figure 3-22. The options available in theDimensionsrolloutofthepaletteareusedtocontrolthesizeofstairs.Theseoptionsarediscussednext.
Figure3-22Someimportanttermsfordefiningthesizeofstairs
WidthThiseditboxisusedtospecifythewidthofastep.Youcanalsospecifythewidthofastepbyusingtwopoints.Todoso,clickonthebuttondisplayedontherightoftheeditbox;youwillbepromptedtoselectstartpointforwidthcalculation.Selectastartpoint;youwillbepromptedtoselectanendpointforwidthcalculation.Selectapoint;thewidthvalueforthespecifiedpointswillbereflectedintheeditbox.HeightThiseditboxisusedtospecifytotalheightofthestairs.Youcanalsospecifythetotalheightofstairsby
![Page 128: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/128.jpg)
usingtwopoints.Themethodofusingthepointsisalreadydiscussed.
JustifyTheoptionsinthisdrop-downlistareusedtochangethejustificationofstairs.Therearethreeoptionsavailableinthisdrop-downlist:Left,Right,andCenter.TheseoptionschangetoInside,Outside,andCenteriftheoptionselectedfromtheShapedrop-downlistiseitherU-shapedorSpiral.
TerminatewithTheoptionsinthisdrop-downlistareusedtochangethejustificationofstairs.Therearethreeoptionsavailableinthisdrop-downlist:Riser,Tread,andLanding.WhenyouselecttheRiseroption,thestairsendwithariser.WhenyouselecttheTreadoption,thestairsendwithatread.IftheLandingoptionisselected,thestairsendwithalanding.Figure3-23showstheoutputofvariousoptionsselectedfromtheTerminatewithdrop-downlist.
![Page 129: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/129.jpg)
Figure3-23TheoutputofvariousoptionsselectedfromtheTerminatewithdrop-downlist
FlightlengthTheoptionsinthisdrop-downlistareusedtocontrolthelengthofonesegmentofastaircase.Therearetwooptionsavailableinthisdrop-downlist:DistanceandTreadlength.UsingtheDistanceoption,youcanspecify theflight lengthbyspecifying totaldistancevalue.Using theTreadlength option,youcanspecifytheflightlengthbyspecifyingthelengthofonetread.Thetotalflightlengthiscalculatedonthebasisofnumberoftreadsinthestaircase.
CalculationrulesWhenyouclickon theTread buttondisplayed in this field, theCalculationRules dialog boxwill bedisplayed,asshowninFigure3-24.Bydefault,theD-Treadeditboxisactivated.Onchangingthevalueinthiseditbox,thevalueintheothereditboxesinthisdialogboxwillchangeaccordingly.Tochangevaluesinothereditboxesmanually,youneedto locktheD-Treadeditbox.Todoso,choose the lockbutton; theCalculationRules dialog boxwill be displayed, as shown in Figure 3-25. Now, you canchangethevalueofanyoftheeditboxinthedialogboxbychoosingthebuttonadjacenttotherespectiveeditbox.Inthisdialogbox,youcanmanuallydefinethevalueintwoeditboxessimultaneously.ButifyouchoosetheC-Risereditboxfordefiningthevalueofrisermanually,thentheotherthreeeditboxeswillbelocked.
![Page 130: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/130.jpg)
Figure3-24TheCalculationRulesdialogbox
The value of the edit boxes that are set to change manually can also be changed directly using thePROPERTIESpalette.NotethatinthePROPERTIESpaletteonlythoseeditboxeswillbeactivethataresettochangemanuallyintheCalculationRulesdialogbox.
Figure3-25TheCalculationRulesdialogboxdisplayedafterlockingtheeditboxes
Someof theoptions in thePROPERTIESpalettearedisplayedonlywhenSpiral is selected from theShapedrop-downlistofthepalette.Theseoptionsarediscussednext.
SpecifyonscreenThisoptionwillbeavailableonlywhenSpiralisselectedfromtheShapedrop-downlist.Theoptionsinthisdrop-down listareused tospecifywhether thesecondpoint specifies the radiusalong thestartingdirectionornot.Therearetwooptionsavailableinthisdrop-downlist:YesandNo.WhenyouselectYesfromthisdrop-downlist,thenyoucanspecifytheradiusofstairsonthescreenwhilecreatingthestairs.RadiusThiseditboxisavailableonlywhenyouselecttheNooptionfromtheSpecifyonscreendrop-downlist.Usingthiseditbox,youcanspecifythevalueofradiusforthespiralstairs.ArcconstraintTheoptionsinthisdrop-downlistareusedtoconstrainthearcofthespiralstairs.Therearethreeoptionsavailableinthisdrop-downlist:Free,Totaldegrees,andDegreespertread.WhentheFreeoptionisselected fromthisdrop-down list, thestair run isunconstrained.WhenTotaldegrees is selected fromthisdrop-downlist,youcanspecifythetotalangleofarcaroundwhichthestairsarecreated.WhenyouselecttheDegreespertreadoption,youcanspecifytheangleofeachtreadwithrespecttotheadjacentinthestairs.ArcangleThiseditboxisactiveonlywhentheTotaldegreesortheDegreespertreadoptionisselectedfromthe
![Page 131: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/131.jpg)
Arcconstraint drop-down list.Using this edit box, you can specify thevalueof arc angle.ThevaluespecifiedinthiseditboxislinkedtotheoptionselectedintheArcconstraintdrop-downlist.IfyouhaveselectedtheTotaldegreesoptionfromtheArcconstraintdrop-downlist,thenthevaluespecifiedintheArcangleeditboxisapplicablefortotaldegreeofthespiralstairs.IftheDegreespertreadisselectedfromtheArcconstraintdrop-downlist,theanglevaluespecifiedintheArcangleeditboxisapplicableforeachtread.Other options in theDimensions rollout have already been discussed. Some of the important optionsavailableintheAdvancedrolloutofthePROPERTIESpalettearediscussednext.TopoffsetThiseditbox is available in theFloorSettings rollout.This edit box is used to specify the value forthicknessoftheflooratthetopofthestairs.BottomoffsetThiseditboxisalsoavailableintheFloorSettingsrolloutandisusedtospecifythevalueofthicknessoftheflooratthebottomofthestairs.MinimumlimittypeThisdrop-downlist isavailable in theFlightHeight rollout.Using theoptionsavailable in thisdrop-downlist,youcanchangetheminimumlimitfortheheightofflight.Therearethreeoptionsavailableinthisdrop-downlist:NONE,Risers,andHeight.Bydefault,theNONEoptionisselectedinthisdrop-downlist.Asaresult,nolimitissetforheightorrisersofthestairs.YoucanspecifytheminimumlimitofrisersbyselectingtheRisersoptionfromthedrop-downlist.YoucanalsospecifytheminimumheightofstairsbyusingtheHeightoptionfromthisdrop-downlist.MinimumRisersThiseditboxisavailableintheFlightHeightrolloutonlywhentheRisersoptionisselectedfromtheMinimumlimittypedrop-downlist.Youcanspecifytheminimumvalueforheightoftheriserbyusingthiseditbox.MinimumHeightThis edit box is available in theFlightHeight rollout onlywhen theHeight option is selected in theMinimumlimittypedrop-downlist.Youcanspecifytheminimumvalueforheightofthestairsbyusingthiseditbox.MaximumlimittypeUsing theoptionsavailable in thisdrop-down list,youcanchange themaximumlimit for theheightofflight.Therearethreeoptionsavailableinthisdrop-downlist:NONE,Risers,andHeight.Bydefault,theNONEoptionisselectedinthisdrop-downlist.Asaresult,nolimitissetforheightorrisersofthestairs.Youcanspecify themaximumlimitof risersbyselecting theRisers option from thedrop-downlist.YoucanalsospecifythemaximumheightofstairsbyusingtheHeightoptionfromthisdrop-downlist.MaximumRisersThiseditboxisavailableintheFlightHeightrolloutonlywhentheRisersoptionisselectedfromthe
![Page 132: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/132.jpg)
Maximumlimittypedrop-downlist.Youcanspecifythemaximumvalueforheightoftheriserbyusingthiseditbox.MaximumHeightThiseditboxisavailableintheFlightHeightrolloutonlywhentheHeightoptionisselectedfromtheMaximumlimittypedrop-downlist.Youcanspecifythemaximumvalueforheightforthestairsbyusingthiseditbox.HeadroomheightThiseditboxisavailableintheInterferencerollout.Thiseditboxisusedtospecifytheheightofceilingaroundthestairsopeningfromthetread.Thisheightisrequiredsothatpeopledonotcollidewiththeroofwhilegoingthroughthestairs.LeftclearanceThis edit box will be available in the Interference rollout only when Straight orMulti-landing isselectedfromtheShapedrop-downlist.Thiseditbox isused tospecify theclearancevalueforstairsfromtheleftedgeoftheopeningintheroof.RightclearanceThis edit box will be available in the Interference rollout only when Straight orMulti-landing isselectedfromtheShapedrop-downlist.Thiseditbox isused tospecify theclearancevalueforstairsfromtherightedgeoftheopeningintheroof.InsideclearanceThiseditboxwillbeavailableintheInterferencerolloutonlywhenSpiralorU-shaped isselectedintheShapedrop-downlist.Thiseditboxisusedtospecifytheclearancevalueforstairsfromtheinneredgeoftheopeningintheroof.OutsideclearanceThiseditboxwillbeavailableintheInterferencerolloutonlywhenSpiralorU-shaped isselectedintheShapedrop-downlist.Thiseditboxisusedtospecifytheclearancevalueforstairsfromtheouteredgeoftheopeningintheroof.ComponentThisoptionisavailableintheWorksheetrollout.Itisusedtoedittheparametersforstairs.Whenyouchoosethisoption, theStairComponentsdialogboxwillbedisplayed,asshowninFigure3-26.Theoptionsavailableinthisdialogboxarediscussednext.
![Page 133: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/133.jpg)
Figure3-26TheStairComponentsdialogboxNotethatyouneedtoselecttheAllowEachStairtoVarycheckboxbychangingtheoptionsinthestylemanagerbyselectingthesuitableoptions.TreadThischeckboxisavailableintheFlightDimensionsarea.Thischeckboxisusedtoenablechangeinthevalueoftreadthickness.RiserThischeckboxisavailableintheFlightDimensionsarea.Thischeckboxisusedtoenablechangeinthevalueofriserthickness.A-TreadThicknessThiseditboxisactivatedonlywhentheTreadcheckboxisselected.Usingthiseditbox,youcanspecifythe value for tread thickness. On specifying a value in this edit box, an annotated preview of all therelatedparameterswillbedisplayedintheleftarea.
B-RiserThicknessThiseditboxisactiveonlywhentheRisercheckboxisselected.Usingthiseditbox,youcanspecifythevalueforriserthickness.Onspecifyingavalueinthiseditbox,anannotatedpreviewofall therelatedparameterswillbedisplayedintheleftarea.C-NosingLengthThiseditboxisusedtospecifythelengthforextendedportionoftreadovertheriser.SlopingRiserSelectthischeckboxifyouwanttocreateriserwithaslope.
![Page 134: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/134.jpg)
D-LandingThicknessThiseditboxisavailableintheLandingDimensionsarea.Thiseditboxisusedtospecifythevalueforthicknessofthelanding.E-AdditionalWidthThiseditboxisavailableintheLandingDimensionsarea.Thiseditboxisusedtospecifythevalueforadditionalwidthoflanding.ResettoStyleValuesThisoptionisusedtoresetvaluesofalltheparameterstotheiroriginalvalues.Thisbuttonisavailableatthebottomofthedialogbox.LandingextensionsThistoolisavailableintheWorksheetrollout.Thistoolisusedtoedittheparametersforstairsrelatedtolandingextensions.Whenyouchoosethistool,theLandingExtensionsdialogboxwillbedisplayed,asshowninFigure3-27.Theoptionsavailableinthisdialogboxarediscussednext.
Figure3-27TheLandingExtensionsdialogbox
NoteYoucanedittheparametersinthisdialogboxonlywhenyouhaveselectedtheAllowEachStairtoVarycheckboxfromtheLandingExtensionstaboftheStairStylesdialogboxintheStyleManager.TheStyleManagerisdisplayedonchoosingtheStyleManagertoolfromtheStyle&DisplaypanelintheManagetaboftheRibbon.A-DistancetoFirstTreadDOWNThis edit box is used to specify the value of extension of the tread attached to the lower riser. By
![Page 135: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/135.jpg)
specifyingthisvalue,youcanextendthelandinguptodesireddistancetowardslowerriser.AddTreadDepthSelectthischeckboxifyouwanttoaddtreaddepthtothevaluespecifiedintheDistancetoFirstTreadDOWNeditbox.B-DistancetoFirstTreadUPThis edit box is used to specify the value for extension of the tread attached to the higher riser. Byspecifyingthisvalue,youcanextendthelandinguptodesireddistancetowardshigherriser.AddTreadDepthSelectthischeckboxifyouwanttoaddtreaddepthtothevaluespecifiedintheDistancetoFirstTreadUPeditbox.ExtendLandingstoPreventRisersandTreadsSittingunderLandingsThischeckboxisavailablebelowthepreviewarea.Selectthischeckboxifyouwanttocreatelandingatthe level of the adjacent riser and tread. If you clear this checkbox, youwill get flush or rectangularlandings.ExtendLandingstoMergeFlightStringerswithLandingStringersThischeckboxisavailableintheStringerResolutionareaof thedialogbox.Select thischeckboxtoextendthelandingssothatthelandingstringersmergewiththeflightstringer.RailingThis tool isavailable in theStairdrop-downof theBuildpanel in theHome tab.This tool isused tocreateastand-alonerailingaswellasa railingattached tostairsorsomeobjects.Tocreatea railing,choosetheRailingtoolfromtheStairdrop-down;youwillbepromptedtospecifythestartpointoftherailing. Select a point as the start point; youwill be prompted to specify the end point of the railing.Selectapointastheendpoint;youwillbepromptedtospecifytheendpointagain.Youcanspecifyanend point for the next segment or you can press ENTER to exit the command. Figure 3-28 shows anannotatedrailingcreatedwithguardrail,handrail,andbottomrail.Figure3-29showsthePROPERTIESpalettedisplayedonselectingarailing.
![Page 136: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/136.jpg)
Figure3-28Anannotatedrailing
Figure3-29ThePROPERTIESpalettedisplayedonselectingarailingSome of the important options available in theDimension rollout of the PROPERTIES palette arediscussednext.RaillocationsWhenyouselectthisoption,theRailLocationsdialogboxwillbedisplayed,asshowninFigure3-30.
![Page 137: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/137.jpg)
Variousoptionsavailableinthisdialogboxarediscussednext.
Figure3-30TheRailLocationsdialogbox
NoteTheoptionsinthisdialogboxcanbeeditedonlywhentheAllowEachRailingtoVarycheckboxisselectedfromtheRailLocationstabofRailingStylesoptionintheStyleManagerdialogbox.
GuardrailWhenyouselectthischeckbox,theeditboxesavailablenexttothecheckboxgetactivated.Usingtheseeditboxes,youcanspecifyhorizontalheight,slopingheight,andoffsetvalueofguardrailfromthepost.YoucanalsospecifythesideofoffsetbyusingtheoptionsavailableintheSideforOffsetdrop-downlist.
HandrailWhenyouselectthischeckbox,theeditboxesavailablenexttothecheckboxgetactivated.Usingtheseeditboxes,youcanspecifyhorizontalheight,slopingheight,andoffsetvalueofhandrailfromthepost.YoucanalsospecifythesideofoffsetbyusingtheoptionsavailableintheSideforOffsetdrop-downlist.BottomrailWhenyouselectthischeckbox,theeditboxesavailablenexttothecheckboxgetactivated.Usingtheseeditboxes,youcanspecifyhorizontalheight,slopingheight,andoffsetvalueforbottomrailfromthepost.YoucanalsospecifythesideofoffsetbyusingtheoptionsavailableintheSideforOffsetdrop-downlist.Whenyou select theBottomrail check box, then theNumberofRails andSpacing ofRails editboxesgetenabled.UsingtheNumberofRailseditbox,youcanspecifythenumberofrailstobecreatedfromthebottom.UsingtheSpacingofRailseditbox,youcanspecifythevalueofspacingbetweentwosuccessivebottomrails.
![Page 138: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/138.jpg)
PostlocationsWhenyouchoosethistool,thePostLocationsdialogboxwillbedisplayed,asshowninFigure3-31.Theoptionsavailableinthisdialogboxarediscussednext.
Figure3-31ThePostLocationsdialogbox
NoteTheoptionsinthisdialogboxcanbeeditedonlywhentheAllowEachRailingtoVarycheckboxisselectedfromthePostLocationstabofRailingStylesintheStyleManager.FixedPostsThischeckboxisusedtoenabletheeditboxesthatareusedtomodifythevalueofextensionofthepost.Therearetwoeditboxestochangethevalueofextension:ExtensionofALLPostsfromTopRailingandExtensionofALLPostsfromFloorLevel.TheExtensionofAllPostsfromTopRailingeditboxisusedtospecifythevalueofpostaboveorbelowthetoprailing.TheExtensionofALLPostsfromFloorLevelisusedtospecifytheheightofallpostsfromthefloor.FixedPostsatRailingCornersThischeckboxisusedtoincludethepostspresentattherailingcorners.DynamicPostsWhenyouselectthischeckbox,theMaximumCentertoCenterSpacingeditboxisenabled.Thiseditboxisusedtomodifythedistancebetweentwosuccessivedynamicposts.Specifythevaluefordistancebetween the dynamic posts in the edit box; the valuewill be taken as themaximum limit of distancebetweenthetwosuccessiveposts.Whenyoucreatearailinghavinglengthmorethanthisvalue,anewpostisaddedintherailing.
![Page 139: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/139.jpg)
BalustersWhenyouselectthischeckbox,theExtensionofBalustersfromFloorLevelandMaximumCentertoCenter Spacing edit boxes are enabled. These check boxes are used tomodify the values related tobaluster. TheExtension of Balusters from Floor Level edit box is used to specify the distance forbottompointofbalusterfromthelevelofcorrespondingtread.TheMaximumCentertoCenterSpacingeditboxisusedtospecifythecentertocenterdistancebetweentheconsecutivebalusters.StairTreadLengthOverrideWhenyou select this checkbox, theNumberperTread edit box is enabled.This edit box is used tooverridethevaluefornumberofbalusterspertread.PerpendicularpostsTherearetwooptionsavailableinthisdrop-downlist:YesandNo.WhentheYesoptionisselectedfromthisdrop-downlist,thepostsintherailingwillbeperpendiculartotherailsintherailing.IfyouselecttheNooptionfromthisdrop-downlist,thepostswillbeperpendiculartothetread.RailingExtensionsThistoolintheDimensionrolloutwillbeavailableonlywhenrailingisaddedtothestairsandthereisaneedtoextendtherailingaheadofthestairs.Therailingscanbeextendedattwolevels,eitheratfloorlevelsoratlandings,refertoFigure3-32.
Figure3-32TheRailingExtensionsdialogbox
AtFloorLevelsWhenyouselecttheUseStairLandingExtensioncheckboxintheAtFloorLevelsarea,theeditboxes
![Page 140: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/140.jpg)
givenbelowget activated.You can specify the values forTopofEntireStairandBottomofEntireStairfortheHandrailandGuardrail lengths in therespectiveeditboxes.Select the+Tcheckboxforaddingthetreadlengthtotheextensionvalue.AtLandingsWhenyouselecttheUseStairLandingExtensioncheckboxintheAtFloorLevelsarea,theeditboxesgiven below get activated. You can specify the values for top of flight and bottom of flight for theHandrailandGuardraillengthsintherespectiveeditboxes.Selectthe+Tcheckboxforaddingthetreadlengthtotheextensionvalue.
NoteIftheeditboxesusedforspecifyingthesettingsforrailingextensionsareunavailable,youcansettheoptionsusingtheRailingStyleoptionintheStyleManager.
StairTowerThis tool isavailable in theStairdrop-downof theBuildpanel in theHome tab.This tool isused tocreateastairtowerfromonestair.Youcancreateastairtowerbyusinganystairshapeexceptspiral.Tocreateastairtower,youneedtofulfilltheconditionsgivennext.1.Astairmustalreadybecreatedinthedrawing.2.Youmusthavemorethanonelevelinthecurrentproject.CREATINGGRIDS,BEAMS,COLUMNS,ANDBRACESTocreategrids,beams,columns,orbraces,thetoolsareavailableintheEnhancedCustomGriddrop-downintheBuildpaneloftheHometabintheRibbon.Thetoolsinthisdrop-downarediscussednext.EnhancedCustomGridThistoolisavailableintheEnhancedCustomGriddrop-down.Thistoolisusedtocreatecolumngrids.Whenyou choose this tool, theColumnGrid dialog boxwill be displayed, as shown in Figure 3-33.Usingtheoptionsinthisdialogbox,youcancreatetwotypesofgrids:orthogonalgridsandradialgrids.Themethodstocreatethesegridsarediscussednext.
![Page 141: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/141.jpg)
Figure3-33TheColumnGriddialogbox
CreatingOrthogonalGridsTo create orthogonal grids, select theOrthogonal radio button from the top left corner of theGridLayoutarea;themodifiedGridLayoutareawillbedisplayed.Bydefault,theToptabisselectedinthedialogbox.Asaresult,thegridlineswillbecreatedintheTopplane.Tocreateagridline,selectthedesireddistancevaluefromthelistavailableontheleftintheGridLayoutarea;thepreviewofthegridlinesdistancedaspertheselectedvalue,willbedisplayedinthePreviewarea.Also,theparametersofthegridlineswillbedisplayedinthetableontherightintheGridLayoutarea.Keeponclickingonthedesireddistancevalues in the list tillyouget therequirednumberofgrid lines.Figure3-34showstheColumnGrid dialogboxafter selectingvalues from the listdisplayed.Similarly,youcanadddesirednumberofgridstotheBottom,Left,andRightplanes.Youcanchangethepatternoflabelingbyusingtheoptions available in theX-Labeling andY-Labeling drop-down lists. Similarly, you can change otherparameters for grids by using the options available in the dialogbox.After setting all the parameters,choose theOK button; the gridwill be displayed attached to the cursor and youwill be prompted tospecifytheinsertionpoint.Specifytheinsertionpoint;youwillbepromptedtospecifytherotationangle.Specify the rotation angle; the gridwill be created at the specified location.PressENTER to exit thecommandoryoucanspecifyaninsertionpointtocreateanothergridwiththesamespecifications.
![Page 142: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/142.jpg)
Figure3-34TheColumnGriddialogboxdisplayedafteraddinggridlines
CreatingRadialGridsTocreateradialgrids,selecttheRadialradiobuttononthetopleftcornerintheGridLayoutarea;themodifiedGridLayoutareawillbedisplayed,refertoFigure3-35.Bydefault,theRadialtabisselectedinthedialogbox,asaresultthegridlineswillbecreatedintheradialdirection.Tocreateagridline,select thedesiredanglevalue from the list available in the left of thedialogbox;previewof thegridlines,attheselectedvalue,willbedisplayedinthePreviewarea.Also,theparametersofthegridlineswillbedisplayedinthetableontherightintheGridLayoutarea.Youcanaddthedesirednumberofgridlinesbyselectingthemfromthelist.Figure3-36showstheColumnGriddialogboxafterselectingvaluesfromthelistdisplayedintheleft.Similarly,youcanadddesirednumberofgridsintheformofanarcbyselectingtheArcstab.YoucanchangethepatternoflabelingbyusingtheoptionsavailableintheX-LabelingandY-Labelingdrop-downlists.Similarly,youcanchangeothersettingsforgridsbyusingtheoptionsavailableinthedialogbox.Aftersettingall theparameters,choosetheOKbutton; thegridwillbedisplayedattachedtothecursorandyouwillbepromptedtospecifytheinsertionpoint.Specifytheinsertionpoint;youwillbepromptedtospecifytherotationangle.Specifytherotationangle;thegridwill be created at the specified location. Press ENTER to exit the command or you can specify aninsertionpointtocreateanothergridwiththesamespecifications.
![Page 143: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/143.jpg)
Figure3-35ThemodifiedColumnGriddialogboxafterselectingtheRadialradiobutton
![Page 144: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/144.jpg)
Figure3-36ThemodifiedColumnGriddialogboxafterselectingvaluesfromthelist
CustomGridConvertThistoolisavailableintheEnhancedCustomGriddrop-down.Itisusedtoconvertthenetworkoflinesinto columngrids.Whenyou choose this tool, youwill beprompted to select a networkof lines.Thecommandpromptforcreatingagridfromlinesingivennext.Selectlinework:Selectthenetworkoflinesthatyouwanttoconvertingrid.Selectlinework:Enter label extension or [No labels] <1200>:Specify the length of extension line from the grid endpoint.Eraseselectedlinework?[Yes/No]<No>:Specifywhetheryouwant todelete thenetworkof linesornot.ColumnGridThistoolisavailableintheEnhancedCustomGriddrop-down.Itisusedtocreateacolumngridwithpredefinedparameters.Tocreateacolumngrid,choosetheColumnGridtoolfromthedrop-down;youwill be prompted to specify the insertion point for the grid. Specify the insertion point; you will bepromptedtospecifytherotationangleforthegrid.Specifytherotationangle;thegridwillbecreatedatthespecifiedinsertionpoint.Again,youwillbepromptedtospecifytheinsertionpointforthegrid.PressENTERtoexitthecommand.YoucanedittheparametersofagridbyusingtheoptionsavailableinthePROPERTIESpalette,refertoFigure3-37.Someimportantoptionsinthispalettearediscussednext.
![Page 145: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/145.jpg)
Figure3-37ThePROPERTIESpalettedisplayedonchoosingtheColumnGridtool
ShapeThisdrop-downlistisavailableintheGeneralrolloutofthePROPERTIESpalette.Theoptionsinthisdrop-downlistareusedtochangetheshapeofthegridtobecreated.Therearetwooptionsavailableinthisdrop-downlist:RectangularandRadial.When theRectangularoption isselected, thegrid tobecreatedwillberectangularinshape.Therewillbehorizontalandverticalgrid lines in thegrid.WhenyouselecttheRadialoption,thegridswillbeintheformofarcsandintheradialdirection.SpecifyonscreenThisdrop-downlistisavailableintheDimensionsrolloutofthePROPERTIESpalette.Theoptionsinthis drop-down list are used to specify themethod for dimensioning the column grids. There are twooptions available in this drop-down list:Yes andNo.When you choose theYes option, you will bepromptedtospecifythecornerpointsofthecolumngridsinthescreen.IftheNooptionischosen,thenyouneedtospecifythedimensionsintheeditboxesavailableinthePROPERTIESpalette.X-WidthThiseditboxisavailableforbothrectangularshapedaswellastheradialshapedgrids.ThiseditboxintheDimensionsrolloutofthePROPERTIESpalettegetsactivatedonlywhentheNooptionisselectedintheSpecifyonscreendrop-downlist.Thiseditboxisusedtospecifythevalueforthewidthofthegrid.Y-DepthThiseditboxisavailableforrectangularshapedgridsonly.ThiseditboxintheDimensionsrolloutofthe
![Page 146: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/146.jpg)
PROPERTIESpalettegetsactivatedonlywhentheNooptionisselectedintheSpecifyonscreendrop-downlist.Thiseditboxisusedtospecifythevalueforthedepthofthegrid.A-AngleThiseditboxisavailablefortheradialshapedgridsonly.ThiseditboxintheDimensionsrolloutofthePROPERTIESpalettegetsactivatedonlywhentheNooptionisselectedintheSpecifyonscreendrop-downlist.Thiseditboxisusedtospecifythevalueforangleofthegrid.LayouttypeThisdrop-downlistisavailableinboththeXAxisrolloutaswellastheYAxisrollout.Therearetwooptionsavailableinthisdrop-downlist:RepeatandSpaceevenly.WhentheRepeatoptionisselected,thedistancebetweenthetwogridsisfixedanddependingonthetotalsizespecified,thenumberofgridlinesare inserted. If theSpaceevenly option is selected in theLayouttype drop-down list, the totalnumberofgridlineswillbefixedanddependingonthetotalsizeofgridboundary,thedistancebetweenthetwogridlineswillbeadjusted.BaysizeThiseditboxisavailableinboththeXAxisandtheYAxisrollouts.ThiseditboxisavailableonlywhentheRepeatoptionisselectedintheLayouttypedrop-downlist.YoucanspecifythedistancebetweentwogridlinesperpendiculartotheXandYaxesbyusingtheeditboxintherespectiverollout.NumberofbaysThis edit box is available in both theXAxis rollout as well as theYAxis rollout. This edit box isavailableonlywhen theSpaceevenly option is selected in theLayouttype drop-down list.You canspecifythenumberofgridlinesalongXaxisbyusingtheeditboxintherespectiverollout.StyleThisdrop-down list in thePROPERTIES palette for thecolumngridwill be available only after thecustomconvertcolumnisappliedtothedrawing.Itisusedtochangethetypeofcolumntobeusedforbuilding the grid. The options available in this drop-down list areNONE,8mmDropRod support,CH421RollFormedChannelProfile,andStandard.ColumnThis tool isavailable in theEnhancedCustomGriddrop-down.This tool isused tocreateacolumnwithpredefinedparameters.To create a column, choose theColumn tool from the drop-down; youwill beprompted tospecify thepositionofcolumnin thedrawingarea.Selectapointon thegridorspecifyapoint in the drawing area; the column will be created at the specified point. You can change theparametersofthecolumnbyusingtheoptionsavailableinthePROPERTIESpalette,refertoFigure3-38.SomeoftheimportantoptionsinthePROPERTIESpalettearediscussednext.
![Page 147: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/147.jpg)
Figure3-38ThePROPERTIESpalettedisplayedonchoosingtheColumntool
OnobjectThisdrop-down list isavailable in theGeneral rollout.Thereare twooptionsavailable in thisdrop-downlist:YesandNo.WhenyouselecttheYesoption,thecolumnwillbeattachedtothebaseobject.Ifyoumovethebase,thecolumnwillmoveaccordingly.WhenyouchoosetheNooption,thecolumnwillbeplacedasaseparateobjecthavingnolinkwiththeotherobjects.
StartoffsetThiseditboxisavailableintheDimensionsrollout.Inthiseditbox,youcanspecifytheoffsetvalueforthestartpointofthecolumnfromtheinsertionpoint.EndoffsetThiseditboxisavailableintheDimensionsrollout.Inthiseditbox,youcanspecifytheoffsetvaluefortheendpointofcolumnfromtheinsertionpoint.LogicalLengthThiseditboxisavailableintheDimensionsrollout.Inthiseditbox,youcanspecifythevalueforlengthofthecolumn.
![Page 148: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/148.jpg)
SpecifyrollonscreenThisdrop-downlistisavailableintheDimensionsrollout.Therearetwooptionsavailableinthisdrop-downlist:YesandNo.WhenyouselecttheYesoption,youwillbepromptedtospecifythevaluefortherotationofthecolumnwhileplacingit.WhenyouselecttheNooption,youneedtospecifythevaluefortherotationofthecolumnintheRolleditboxavailableinthePROPERTIESpalette.RollThiseditboxisavailableintheDimensionsrolloutonlywhentheNooptionisselectedintheSpecifyrollonscreendrop-downlist.Inthiseditbox,youcanspecifythevalueforrotationofthecolumnbeingcreated.JustifyThisdrop-downlistisavailableintheDimensionsrollout.Therearetenoptionsavailableinthisdrop-downlisttochangethejustificationofthecolumn.Justifycross-sectionThisdrop-downlistisavailableintheDimensionsrollout.Therearetwooptionsavailableinthisdrop-downlist:MaximumandAteachnode.WhenyouselecttheMaximumoptionfromthedrop-downlist,thejustificationmethodisappliedonlytothecolumnshavingmaximumcrosssection.WhenyouchoosetheAteachnodeoptionfromthedrop-downlist,thejustificationmethodisappliedtoeverycolumn.JustifycomponentsThisdrop-downlistisavailableintheDimensionsrollout.Therearetwooptionsavailableinthisdrop-down list:Highestpriorityonly andAll.When you select theHighest priority only option from thedrop-down list, the justificationmethods will be applied only to the columns having highest priority.WhentheAlloptionisselectedfromthedrop-downlist,thenthejustificationmethodisappliedtoallthecolumns.CustomColumnThis tool is available in theEnhanced CustomGrid drop-down. This tool is used to create a userdefinedcolumn.Tocreateacustomcolumn,choosetheCustomColumn tool;youwillbeprompted toselect a closed polyline, a closed spline, a circle, or an ellipse. Select a closed entity; you will bepromptedtospecifytheinsertionpointorcentroid.Selectapointtospecifyasinsertionpointorcentroid;theConverttoColumndialogboxwillbedisplayed,asshowninFigure3-39.SpecifythenameofthecolumnintheNewNameeditboxandchoosetheOKbuttonfromthedialogbox;thecustomcolumnwillbecreatedatthespecifiedlocation.
![Page 149: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/149.jpg)
Figure3-39TheConverttoColumndialogbox
YoucanchangethepropertiesofacustomcreatedcolumnbyusingthePROPERTIESpalette, refer toFigure 3-40. Some important options available in thePROPERTIES palette after selecting a customcolumnarediscussednext.
Figure3-40ThePROPERTIESpaletteBoundspacesThisdrop-downlistisavailableintheGeneralrollout.Therearethreeoptionsavailableinthisdrop-down list:Yes,No, andBystyle.When theYes option is selected in the drop-down list, the createdobjectwillactasaspaceboundary.WhentheNooption isselected in thedrop-downlist, thecreatedobjectwillbenotactasaspaceboundary.WhentheBystyleoptionisselectedinthedrop-downlist,theboundaryconditionsoftheobjectarespecifiedbythestyleoftheobject.
TrimautomaticallyThisdrop-downlistisavailableintheGeneralrollout.Therearethreeoptionsavailableinthisdrop-down list:Yes,No, andBystyle.When theYes option is selected in the drop-down list, the created
![Page 150: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/150.jpg)
objectwillgetautomaticallytrimmedtojoinwiththeconnectingobject.WhentheNooptionisselectedin thedrop-downlist, thecreatedobjectwillnotgetautomatically trimmedto joinwith theconnectingobject.WhentheBystyleoptionisselectedinthedrop-downlist,thetrimmingconditionsoftheobjectarespecifiedbythestyleofobject.MembertypeThisdrop-downlistisavailableintheGeneralrollout.Therearethreeoptionsavailableinthisdrop-down list:Beam,Column, andBrace. You can choose theBeam option from this drop-down list tocreateacustombeam.Bydefault, theColumn option is selected in thedrop-downlist. This option isusedtocreateacolumn.YoucancreateabracebychoosingtheBraceoptionfromthedrop-downlist.TheotheroptionsinthePROPERTIESpalettehavealreadybeendiscussed.
BeamThistoolisavailableintheEnhancedCustomGriddrop-down.Thistoolisusedtocreateabeam.Tocreateabeam,choosetheBeamtool;youwillbepromptedtospecifythestartpointofthebeam.Specifythestartpointof thebeam;youwillbepromptedtospecify theendpointof thebeam.Specify theendpointofthebeam;thebeamwillbecreatedwiththespecifiedparameters.YoucanspecifytheparametersofthebeaminthePROPERTIESpalette.TheoptionsavailableinthePROPERTIESpaletteforbeamaresimilartotheoptionsavailableforcustomcolumn.Theoptionsthatareavailableonlyforabeamarediscussednext.ArrayThisdrop-downlistisavailableintheLayoutrollout.Therearetwooptionsavailableinthisdrop-downlist:YesandNo.TheNooption is selectedbydefault in thedrop-down list.Whenyouselect theYesoption,youcancreatemultiple instancesof thebeam.OnselectingtheYesoption, theLayoutmethodandNumberofbaysoptionsbecomeavailableintheLayoutrollout.Theseoptionsareusedtospecifytheparameterforcreatingmultipleinstancesofthebeam.LayoutmethodThisdrop-downlistisavailableintheLayoutrollout.Therearetwooptionsavailableinthisdrop-downlist:Space evenly andRepeat. When you select the Space evenly option, the instances are spacedequallyoverthetotaldistance.WhenyouselecttheRepeatoption,theinstancesarespacedaccordingtothespecifieddistancevaluespecified.NumberofbaysThiseditboxisavailableintheLayoutrollout.Inthiseditbox,youcanspecifythevaluefornumberofinstancesofthebeam.BraceThistoolisavailableintheEnhancedCustomGriddrop-down.Thistoolisusedtocreateabrace.Tocreate a brace, choose theBrace tool; you will be prompted to specify the start point of the brace.Specifythestartpointofthebrace;youwillbepromptedtospecifytheendpointofthebrace.Specifytheend point of the brace; the brace will be created with the specified parameters. You can specify the
![Page 151: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/151.jpg)
parameters of the brace in the PROPERTIES palette. The options available in the PROPERTIESpaletteforbracearesimilartotheoptionsavailableforthecustomcolumn.Theoptionsthatareavailableonlyforabracearediscussednext.SpecifyriseonscreenThisdrop-downlistisavailableintheRiserollout.Therearetwooptionsavailableinthisdrop-downlist:YesandNo.TheYesoptionisselectedbydefaultinthedrop-downlist.Soyouneedtospecifythevalueof riseon the screenwhileplacing thebraces.Whenyouchoose theNo option, you can set theparametersrelatedtorisebyusingtheoptionsavailableinthePROPERTIESpalette.MethodThisdrop-downlistisavailableintheRiserollout.Therearetwooptionsavailableinthisdrop-downlist:AngleandDistance.OnchoosingtheAngleoption,youcansetthevalueofrisebyspecifyinganglevalueintheAnglefromfirstmembereditbox.DistancealongfirstmemberThiseditboxisavailableintheRiserollout.Youcanspecifythevaluefordistanceofstartpointofthebracealongthefirstmember.AnglefromthefirstmemberThiseditboxisavailableonlywhentheAngleoptionisselectedintheMethoddrop-downlist.Youcanspecifythevalueforrotationofthebracewithrespecttothefirstmember.CREATINGPRIMITIVESYoucancreatebasicobjectslikebox,cylinder,torusandsoonbyusingthetoolsavailableinAutoCADMEP.Thesebasicobjectsarecalledprimitives.ThetoolstocreateprimitivesareavailableintheBoxdrop-downoftheBuildpanel.Thetoolsavailableinthisdrop-downarediscussednext.TheoptionsforcreatingdifferentPrimitiveshapesalsoShowsupinthecommandline.BoxTheBoxtoolisusedtocreateaboxwiththespecifieddimensions.Tocreateabox,choosetheBoxtoolfromtheBoxdrop-downintheBuildpanel;youwillbepromptedtospecifythefirstcornerofthebox.Specifythefirstcornerofthebox;youwillbepromptedtospecifythesecondcornerofthebox.Specifythesecondcornerofthebox;youwillbepromptedtospecifytheheightofthebox.Specifytheheightofthebox;youwillbepromptedtospecifytherotationangleofthebox.Specifytherotationvalue;theboxwillbecreated.PyramidThePyramidtoolisusedtocreateapyramidwiththespecifieddimensions.Tocreateapyramid,choosethePyramidtoolfromtheBoxdrop-downintheBuildpanel;youwillbepromptedtospecifythefirstcornerpointofthepyramid.Specifythefirstcornerpointofthepyramid;youwillbepromptedtospecifythesecondcornerpoint.Specifythesecondcornerpoint;youwillbepromptedtospecifytheheightoftheapex.Specifytheheightoftheapex;youwillbepromptedtospecifytherotationangleofthepyramid.
![Page 152: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/152.jpg)
Specifythevalueforrotation;apyramidwithspecifiedsettingswillbecreated.CylinderTheCylindertoolisusedtocreateacylinderwithspecifieddimensions.Tocreateacylinder,choosetheCylindertoolfromtheBoxdrop-downintheBuildpanel;youwillbepromptedtospecifytheinsertionpointofthecylinder.Specifythepointinthedrawingarea;youwillbepromptedtospecifytheradius.Entertheradiusvalue;youwillbepromptedtospecifytheheightofthecylinder.Specifytheheightofthecylinder;youwillbepromptedtospecifytherotationangle.Specifythevalueforrotation;acylinderofspecifiedsettingswillbecreated.RightTriangleTheRightTriangle tool isused tocreatea right trianglemasswith specifieddimensions.Tocreatearight triangle,choose theRightTriangle tool fromtheBoxdrop-downin theBuildpanel;youwillbepromptedtospecifythefirstcornerpointoftherighttriangle.Specifythepointinthedrawingarea;youwillbepromptedtospecifythesecondcornerpointoftherighttriangle.Specifythesecondcornerpoint;you will be prompted to specify the height of the apex. Specify the height of the apex; you will bepromptedtospecifytherotationangleoftherighttriangle.Specifythevalueforrotation;arighttrianglewiththespecifiedsettingswillbecreated.IsoscelesTriangleTheIsoscelesTriangletoolisusedtocreateanisoscelestrianglemasswithspecifieddimensions.Theproceduretocreateanisoscelestriangleissimilartotheprocedureofcreatingarighttrianglemass.ConeTheConetoolisusedtocreateaconewiththespecifieddimensions.Tocreateacone,choosetheConetoolfromtheBoxdrop-downintheBuildpanel;youwillbepromptedtospecifytheinsertionpointofthecone.Specifythepointinthedrawingarea;youwillbepromptedtospecifytheradius.Entertheradiusvalue; youwill beprompted to specifyheight of the cone.Specify theheight of the cone; youwill beprompted tospecify the rotationangle.Specify thevalueof rotation;aconewith the specified settingswillbecreated.DomeTheDome tool isused to create adomewith the specifieddimensions.Tocreate adome, choose theDome tool from theBox drop-down in theBuild panel; youwill be prompted to specify the insertionpointofthedome.Specifythepointinthedrawingarea;youwillbepromptedtospecifytheradius.Entertheradiusvalue;youwillbepromptedtospecifytherotationangle.Specifythevalueofrotation;adomewiththespecifiedsettingswillbecreated.SphereTheSpheretoolisusedtocreateadomewiththespecifieddimensions.Tocreateasphere,choosetheSphere toolfromtheBoxdrop-downintheBuildpanel;youwillbeprompted tospecify the insertionpointof the sphere.Specify thepoint in thedrawingarea;youwillbeprompted to specify the radius.Entertheradiusvalue;youwillbepromptedtospecifytherotationangle.Specifythevalueofrotation;a
![Page 153: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/153.jpg)
spherewiththespecifiedsettingswillbecreated.ArchTheArchtoolisusedtocreateanarchwiththespecifieddimensions.Tocreateanarch,choosetheArchtoolfromtheBoxdrop-downintheBuildpanel;youwillbepromptedtospecifythefirstcornerpointofthebase.Specifythepointinthedrawingarea;youwillbepromptedtospecifythesecondcornerpointofthebase.Specifythesecondcornerpoint;youwillbepromptedtospecifytheheightofthearch.Specifytheheightofthearch;youwillbepromptedtospecifytherotationangleofthearch.Enterthevalueofrotationangle;anarchwillbecreatedwiththespecifiedparameters.GableTheGable tool isused tocreateanarchwith the specifieddimensions.Tocreateagable, choose theGabletoolfromtheBoxdrop-downintheBuildpanel;youwillbepromptedtospecifythefirstcornerpointofthebase.Specifythepointinthedrawingarea;youwillbepromptedtospecifythesecondcornerpointofthebase.Specifythesecondcornerpoint;youwillbepromptedtospecifytheheightofthegable.Specifytheheightofthegable;youwillbespecifytherotationangleofthearch.Enterthevalueoftherotationangle;agablewillbecreatedwiththespecifiedparameters.BarrelVaultTheBarrelVaulttoolisusedtocreateabarrelvaultwiththespecifieddimensions.Tocreateabarrelvault,choosetheBarrelVaulttoolfromtheBoxdrop-downintheBuildpanel;youwillbepromptedtospecifythefirstcornerpointofthebase.Specifythepointinthedrawingarea;youwillbepromptedtospecify the secondcornerpointof thebase.Specify the secondcornerpoint; youwill beprompted tospecifytherotationangleofthebarrelvault.Enterthevalueoftherotationangle;abarrelvaultwillbecreatedwiththespecifiedparameters.DrapeTheDrapetoolisusedtocreateadrapewiththespecifiedparameters.Adrapeisusedtoshowcontourofthesite.Youcancreateadrapewiththehelpofpolylinesorpolygons.Tocreateadrape,choosetheDrape tool from the Box drop-down in the Build panel; you will be prompted to select objectsrepresenting the contour. Select polylines or other objects representing the contour and then pressENTER;youwillpromptedtoeraseorretaintheselectedcontours.EnterYorNatthecommandprompt;youwillbepromptedtogeneratearegularmesh.EnterYorNatthecommandprompt.OnspecifyingNatthecommandprompt,youwillbepromptedwhethertogeneratearectangularmesh.OnenteringYatthecommandprompt;youwillbepromptedtospecifythefirstcorneroftherectangletocreateamesh.Specify a point in the drawing area; you will be prompted to specify the opposite corner of therectangularmesh.Specifytheoppositecornerofthemesh;youwillbepromptedtospecifythenumberofsubdivisionsalongtheXdirection.Enterthedesirednumberofsubdivisionsatthecommandprompt;youwill be prompted to specify the number of subdivisions along the Y direction. Enter the number ofsubdivisions at the commandprompt;youwill beprompted to specify the thicknessvalueof thebase.Enterthevalueofthicknessatthecommandprompt;thedrapewiththeselectedcontourswillbecreated.Doric
![Page 154: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/154.jpg)
Thedoricpillarisusedforcreatingheritagetypeverticalstructures.TheDoric toolwillbeavailableonly afterBox is selected from thePrimitivesdrop-down in theBuildpanel of theHome tab; theShapeoptionpopsupinthecommandprompt.SelectShapeinthecommandprompt;variousoptionsfordifferentshapesgetdisplayedinthecommandbar.SelecttheDORicoption.Specifythecenterpointofthedoricshapeinthedrawingarea;youwillbepromptedtospecifytheradius.Entertheradiusvalueinthecommandbar;youwillbepromptedtospecifytheheightofthedoricshapedpillar.Specifytheheightforthepillar;youwillbepromptedtospecifytherotationangle.Specifythevaluefortherotationangle;adoricpillarwiththespecifiedsettingswillbecreated.TUTORIALSTUTORIAL1Inthistutorial,youwillcreateamodelofabuilding,asshowninFigure3-41.TheplanofthebuildingisgiveninFigure3-42.(Expectedtime:30min)
Figure3-41Modelofabuilding
![Page 155: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/155.jpg)
Figure3-42Planviewofabuilding
Examinethemodeltodeterminethenumberoffeaturesinit.Themodelconsistsofthreefeatures,refertoFigure3-41.
Thefollowingstepsarerequiredtocompletethistutorial:
a.CreateaprojectfilewiththenameOffice.b.CreateanewconstructwiththenameC03_tut01.c.Createwallsbyusingthereferenceoflinediagram,refertoFigures3-42and3-43.d.Createdoorsaccordingtotheplan,refertoFigures3-42and3-44.StartingaNewProjectFile1. Start AutoCADMEP by usingAutoCADMEP 2015 - English (Global) icon from the desktop andchooseNew>ProjectfromtheApplicationmenu;theProjectBrowserisdisplayed.
2.Choose theNewProject button available at the bottom of theProject Browser; theAddProjectdialogboxisdisplayed.
3.EntertheprojectnameasOfficeintheProjectNamefield.Also,entertheProjectNumberas0001andspecify thedescriptionabout theprojectasdesired in their respectivefields.Makesure that theCreatefromtemplateprojectcheckboxisselected.
4. Choose the Browse button and select the fileCommercial Template Project (Metric).apj from theC:\ProgramData\Autodesk\MEP2015\enu\Template\CommercialTemplateProject(Metric)directoryandthenchoosetheOpenbutton;thepathoftheselectedfileisaddedtotheeditboxdisplayedbelowtheCreatefromtemplateprojectcheckbox.
5.ChoosetheOKbutton;thenewlycreatedprojectfilenameisdisplayedintheleftpaneoftheProjectBrowser.
![Page 156: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/156.jpg)
6.ChoosetheClosebuttonfromtheProjectBrowser;theProjectNavigatorpaletteisdisplayedinthedrawingareaandthenewprojectisactivated.Bydefault,theConstructstabisactiveintheProjectNavigator.
AddingaNewConstruct1.ChoosetheConstructtabinthePROJECTNAVIGATOR.2.ChoosetheAddConstructbuttonavailableatthebottomofthePROJECTNAVIGATOR; theAddConstructdialogboxisdisplayed.
3.Click in theName field,specify thenameofconstructasC03_tut01andchoose theOK button; theC03_tut01drawingfileisopened.
CreatingWallsNow,youwillcreatewalls.BeforethatchoosetheArchitectureoptionfromtheWorkspaceSwitchingflyout.
1.ChoosetheWalltoolfromtheWalldrop-downavailableintheBuildpaneloftheHometab;youareprompted to specify the start point of the wall. Also, the corresponding PROPERTIES palette isdisplayed.
2.Specifythevalueforwidth,baseheight,andjustifyas254,4000,andCenter, respectively, in theirrespectivefieldsintheDimensionsrolloutofthePROPERTIESpalette.
3.Click to specify the start point of thewall and then create thewalls, as shown inFigure3-43.Fordimensions,refertoFigure3-42.
Figure3-43Wallscreated
CreatingDoorsNow,youwillcreatedoors.Fordimensions,refertoFigure3-42.1.ChoosetheDoortoolfromtheDoordrop-downavailableintheBuildpaneloftheHometab;youare
![Page 157: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/157.jpg)
promptedtoselectawalloragridassembly.Also,thePROPERTIESpaletteisdisplayed.
2.Specifythevalueforwidthandheightas1500and3500,respectively,intheirrespectivefieldsintheDimensions rollout of the PROPERTIES palette. Also, select theOffset/Center option from thePositionalongwallfieldintheLocationrolloutofthePROPERTIESpalette.
3.ClickattherequiredlocationstoplacethedoorD1,refertoFigure3-42.4. Now, specify width as 2000 in the Width field available in the Dimensions rollout of thePROPERTIESpaletteandcreatethemaingate.Forpositioningthegates,refertoFigure3-42.
Aftercreatingthedoors,thedrawingisdisplayed,asshowninFigure3-44.
Figure3-44Thedrawingaftercreatinggates
CreatingWindowsNow,youwillcreatewindowswiththespecificationsgiveninFigure3-42.1.ChoosetheWindowtoolfromtheWindowdrop-downavailableintheBuildpaneloftheHome tab;you are prompted to select a wall or a grid assembly. Also, the PROPERTIES palette withcorrespondingoptionsisdisplayed.
2. Specify the value for width and height of window as 2000 and 1510 respectively, in theircorrespondingfieldsintheDimensionsrolloutofthePROPERTIESpalette.
3.Clickattherequiredlocationstocreatethewindows,refertoFigure3-42.
ThefinalmodelintheSWIsometricviewandtheConceptualdisplaystyleisshowninFigure3-45.
![Page 158: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/158.jpg)
Figure3-45Modelofabuilding
SavingtheDrawingFile1.ChooseSavefromtheApplicationMenutosavethedrawingfilewiththenamec03_tut1.
TUTORIAL2Inthistutorial,youwillcreateamodelofabuilding,asshowninFigure3-46.TheplanofthebuildingisgiveninFigure3-47.(Expectedtime:30min)
Figure3-46Modelofabuilding
![Page 159: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/159.jpg)
Figure3-47Theplanofthebuilding
Thefollowingstepsarerequiredtocompletethistutorial:a.Createanewprojectfile.b.CreateanewconstructwiththenameC03_tut02.c.Createwallsbyusingthereferenceofthelinediagram,refertoFigure3-48.d.Createdoorsaccordingtheplan,refertoFigure3-47.e.Createtheroofaccordingtotheplan,refertoFigure3-49.f.Createthestairs,refertoFigure3-50.AfterstartingtheAutoCADMEPsession,thefirsttaskistocreateaproject.StartingaNewProjectFile1.StartAutoCADMEPbyusingAutoCADMEP2015-English(Global) iconfromthedesktop, ifnotstartedandthenchooseNew>ProjectfromtheApplicationMenu;theProjectBrowserisdisplayed.
2.Choose theNewProject button available at the bottom of theProject Browser; theAddProjectdialogboxisdisplayed.
3.EntertheprojectnameasMachiningPlantintheProjectNamefield.Also,entertheprojectnumberand description in their respective fields. Select theCommercial Template Project (Metric).apj astemplatefortheprojectusingtheBrowsebutton.
4.ChoosetheOKbutton;thenewcreatedprojectfilenameisdisplayedontheleftpaneoftheProjectBrowser.
5.ChoosetheClosebuttonfromtheProjectBrowser;theProjectNavigatorpaletteisdisplayedinthedrawingareaandthenewprojectisactivated.
AddingaNewConstruct1.ChoosetheConstructstabfromtheProjectNavigator.ChoosetheAddConstructbuttonavailableat
![Page 160: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/160.jpg)
thebottomoftheProjectNavigator;theAddConstructdialogboxisdisplayed.2.ClickintheNamefield,specifythenameoftheconstructasC03_tut02andchoosetheOKbutton;theC03_tut02drawingfileisopened.
CreatingWallsNow,youneedtocreatewalls.MakesurethattheArchitectureworkspaceisactive.1.ChoosetheWalltoolfromtheWalldrop-downavailableintheBuildpaneloftheHometab;youarepromptedtospecifythestartpointofthewall.Also,thePROPERTIESpaletteisdisplayed.
2.Specifywidth,baseheight,andjustifyas254,4500,andCenter,respectivelyintheirrespectivefieldsintheDimensionsrolloutofthePROPERTIESpaletteifnotspecified.
3.Click to specify the start point of thewall and then create thewalls, as shown inFigure3-48. Fordimensions,refertoFigure3-47.
CreatingDoorsNow,youneed tocreatedoors.Fordimensions, refer toFigure3-47.Makesure that theArchitectureworkspaceisactive.
1.ChoosetheDoortoolfromtheDoordrop-downavailableintheBuildpaneloftheHometab;youarepromptedtoselectawalloragridassembly.
NotethatthePROPERTIESpalettewiththecorrespondingoptionsisdisplayed.
Figure3-48Wallscreatedusingreferenceoflinediagram
2.Specifywidthandheightas1500and3500respectively,intheirrespectivefieldsintheDimensionsrolloutofthePROPERTIESpalette.
![Page 161: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/161.jpg)
3.Also,selecttheCenteroptionfromthePositionalongwallfieldintheLocationrolloutandmakesurethattheStandardoptionisselectedintheStyledrop-downlistofthePROPERTIESpalette.
4.Clickattherequiredlocationstocreatethedoors,refertoFigure3-47.5.Now,youneedtocreatethehingeddoubledoors.Asthesedoorsarenotavailablebydefault,soyouneedtoselecttheHingedDoubleDooroptionfromthePROPERTIESpalette.
6.SelecttheDoortoolfromtheDoordrop-downavailableintheBuildpaneloftheHometab;youarepromptedtoselectawalloragridassembly.Also,thePROPERTIESpalettewiththecorrespondingoptionsisdisplayed.
7. Click on the Style preview area in the PROPERTIES palette; the Select Style dialog box isdisplayed,choosetheHingedDoubleoptionandclickOK.
8.Specifywidthandheightas4000and3500intheirrespectivefieldsintheDimensionsrolloutofthePROPERTIES palette. Select theUnconstrained option from thePosition along wall field in theLocationrolloutofthePROPERTIESpalette.
9.Clickattherequiredlocationtopositionthedoors,asshownintheFigure3-47.Aftercreatingthedoors,thedrawingisdisplayedasshowninFigure3-49.
Figure3-49Thedrawingaftercreatingallthedoors
CreatingSlabNow,youneedtocreatetheslabwiththespecificationsshowninFigure3-50.1.ChoosetheSlabtoolfromtheRoofSlabdrop-downavailableintheBuildpaneloftheHometab;youarepromptedtospecifythestartpointoftheslab.
2.SelectoneofthecornerpointsofthebuildingdisplayedinFigure3-49;youarepromptedtospecifythenextpointfortheslab.
![Page 162: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/162.jpg)
3.SelectrestofthecornerpointsasshowninFigure3-50.
Figure3-50Cornerpointsfortheslab
CreatingStairsNow,youwillcreatestairsattachedtotheslab.1.ChoosetheStairtoolfromtheStairdrop-downavailableintheBuildpaneloftheHometab;youarepromptedtospecifytheflightstartpoint.Also,thePROPERTIESpaletteisdisplayedwiththeoptionsrelevanttostairs.
2. Specify width, height, justification, and termination as 1000, 4500, Right, and Landing in theirrespectivefieldsinthePROPERTIESpalette.Also,chooseStraightfromtheShapedrop-downlistintheGeneralrollout.
3.Selectastartingpointforstairsandalignitwiththeadjacentwall,refertoFigure3-51.
Figure3-51Startingpointofthestairs
Now,youwillcreateacutontheslabtoallowapassagethroughthestairstothetopoftheroof.
![Page 163: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/163.jpg)
CreatingCutintheSlab1.ChoosetheRectangletoolfromtheRectangledrop-downavailableintheDrawpaneloftheHometab;youarepromptedtospecifythefirstcornerpoint.Specifythecornerpointsfor therectangle,asshowninFigure3-52.
Figure3-52Rectangletobecreatedforcutintheslab
2.Select the slabandchoose theTrim tool from theModify panel in theSlab contextual tab; you arepromptedtoselectatrimmingobjectlikeapolygonorasolidobject.
3.SelecttherectanglecreatedforthecutandpressENTER;youarepromptedtospecifythesidetobedeleted.
4.Click inside the rectangle, theareacoveredby the rectangle is trimmed.PressESC toexit the tool.Now,hidetherectanglegeometrycreatedfortrimming,
IsometricviewofthedrawingaftercreatingthecutisshowninFigure3-53.
![Page 164: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/164.jpg)
Figure3-53Drawingaftercreatingthecutintheslab
CreatingRailingontheStairs1.ChoosetheRailingtoolfromtheStairdrop-downavailableintheBuildpaneloftheHome tab;youarepromptedtospecifythestartpointfortherailing.
2.ChooseAttachandthentheStairoptionfromthecommandprompt;youarepromptedtoselectastair.3.Selectthestairscreatedearlier;arailingwiththestandardsettingsiscreatedinthedrawingarea.4.Deselectalltheentities,selecttherailing,andinvokethePROPERTIESpalette.5.Enter900intheSideoffsetfieldintheLocationrolloutofthePROPERTIESpalette.Aftercreatingallthecomponents,thefinaldrawing(inconceptualview)isdisplayed,asshowninFigure3-54.
Figure3-54Thefinaldrawing
SavingtheDrawingFile1.ChooseSavefromtheApplicationMenutosavethedrawingfile.
SELF-EVALUATIONTESTAnswerthefollowingquestionsandthencomparethemtothosegivenattheendofthischapter:1.YoucannotcreateacurvedwallusingtheWalltool.(T/F)2.Acurtainwallisanon-structuralwall.(T/F)3.UsingtheStairtool,youcancreateonlystraightstairs.(T/F)
![Page 165: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/165.jpg)
4.A__________isanopeninginawallordoortofacilitatethepassageofairandlight.5.The_____________toolisusedtocreateasegmentofroofwhichisnotconnectedwithotherentities.6.A___________windowcanbecreatedonacorneredwall.REVIEWQUESTIONSAnswerthefollowingquestions:1.UsingtheoptionsintheStyleManager,youcancreatecustomdoors.(T/F)2.Spiralstairscanbecreatedonlyintheclockwisedirection.(T/F)3.TheRailingtoolcanbeusedtoattachrailingtoastair.(T/F)4.Onselectingaslab,the___________contextualtabgetsactivatedintheRibbon.5.The__________toolisusedtoconvertthenetworkoflinesintocolumngrids.EXERCISEEXERCISE1Createthemodelofbuilding,asshowninFigure3-55.TheplanviewofthebuildingisshowninFigure3-56.(Expectedtime:45min)
Figure3-55ModelforExercise1
![Page 166: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/166.jpg)
Figure3-56Planofthebuilding
AnswerstoSelf-EvaluationTest1.F,2.T,3.F,4.window,5.RoofSlab,6.cornered
![Page 167: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/167.jpg)
Chapter4
CreatinganHVACSystem
![Page 168: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/168.jpg)
LearningObjectivesAftercompletingthischapter,youwillbeableto:•UseHVACtools•ChangebasicsettingsofanHVACsystem•Configureductworkoptions•Routetheductline•Createducts
INTRODUCTIONIn this chapter, youwill learn about the use ofmechanical equipment that are required for creating anHVACsystem.AnHVACsystemisusedtomaintaindesiredenvironmentalconditionsinaspecificarea.Itconsistsoftheheating,ventilation,andairconditioningsystems.TocreateanHVACsystem,youneedtoknowtheheatingloadofthedesiredareabyusingthermodynamics,fluidmechanics,andheattransferprinciples.TheseloadsettingsareusedtodeterminethecapacityofequipmenttobeaddedforHVAC.TostartworkingintheHVACworkspace,choosetheHVACoptionfromtheWorkspaceSwitchingflyoutintheApplicationStatusBar. The equipment available in theHVACworkspace ofAutoCADMEP arediscussednext.EQUIPMENTForcreatinganHVACsystem,youneedtoaddequipmentrelatedtothesystemtothebuildingstructure.All the equipment that can be added while working in the HVAC workspace are available in theEquipmentdrop-downoftheBuildpanelintheHometaboftheRibbon,refertoFigure4-1.The toolsavailableinthisdrop-downarediscussednext.
Figure4-1TheEquipmentdrop-down
AirHandlerAirHandlerisanequipmentoradevicewhichisusedtocirculateairinaspecificarea.ThequalityofairisalsocontrolledbyAirHandler.TherearetwotypesofAirHandlersavailableinAutoCADMEP:
![Page 169: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/169.jpg)
ModularAirHandlerandPackagedAirHandler.AModularAirHandlerconsistsofvariouscomponentsthattogethermakeanAirHandler.SomeoftheimportantcomponentsinaModularAirHandlerareAHUCoils,AHUEconomizer,AHUFans,AHUFilters,AHUInspectionModules,andAHUMixingBoxes.APackagedAirHandler is a closed unit consisting of all the components available in theModularAirHandlerbutinaninterconnectedmanner.ToaddanAirHandlerinthedrawing,choosetheAirHandlertoolfromtheEquipmentdrop-downavailableintheBuildpaneloftheHometabintheRibbon;theAddMulti-viewParts dialogboxwill be displayed, as shown inFigure 4-2.Select theAHULargeCoilscomponentfromtheAHUCoilssub-categoryoftheModularAirHandlingUnitComponentscategoryofAirHandlingUnitsequipment.Also,thepreviewoftheselectedcomponentisdisplayedintherightofthedialog box. The blue arrows in the Preview area indicate the flow of fluid through the selectedcomponent.Various components in theModularAirHandlingUnitComponents category arediscussednext.
Figure4-2TheAddMulti-viewPartsdialogbox
AHUCoilsTheAHUCoil is a component ofModularAirHandlerwhich is used to cool or heat the air comingthrough theduct.There are four ports ofAHUCoil component:Duct inlet port,Duct outlet port,HeatExchangingfluidinletport,andHeatExchangingfluidoutletport.ToaddanAHUCoilinthedrawing,clickonthe+signadjacenttoAHUCoilintheModularAirHandlingUnitComponentscategoryofAirHandlingUnitsequipment;threetypesofAHUCoilwillbedisplayedbelowtheAHUCoilsub-category.
Youcanchooseanyofthethreeoptions:AHULargeCoil,AHUMediumCoil,andAHUSmallCoil,aspertherequirement.Afterchoosingthedesiredoption,selecttherequiredsizefromthePartSizeNamedrop-downlistavailablebelowthePreviewarea.AfterselectingtherespectivesizeforAHUcoil,clickin the drawing area; the AHU coil will be placed at the selected position and a compass will bedisplayedbelowtheAHUcoil.OrienttheAHUcoilatthedesiredanglebyusingthecompass.Figure4-3
![Page 170: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/170.jpg)
showsanannotatedAHUCoil.
Figure4-3AnAHUCoil
AHUEconomizerTheAHUEconomizerisacomponentoftheAHUsystemwhichisusedtoincreasetheefficiencyofanAHUsystembyusingnaturalair.InanEconomizer,naturalairisusedtoheatorcooltheairinaspecificarea. For example, if the temperature inside a room is higher than the temperature outside, then theeconomizerdrawsairfromoutsideandmixeswiththeinsideairtocreateanambienttemperature.ToaddanAHUEconomizerinthedrawing,clickonthe+signadjacenttoAHUEconomizerintheModularAirHandlingUnitComponents categoryofAirHandlingUnits equipment.Ondoing so, the standardAHUeconomizer will be displayed below the AHU Economizer sub-category. After choosing the requiredoptionfromtheavailableeconomizers,selecttherequiredsizefromthePartSizeNamedrop-downlistwhichisavailablebelowthePreviewarea.Afterselectingthesize,clickinthedrawingarea;theAHUEconomizerwill be placed at the selected position and a compasswill be displayed below theAHUEconomizer.OrienttheAHUEconomizeratthedesiredanglebyusingthecompass.Figure4-4showsanannotatedAHUEconomizer.
![Page 171: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/171.jpg)
Figure4-4AnAHUEconomizer
AHUFanTheAHUFanisacomponentoftheAHUsystemwhichforcestheairtoflowthroughtheduct.ToaddanAHUFan in thedrawing,clickon the+ signadjacent toAHUFans in theModularAirHandlingUnitComponentscategoryofAirHandlingUnitsequipment.Ondoingso, three typesofAHUFanswillbedisplayedbelowtheAHUFanssub-category.Youcanchooseanyofthethreeoptions:AHUFanModulesFrontDischargeUp,AHUFanModulesRearDischargeUp,andAHUFanModulesSideDischarge,aspertherequirement.Afterchoosingthedesiredoption,selecttherequiredsizefromthePartSizeNamedrop-downlistavailablebelowthePreviewarea.AfterselectingtherequiredsizeforAHUFan,clickinthedrawingarea;theAHUFanwillbeplacedattheselectedpositionandacompasswillbedisplayedbelowtheAHUFan.OrienttheAHUFanatthedesiredanglebyusingthecompass.Figure4-5showsanannotatedAHUFanModulesSideDischarge.
![Page 172: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/172.jpg)
Figure4-5AnAHUFanModulesSideDischarge
AHUFilterTheAHUFilterisacomponentoftheAHUsystemwhichfilterstheaircomingfromtheinputline.Afterfilteringtheair,itispassedtotheAHUInspectionModule.ToaddanAHUFilterinthedrawing,clickonthe + sign adjacent to AHU Filters in the Modular Air Handling Unit Components category of AirHandling Units equipment; four types of AHU Filters will be displayed below the AHU Filters sub-category.Youcanchooseanyofthefollowingfouroptionsasperyourrequirement:AHUAngleFilter,AHUBagFilter,AHUCartridgeFilter,andAHUPanelFilter.Afterchoosingtherequiredoption,selectthesizefromthePartSizeNamedrop-downlistavailablebelowthePreviewarea.AfterselectingtherequiredsizefortheAHUFilter,clickinthedrawingarea;theAHUFilterwillbeplacedattheselectedpositionandacompasswillbedisplayedbelow theAHUFilter.Orient theAHUFilterat thedesiredanglebyusingthecompass.Figure4-6showsanannotatedAHUBagFilter.
![Page 173: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/173.jpg)
Figure4-6AnAHUBagFilter
AHUInspectionModulesTheAHUInspectionModuleisacomponentoftheAHUsystemwhichisusedtocheckthequalityofairbeingspreadinthedesiredarea.ToaddanAHUInspectionModuleinthedrawing,clickonthe+ signadjacent to AHU Inspection Module in the Modular Air Handling Unit Components category of AirHandlingUnitsequipment;thefollowingthreetypesofAHUInspectionModuleswillbedisplayed:AHUInspectionModuleLarge,AHUInspectionModuleMedium,andAHUInspectionModuleSmall.Theseinspection module categories vary according to the size required for the system. After choosing therequired option, select the required size from thePart SizeName drop-down list. Next, click in thedrawingarea;theAHUInspectionModulewillbeplacedattheselectedpositionandacompasswillbedisplayedbelowtheAHUInspectionModule.OrienttheAHUInspectionModuleatthedesiredanglebyusingthecompass.AnAHUInspectionModulehastwoports:oneforinletofairandtheotherforoutletofair.
AHUMixingBoxesTheAHUMixingBoxisacomponentoftheAHUsystemthatmixesthereturningairwiththeoutsideairaspertherequirement.ToaddanAHUMixingBoxinthedrawing,clickonthe+signadjacenttoAHUMixingBoxesintheModularAirHandlingUnitComponentscategoryofAirHandlingUnitsequipment.Ondoingso,thestandardtypeofAHUMixingBoxwillbedisplayedbelowtheAHUMixingBoxessub-category.AfterselectingtherequiredAHUmixingbox,select thesizefromthePartSizeNamedrop-downlistavailablebelowthePreviewarea.Afterselectingtherequiredsize,clickinthedrawingarea;theAHUMixingBoxwillbeplacedattheselectedpositionandacompasswillbedisplayedbelowtheAHUMixing Box. Orient the AHUMixing Box at the desired angle by using the compass. An AHUMixingBoxhasthreeports:forinletofreturningair,forinletoffreshair,andforoutletofmixedair.AirTerminal
![Page 174: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/174.jpg)
AirTerminal is a vent throughwhich the fresh air is diffused in a specific area.To add a vent in thedrawing,choosetheAirTerminaltoolfromtheEquipmentdrop-downintheBuildpanelof theHometab;theAddMulti-viewPartsdialogboxwillbedisplayedwiththeoptionsforAirTerminals,asshownin Figure 4-7. There are three categories available forAir Terminal:Diffusers,Grills, andRegisters.Click on the+ sign adjacent to the desired category in the dialog box; the available options will bedisplayedbelowthatcategory.Selecttherequiredoption;differentsizesfortheselectedoptionwillbedisplayedinthePartSizeNamedrop-downlist.Selecttherequiredsizefromthelistandthenclickinthedrawingareatoplacetheairterminal.Onplacingtheairterminal,youwillbepromptedtospecifytherotationanglebyusingthecompassdisplayedbelowit.Specifytherotationangleeitherbyenteringthevalueatthecommandpromptordynamicallyspecifythevaluebyclickingonthescreen.Ondoingso,theair terminalwillbeplacedat thedesiredpointandangle.Close thedialogboxbychoosing theClosebuttonafteraddingtherequirednumberofairterminals.
Figure4-7TheAddMulti-viewPartsdialogboxwithoptionsforAirTerminals
NoteYoucanspecifytheflowratefortheselectedairterminalbyusingtheFlow(EachTerminal)editboxavailableintheFlow tabof theAddMulti-viewPartsdialogbox.Theunit forspecifying thevalueshouldbel/s.
FanFanisanequipmentthatgeneratesacurrentofair.Toaddafaninthedrawing,choosetheFantoolfromtheEquipmentdrop-downintheBuildpaneloftheHometab;theAddMulti-viewPartsdialogboxwillbedisplayedwiththeoptionsrelatedtofans,asshowninFigure4-8.Selecttherequiredfanfromthelist;various sizes for the selected fanwill be displayed in thePart SizeName drop-down list availablebelowthePreviewarea.Selecttherequiredsizefromthelistandclickinthedrawingarea;theselectedfanwillbeplacedatthespecifiedlocationandacompasswillbedisplayedbelowthefaninthedrawingarea.Using thiscompass,youcanspecify the rotationvaluedynamically.Ondoing so, the fanwillbe
![Page 175: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/175.jpg)
placedatthedesiredpointandangle.Afteraddingtherequirednumberoffans,closethedialogboxbychoosingtheclosebutton.
Figure4-8TheAddMulti-viewPartsdialogboxwithoptionsforfans
DamperDamper is anHVACequipment that is used to regulate the flowof air in anHVAC system.To add adamperinthesystem,choosetheDampertoolfromtheEquipmentdrop-downintheBuildpaneloftheHome tab; theAddMulti-viewParts dialog boxwill be displayedwith the options for dampers, asshown in Figure 4-9. There are four categories of dampers: Balancing Dampers, Fire Dampers,RectangularCurtain Fire ShieldDamper, andRectangular Smoke ShieldDamper PTC.TheBalancingDamperisusedtocontroltheamountofairflowingthroughtheduct.TheFireDamperisusedtorestricttheflowoffirethroughtheduct,incasethebuildingcatchesafire.TheRectangularCurtainFireShieldDamperisalsousedasashieldagainstfirebutthistypeoffiredampersareintheformofcurtains.TheRectangularSmokeShieldDamperPTCisusedasashieldagainstsmoke.PTCisatypeofsmokeshielddamper which stands for Proportional Torque Control. Click on the + sign adjacent to the requiredcategory;alistwithrelativedamperswillbedisplayed.Selecttherequireddamperfromthelist;varioussizesfortheselecteddamperwillbedisplayedinthePartSizeNamedrop-downlistavailablebelowthePreviewarea.Selecttherequiredsizefromthelistandclickinthedrawingarea;theselecteddamperwill be placed at the specified location and a compass will be displayed below the damper in thedrawingarea.Usingthiscompass,youcanspecifythevalueofrotationdynamically.Afterspecifyingallrequiredparameters,theDamperwillbeplacedatthedesiredpointandangle.ClosethedialogboxbychoosingtheClosebuttonfromtheAddMulti-ViewPartsdialogbox.
![Page 176: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/176.jpg)
Figure4-9TheAddMulti-viewPartsdialogboxwithoptionsfordampers
VAVUnitAVAVunitisanequipmentusedtovarythespeedofairflowingthroughtheduct.ThetemperatureofairtobesuppliedtoVAVunitisconstant;thereforetheairflowisregulatedtomeettheuserrequirements.ToaddaVAVUnit in theHVACsystem,choose theVAVUnit tool fromtheEquipment drop-down in theBuildpaneloftheHometab;theAddMulti-viewPartsdialogboxwillbedisplayedwiththeoptionsforVAVunit,asshowninFigure4-10.In thisdialogbox, thereare twooptionsavailableforselectingthetypeofVAVunitfortheHVACsystemDesign:AirTerminalsandVAVunits.TheAirTerminalsoptionhasasuboptionOutletPlenums.TheVAVunitshasthesuboption,VAVBoxeswhichcanbeopenedintheAddMultiViewPartswindow.Clickon the+signadjacent to therequiredcategory;a listof relativeVAVboxeswill bedisplayed. Select the requiredVAVunit from theVAVUnits category; the standardsizes available for the selected VAV unit will be displayed in the Part Size Name drop-down list.Choosetherequiredsizefromthedrop-downlistandclickinthedrawingareatoplacetheVAVunit;acompasswillbedisplayedattachedtotheVAVunitforspecifyingtheangle.SpecifytherotationangleandthenchoosetheClosebuttonfromtheAddMulti-viewPartsdialogbox.
![Page 177: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/177.jpg)
Figure4-10TheAddMulti-viewPartsdialogboxwithoptionsforVAVunitEquipmentUsingtheEquipmenttool,youcanaddanyequipmentavailableinAutoCADMEPtothestructure.WhenyouchoosetheEquipmenttoolfromtheEquipmentdrop-downoftheBuildpaneloftheHometab,theAddMulti-view Parts dialog box will be displayed, as shown in Figure 4-11. Click on the + signadjacenttotheMechanicalcategoryinthedialogbox;themechanicalequipmentavailableinAutoCADMEPwillbedisplayedinatreestructure,refertoFigure4-12.
![Page 178: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/178.jpg)
Figure4-11TheAddMulti-viewPartsdialogbox
Figure4-12TheAddMulti-viewPartsdialogboxwithmechanicalequipmentClickonthe+signadjacenttotherequiredcomponent;variousoptionsrelatedtotheselectedcomponentwillbedisplayedinalist.Selecttherequiredoptionfromthelistandthenclickinthedrawingareato
![Page 179: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/179.jpg)
placethecomponent.Acompasswillalsobedisplayedbelowthecomponent.Usingthiscompass,youcanrotatethecomponentattherequiredangle.Afterspecifyingtheangle,choosetheClosebuttonfromtheAddMulti-viewPartsdialogboxtoexitthedialogbox.DUCTLINEDuct line is the circuit of ducts inserted in a particular area to create desired air and temperatureconditions.Beforecreatingaductline,youmustknowaboutthespecificationssuchassizeofduct,airflowrate in theduct,numberofbranches required,and thesizeofduct in thebranches.Afterenteringthesespecifications,youwillcreatethepathofductline.Themethodsofsizingtheductandcreatingaductlinearediscussednext.SizingtheDuctLineInAutoCADMEP,theductsizeofmainductlineisdependentontwoparameters:thetotalamountofairtobecirculatedwhichiscontrolledbyFlowRatevariableandthevelocityofair in theductwhichiscontrolledbyVelocityvariable.Thesetwovariablesarediscussednext.FlowRateYoucanchangethevalueofthisvariablebyusingtheFlowRateeditboxavailableintheSizingrolloutofthePROPERTIESpalettewhichisdisplayedonchoosingtheDucttool.Flowrateisthetotalvolumeofairthatistobeprovidedinaspecificarea.EntertheflowratevalueintheFlowRateeditboxinthePROPERTIES palette; the value of friction and velocity will be calculated according to the rulesspecifiedinthedesignpropertiesofducttype.VelocityVelocity of air flowing through a duct is a dependent variable. You cannot control the value of thisvariabledirectly.Thisvariableisdependentontheductsize.Ifyouincreasetheductsize,thevalueofvelocitywillautomaticallydecreaseandalsothevalueoffrictionwilldecrease.Ifyoudecreasethesizeofduct,thevalueofvelocityandfrictionwillincrease.Inotherwordswiththeductsize,youcancontrolthevalueof velocity.Note that thevalueof velocity and friction also changes according to theoptionselectedintheSystemdrop-downlistintheBASICrollout.RoutingtheDuctLineRoutingistheprocessofcreatingaductlineinalayout.Routingofductinvolvesmanyfactorssuchaspositionofhandlingunits,positionofdiffusers,andlayoutofbuilding.Therearesomemajorpointsthataretobeconsideredwhileroutingtheductlinethatarediscussednext.1.Duct lineshouldberouted insuchaway that itdoesnotpass throughanarea that ishavinga largetemperaturedifferencefromtheairinsidetheduct.
2.Rise/Slopeofductmustbedeterminedafterconsideringthetemperatureofairinsidetheduct.3.Ductroutesmustbeasstraightaspossible.4.Ductmustbelargerattheopeningpointtotheairfilterentryandatthereturningpointoftheunit.5.Alwaystrytoroutethrougheitherthebasementortheatticsothatyoucansupporttheductsbyusingtheducthangers.
![Page 180: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/180.jpg)
6.Itisalwaysgoodtopositiontheairterminalsandairhandlingunitfirstbeforeroutingtheductline.7.Foraverticalrun,theductmustbefastenedtoawall.DUCTDuctisanobjectwhichisusedtodeliverorremoveairfromanHVACsystem.TherearetwotypesofductsavailableinAutoCADMEP:DuctandFlexDuct.ToolstocreatetheseductsareavailableintheDuctdrop-downintheBuildpaneloftheHometabintheRibbon.Thesetoolsarediscussednext.DuctThistoolisusedtocreatearigidductintheHVACsystem.Thisductcanberectangular,oval,round,orcustomshaped.Tocreatearigidduct,choosetheDucttoolfromtheDuctdrop-downintheBuildpaneloftheHometabintheRibbon;thePROPERTIESpalettewillbedisplayed,asshowninFigure4-13.TheoptionsavailableinthePROPERTIESpalettearediscussednext.
Figure4-13ThePROPERTIESpalettedisplayedonchoosingtheDucttoolDescriptionThisfieldisavailableintheGeneral>BASICrolloutinthePROPERTIESpaletteoftheDesign tab.Whenyouclickinthisfield,theDescriptiondialogboxwillbedisplayed,asshowninFigure4-14.YoucanenterdescriptionabouttheselectedobjectinthetextboxavailablebelowtheEdit thedescription
![Page 181: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/181.jpg)
forthisobjectoption.ChooseOKtoexitthedialogbox.
Figure4-14TheDescriptiondialogbox
SystemThisdrop-downlistisavailableintheBASIC>GeneralrolloutintheDesigntabofthePROPERTIESpalette.Thisdrop-down listcontainsvariousoptions for systemdefinitionsof theduct.Bydefault, theStandard(STD)optionisselectedinthisdrop-downlist.
RoutingPreferencesThisdrop-downlistisavailableintheBASIC>Dimensionsrollout.Theoptionsavailableinthisdrop-downlistareusedforspecifyingtheroutingstyleofduct.Bydefault,theStandardoptionisselectedinthisdrop-downlist.
ShapeThis drop-down list is available in theBASIC >Dimensions rollout. This drop-down list containsoptions to change the shape of duct. There are four options available in this drop-down list:Oval,Rectangular,Round,andUndefined.Generally,roundandrectangularductsareusedinindustries.
WidthThiseditbox isavailable in theDimensions rolloutwhen theRectangularorOval option is selectedfromtheShape drop-down list.You can specify thevalueofwidthof theduct byusing this edit box.Whenyouclickontheinvertedtriangleadjacenttothiseditbox,adrop-downlistisdisplayed.Youcanselect the standard sizes available for width from this edit box. TheCalculate Size toggle button isavailable on the right of this edit box.Whenyou choose thebutton, thewidthof duct is automaticallycalculatedonthebasisoftheflowrate,friction,velocity,andsoon.Theselectedsizeforwidthoftheductcanbelockedbyclickingonthelockbuttonontheextremerightofthiseditbox.HeightThiseditbox isavailable in theDimensions rolloutwhen theRectangularorOval option is selectedfromtheShapedrop-downlist.Usingthiseditbox,youcanspecifytheheightofduct.DiameterThiseditboxisavailableintheDimensionsrolloutwhentheRoundoptionisselectedfromtheShapedrop-down list. Using this edit box, you can specify the diameter of duct. TheCalculate Size togglebutton is available in the right of this edit box.When you choose this button, the diameter of duct is
![Page 182: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/182.jpg)
automaticallycalculatedonthebasisofparameterssuchasflowrate,friction,andvelocity.FlowRateUsingthiseditbox,youcanspecifytherateofflowoffluidthroughtheduct.Theflowrateisspecifiedinliterspersecond.FrictionThisfieldisavailableintheDimensions>Sizing rollout.Thisfieldshowsthevalueoffrictionactingagainst the flow of fluid through the duct. The value in this field is controlled by theDuct SystemDefinitionssectionintheStyleManager.
VelocityThisfieldisavailableintheDimensions>Sizingrollout.Thisfieldshowsthevalueofvelocityoffluidpassingthroughtheduct.ThevalueinthisfieldisalsocontrolledbyDuctSystemDefinitionssectionintheStyleManager.SpecifyCutLengthThisdrop-downlistisavailableintheDimensions>Sizingrollout.Therearetwooptionsavailableinthisdrop-downlist:YesandNo.Bydefault,theNooptionisselectedinthisdrop-downlist.OnselectingtheYesoption,youcanspecifythecutlengthintherespectivefield.
CutLengthThiseditboxisavailableintheDimensions>SizingrolloutonlywhentheYesoptionisselectedfromtheSpecifyCutLength drop-down list.You can specify the value of cut length in this edit box. Cutlengthisthemaximumlengthofapieceofductthatisavailableforcreatingductline.
ElevationThiseditbox isavailable in theBASIC>Placement rollout.Using thiseditbox,youcanspecify thevalueofelevationofductfromtheground.StartElevationThisfieldisavailableintheBASIC>Placementrollout.ThevaluespecifiedinthisfieldisthesameastheonespecifiedintheElevationeditbox.JustifyThisdrop-downlistisavailableinthePlacement>Justificationrollout.Variousoptionsareavailableinthisdrop-downlisttochangethejustificationofduct.HorizontalOffsetThiseditboxisavailableinthePlacement>Justificationrollout.Usingthiseditbox,youcanspecifythehorizontaldistancevaluebywhichtheductisplacedfromtheselectedjustificationpoint.VerticalOffsetThiseditboxisavailableinthePlacement>Justificationrollout.Usingthiseditbox,youcanspecify
![Page 183: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/183.jpg)
theverticaldistancevaluebywhichtheductisplacedfromtheselectedjustificationpoint.BendMethodThis drop-down list is available in theRouting rollout and is used to define themethods of bendingappliedonabend in theductsystem.Thereare threeoptionsavailable in thisdrop-down list:Elbow,Offset,andTransition-Offset.TheElbowoptionisselectedbydefault.BendAngleThisdrop-downlistisavailableintheRoutingrolloutandisusedtospecifytheangleofbendthatistobeappliedtoanybendwhilecreatingaduct.ConnectiondetailsThisbuttonisavailableintheADVANCEDrollout.Whenyouchoosethisbutton,theConnectionDetailsdialogboxwillbedisplayed,asshowninFigure4-15.Therearetworolloutsavailableinthedialogboxthatcontainthedetailsoftheflowdirectionandtheconnectiontypeofinletandoutletconnections.
Figure4-15TheConnectionDetailsdialogbox
LiningthicknessThiseditboxisavailableintheADVANCEDrollout.Usingthiseditbox,youcanspecifythevalueofthicknessoflinerintheduct.
InsulationthicknessThis edit box is also available in the ADVANCED rollout and is used to specify the thickness ofinsulationappliedontheduct.
![Page 184: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/184.jpg)
SlopeformatTheoptionsinthisdrop-downlistareusedtospecifytheformatinwhichtheslopevaluewillbeentered.There are four options available in this drop-down list: Angle (Decimal Degrees); Percentage,100%=45degree;Percentage,100%=90degree;andRise/Run(Meters/Meters).SlopeThiseditboxisavailableintheADVANCED>RoutingOptionsrolloutofthePROPERTIESpalette.Youcanspecifythevalueofslopeinthiseditbox.TheformatinwhichthevaluewillbespecifiedinthiseditboxdependsontheoptionselectedintheSlopeformatdrop-downlist.Ifyouchangetheslopevaluewhileaddingmoreducts,thefittingatjointswilladjustautomaticallytoprovidethechangedslope.BranchfittingThisdrop-downlist isavailableintheADVANCED>RoutingOptions rolloutof thePROPERTIESpalette.Therearetwooptionsinthisdrop-downlist:TeeandTakeoff.WhentheTeeoptionisselectedinthedrop-downlist,thenthebranchestobecreatedwillbejoinedtothemainductthroughaTeefitting.WhentheTakeoffoptionisselectedinthedrop-downlist,thebrancheswillbejoinedtothemainductthroughtheTakeofffitting.Terminal-ductconnectionThisdrop-downlist isavailableintheADVANCED>RoutingOptions rolloutof thePROPERTIESpalette.Therearethreeoptionsavailableinthisdrop-downlist:Flexible,ElbowwithRigidDuct,andExtendedDuct.FittingSettingsThisoption isavailable in theADVANCED>RoutingOptions rolloutof thePROPERTIES palette.Whenyouclickonthisoption,theFittingSettingsdialogboxwillbedisplayed,asshowninFigure4-16.The options in this dialog box are used to change the type of fitting to be usedwhile creating thebranchesintheduct.
![Page 185: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/185.jpg)
Figure4-16TheFittingSettingsdialogbox
PreferencesThisoption isavailable in theADVANCED>RoutingOptions rolloutof thePROPERTIES palette.Whenyouclickonthisoption,theDuctLayoutPreferencesdialogboxwillbedisplayed,asshowninFigure4-17.Theoptionsinthisdialogboxareusedtodefinethelayoutpreferencesforcreatingaduct.Usingtheoptionsinthisdialogbox,youcansetthepreferencesforvariablessuchasSlope,Elevation,Labelstyle,Flowarrowstyle,andElbowlayout.
Figure4-17TheDuctLayoutPreferencesdialogbox
StyleThisdrop-downlistisavailableintheADVANCED>LabelsandFlowArrows>LabelsrolloutofthePROPERTIESpalette.Theoptionsinthisdrop-downlistareusedtoapplythelabelstylestoduct.LayoutmethodThisdrop-downlistisavailableintheADVANCED>LabelsandFlowArrows>LabelsrolloutofthePROPERTIESpaletteonlywhenNONE isnotselectedfromtheStyledrop-downlist.Thereare twooptionsavailableinthisdrop-downlist:BydistanceandByquantity.Theseoptionsareusedtospecifythelayoutmethodofducts.
![Page 186: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/186.jpg)
NumberofLabelsThis edit box is available in theADVANCED>Labels and Flow Arrows >Labels rollout of thePROPERTIESpaletteonlywhenNONEisnotselectedfromtheStyledrop-downlistandByquantityisselectedfromtheLayoutmethoddrop-downlist.Usingthiseditbox,youcanspecifytotalnumberoflabelsappliedonasegmentduct.DistancebetweenThis edit box is available in theADVANCED>Labels and Flow Arrows >Labels rollout of thePROPERTIESpaletteonlywhenNONEisnotselectedfromtheStyledrop-downlistandBydistanceis selected from theLayoutmethod drop-down list.Using this edit box, you can specify the distancebetweentwoconsecutivelabelsappliedonaduct.TheStyle,Layoutmethod,NumberofLabels,andDistancebetweenoptionsarealsoavailableintheFlowArrowsrollout.TheseoptionsworkforflowarrowsinthesamewayasforLabels.FlexDuctThistoolisusedtocreateflexibleductsintheHVACsystem.Tocreateaflexibleduct,choosetheFlexDucttoolfromtheDuctdrop-downintheBuildpaneloftheHometabintheRibbon;thePROPERTIESpalette will be displayed, refer to Figure 4-13. Some of the options available in thePROPERTIESpaletteafterselectingflexducthavealreadybeendiscussedintheDuctsectionofthischapter.Restoftheoptionsarediscussednext.SegmentThisdrop-downlistisavailableintheBASIC>RoutingrolloutinthePROPERTIESpalette.Therearethree options available in this drop-down list:Line,Arc, andSpline. Using theLine option, you cancreateaflexductintheformofastraightline.UsingtheArcoption,youcancreateaflexductintheformofanarc.UsingtheSplineoption,youcancreateaflexductintheformofaspline.RadiusfactorThiseditboxisavailableintheBASIC>RoutingrolloutinthePROPERTIESpalette.Usingthiseditbox,youcanspecifythevalueofradiusonthebend.Thevalueenteredinthiseditboxismultipliedbythediametervalueoftheflexducttogivetheradiusatthebend.ThiseditboxisavailableonlywhentheLineoptionisselectedintheSegmentdrop-downlist.
GraphicsThisdrop-downlist isavailableintheADVANCED>Graphics rollout in thePROPERTIESpalette.Thisdrop-downlistisavailableforboth1-Lineand2-Lineannotationsintherespectiverollouts.Usingthe options available in this drop-down list, you can specify the shape and pattern of the annotativerepresentationoftheductinthe2-Ddrawing.
PitchThiseditboxisavailableintheADVANCED>GraphicsrolloutinthePROPERTIESpalette.Thiseditboxisavailableforboth1-Lineand2-Lineannotationsintherespectiverollouts.Thiseditboxisusedtospecifythelengthofonepieceflexduct.
![Page 187: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/187.jpg)
VertexThiseditboxisavailableintheADVANCED>Geometry rollout in thePROPERTIESpalettewhenyou select an already created flex duct.Using this edit box, you can select an available vertex of theflexibleduct.Youcanalsochangetheselectedvertexbyusingthescrollbuttonsavailableintherightoftheeditbox.Ondoingso,theoptionsrelevanttotheselectedvertexwillbedisplayed.VertexXThiseditboxisavailableintheADVANCED>GeometryrolloutinthePROPERTIESpalette.Usingthiseditbox,youcanspecifyXcoordinateoftheselectedvertex.VertexYThiseditboxisavailableintheADVANCED>GeometryrolloutinthePROPERTIESpalette.Usingthiseditbox,youcanspecifyYcoordinateoftheselectedvertex.VertexZThiseditboxisavailableintheADVANCED>GeometryrolloutinthePROPERTIESpalette.Usingthiseditbox,youcanspecifyZcoordinateoftheselectedvertex.DUCTFITTINGDuct fitting is used to connectmultiple ducts. The tools to add duct fitting are available in theDuctFittingdrop-downintheBuildpaneloftheHometabintheRibbon.Therearethreetoolsavailableinthis drop-down: Duct Fitting, Duct Custom Fitting, and Duct Transition Utility. These tools arediscussednext.DuctFittingThis tool is used to add a user specified fitting in theduct.On choosing this tool, thePROPERTIESpaletteisdisplayed,refertoFigure4-18.Variousoptionsavailableinthispalettearediscussednext.
![Page 188: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/188.jpg)
Figure4-18ThePROPERTIESpalettedisplayedafterchoosingtheDuctFittingtool
DescriptionThisfieldisavailableintheBASIC>GeneralrolloutinthePROPERTIESpalette.Whenyouclickinthisfield,theDescriptiondialogboxwillbedisplayed.Youcanwritedescriptionaboutthefittinginthistextbox.SystemThisdrop-downlist isavailable in theBASIC>General rolloutof thePROPERTIESpalette.Therearevariousoptions available in thisdrop-down list.Theseoptions areused to change the standardoffittingtobecreated.Bydefault,theStandard(STD)optionisselectedinthisdrop-downlist.PartThisfieldisavailableintheBASIC>GeneralrolloutofthePROPERTIESpalette.Whenyouclickinthisfield,theSelectPartdialogboxwillbedisplayed,refertoFigure4-19.Therearevarioustypesoffittings available for duct in this dialog box. All these fittings are displayed in the SELECT PARTFROMCATALOGrollout.Thefittingsinthisrolloutaredividedintogroupsinatreestructure.YoucanfiltertheavailablepartsdependingonyourrequirementsbyusingtheoptionsintheFILTER rolloutofthisdialogbox.ThefilteredoptionswillbedisplayedintheSELECTPARTSIZEareaofthisdialogbox.YoucanalsoselecttherequiredfittingfromtheHVACToolpalette.ThesefittingsareavailableintheFittingtabofthepalette.
![Page 189: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/189.jpg)
Figure4-19TheSelectPartdialogbox
CurrentSizeThis drop-down list is available in theBASIC>General rollout of thePROPERTIES palette. Theoptionsavailableinthisdrop-downlistareusedtochangethesizeofthecurrentselectedfitting.ConnectionsRolloutThisrolloutisavailableintheBASIC>DimensionsrolloutinthePROPERTIESpalette.Theoptionsinthisrolloutareusedtochangethedimensionsofaselectedfitting.Theoptionsinthisrolloutmayvarydependingontheselectedfitting.ElevationThiseditbox isavailable in theBASIC>Placement rollout in thePROPERTIESpalette.Using thisedit box, you can specify the value of height of fitting from the ground level. By default,UCS : 0 isdisplayedinthiseditbox.SpecifyrotationonscreenThisdrop-downlistisavailableintheBASIC>PlacementrolloutinthePROPERTIESpalette.Therearetwooptionsavailableinthisdrop-downlist:YesandNo. Ifyouselect theYesoption,youwillbepromptedtospecifytherotationvalueonscreenwhilecreatingthefitting.IfyouselecttheNooption,thenyouneedtospecifytherotationvalueintheeditboxavailableinthePROPERTIESpalette.
![Page 190: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/190.jpg)
RotationThiseditbox isavailable in theBASIC>Placement rollout in thePROPERTIESpalette.Using thiseditbox,youcanspecifythevalueofrotationofthefittingbeforeplacingitinthedrawing.ThiseditboxisavailableonlywhentheNooptionisselectedintheSpecifyrotationonscreendrop-downlist.VanesThisdrop-down list is available in theADVANCED>PROPERTIES palette.There are twooptionsavailableinthisdrop-downlist:YesandNo.IfyouselecttheYesoption,thevaneswillbeaddedtothefittingandifyouselecttheNooption,thevaneswillnotbeaddedtothefitting.DuctCustomFittingThis tool isusedforcreatingcustomfittings in theduct line.Tocreateacustomfitting,youmusthavelines,arcs,orpolylinescreatedinthedrawingarea.ChoosetheDuctCustomFittingtoolfromtheDuctFitting drop-down; you will be prompted to select lines, arcs, or polylines. Select lines, arcs, orpolylinesfromthedrawingareaandthenpressENTER;theCreateDuctCustomFittingdialogboxwillbedisplayed,refertoFigure4-20.
Figure4-20TheCreateDuctCustomFittingdialogbox
Dependingontheentitiesselected,thesegmentswillbedisplayedinthedialogboxasSegmentnofm,wheren istheserialnumberofthecurrentsegmentandm isthetotalnumberofsegmentsinthefitting.Using theShape drop-down list available in theSegmentn ofm area, you can change the shape ofsegmentsinthefitting.Therearethreeoptionsavailableinthisdrop-downlist:Rectangular,Round,andOval. After selecting the required option, you can specify the relevant parameters in the edit boxesavailablebelowthisdrop-downlist.Afterspecifyingtheparameters,youcanchoosetheNext>buttontochangetheparametersofnextsegment.YoucanalsoselecttheApplytoAllSegmentscheckbox,ifyouwanttokeepsameparametersfortheothersegments.YoucancreatemiteredendsatthestartpointortheendpointbyselectingthecorrespondingMiteredEndscheckboxes.Afterspecifyingparametersforallthesegments,choosetheFinishbutton;youwillbepromptedwhethertodeletethebasegeometryornot.EnterYesorNoatthecommandprompt;thecustomfittingwillbecreated.DuctTransitionUtility
![Page 191: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/191.jpg)
This tool isused to connect twoparallelducts, duct fittings,or equipment.Various shapes that canbeconnectedbyusingthistoolaregivennext.
RoundtoRoundRoundtoRectangularRoundtoOvalRectangulartoRectangularRectangulartoOvalRectangulartoRoundOvaltoOvalOvaltoRectangularOvaltoRound
Tocreateaducttransition,choosetheDuctTransitionUtilitytoolfromtheDuctFittingdrop-down;youwill be prompted to select the first duct, duct fitting, or MvPart. Select the first entity; you will beprompted to select the second entity. Select the duct, duct fitting, orMvPart to be joined; a transitionfittingwillbecreated,joiningboththeentities.
TUTORIALTUTORIAL1Inthistutorial,youwilladdamechanicalsystem(HVACsystem)inthebuildingcreatedinTutorial2ofChapter 3. You can also download the architectural file from www.cadcim.com. Path of the file is:Textbooks > CAD/CAM > AutoCAD MEP > AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers > Tutorial. ThebuildingafteraddingthemechanicalsystemisshowninFigure4-21.TheplanforthemechanicalsystemisgiveninFigure4-22.Assumethemissingdimensions.
(Expectedtime:30min)
Figure4-21Thedrawingafteraddingmechanicalsystem
![Page 192: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/192.jpg)
Figure4-22Theplanformechanicalsystem
ZoneWiseAirflow:Zone1:144m3/h=40l/sZone2:180m3/h=50l/sZone3:720m3/h=200l/sThefollowingstepsarerequiredtocompletethistutorial:a.Calculatethezonewiseairflow.b.InstalltheAirTerminalsonthebasisofairflowrequiredinazone.c.AddtheductlinetotheAirTerminalsd.InstalltheAHUonthebasisofrequirement.e.Calculatethesizeofductonthebasisofrequirements.f.Installtheductlinesandductfittingsinthesystem.Now,youneedtoopentheprojectfilecreatedinTutorial2ofChapter3.
OpeningtheDrawingFile1.ChooseOpen>DrawingfromtheApplicationMenu;theSelectFiledialogboxisdisplayed.2.SelectthefilecreatedinTutorial2ofChapter3andchoosetheOpenbutton; thefile isopenedanddisplayed,asshowninFigure4-23.
![Page 193: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/193.jpg)
Figure4-23Thedrawingafterdividingintosections
PlacingAirTerminalsDepending on the air flow required for each zone and the area to be covered, you need to install thediffusers.
1.ChoosetheAirTerminaltoolfromtheEquipmentdrop-downintheBuildpaneloftheHome tab intheRibbon;theAddMulti-viewPartsdialogboxisdisplayedwiththeoptionsrelatedtodiffusers.
2.Select600x600mmSquareFacedCeilingDiffuserfromthepartlistdisplayedintheParttabofthedialogbox;thepartsfortheselectedcategoryaredisplayedinthePartSizeNamedrop-downlist.
3.Selectthepartwith150mmneckfromthedrop-downlist,setthevalueofelevationas4500,andinstallthediffusersaccordingtotheairflowrequirementsinthezones,refertoFigure4-24.
4.Selectthediffusers4,5inZone1and1,2inZone2.Changetheflowratebyenteringthevalue20l/sinFloweditboxavailableintheExtendedDatatabofthePROPERTIESpalette.
5.Selectthefivediffusers9,10,11,12,13inZone3andchangetheflowratebyenteringthevalue40l/sinFloweditboxavailableintheExtendedDatatabofthePROPERTIESpalette.
![Page 194: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/194.jpg)
Figure4-24Thedrawingafteraddingdiffusers
6.Selectthetwodiffusers6,3adjacenttothewallofZone1andZone2.Changetheflowratebyenteringthevalue40l/sinFloweditboxintheExtendedDatatabofthePROPERTIESpalette.
7.Selectthefourdiffusers7,8,14,15adjacenttothewallofZone3andchangetheflowratebyenteringthevalue50l/sinFloweditboxintheExtendedDatatabofthePROPERTIESpalette.
AddingtheDuctLinetotheDiffusersNow,youneedtoroutetheductlinebyusingthe1-Linetool.1.Tocreateroutingoftheductline,choosethe1-LinetoolfromtheByShapeareaoftheDucttabintheToolPalette;youwillbepromptedtospecifythestartingpointoftheductline.
2. Select the Fresh Air - Make-up (FAMAKE-UP) option from the System drop-down list in theBASIC>GeneralrolloutoftheDesigntabinthePROPERTIESpaletteandcreatethefreshairductline,asshowninFigure4-25.
Figure4-25Thedrawingaftercreatingfreshairductline
![Page 195: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/195.jpg)
3.Again,choosethe1-LinetoolandselecttheReturn(RA)optionfromtheSystemdrop-downlist intheGeneralrolloutoftheBASICrolloutoftheDesigntabinthePROPERTIESpalette.
4.Createthereturnductline,asshowninFigure4-26.
Figure4-26Thedrawingaftercreatingthereturnductline5.Aftercreatingtheductlines,choosetheAcceptoptionfromtheCommandbar.
AddinganAirHandlerNow,youneedtoaddanAirHandlerinthedrawingtocompletetheductline.1.ChoosetheAirHandler toolfromtheEquipmentdrop-downinBuildpanelof theHome tab in theRibbon;theAddMulti-viewPartsdialogboxisdisplayed,asshowninFigure4-27.
![Page 196: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/196.jpg)
Figure4-27TheAddMulti-viewPartsdialogbox
2.SelecttheAirHandlingUnits-FloorMountedFrontDischargeequipmentfromthePartslistintheParttabofthisdialogbox.ThepreviewoftheequipmentisdisplayedontherightofthePartlist.
3.Specifytheelevationvalueas4500intheElevationeditbox.4.Clickinthedrawingareatospecifythelocationofequipment;youarepromptedtospecifytherotationangleforequipment.
5.Entertheanglevalue0;theequipmentisplacedatthespecifiedlocation,refertoFigure4-28.
Figure4-28Thedrawingafteraddingequipment
Now,youneedtoaddductlinetotheequipment.
![Page 197: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/197.jpg)
6.Selecttheequipment;the+signisdisplayedonvariousportsoftheequipment.7.Clickonthe+signavailableondifferentportsonebyoneandthenconnecttheequipment,asshowninFigure4-29.
Figure4-29Thedrawingafterconnectingtheequipmentwiththeductline
CalculatingDuctSizeNow,youneedtocalculatetheductsizeofeachsegment.1.Select theduct lines,asshowninFigure4-30andchoosetheCalculateDuctSizesbuttonfromtheCalculationspaneloftheDuctcontextualtabintheRibbon;theDuctSystemSizeCalculatordialogboxisdisplayed,refertoFigure4-31.
Figure4-30Theductlinestobeselectedforcalculatingductsize
2.ChangeallthesettingsinthedialogboxaccordingtoFigure4-31.
![Page 198: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/198.jpg)
Figure4-31TheDuctSystemSizeCalculatordialogbox3.Choose theStart button from the4 areaof thedialogbox; theMultiplePartsFound dialog box isdisplayed,refertoFigure4-32.
![Page 199: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/199.jpg)
Figure4-32TheMultiplePartsFounddialogbox
4. Select the desired part from theSelect a detailedpart area of the dialog box and choose theOKbutton;theselectedpartisaddedatthepromptedposition.
5.Similarly,addallthepartsatthepromptedlocationsoneaftertheother.6.After adding all the parts, theDuctSystemSizeCalculator dialog box is displayed, as shown inFigure4-33.
![Page 200: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/200.jpg)
Figure4-33TheDuctSystemSizeCalculatordialogboxaftercompletingcalculations7.Ifthesuccessrateisdisplayedas100%,choosetheClosebuttonandexitthedialogbox.8. Ifsuccess rate isnotdisplayedas100%,choose theViewEventLogbuttonfromthe5 areaof thedialogbox;theEventLogdialogboxisdisplayed,refertoFigure4-34.
![Page 201: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/201.jpg)
Figure4-34TheEventLogdialogbox
9.SelecttheobjectintheObjectcolumnthatshowsanerrorintheErrorcolumn,refertoFigure4-34,andthenchoosetheHighlightandZoomtheselectedobjectbuttonfromthedialogbox;theselectedobjectishighlightedinthedrawingarea,refertoFigure4-35.
Figure4-35Theobjectcausingerrorhighlightedinthedrawingarea10.Rectify the errors according to the descriptiongiven in theDescription column of theEventLogdialogboxandthenchoosetheStartbuttonagainafteralltheerrorsarerectified.
Thedrawingaftercalculatingtheductsizeisdisplayed,asshowninFigure4-36.
![Page 202: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/202.jpg)
Figure4-36Thedrawingaftercalculatingductsize
SavingtheDrawingFile1.ChooseSavefromtheApplicationmenutosavethedrawingfile.
SELF-EVALUATIONTESTAnswerthefollowingquestionsandthencomparethemtothosegivenattheendofthischapter:1.TheAirHandleroptionisavailableintheEquipmentdrop-downoftheBuildpanel.(T/F)
2.TheAHUInspectionModuleisusedtocheckthequantityofairtobespreadinthedesiredarea.(T/F)3.AnAHUMixingBoxhasthreeports,oneforinletof___________,oneforinletoffreshair,andonefor___________ofmixedair.
4.Youcanspecifytheflowrateofanairterminalbyusingthe___________editbox.5.Inwhichofthefollowingdrop-downsistheFantoolavailable?(a)Equipment(b)DuctFitting(c)Duct(d)PipeREVIEWQUESTIONSAnswerthefollowingquestions:1.TheAHUMixingBoxisanequipmentthatisusedtovarythespeedofairflowingthroughtheduct.(T/F)
2.UsingtheElevationeditbox,youcanspecifythevalueofelevationoftheobjectfromground.(T/F)3. There are three options available inAutoCADMEP for specifying bends of a duct: ___________,
![Page 203: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/203.jpg)
________,and___________.4.Forbranchfitting,youcanusetwooptions,_______and__________.5.Whichofthefollowingbuttonsisusedtocalculatetheductsizeofaductsystem?(a)CalculateDuctSizes(b)Duct(c)FlexibleDuct(d)DetailComponentsEXERCISEEXERCISE1Inthisexercise,youwilladdanHVACsysteminanoffice.TheofficeafteraddingtheHVACsystemisshown inFigure4-37.The plan for theHVAC system is given in Figure 4-38.You can download thearchitecturemodeloftheofficefromwww.cadcim.com.
(Expectedtime:30min)
Figure4-37TheHVACsystemintheoffice
![Page 204: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/204.jpg)
Figure4-38TheplanfortheHVACsystem
AnswerstoSelf-EvaluationTest1.T,2.F,3.Returningair,outlet,4.Flow(EachTerminal),5.Equipment
![Page 205: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/205.jpg)
Chapter5
CreatingPipingSystems
![Page 206: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/206.jpg)
LearningObjectivesAftercompletingthischapter,youwillbeableto:•Useequipmentrequiredinapipingsystem•Changebasicsettingsofapipingsystem•Configurepipelineoptions•Routethepipeline•Createpipeandflexpipe•Createacustompart
INTRODUCTIONInthischapter,youwilllearntheuseofvariousequipmentforcreatingapipingsystem.Apipingsystemis used to supply the desired amount ofwater to a specific location.A piping system is composed ofpipingequipmentandpipes.Pipingequipmentandpipestogethercontrolthetemperature,pressure,andflowrateofthefluidpassingthroughthepipes.Tocreateapipingsystem,youneedtoknowtheverticalheads, pressure, temperature, and flow rate of the fluid. These variables are used for deciding thecapacityoftheequipmentthataretobeaddedinthepipingsystem.Tocreateapipingsystem,choosethePiping option from theWorkspace Switching flyout; the Piping workspace will be invoked. TheequipmentavailableinthePipingworkspaceofAutoCADMEParediscussednext.ADDINGEQUIPMENTForcreatingapipingsystem,youneedtoaddrelatedequipmenttothegivenstructure.AlltheequipmentthatcanbeaddedwhileworkinginthePipingworkspaceareavailableintheEquipmentdrop-downoftheBuildpanelintheHometaboftheRibbon,refertoFigure5-1.Thetoolsavailableinthisdrop-downarediscussednext.
Figure5-1TheEquipmentdrop-down
HeatExchangerA heat exchanger is an equipment or a devicewhich is used to transfer heat efficiently between twofluids. This heat transfer can occur through conduction or convection. To add a heat exchanger to the
![Page 207: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/207.jpg)
drawing,choosetheHeatExchangertoolfromtheEquipmentdrop-downavailableintheBuildpanelof theHome tab in theRibbon; theAddMulti-viewParts dialog boxwill be displayed, as shown inFigure 5-2. Select the Shell and Tube Heat Exchangers from the Heat Exchanger category of theMechanicalnode;previewoftheselectedcomponentwillbedisplayedontherightinthedialogbox.TheD1,D2,D3,andD4inthePreviewareaindicatethediametersofportsavailableontheheatexchanger.Additionally,youcanselecttherequiredsizefortheheatexchangerfromthePartSizeNamedrop-downlist.YoucanspecifytheelevationvalueofheatexchangerfromthegroundorUCSbyusingtheElevationeditboxavailablebelowthePartSizeNamedrop-downlist.Afterspecifyingtherequiredparameters,click in the drawing area to place the heat exchanger; a compass will be displayed below the heatexchanger.Usingthiscompass,youcanrotatetheheatexchangerattherequiredangle.Afterspecifyingtheangle,choosetheClosebuttonfromtheAddMulti-viewPartsdialogboxtoexitit.Figure5-3showsaShellandTubeHeatExchanger.
Figure5-2TheAddMulti-viewPartsdialogbox
![Page 208: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/208.jpg)
Figure5-3TheShellandTubeHeatExchanger
PumpApumpisamechanicaldevicethatisusedtosupplyfluidtothedesiredpointbyusingmechanicalforce.Toaddapumpto thedrawing,choose thePump tool fromtheEquipment drop-downavailable in theBuildpaneloftheHometabintheRibbon;theAddMulti-viewPartsdialogboxwillbedisplayed,asshown in Figure 5-4. Select the Base Mounted Pumps sub-category from the Pumps category of theMechanical node. Select the required sub-category from the part list in the dialog box; various sizesavailableforthatsub-categoryaredisplayedinthePartSizeNamedrop-downlist.Selecttherequiredsizefromthedrop-downlist;youwillbeprompted tospecifyapoint in thedrawingarea toplace thepump.Clickinthedrawingareatoplacethepump;acompasswillbedisplayedbelowthepump.Usingthiscompass,youcanrotatethepumpattherequiredangle.Afterspecifyingtheangle,choosetheClosebuttonfromtheAddMulti-viewPartsdialogboxtoexitit.Figure5-5showsabasemountedpump.
![Page 209: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/209.jpg)
Figure5-4TheAddMulti-viewPartsdialogboxdisplayedafterselectingthePumptool
Figure5-5Abasemountedpump
TankAtankisahollowspacecreatedinastructuretostorethefluidforlateruse.TherearetwotypesoftanksavailableinAutoCADMEP:ExpansionTankandStorageTank.Theexpansiontankactsasasafetytankforfluidheatingsystem.Thistankallowsthefluidtoexpandsothatitcanreleasepressure.Thestoragetankisusedtostorethefluidforlateruse.Toaddatanktothedrawing,choosetheTank toolfromtheEquipmentdrop-downavailableintheBuildpaneloftheHometabintheRibbon;theAddMulti-viewPartsdialogboxwillbedisplayed,asshowninFigure5-6.SelecttheFreestandingVerticalExpansionTankspartfromtheExpansionTankssub-categoryoftheTankscategoryinMechanicalequipment.Selecttherequiredpartfromthedialogbox;varioussizesavailableforthatsub-categoryaredisplayedinthe
![Page 210: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/210.jpg)
PartSizeNamedrop-downlist.Selecttherequiredsizefromthedrop-downlistanddouble-clickinthedrawingareatoplacethetank;acompasswillbedisplayedbelowthecomponent.Usingthiscompass,youcanrotate thecomponentat therequiredangle.Afterspecifying theangle,choose theClosebuttonfromtheAddMulti-viewPartsdialogboxtoexitthedialogbox.Figure5-7showsthetanksavailableinAutoCADMEP.
Figure5-6TheAddMulti-viewPartsdialogboxdisplayedafterchoosingtheTanktool
Figure5-7ThetanksavailableinAutoCADMEP
ValveAvalveisadevicethatisusedtoregulateordirecttheflowoffluidthroughapassage.Therearevarioustypes of valves available inAutoCADMEP.These valves are available in twomain categories: FireProtectionandValves.Toaddavalvetothedrawing,choosetheValvetoolfromtheEquipmentdrop-downavailableintheBuildpaneloftheHometabintheRibbon;theAddMulti-viewPartsdialogbox
![Page 211: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/211.jpg)
willbedisplayed,asshowninFigure5-8.SelecttheGateValvesHoseConnectionpartfromtheHoseConnectionssub-categoryoftheFireProtectioncategoryintheMechanicalnode.Selecttherequiredpartfromthedialogbox;varioussizesavailableforthatsub-categoryaredisplayedinthePartSizeNamedrop-downlist.Selecttherequiredsizefromthedrop-downlistandclickinthedrawingareatoplacethevalve;acompasswillbedisplayedbelowthevalve.Usingthiscompass,youcanrotatethevalveattherequiredangle.Afterspecifyingtheangle,choosetheClosebuttonfromtheAddMulti-viewPartsdialogboxtoexitit.
Figure5-8TheAddMulti-viewPartsdialogboxdisplayedafterchoosingtheValvetool
EquipmentWhenyouchoose theEquipment tool fromtheEquipmentdrop-downof theBuildpanelof theHometab,theAddMulti-viewPartsdialogboxwillbedisplayed,asshowninFigure5-9.Clickonthe+signadjacenttotheMechanicalnodeintheParttab;themechanicalequipmentavailableinAutoCADMEPwillbedisplayedinatreestructure.
![Page 212: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/212.jpg)
Figure5-9TheAddMulti-viewPartsdialogboxClickonthe+signadjacenttotherequiredcomponent;variousoptionsrelatedtotheselectedcomponentwillbedisplayedinalist.Selecttherequiredoptionfromthelistandclickinthedrawingareatoplacethe component.A compasswill also be displayed below the component.Using this compass, you canrotatethecomponentattherequiredangle.Afterspecifyingtheangle,choosetheClosebuttonfromtheAddMulti-viewPartsdialogboxtoexit.CREATINGPIPELINESIn apiping system,pipe is amechanical object throughwhich the fluid flows.There are two typesofpipesavailableinAutoCADMEP:PipeandParallelPipe.ThetoolstocreatethesepipesareavailableinthePipedrop-downintheBuildpaneloftheHometabintheRibbon.Thesetoolsarediscussednext.PipeThistoolisusedtocreateapipelineinthepipingsystem.Theshapeofthepipecreatedbyusingthistoolisround.Whenyouchoosethistool,thePROPERTIESpalettewillbedisplayed,asshowninFigure5-10.Also,youwillbeprompted tospecify thestartpointof thepipe line.Click in thedrawingarea tospecify thestartpointof thepipe line;youwillbeprompted tospecify thenextpointof thepipe line.Specify the next point to create the pipe line.The options available in thePROPERTIES palette arediscussednext.
![Page 213: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/213.jpg)
Figure5-10ThePROPERTIESpalettedisplayedonchoosingthePipetoolDescriptionThisfieldisavailableintheBASIC>GeneralrolloutinthePROPERTIESpalette.Whenyouclickinthis field, the Description dialog box will be displayed, as shown in Figure 5-11. You can enterdescriptionfor thepipein theEditthedescriptionforthisobject textboxin thisdialogbox.ChooseOKtoexitthedialogbox.
![Page 214: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/214.jpg)
Figure5-11TheDescriptiondialogbox
SystemThis drop-down list is available in theBASIC>General rollout of thePROPERTIES palette. Thisdrop-downlistcontainsvarioussystemdefinitionsforthepipe.RoutingPreferencesThisdrop-downlistisavailableintheBASIC>Dimensionsrollout.Theoptionsavailableinthisdrop-downlistareusedforselectingroutingstyleofthepipe.Bydefault,theStandardoptionisselectedinthisdrop-downlist.NominalsizeThis drop-down list is available in theBASIC > Dimensions rollout. This drop-down list containsoptions tochange thesizeofpipe.Theoptionsavailable in thisdrop-down listwillchangedependingupontheoptionselectedfromtheRoutingpreferencesdrop-downlist.
SpecifyCutLengthThisdrop-downlistisavailableintheGeneral>Dimensionsrollout.Therearetwooptionsavailableinthisdrop-downlist:YesandNo.Bydefault,theNooptionisselectedinthisdrop-downlist.OnselectingtheYesoption,youcanspecifythecutlengthintherespectivefield.CutLengthThiseditboxisavailableintheDimensionsrolloutonlywhentheYesoptionisselectedintheSpecifyCutLength drop-down list.You can specify thevalueof cut length in this edit box.Cut length is themaximumavailablelengthofapieceofpipe.
ElevationThiseditbox isavailable in theBASIC>Placement rollout.Using thiseditbox,youcanspecify thevalueofelevationofpipefromtheground.StartelevationThisfieldisavailableintheBASIC>Placementrollout.ThevalueinthisfieldisthesameasspecifiedintheElevationeditbox.JustifyThisdrop-downlistisavailableinthePlacement>Justificationrollout.Theoptionsinthisdrop-down
![Page 215: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/215.jpg)
listareusedtochangethejustificationofpipe.HorizontaloffsetThiseditboxisavailableintheJustificationrolloutofthePlacementrollout.Usingthiseditbox,youcanspecifythehorizontaldistancevaluebywhichthepipeisdistantfromtheselectedjustificationpoint.VerticaloffsetThiseditboxisavailableintheJustificationrolloutofthePlacementrollout.Usingthiseditbox,youcanspecifytheverticaldistancevaluebywhichthepipeisdistantfromtheselectedjustificationpoint.SlopeformatThis drop-down list is available in theBASIC>Routing rollout of thePROPERTIES palette. Theoptions in thisdrop-down listareused tospecify the format inwhich theslopevaluewillbeentered.There are seven options available in this drop-down list: Angle (Decimal Degrees); Percentage,100%=45 degree; Percentage, 100%=90 degree; Rise/Run (Millimeters/Millimeters); Run(Millimeters),Rise=(1Millimeters);Rise(Millimeters),Run=(10Millimeters);andFractionalRise(Millimeters),Run=(10Millimeters).InAutoCADMEP2015,theslopealsoincludesthegravityfactorinit.SlopeThiseditboxisavailableintheBASIC>RoutingrolloutofthePROPERTIESpalette.Youcanspecifythevalue of slope in this edit box.The format inwhich the valuewill be specifieddependsupon theoptionselectedfromtheSlopeformatdrop-downlist.Ifyouchangetheslopevaluewhileaddingmorepipes,thefittingatjointswilladjustautomaticallytoprovidethechangedslope.BendmethodThis drop-down list is used to specify themethodof bending that is to be appliedon anybendwhilecreating a pipe line. There are twomethods of bending available in this drop-down list:Elbow andOffset.BendangleThisdrop-downlistisusedtospecifytheangleofbendthatistobeappliedonanybendwhilecreatingapipe.Bydefault,theValuefromCatalogoptionisselectedinthisdrop-downlist.Therefore,thebendanglespecifiedinthecatalogisused.Youcanspecifyadesiredvaluebyclickingonthisdrop-downlist.BranchangleThisdrop-downlist isusedtospecifythelateralangleofTee that is tobeappliedonanybendwhilecreatingapipe.Bydefault,theValuefromCatalogoptionisselectedinthisdrop-downlist.Therefore,thebendanglespecifiedinthecatalogisused.Youcanspecifyadesiredvaluebyclickingonthisdrop-downlist.ConnectiondetailsThisbuttonisavailableintheADVANCEDrollout.Whenyouchoosethisbutton,theConnectionDetailsdialogboxwillbedisplayed, refer toFigure5-12.Thereare two rollouts available in thedialogbox
![Page 216: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/216.jpg)
whichcontainthedetailsaboutboththeconnections.
Figure5-12TheConnectionDetailsdialogbox
InsulationthicknessThis edit box is also available in the ADVANCED rollout and is used to specify the thickness ofinsulationappliedinthepipe.UsefittingtoleranceThisdrop-downlist isavailableintheADVANCED>RoutingOptions rolloutof thePROPERTIESpalette.Therearetwooptionsinthisdrop-downlist:YesandNo.WhentheYesoptionisselectedinthedrop-downlist,thebranchfittingswillbeconnectedtothemainpipe,consideringthefittingtolerances.IftheNo option is selected in the drop-down list, the brancheswill be joined to themain pipewithoutconsideringthefittingtolerances.JointdirectionThisdrop-downlist isavailableintheADVANCED>RoutingOptions rolloutof thePROPERTIESpalette.Thereare twooptionsavailable in thisdrop-down list:Male intoFemaleandFemaleout toMale.BranchfittingThisdrop-downlist isavailableintheADVANCED>RoutingOptions rolloutof thePROPERTIESpalette.Theoptionsinthisdrop-downlistareusedtospecifythetypeoffittingtobeappliedonabranch.Therearefiveoptionsavailableinthisdrop-downlist:Takeoffonly,Teeonly,TeeorWye(Lateral),Wye(Lateral)only,andWye(Lateral)orTee.
![Page 217: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/217.jpg)
FittingSettingThisoption isavailable in theADVANCED>RoutingOptions rolloutof thePROPERTIES palette.Whenyouclickonthisoption,theFittingSettingsdialogboxwillbedisplayed,asshowninFigure5-13.Theoptionsinthisdialogboxareusedtochangethetypeoffittingtobeappliedwhilecreatingthebranchesinthepipe.
Figure5-13TheFittingSettingsdialogbox
PreferencesThisoption isavailable in theADVANCED>RoutingOptions rolloutof thePROPERTIES palette.Whenyouclickonthisoption,thePipeLayoutPreferencesdialogboxwillbedisplayed,asshowninFigure5-14.Theoptionsinthisdialogboxareusedtodefinethelayoutpreferencesforcreatingapipe.Usingtheoptionsinthisdialogbox,youcansetthepreferencesforparameterssuchasSlope,Elevation,Labelstyle,Flowarrowstyle,andElbowlayout.
![Page 218: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/218.jpg)
Figure5-14ThePipeLayoutPreferencesdialogbox
StyleThisdrop-downlistisavailableintheADVANCED>LabelsandFlowArrows>LabelsrolloutofthePROPERTIESpalette.Theoptionsinthisdrop-downlistareusedtoapplythelabelstylestopipe.
LayoutmethodThisdrop-downlistisavailableintheADVANCED>LabelsandFlowArrows>LabelsrolloutofthePROPERTIESpaletteonlywhenNONEisnotselectedfromtheStyledrop-downlist.Theoptions inthisdrop-downlistareusedtospecifythetypeoflayoutforpipes.Therearetwooptionsavailableinthisdrop-downlist:BydistanceandByquantity.NumberofLabelsThis edit box is available in theADVANCED > Labels and Flow Arrows > Labels rollout of thePROPERTIESpaletteonlywhenNONEisnotselectedintheStyledrop-downlistandByquantityisselectedintheLayoutmethoddrop-downlist.Usingthiseditbox,youcanspecifythetotalnumberoflabelsonasegmentpipe.Distancebetween
![Page 219: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/219.jpg)
This edit box is available in theADVANCED > Labels and Flow Arrows > Labels rollout of thePROPERTIESpaletteonlywhenNONEisnotselectedintheStyledrop-downlistandBydistanceisselectedintheLayoutmethoddrop-downlist.Usingthiseditbox,youcanspecifythedistancebetweentwoconsecutivelabelsonapipe.TheStyle,Layoutmethod,NumberofLabels,andDistancebetween options are also available forFlowArrows.Theseoptionshavealreadybeendiscussedinthischapter.ParallelPipesThis tool is used to create parallel pipes in the Piping system. To create a parallel pipe, choose theParallelPipestoolfromthePipedrop-downintheBuildpaneloftheHometabintheRibbon;youwillbepromptedtoselectabaselineobject.Selectabaselineobject,likeanearliercreatedpipe,fromthedrawingarea;youwillbepromptedtoselectparallelpipes.SelectparallelpipesfromthedrawingareaandpressENTER;youwillbepromptedtospecifythenextpointforcreatingparallelpipes.TheoptionsavailableinthePROPERTIESpaletteforparallelpipesaresameasdiscussedinthePipesectionofthischapter.ADDINGPIPEFITTINGSApipefittingisusedtojointwoormorepipes.YoucanaddpipefittingsbyusingthetoolsavailableinthePipe Fitting drop-down. This drop-down is available in theBuild panel of theHome tab in theRibbon.Thetoolsinthisdrop-downarediscussednext.PipeFittingThistoolisusedtoaddauserspecifiedfittinginthepipeline.Onchoosingthistool,thePROPERTIESpalettewillbedisplayed,refertoFigure5-15.Theoptionsavailableinthispalettearediscussednext.
![Page 220: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/220.jpg)
Figure5-15ThePROPERTIESpaletteforpipefittings
DescriptionThisfieldisavailableintheBASIC>GeneralrolloutinthePROPERTIESpalette.Whenyouclickinthisfield,theDescriptiondialogboxwillbedisplayed.Youcanwritedescriptionaboutthefittinginthetextboxavailableinthisdialogbox.SystemThis drop-down list is available in theBASIC>General rollout of thePROPERTIES palette. Theoptions in this drop-down list are used to change the standard of fitting to be created.By default, theStandard(STD)optionisselectedinthisdrop-downlist.
PartThisfieldisavailableintheBASIC>GeneralrolloutofthePROPERTIESpalette.Whenyouclickinthisfield,theSelectPartdialogboxwillbedisplayed,refertoFigure5-16.Therearevarioustypesoffittings available for pipe in this dialog box. All these fittings are displayed in the SELECT PARTFROMCATALOGrollout.Thefittingsinthisrolloutaredividedintogroupsinatreestructure.Youcanfilter theavailablepartsdependingonyourrequirementsbyusingtheoptionsavailableintheFILTERrolloutofthisdialogbox.ThefilteredoptionswillbedisplayedintheSELECTPARTSIZEareaofthisdialog box. You can also select the required fitting from the Piping Tool palette. These fittings areavailableintheFittingtabofthepalette.
![Page 221: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/221.jpg)
Figure5-16TheSelectPartdialogbox
CurrentsizeThisdrop-downlist isavailable in theBASIC>General rolloutof thePROPERTIESpalette.Therearevariousoptionsavailableinthisdrop-downlisttochangethesizeofthecurrentfitting.ConnectionsrolloutThis rollout is available in theBASIC>Dimensions rollout in thePROPERTIES palette.There arevarious options available in this rollout to change the dimensions of a selected fitting.Options in thisrolloutvarydependingontheselectedfitting.
ElevationThiseditbox isavailable in theBASIC>Placement rollout in thePROPERTIESpalette.Using thiseditbox,youcanspecifythevalueofheightoffittingfromthegroundlevel.SpecifyrotationonscreenThisdrop-downlistisavailableintheBASIC>PlacementrolloutinthePROPERTIESpalette.Therearetwooptionsavailableinthisdrop-downlist:YesandNo.IfyouselecttheYesoption,thenyouwillbepromptedtospecifytherotationvaluewhilecreatingthefitting.IfyouselecttheNooption,thenyouneedtospecifytherotationvalueintheeditboxavailableinthePROPERTIESpalette.
![Page 222: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/222.jpg)
RotationThiseditbox isavailable in theBASIC>Placement rollout in thePROPERTIESpalette.Using thiseditbox,youcanspecifythevalueofrotationofthefittingbeforeplacingitinthedrawing.ThiseditboxisavailableonlywhentheNooptionisselectedfromtheSpecifyrotationonscreendrop-downlist.ConnectiondetailsThisbuttonisavailableintheADVANCEDrollout.Whenyouchoosethisbutton,theConnectionDetailsdialogboxwillbedisplayed,asshowninFigure5-17.Therearetworolloutsavailableinthedialogboxthatcontainthedetailsaboutboththeconnections.
Figure5-17TheConnectionDetailsdialogbox
InsulationthicknessThis edit box is also available in the ADVANCED rollout and is used to specify the thickness ofinsulationappliedtothepipe.
PipeCustomFittingThis tool isusedforcreatingcustomfittings in thepipe line.Tocreateapipecustomfitting,youmusthave lines, arcs, or polylines created in the drawing area.To create a custom fitting, choose thePipeCustomFittingtoolfromthePipeFittingdrop-downlist;youwillbepromptedtoselectlines,arcs,orpolylines. Select lines, arcs, or polylines from the drawing area and press ENTER; theCreate PipeCustomFittingdialog
boxwill be displayed, refer to Figure 5-18.Depending on the selected entities, the segmentswill bedisplayedinthedialogboxasSegmentnofm,wherenistheserialnumberofcurrentsegmentandmisthetotalnumberofsegmentsinthefitting.UsingtheShapedrop-downlistavailableintheSegmentnof
![Page 223: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/223.jpg)
marea,youcanchangetheshapeofsegmentsinthefitting.Therearevarioussystemdefinitionsavailablein theSystemdrop-down.After selecting the desired system, choose theNext> button to change theparametersofnextsegment.YoucanalsoselecttheApplytoAllSegmentscheckboxifyouwanttokeepthe same parameters for other segments. After specifying parameters for all the segments, choose theFinishbutton;youwillbepromptedwhethertodeletethebasegeometryornot.EnterYesorNoat theCommand prompt; the custom fitting will be created. The open end points of entities will be theconnectionportsforfitting.
Figure5-18TheCreatePipeCustomFittingdialogbox
CREATINGACUSTOMMULTI-VIEWPARTWhile creating models in AutoCAD MEP, you may need to create some custom parts that can befrequentlyusedinthedrawing.TheproceduretocreateaCustomMulti-ViewPartisgivennext.
TocreateaCustomMulti-ViewPart,youneed tocreateasolidcomponentandconvert it intoablockusingtheCreateBlockcommandfromtheInserttabintheRibbon.Thesteps tocreateacustommultiviewpartaregivenbelow:
1.Create amodelof the custompart thatyouwant to add to theMulti-viewPart list and save it as ablock.
2.ChoosetheContentBuildertoolfromtheMEPContentpanelintheManagetaboftheRibbon; theGettingStarted-CatalogScreendialogboxwillbedisplayed,asshowninFigure5-19.
![Page 224: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/224.jpg)
Figure5-19TheGettingStarted-CatalogScreendialogbox3.Select theMulti-viewPartoptionfromthePartDomain drop-down list available at the topof thedialogbox;theoptionsinthedialogboxwillbemodifiedaccordingtoMulti-viewparts.
4.SelectMechanical fromthepart treedisplayedin thedialogboxtoaddanewequipmentrangeandchoosetheNewChapterbuttonavailableattherightoftheparttree;theNewChapterdialogboxwillbedisplayed,asshowninFigure5-20.
Figure5-20TheNewChapterdialogbox5.EnterTurbineasnameforthecategoryintheNameeditboxofthedialogboxandchooseOK;anewcategorywillbeaddedintheMechanicalpart list.Figure5-21showsTurbinecategoryaddedintheMechanicalpartlist.
![Page 225: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/225.jpg)
Figure5-21TheGettingStarted-CatalogScreendialogboxwithTurbineaddedasanewchapter
6.ChoosetheNewBlockPartbuttonfromtheGettingStarted-CatalogScreendialogbox;theNewPartdialogboxisdisplayed,asshowninFigure5-22.
Figure5-22TheNewPartdialogbox
7. Enter Steam Turbine and description of the new part in the Name and Description edit boxes,respectivelyandchooseOK; theMvPartBuilder (NewPart) -SteamTurbine dialogboxwill bedisplayed,refertoFigure5-23.
![Page 226: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/226.jpg)
Figure5-23TheMvPartBuilder(NewPart)-SteamTurbinedialogboxdisplayed8.SelectanoptionfromtheTypedrop-downlistwhosepropertiesarematchingwiththepartyouwanttocreate.Inthiscase,selecttheCoolingToweroptionfromthisdrop-downlist;theoptionsintheLayerKeyandSubtypefieldswillbeselectedaccordingly.
9.Choose theNext button from the dialogbox; theBlocks&Names page of the dialog boxwill bedisplayed,asshowninFigure5-24.
![Page 227: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/227.jpg)
Figure5-24TheMvPartBuilder(NewPart)-SteamTurbinedialogboxwiththeBlocks&Namespagedisplayed
10.ChoosetheAddPartSizebuttonavailablebelowthepartsheet;anewpartwillbeaddedinthelistandyouwillbepromptedtoselectanoptionfromthedrop-downlistdisplayed.
11.Selecttheblockyouhavecreatedforthepartonebyoneintherespectivefields;theblockswillbeassignedtothenewpart.(Inthiscase,theblockiscreatedwiththenameturbine).
12.Choose theGenerateBlocksbutton tocreate thepart; theViewsdialogboxwillbedisplayed,asshowninFigure5-25.
![Page 228: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/228.jpg)
Figure5-25TheViewsdialogbox
13.Using the options available in this dialog box, you can change the display style of the part to becreated.Afterconfiguringthedisplaystyle,choosetheOKbuttontoexit.
14. Choose theNext button from theMvPart Builder (New Part) - Steam Turbine dialog box; theImagepagewillbedisplayed,asshowninFigure5-26.
![Page 229: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/229.jpg)
Figure5-26TheMvPartBuilder(NewPart)-SteamTurbinedialogboxwiththeImagepage15.SelecttheGenerateanimagebasedonamodelblockfromSWIsometricViewradiobuttonandthenchoosetheGeneratebuttonfromthispage;theimageofblockwillbegenerated.Aftergeneratingtheimage,choosetheNextbutton;theConnectorspagewillbedisplayed,asshowninFigure5-27.
Figure5-27TheMvPartBuilder(NewPart)-SteamTurbinedialogboxwiththeConnectorspage
![Page 230: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/230.jpg)
16.Usingtheoptionsavailableinthispage,youcanspecifytheconnectorstobeaddedtotheMulti-viewpart.Toaddaconnector to thepart (SteamTurbine), right-clickon thepart;ashortcutmenuwillbedisplayed,asshowninFigure5-28.
Figure5-28Shortcutmenutoaddconnectors
17.Choosethedesiredoptionfromtheshortcutmenu;thePartFamilyConnectorPropertiesdialogboxis displayed. Figure 5-29 shows the dialog box displayed after choosing theAdd Pipe Connectoroption.
Figure5-29ThePartFamilyConnectorPropertiesdialogbox
18.ClickonthefieldadjacenttoFlowDirection;adrop-downlistwillbedisplayed.SelecttheInoptionfromthedrop-downlist.
19. Similarly, add onemore pipe connectorwith theOut option and choose theOK button from thedialogbox; theMvPartBuilder (ModifyPartSize) dialogboxafter adding the connectorswill bedisplayed,asshowninFigure5-30.
![Page 231: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/231.jpg)
Figure5-30TheMvPartBuilder(NewPart)dialogboxafteraddingconnectors20.Selectandright-clickonConnector1availablebelowTurbine in the list; a shortcutmenuwill bedisplayed.
21. Choose the Edit Placement option from the shortcut menu; the Application window will bedisplayed, as shown inFigure5-31, and youwill be prompted to specify the position or normal ofconnector.Also,theMvPartBuilder-ConnectorEditorpaletteisdisplayed.
![Page 232: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/232.jpg)
Figure5-31TheApplicationwindow
22.ChoosethePositionbuttonfromthecommandbarandspecifythelocationofthefirstconnector.23. Similarly, specify the location of the second connector after selecting Connector2 from theMvPartBuilder-ConnectorEditorpalette.
24.Afterspecifying the locations,choose theOKbuttonfromtheMvPartBuilder -ConnectorEditorpalette;theMvPartBuilderdialogboxwillbedisplayedagain.
25.Choose theNext button from the dialog box; theProperties pagewill be displayed, as shown inFigure5-32.
![Page 233: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/233.jpg)
Figure5-32TheMvPartBuilderdialogboxwiththePropertiespagedisplayed26. Choose theEdit Properties button from the dialog box; thePropertyEditor dialog box will bedisplayed, refer toFigure5-33.Using theoptions available in this dialogbox, you can adddesiredpropertyvariablestothenewpart.
Figure5-33ThePropertyEditordialogbox
![Page 234: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/234.jpg)
27.Afterconfiguringthepropertyvariables,choosetheOKbuttonandthenchoosetheFinishbuttonfromtheMvPartBuilderdialogbox;thepartwillbecreatedandaddedtotheequipmentlist.
TUTORIALTUTORIAL1Inthistutorial,youwillcreatethepipesystemshowninFigure5-34.TheplanviewforcreatingthepipesystemisgiveninFigure5-35.Notethattocompletethispipingsystem,youalsoneedtocreateacustompartnamedsteamturbinecomponent.(Expectedtime:30min)
Figure5-34Thepipingsystem
![Page 235: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/235.jpg)
Figure5-35Planforcreatingthepipingsystem
Thefollowingstepsarerequiredtocompletethistutorial:Examinethemodeltodetermineequipmenttobeaddedandparametersofpiping.a.CreateacustompartnamedTurbine.b.Addtheequipmentaccordingtothemodel.c.Createpipingbetweenvariousequipment.
CreatingtheDrawingFile1.ChooseNew>DrawingfromtheApplicationMenu;theSelectTemplatedialogboxisdisplayed.2. Select theAecbModel (GlobalCtb).dwt template from the dialog box and then choose theOpenbutton;ablankdrawingfileiscreated.
CreatingaCustomPartTo create a custom part, youmust have amodel of the part created as a block. So, before creating acustompart,youneedtocreateamodelofthepartandsaveitasablock.Beforecreatingamodel,youneedtoaddtheSolidstabtotheRibbon.Todoso,right-clickanywhereontheRibbon;ashortcutmenuisdisplayed.ChooseShowTabs>Solidsfromtheshortcutmenu;theSolidstabisaddedtotheRibbon.1.ChoosetheConetoolfromtheSolidPrimitivesdrop-downintheModelingpaneloftheSolidstabintheRibbon;youwillbepromptedtospecifythecenterofthebase.
2.Enter0,0,0atthecommandbarandcreateaconewiththebaseradius1000,topradius500,andheight1000.Also,createtheinletandoutletpipesonthecone,refertoFigure5-34.
3.SelecttheconeandthenchoosetheCreateBlock toolfromtheBlockpaneloftheInsert tab in theRibbon;theBlockDefinitiondialogboxisdisplayed,asshowninFigure5-36.
![Page 236: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/236.jpg)
Figure5-36TheBlockDefinitiondialogbox
4.SpecifythenameoftheblockasSteamTurbineintheNameeditboxavailableatthetopleftcornerofthedialogboxandchoosetheOKbuttonfromthedialogbox;themodelisaddedasablock.
CreatingCustomPartbyUsingtheBlock1.ChoosetheContentBuildertoolfromtheMEPContentpanelintheManagetaboftheRibbon; theGettingStarted-CatalogScreendialogboxisdisplayed,asshowninFigure5-37.SelecttheMulti-viewPartoptionfromthePartDomaindrop-downlist.
![Page 237: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/237.jpg)
Figure5-37TheGettingStarted-CatalogScreendialogbox
2.ClickonMechanicalintheparttreeandchoosetheNewChapterbuttonattherightinthedialogbox;theNewChapterdialogboxisdisplayed,asshowninFigure5-38.
Figure5-38TheNewChapterdialogbox
3.SpecifythenameasTurbineintheNameeditboxofthedialogboxandthenchoosetheOKbuttontoexit;aTurbineisaddedtotheMechanicalpartlist.
4.SelectTurbinefromthelistandchoosetheNewBlockPartbuttonattherightofthedialogbox;theNewPartdialogboxisdisplayed,asshowninFigure5-39.
![Page 238: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/238.jpg)
Figure5-39TheNewPartdialogbox5.SpecifythenameofthepartasSteamTurbineintheNameeditboxandthenclickintheDescriptioneditbox;thetextspecifiedintheNameeditboxiscopiedintheDescriptioneditbox.
6.ChoosetheOKbuttonfromthedialogbox;theMvPartBuilder(NewPart)dialogboxisdisplayed,refertoFigure5-40.
Figure5-40TheMvPartBuilder(ModifyPartSize)dialogbox
7.SelectthePumpoptionfromtheTypedrop-downlistandselecttheInlinePumpoptionfromtheSub-
![Page 239: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/239.jpg)
Typedrop-downlist.8.ChoosetheNextbuttonfromthedialogbox;theBlocks&Namespageofthedialogboxisdisplayed,asshowninFigure5-41.
Figure5-41TheMvPartBuilder(NewPart)dialogboxwiththeBlocks&Namespagedisplayed
9.ChoosetheAddPartSizebuttonavailablebelowthepartsizesheet;adrop-downlistisdisplayed.10. Select theSteamTurbine option from the drop-down list and then choose theGenerate BlocksbuttonfromtheMvPartBuilder(NewPart)dialogbox;theViewsdialogboxisdisplayed,asshowninFigure5-42.
![Page 240: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/240.jpg)
Figure5-42TheViewsdialogbox11.Choose theOK button from theViews dialogbox; theMvPartBuilder (NewPart) dialog box isdisplayed.ChoosetheNextbuttonfromit;theImagepageofthedialogboxisdisplayed,asshowninFigure5-43.
![Page 241: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/241.jpg)
Figure5-43TheMvPartBuilder(NewPart)dialogboxwiththeImagepage12.SelecttheGenerateanimagebasedonamodelblockfromtheSWIsometricViewradiobutton,andthenchoosetheGeneratebutton;thepreviewoftheblockisdisplayedinthePreviewareaofthedialogbox.
13.ChoosetheNextbuttonfromthedialogbox;theConnectorspageisdisplayed,refertoFigure5-44.
![Page 242: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/242.jpg)
Figure5-44TheMvPartBuilder(NewPart)dialogboxwiththeConnectorspagedisplayed
14.Right-clickontheSteamTurbinesymbol,refertoFigure5-44;ashortcutmenuisdisplayed.15. Choose the Add Pipe Connector option from the shortcut menu; the Part Family ConnectorPropertiesdialogboxisdisplayed,asshowninFigure5-45.
Figure5-45ThePartFamilyConnectorPropertiesdialogbox
![Page 243: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/243.jpg)
16. Select the In option from theFlowDirection drop-down list and theHotWater option from theSystemTypedrop-downlist.
17.ChoosetheOKbuttontoclosethedialogbox;Connector1isaddedtothenewpart.18. Similarly, add another pipe connector to the part and then select theOut option from the FlowDirectiondrop-downlistandtheHotWateroptionfromtheSystemdrop-downlist.
19.Right-clickontheConnector1availablebelowSteamTurbinehavingthesymbol;ashortcutmenuisdisplayed.
20. Choose the Edit Placement option from the shortcut menu; the MvPartBuilder -ConnectorEditor palette is displayed, as shown in Figure 5-46 and you are prompted to specifypositionofconnectorornormaltoconnector.
Figure5-46TheMvPartBuilder-ConnectorEditorpalette
21.ChoosethePositionbuttonfromthecommandbar;youareprompted toselectpositionfor thefirstconnector.ClickontheInConnectoravailableonthemodel,asshowninFigure5-47,andthenselectthe Flange option from theConnection Type drop-down list in theMvPartBuilder - Connector
![Page 244: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/244.jpg)
Editorpalette.ClickinthedrawingareaandchoosetheOKbuttontoaccepttheresults.
Figure5-47ThemodelwithInConnectorandOutConnector22.Similarly,specifythepositionofConnector2andthenchoosetheOKbuttonfromtheMvPartBuilder-ConnectorEditorpalette;theMvPartBuilder(NewPart)dialogboxisdisplayedagain.
23.ChoosetheNextbuttonfromthedialogbox;thePropertiespageofthedialogboxisdisplayed,asshowninFigure5-48.
![Page 245: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/245.jpg)
Figure5-48TheMvPartBuilder(NewPart)dialogboxwiththePropertiespagedisplayed
24.Choose theFinish button; the custompart is createdwith thenameSteamTurbine in theTurbinecategoryofequipmentintheequipmentlist.
AddingtheEquipment1.ChoosetheEquipmenttoolfromtheEquipmentdrop-downavailableintheBuildpaneloftheHometabintheRibbon;theAddMulti-viewPartsdialogboxisdisplayed.
2.ExpandtheMechanicalcategory;thelistofallavailablemechanicalequipmentisdisplayed.3.Clickonthe+signadjacenttoBoilers;varioustypesofboilersaredisplayed.4.SelectFiretubeBoilersfromthelist.Now,selectthe600kWFiretubeBoilersoptionfromthePartSizeNamedrop-downlistandclickanywhere in thedrawingarea toplace theboiler.Place itwithzerorotationanglevalue.
5.Similarly,add80x80mmBaseMountedPump,33.5KWLargeHorizontalAir-CooledCondenser,andtheSteamTurbinecreatedearlier,asshowninFigure5-49.Forposition,refertoFigure5-35.
![Page 246: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/246.jpg)
Figure5-49Thedrawingafteraddingequipmentlist
6.ChoosetheClosebuttontoexitthedialogbox.NoteSteamTurbineisavailableintheTurbinecategoryofequipment.
CreatingPipingbetweenVariousEquipment1.ChoosethePipetoolfromthePipedrop-downintheBuildpaneloftheHometabintheRibbon;youarepromptedtospecifythestartpointofthepipe.
2.ClickonthePipeEndConnectoravailableonthepump,refertoFigure5-50,movethecursorintheverticaldirection,andenter1000at thedynamicpromptdisplayed;theChooseaPartdialogbox isdisplayed,refertoFigure5-51.
Figure5-50ThePipeEndConnectoronthepump
![Page 247: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/247.jpg)
Figure5-51TheChooseaPartdialogbox
3.ChoosetheOKbuttonfromthedialogbox;apipewiththelengthof1000iscreated.SelectthePipeEndConnector,asshowninFigure5-52;youarepromptedtospecifywhetheryouwanttoaccepttheconnectionor youwant to undo the connectionmade.Choose theAccept button from theCommandprompt;thepipelineiscreatedbetweenPumpandBoiler.PressENTERtoexitthecommand.
Figure5-52Thepipeconnectorendtobeselected4.SelectTurbineandclickonthe+sign;arubberbandpipeisattachedtothecursor.Movethecursorintheleftdirectionandenter4000attheCommandprompt;theChooseaPartdialogboxisdisplayed.ChooseOKfromthedialogbox;thepipelineiscreated,refertoFigure5-53.
![Page 248: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/248.jpg)
Figure5-53Thepipelinecreated5.ClickonthePipeEndConnector,asshowninFigure5-54;theoptionsrelatedtopossiblelayoutsaredisplayedat thecommandprompt.ChoosetheNextbuttonfromthecommandprompt tillyouget thedesiredlayout,refertoFigure5-55.
Figure5-54ThePipeEndConnectorinthemodel
Figure5-55Thedrawingaftercreatingpipelinebetweencondenserandpump6.ChoosetheAcceptoptionfromthecommandprompt;thepipelineiscreatedbetweentheboilerandtheturbine.
7.Selectthehorizontalconnectorofthepump,movethecursorinthehorizontaldirection,andspecifythedistanceas1500atthecommandprompt;theChooseaPartdialogboxisdisplayed.ChoosetheOK
![Page 249: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/249.jpg)
button from thedialogbox and clickon thePipeEndConnector availablebelow the condenser; thepipelineiscreated,asshowninFigure5-55.
8.ChoosetheAcceptbuttonfromtheCommandprompttoacceptthepipeline;theCustomSizesdialogboxisdisplayed.ChoosetheYesoptionsfromthedialogbox.PressENTERtoexitthetool.
9.Select theCondenserandclickonthe+signdisplayedbelowthecondenser, refer toFigure5-56;arubber band pipe is attached to the cursor.Now, click on the PipeEndConnector displayed on theturbine.Acceptthedefaultsettings.Thepipelineiscreatedandthefinalmodelisdisplayed,asshowninFigure5-57.PressENTERtoexitthetool.
Figure5-56ThePipeEndConnectortobeselected
Figure5-57Thefinalmodel
![Page 250: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/250.jpg)
Savingthedrawingfile1.ChooseSavefromtheApplicationMenutosavethedrawingfile.
SELF-EVALUATIONTESTAnswerthefollowingquestionsandthencomparethemtothosegivenattheendofthischapter:1.YouneedtochoosethePlumbingoptionfromtheWorkspaceSwitchingflyouttoactivatethePipingworkspace.(T/F)
2.Theelevationvalueofanequipmentcanbespecifiedonlyfromtheground.(T/F)3.TheEquipmentdrop-downisavailableinthe___________paneloftheHometab.4.Thecutlengthofapipecanbespecifiedinthe___________editbox.5.Whichofthefollowingtoolsisusedtocreateacustompart?(a)Equipment(b)ContentBuilder(c)CatalogEditor(d)StyleManagerREVIEWQUESTIONSAnswerthefollowingquestions:1.ThePipeCustomFittingtoolisavailableinthePipedrop-downoftheBuildpanel.(T/F)2.TheBranchAngleoptionisusedtospecifythelateralangleofaTeeatthebend.(T/F)3.The__________toolisusedtoaddvalve.4.TocreateacustomMulti-viewPart,youmusthavea___________ofthemodel.5.WhichofthefollowingpanelcontainstheConetool?(a)Build(b)Draw(c)Block(d)ModelingEXERCISEEXERCISE1Inthisexercise,youwillcreatemodelofapipingsystem,asshowninFigure5-58.Figure5-59showstheplanofthepipingsystem.(Expectedtime:30min)
![Page 251: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/251.jpg)
Figure5-58Modelofthepipingsystem
Figure5-59Planofthepipingsystem
AnswerstoSelf-EvaluationTest1.F,2.F,3.Build,4.Cutlength,5.ContentBuilder
![Page 252: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/252.jpg)
Chapter6
CreatingPlumbingSystem
![Page 253: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/253.jpg)
LearningObjectivesAftercompletingthischapter,youwillbeableto:•Createaplumbingsystem•Useequipmentrequiredinplumbingsystem•Changebasicsettingsofaplumbingsystem•Configureplumbingoptions•Routetheplumbingline
INTRODUCTIONInthischapter,youwilllearntheusageofvariousmechanicalequipmentrequiredforcreatingaplumbingsystem.Aplumbingsystemisusedtodrainthewaterbornewastefromdifferentlocationsandtosupplywatertodifferentlocations.Itconsistsofplumbingequipmentandplumbinglinewhichtogethercontroltheflowofwateratvariouslocationsinabuilding.Tocreateaplumbingsystem,firstyouneedtofigureoutvariablessuchastheverticalheads,pressurerequiredatvariouslocations,andtheflowrateofwater.Thesevariablesareusedtodeterminethecapacityofequipmenttobeaddedtotheplumbingsystem.
PLUMBINGWORKSPACETocreateaplumbingsystem,youfirstneedtoinvokethePlumbingWorkspace.Toinvokethisworkspace,choose theWorkspaceSwitchingbutton from theApplicationStatusBar;a flyoutwill be displayed.ChoosethePlumbingoptionfromtheflyout;thePlumbingworkspacewillbeactivated.TheequipmentthatcanbeaddedwhileworkinginthePlumbingworkspaceareavailableintheEquipmentdrop-downoftheBuildpanelintheHometaboftheRibbon,refertoFigure6-1.Thetoolsavailableinthisdrop-downarediscussednext.
Figure6-1TheEquipmentdrop-down
FilterAfilter is an equipmentor a devicewhich is used to filter the fluidbeforemaking it flow through anoutlet.Toaddafiltertothedrawing,choosetheFiltertoolfromtheEquipmentdrop-downavailablein
![Page 254: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/254.jpg)
theBuildpaneloftheHometabintheRibbon;theAddMulti-viewPartsdialogboxwillbedisplayed,as shown in Figure 6-2. Select the Panel Filters sub-category in the Filter category of Mechanicalequipment in this dialog box; previewof the selected component is displayedon the right pane in thedialogbox.VarioussizesforthefilterareavailableinthePartSizeNamedrop-downlistinthisdialogbox.Select therequiredsizefromthisdrop-downlist.Youcanspecify theelevationvalueof thefilterfromthegroundorUCSbyusingtheElevationeditboxavailablebelowthePartSizeNamedrop-downlist.Click in the drawing area to place the filter; a compasswill be displayed below the component.Usingthiscompass,youcanrotatethecomponentattherequiredangle.Afterspecifyingtheangle,choosetheClosebuttonfromtheAddMulti-viewPartsdialogboxtoexit.
Figure6-2TheAddMulti-viewPartsdialogbox
PumpApumpisamechanicaldevicethatisusedtosupplyfluidtoadesiredpointbyusingmechanicalforce.ThemethodtoplaceapumphasalreadybeendiscussedinChapter5.
ShowerAshower isused toconvertastreamofwater intospray.Toaddashower in thedrawing,choose theShowertoolfromtheEquipmentdrop-downavailableintheBuildpaneloftheHometabintheRibbon;the Add Multi-view Parts dialog box will be displayed, as shown in Figure 6-3. By default, theRectangularShowerStallpartisselectedintheShowerscategoryofthePlumbingequipment.Selecttherequiredpart from thedialogbox;various sizes available for that part aredisplayed in thePart SizeNamedrop-downlist.
![Page 255: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/255.jpg)
Figure6-3TheAddMulti-viewPartsdialogbox
Selecttherequiredsizefromthedrop-downlistandclickinthedrawingareatoplacetheshowerstall;acompasswillbedisplayedbelowthecomponent.Usingthiscompass,youcanrotatethecomponentattherequiredangle.Afterspecifyingtheangle,choosetheClosebuttonfromtheAddMulti-viewPartsdialogboxtoexitthedialogbox.Figure6-4showstheannotatedshowerstall.YoucanapplyvariousparametersforthefixtureattachedtotheMulti-viewParts.TheoptionstochangetheseparametersareavailableintheFixtureUnits tabof theAddMulti-viewParts dialog box, refer toFigure 6-5.These options arediscussednext.
![Page 256: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/256.jpg)
Figure6-4Theshowerstall
Figure6-5TheAddMulti-viewPartsdialogboxwiththeFixtureUnitstabselectedFixtureUnitTableTheFixtureUnitTabledrop-downlistisavailableintheFixtureUnitstaboftheAddMulti-viewPartsdialogbox.Theoptionsinthisdrop-downlistareusedtochangethefixtureunittablestylewhichinturnchangesoptionsavailableforfixturetypeandoccupancytype.FixtureTheoptionsinthisdrop-downlistareusedtospecifythetypeoffixturetobeappliedtothemulti-viewpart.
OccupancyTheoptionsinthisdrop-downlistareusedtospecifytheoccupancytypeoftheMulti-viewpart.Therearetwooptionsavailableinthisdrop-downlist:PublicandPrivate.
FixtureUnitsforConnectorsTherearevariousoptionsavailableinthisareatochangethepropertiesofvariousconnectorsavailableforthecomponent.Theoptionsinthisareaaredisplayedbasedonthepartselected.
SinkAsinkisaplumbingequipmentthatisusedtowashutensilsoranysmallobject.Therearevarioustypesof sinks available inAutoCADMEP. These sinks are available in fourmain categories: Oval Basin,RectangularBasin,VanityBasin,andWallMountedBasin.Toaddasinktothedrawing,choosetheSink
![Page 257: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/257.jpg)
toolfromtheEquipmentdrop-downavailableintheBuildpaneloftheHometabintheRibbon;theAddMulti-viewPartsdialogboxwillbedisplayed,asshowninFigure6-6.Bydefault,theOvalBasinpartisselectedintheBasinscategoryofthePlumbingequipment.Selecttherequiredpartfromthedialogbox;varioussizesavailableforthecategoryaredisplayedinthePartSizeNamedrop-downlist.Selecttherequiredsizefromthedrop-downlistandclickinthedrawingareatoplacethesink;acompasswillbedisplayedbelowthecomponent.Usingthiscompass,youcanrotatethecomponentattherequiredangle.Afterspecifyingtheangle,choosetheClosebuttonfromtheAddMulti-viewPartsdialogboxtoexit.
Figure6-6TheAddMulti-viewPartsdialogboxWaterClosetandUrinalYoucanaddwaterclosetandurinaltothedrawingareainthesamewayasotherequipmentdiscussedearlierinthischapter.AfterchoosingtheWaterClosetandUrinaltoolsfromtheEquipmentdrop-down,thecorrespondingAddMulti-viewPartsdialogboxeswillbedisplayed,asshowninFigures6-7and6-8.
![Page 258: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/258.jpg)
Figure6-7TheAddMulti-viewPartsdialogboxdisplayedafterchoosingtheWaterClosettool
Figure6-8TheAddMulti-viewPartsdialogboxdisplayedafterchoosingtheUrinaltool
EquipmentWhenyouchoosetheEquipmenttoolfromtheEquipmentdrop-downoftheBuildpaneloftheHometab
![Page 259: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/259.jpg)
intheribbon;theAddMulti-viewPartsdialogboxwillbedisplayed,asshowninFigure6-9.Clickonthe+signadjacenttothedesiredcategoryintheAddMulti-viewPartsdialogbox;therelatedequipmentavailableinAutoCADMEPwillbedisplayedinatreestructure.
Figure6-9TheAddMulti-viewPartsdialogbox
Selecttherequiredoptionfromthelistandclickinthedrawingareatoplacethecomponent.Acompasswill alsobedisplayedbelow the component.Using this compass, you can rotate the component at therequiredangle.Afterspecifyingtheangle,choosetheClosebuttonfromtheAddMulti-viewPartsdialogboxtoexit.PLUMBINGLINEAfter adding all the required equipment to the drawing, you need to add the plumbing line. To add aplumbing line, choose the Plumbing Line tool from the Build panel in theHome tab; you will beprompted to specify the start point of the plumbing line.Click in the drawing area to specify the startpoint;youwillbepromptedtospecifythenextpoint.Clickinthedrawingareatospecifythenextpointorenterthedistanceatthecommandprompt;aplumbinglinewillbecreatedandyouwillbepromptedtospecify the next point.Click in the drawing area to specify the next point or pressENTER to exit thecommand. The options related to plumbing line are displayed in thePROPERTIES palette, refer toFigure6-10.
![Page 260: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/260.jpg)
Figure6-10ThePROPERTIESpalettedisplayedonchoosingthePlumbingLinetool
PROPERTIESPaletteTheoptionsinthePROPERTIESpaletteareusedtochangetheparametersofplumbingline.TheoptionsdisplayedinthePROPERTIESpaletteafterchoosingthePlumbingLinetoolarediscussednext.DescriptionThis field is available in the General rollout of the BASIC rollout in the Design tab of thePROPERTIESpalette.Whenyouclickonthisfield, theDescriptiondialogboxwillbedisplayed,asshowninFigure6-11.EnterdescriptionfortheplumbinglineintheEditthedescriptionforthisobjecttextboxinthisdialogboxandchooseOKtoexit.
Figure6-11TheDescriptiondialogbox
StyleThis drop-down list is available in theGeneral rollout of theBASIC rollout of thePROPERTIES
![Page 261: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/261.jpg)
palette.Theoptionsinthisdrop-downlistareusedtodefinetheappearanceandpurposeoftheplumbingline.Bydefault,theStandardoptionisselectedinthedrop-downlist.YoucanselectanyoftheoptionssuchasBlackPipeandCopperTube-TableW.SystemThisdrop-downlistisavailableintheSystemrolloutoftheBASICrolloutofthePROPERTIESpaletteintheDesigntab.Itcontainsvarioussystemdefinitionsfortheplumbinglinelayout.WhenyouchoosetheSelectA System button available next to this drop-down list, theSelect System dialog boxwill bedisplayed.Youcanselectasystemfortheplumbinglineaccordingtotheequipmenttobeconnectedfromthisdialogbox.NominalsizeThisdrop-downlist isavailableintheDimensions rolloutoftheBASIC rollout. Itcontainsoptions tochange the size of pipe. The options available in this drop-down list change according to the optionselectedintheStyledrop-downlist.OffsetThiseditboxisavailableintheDimensionsrolloutoftheBASIC rollout.Usingthiseditbox,youcancreatetheplumbinglinebyspecifiedoffsetdistance.ElevationThiseditbox isavailable in thePlacement rolloutof theBASIC rollout.Using thiseditbox,youcanspecifythevalueofelevationofplumbinglinefromtheground.
RiseThiseditboxisavailableintheSlope rolloutoftheBASIC rolloutinthePROPERTIESpalette.Youcanspecifythevalueoftotalriseinthiseditbox.RunThiseditboxisavailableintheSlope rolloutoftheBASIC rolloutinthePROPERTIESpalette.Youcanspecifythevalueoftotalruninthiseditbox.Slope(%)ThiseditboxisalsoavailableintheSloperolloutoftheBASIC rolloutinthePROPERTIESpalette.ThevalueinthiseditboxiscalculatedautomaticallydependinguponthevaluesspecifiedintheRuneditboxandtheRiseeditbox.IfyouenterthedesiredvalueintheSlope(%)editbox,thevaluesintheRiseandRuneditboxeswillchangeaccordingly.DefaultFittingOverridesTheoptionsinthisrolloutareusedtooverridethetypeoffittingtobechosenwhilecreatingtheplumbingline.TheoptionsavailableinthisrolloutareTee,Teeup,Teedown,andsoon.Tooverrideanyoftheavailableplumbingfittings,clickinthefieldnexttothedesiredplumbingfitting;theSelectStyledialogboxwillbedisplayed,refertoFigure6-12.SelectadrawingfilefromtheDrawingfiledrop-downlist;the related categories will be displayed in the Category drop-down list. On selecting the desired
![Page 262: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/262.jpg)
category from the drop-down list, the relevant components will be displayed in the area below theCategorydrop-downlist.SelectthedesiredcomponentandchoosetheOKbuttonfromthedialogbox;theselectedcomponentwillbeusedasanoverrideforthedesiredfitting.YoucanalsosearchthedefaultoverridefittingbyenteringitsnameintheSearcheditboxatthetopintheSelectStyledialogboxandthenchooseGotogetthedesiredfitting.
Figure6-12TheSelectStyledialogbox
AssignedengineeringIDThis drop-down list is available in theEngineeringData rollout of theADVANCED rollout of thePROPERTIESpalette.IfthecomponenttobeaddedinthedrawingareahasanASHRAEnumber,thentheengineeringIDforthecomponentwillbedisplayedinthedrop-downlist.YoucanassignanyoftheavailableengineeringIDstothecomponentbyselectingitfromthedrop-downlist.
StyleThis drop-down list is available in theLabels rollout of theLabels and FlowArrows rollout in theADVANCEDrolloutofthePROPERTIESpalette.Theoptionsinthisdrop-downlistareusedtoapplythelabelstylestoplumbingline.
TheStyledrop-downlistisalsoavailableforFlowArrows.Theseoptionshavealreadybeendiscussed.PLUMBINGFITTINGThePlumbingFittingtoolisusedtoaddfittingtoaplumbingline.Toaddaplumbingfitting,choosethistoolfromtheBuildpaneloftheHometabintheRibbon;youwillbepromptedtospecifytheinsertionpoint.Also,thePROPERTIESpalettewillbedisplayed,asshowninFigure6-13.Clickontheplumbinglinetoaddtheplumbingfittingintheline;youwillbepromptedtospecifytherotationvalue.Specifythedesiredrotationvalueatthecommandpromptorclickinthedrawingareatospecifytherotationvalue;the plumbing fitting will be added. The PROPERTIES palette displayed on choosing the Plumbing
![Page 263: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/263.jpg)
Fittingtoolisdiscussednext.
Figure6-13ThePROPERTIESpalettedisplayedonchoosingthePlumbingFittingtool
PROPERTIESPaletteTheoptionsavailableinthePROPERTIESpaletteafterchoosingthePlumbingFittingtoolareusedtochangetheparametersofplumbingfitting.Theseoptionsarediscussednext.DescriptionThisfieldisavailableintheGeneralrolloutoftheBASICrolloutinthePROPERTIESpalette.Whenyouclickonthisfield,theDescriptiondialogboxwillbedisplayed.Youcanwritedescriptionaboutthefittinginthetextboxavailableinthisdialogbox.StyleThisoptionisavailableintheGeneralrolloutoftheBASICrolloutofthePROPERTIESpalette.Usingthisoption,youcanspecifythetypeoffittingtobeappliedtoaplumbingline.Tochangethestyle,clickonthefieldnexttotheStyleoption;theSelectStyledialogboxwillbedisplayed,asshowninFigure6-14.SelectthedesiredfittingfromthefittingsdisplayedinthedialogboxandchoosetheOKbutton;theselected fittingwill get attached to the cursor.You can also search theplumbing fittingby entering itsname in theSearch edit box at the top in theSelectStyle dialog box and then chooseGo to get thedesiredfitting.
![Page 264: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/264.jpg)
Figure6-14TheSelectStyledialogbox
SystemThis drop-down list is available in the System rollout of theBASIC rollout of the PROPERTIESpalette.Therearevariousoptionsavailableinthisdrop-downlisttochangetheapplicationareaofthefittingtobecreated.Bydefault,theStandard(STD)optionisselectedinthisdrop-downlist.ElevationThiseditboxisavailableinthePlacementrolloutoftheBASICrolloutinthePROPERTIESpalette.Usingthiseditbox,youcanspecifythevalueofheightofthefittingfromthegroundlevel.
JustificationThisdrop-downlistisalsoavailableintheLocationrolloutandisusedtospecifythejustificationforplumbingline.Theoptions in thisdrop-downlistdependonthenumberofconnectorsavailableontheselectedfitting.Ifthefittinghasthreeconnectors,thenthetotalnumberofoptionsavailableinthisdrop-downlistwillbefour:Insertionpoint,Connector1,Connector2,andConnector3.SpecifyrotationonscreenThisdrop-downlist isavailable in theLocation rollout.Thereare twooptionsavailable in thisdrop-downlist.IfyouselecttheYesoptionthenyoucanspecifytherotationvaluewhileaddingthefittinginthedrawingarea.IfyouselecttheNooption,thenyouneedtospecifythevalueofrotationintheeditboxavailableinthePROPERTIESpalette.RotationThis edit box is available in theLocation rollout onlywhen theNo option is selected in theSpecifyrotationonscreendrop-downlist.Usingthiseditbox,youcanspecifythevalueofrotationofthefitting.ID
![Page 265: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/265.jpg)
Thiseditboxisavailable in theADVANCED rolloutofthePROPERTIESpalette.YoucanspecifyadesignIDtothefittingusingthiseditbox.TUTORIALTUTORIAL1In this tutorial, you will create a plumbing system, as shown in Figure 6-15. You can download thearchitecturalfilefromwww.cadcim.com.Pathofthefileis:Textbooks>CAD/CAM>AutoCADMEP>AutoCADMEP2015forDesigners>InputFiles.(Expectedtime:30min)
Thefollowingstepsarerequiredtocompletethistutorial:a.Openthedrawingdownloadedfromthewebsite.b.Addtheequipmentaccordingtothemodel.c.Createplumbinglinebetweenvariousequipment.
DownloadingandOpeningtheDrawingFile1.Downloadthec06_amep_prt.zipfilefromhttp://www.cadcim.com.Thepathofthefileisasfollows:Textbooks>CAD/CAM>AutoCADMEP>AutoCADMEP2015forDesigners>InputFiles.
2.Extractthisfiletodesiredlocation.
Figure6-15Theplumbingsystemtobecreated3.Open thedrawing filec06_amep_prt.dwg from the specified locationbydouble-clickingon it.Thedrawingfileisdisplayed,asshowninFigure6-16.
![Page 266: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/266.jpg)
Figure6-16Thedownloadeddrawingfile
AddingtheEquipment1. Change the workspace to Plumbing and choose the Shower tool from theEquipment drop-downavailableintheBuildpaneloftheHometabintheRibbon;theAddMulti-viewPartsdialogbox isdisplayed,asshowninFigure6-17.Also,theshowerstallisdisplayed,attachedtothecursor.
Figure6-17TheAddMulti-viewPartsdialogbox2.Specify800x850mmShowerStallinthePartSizeNamedrop-downlistand0intheElevationedit
![Page 267: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/267.jpg)
boxinthedialogbox.
3.Placetheshowerstallinthebathroom,alignedtothecorner,refertoFigure6-18.
Figure6-18Thedrawingafteraddingequipment4. Choose the Sink tool from the Equipment drop-down; the Add Multi-view Parts dialog box isdisplayed,asshowninFigure6-19.
Figure6-19TheAddMulti-viewPartsdialogboxdisplayedafterchoosingtheSinktool
5.SelectVanityBasinfromtheleftareaofthedialogbox,andthenselectpartsizeas750mmx750mm.Click in thedrawing area toplace thebasin, refer toFigure6-20.Make sure the elevationvalue is
![Page 268: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/268.jpg)
1000.
Figure6-20Thedrawingafteraddingequipment
6. Similarly, addBidet available in theAddMulti-viewParts dialog box displayed on choosing theWaterClosettoolfromtheEquipmentdrop-down,refertoFigure6-20.Makesuretheelevationvalueis0.
7.ChoosetheSinktoolfromtheEquipmentdrop-downandthenchooseWallMountedBasinfromtheleftarea;theAddMulti-viewPartsdialogboxisdisplayed,asshowninFigure6-21.
![Page 269: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/269.jpg)
Figure6-21TheAddMulti-viewPartsdialogboxdisplayedafterselectingWallMountedBasin
8.Placethebasinsinthedrawingareaatelevation1000,refertoFigure6-22.
Figure6-22Thedrawingareaafteraddingthebasins
CreatingPlumbingLineBetweenVariousEquipmentThere are three plumbing lines to be added to the system: Waste (WP), Domestic Cold Water, andDomesticHotWater.
1.Choose theWaste(WP) tool fromtheTOOLPALETTES-PLUMBINGdisplayedat the right inAutoCADMEPwindow,refertoFigure6-23;youarepromptedtoselectthestartingpointforWasteplumbingline.
![Page 270: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/270.jpg)
Figure6-23TheTOOLPALETTES-PLUMBING2.SelecttheWastePipeEndConnectoroftheshowerstall;theotherendofthewasteplumbinglinegetsattachedtothecursorandyouarepromptedtospecifythenextendpoint.
3.Select thePipeEndConnectorof thevanitybasinplaced in theKitchenarea; theSelectConnectordialogboxisdisplayed,asshowninFigure6-24.
Figure6-24TheSelectConnectordialogbox4.ChoosetheConnector3:WasteoptionfromthedialogboxandchoosetheOKbutton;thePlumbingLine-ElevationMismatchdialogboxisdisplayed,asshowninFigure6-25.
![Page 271: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/271.jpg)
Figure6-25ThePlumbingLine-ElevationMismatchdialogbox5.ChoosetheAdjusttheslopeoptionfromthedialogbox;theslopeoftheplumbinglineisautomaticallyadjustedtopermittheflowofwaterandaplumbinglineiscreated.
6. Similarly, create a plumbing line from the waste line of vanity basin to waste line of bidet in theBathroomareaandthentothewastelinesofthewallmountedbasins.Thedrawingafteraddingallthewasteplumbinglinesisdisplayed,asshowninFigure6-26.
Figure6-26Thedrawingafteraddingallthewasteplumbinglines
7.Choose theDomesticHotWater tool from theTOOLPALETTES -PLUMBING and add thehot
![Page 272: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/272.jpg)
waterplumbingline,asshowninFigure6-27(displayedinredcolor).
Figure6-27Thedrawingafteraddingallthehotwaterplumbinglines
8.ChoosetheDomesticColdWatertoolfromtheTOOLPALETTES-PLUMBINGandaddthecoldwaterplumbingline,asshowninFigure6-28(displayedinbluecolor).
Figure6-28ThedrawingafteraddingallthecoldwaterplumbinglinesThedrawingafteraddingalltheplumbinglinesisdisplayed,asshowninFigure6-29.
![Page 273: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/273.jpg)
Figure6-29Thedrawingafteraddingalltheplumbinglines
SavingtheDrawingFile1.ChooseSavefromtheApplicationMenutosavethedrawingfile.
SELF-EVALUATIONTESTAnswerthefollowingquestionsandthencomparethemtothosegivenattheendofthischapter:1.Youcannotchangethetypeoffittingafteraddingitintheplumbingline.(T/F)2.Rotationofafittingcanbespecifiedeitherbyusinganeditboxorbydynamicallyrotatingit.(T/F)3.ThevalueintheSlopeeditboxiscalculatedautomaticallydependinguponthevaluesspecifiedinthe________and________editboxes.
4.The_________drop-downlistinthePROPERTIESpaletteisusedtospecifythetypeofsystemforplumbingline.
5.Whichofthefollowingequipmentdoesnotrequireafixture?(a)Filter(b)Shower(c)Sink(d)PumpREVIEWQUESTIONSAnswerthefollowingquestions:
![Page 274: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/274.jpg)
1.ThePipeCustomFittingtoolisnotavailableinthePlumbingworkspace.(T/F)2.TheEndCapoptionisavailableintheSelectStyledialogbox.(T/F)3.TheDomesticHotWatertoolisavailableintheToolPalettes-___________.4.Tocreateacustommulti-viewpart,youmusthavea___________ofthemodelinthecurrentdrawing.5.Whichofthefollowingisnotatypeofplumbingfitting?(a)Tee(b)Cross(c)Elbow(d)WyeEXERCISEEXERCISE1Inthisexercise,youwillcreatethemodelofaplumbingsystemusingthedrawingshowninFigure6-30.You can download the architectural file from www.cadcim.com. Path of the file is: Textbooks >CAD/CAM>AutoCADMEP>AutoCADMEP2015forDesigners>Inputfiles.(Expectedtime:30min)
Figure6-30Thedrawingofplumbingsystem
AnswerstoSelf-EvaluationTest1.T,2.T,3.Rise,Run,4.System,5.d
![Page 275: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/275.jpg)
Chapter7
CreatingElectricalSystemLayout
![Page 276: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/276.jpg)
LearningObjectivesAftercompletingthischapter,youwillbeableto:•UseequipmentrequiredinElectricalSystem•ChangebasicsettingsofanElectricalSystem•Configureelectricaloptions•Createwires•Createacabletray•Createanelectricalpanel•Createacabletrayfitting•Addconduitfittings•Calculatetotalloadofdevices•Calculateloadsandwiresize
INTRODUCTIONInthischapter,youwilllearntheusageofvariouselectricalequipmentforcreatinganelectricalsystem.An electrical system is used to transmit power from one location to the other. It is composed ofequipment,panels,cabletrays,wires,conduitsandsoon.Forcreatinganelectricalsystem,choosetheElectricaloptionfromtheWorkspaceSwitchingflyout,theElectricalworkspacewillbeactivated.TheequipmentavailableintheElectricalworkspaceofAutoCADMEParediscussednext.ADDINGEQUIPMENTForcreatinganelectricalsystem,youneedtoaddrelatedequipmenttothestructure.All theequipmentthat can be added while working in theElectrical workspace are available in theEquipment drop-downoftheBuildpanelintheHometaboftheRibbon,refertoFigure7-1.Someoftheoptionsavailableinthisdrop-downarediscussednext.
Figure7-1TheEquipmentdrop-down
GeneratorA generator is an equipment or a device, which is used to convert mechanical energy into electricalenergy.Toaddageneratortothedrawing,choosetheGeneratortoolfromtheEquipmentdrop-downoftheBuildpanelintheHometaboftheRibbon;theAddMulti-viewPartsdialogboxwillbedisplayed,
![Page 277: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/277.jpg)
asshowninFigure7-2.Bydefault,200-600kWEmergencyPowerGenerator-DieselisselectedintheParttab.Previewoftheselectedcomponentisdisplayedintherightofthedialogbox.Varioussizesforthegenerator,dependingontheirloadcapacity,areavailableinthePartSizeNamedrop-downlistofthisdialogbox.Selecttherequiredsizefromthisdrop-downlist.Clickinthedrawingareatoplacethegenerator; a compasswill be displayed below the component.Using this compass, you can rotate thecomponentataspecificangle.Afterspecifyingtheangle,choosetheClosebuttonfromtheAddMulti-viewPartsdialogboxtoexitthedialogbox.
Figure7-2TheAddMulti-viewPartsdialogboxwiththe200-600kWEmergencyPowerGenerator-Dieselpartselected
YoucanalsospecifytheelevationvalueoftheGeneratorfromthegroundorUCSbyusingtheElevationeditboxavailablebelowthePartSizeNamedrop-downlist.JunctionBoxAjunctionboxisametallicorplasticcontainerthatisusedtohidetheelectricalconnections.Toaddajunction box, choose theJunctionBox tool from theEquipment drop-down of theBuild panel in theHometaboftheRibbon;theAddMulti-viewPartsdialogboxwillbedisplayed,asshowninFigure7-3.SelectthedesiredjunctionboxfromtheJunctionBoxesnodeintheParttabofthedialogbox.Varioussizesof theselected junctionboxaredisplayed in thePartSizeNamedrop-down list.Bydefault,13HoleLargeOutletBoxes is selected in thePart tab.Select the required size from thedrop-down list.Now,clickonthedrawingareatoplacethejunctionbox;acompasswillbedisplayedbelowthejunctionbox.Using this compass, you can rotate the component at a specific angle.After specifying the angle,choosetheClosebuttonfromtheAddMulti-viewPartsdialogboxtoexitthedialogbox.
![Page 278: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/278.jpg)
Figure7-3TheAddMulti-viewPartsdialogboxwiththe13HoleLargeOutletBoxespartselected
SwitchboardAswitchboardisanarrangementofelectricalswitchesconnectedtoeachotherinaclosepackedunit.Aswitchboard controls thepowerofvarious areasof a servingunit.Toadda switchboard, choose theSwitchboardtoolfromtheEquipmentdrop-downoftheBuildpanelintheHometaboftheRibbon;theAddMulti-viewPartsdialogboxwillbedisplayed,asshowninFigure7-4.Expand theSwitchboardnode and click on the desired switchboard type; the preview of the selected switch board will bedisplayedinthePreviewareaofthedialogbox.YoucanselectthedesiredsizefromthePartSizeNamedrop-downlistdisplayedbelowthePreviewareaofthedialogbox.Now,clickinthedrawingareatoplacetheswitchboard;acompasswillbedisplayedbelowthecomponent.Usingthiscompass,youcanrotatethecomponentataspecificangle.Afterspecifyingtheangle,choosetheClosebuttonfromtheAddMulti-viewPartsdialogboxtoexitthedialogbox.
![Page 279: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/279.jpg)
Figure7-4TheAddMulti-viewPartsdialogboxwiththeCircuitBreakerSwitchboardpartselected
There are three types of switchboards available in AutoCAD MEP by default: circuit breakerswitchboard, distribution board, and utility switchboard. The circuit breaker switchboard consists ofswitches that are automatically operated to protect the circuit from the damage caused by overload orshort circuit. The distribution boards are used to distribute the power coming from source to variousoutlets.Theutilityswitchboardsareusedtotransmitpowerforaspecificpurpose.EquipmentIfyouchoosetheEquipmenttoolfromtheEquipmentdrop-downoftheBuildpanelintheHometaboftheribbon;theAddMulti-viewPartsdialogboxwillbedisplayed,asshowninFigure7-5.Clickonthe+ signadjacent to thedesiredcategory in theAddMulti-viewPartsdialogbox; therelatedequipmentavailableinAutoCADMEPwillbedisplayedinatreestructure.Selecttherequiredoptionfromthelistand click in the drawing area to place the equipment; a compass will also be displayed below theequipment. Using this compass, you can rotate the equipment at a specific angle. After specifying theangle,choosetheClosebuttonfromtheAddMulti-viewPartsdialogboxtoexit.
![Page 280: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/280.jpg)
Figure7-5TheAddMulti-viewPartsdialogboxPANELPanelsare,thedistributionboxesinwhichvariousswitchesarearrangedforaspecificpurpose.Toaddapaneltothedrawing,choosethePaneltoolfromtheBuildpaneloftheHometabintheRibbon;previewofapanelwillbedisplayedattachedtothecursor,refertoFigure7-6.
Figure7-6Previewofthepanel
Also,onchoosingthistool,thePROPERTIESpalettewillbedisplayed,asshowninFigure7-7.Now,clickinthedrawingareatoplacethepanel.Youwillbepromptedtospecifytherotationvalueforthepanel.SpecifytherotationvalueandpressENTER;thepanelwillbecreatedatthespecifiedlocation.
![Page 281: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/281.jpg)
Figure7-7ThePROPERTIESpalettedisplayedonchoosingthePaneltool
TheoptionsavailableinthePROPERTIESpaletteafterchoosingthePaneltoolarediscussednext.NoteThesymbolsintheStylefieldandtheSelectStyledialogboxaredisplayedinblackbackgroundifyouhavesetthebackgroundcolorofdrawingareaasblack.TheoptionsintheBASIC>Generalrolloutarediscussednext.DescriptionThisoptionisusedtospecifythedescriptionabouttheobject.Whenyouclickinthefieldcorrespondingtothisoption,theDescriptiondialogboxwillbedisplayed,asshowninFigure7-8.Youcanenter thedescriptionabout thecomponent in theEdit thedescriptionforthiscomponent textboxof thedialogbox.Afterspecifyingthedescription,choosetheOKbuttontoexitthedialogbox.
![Page 282: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/282.jpg)
Figure7-8TheDescriptiondialogbox
StyleThisoptionisusedtochangethestyleofthepaneltobecreated.Clickinthefieldcorrespondingtothisoption;theSelectStyledialogboxwillbedisplayed,asshowninFigure7-9.SelectthedesiredcategoryfromtheCategorydrop-downlistinthedialogbox;thestylesavailableintheselectedcategorywillbedisplayedofthedialogboxoryoucanalsosearchastylebyenteringitsnameintheSearchboxandclickGotofindthestyle.SelectthedesiredstylefromthedialogboxandchoosetheOKbutton;theselectedstylewillbeassignedtothepanel.
Figure7-9TheSelectstyledialogbox
TheoptionsintheBASIC>Locationrolloutarediscussednext.Aligntoobjects
![Page 283: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/283.jpg)
Theoptionsinthisdrop-downlistareusedtospecifywhetherthepanelwillbealignedtotheselectedobjectornot.Therearetwooptionsavailableinthisdrop-downlist:YesandNo.TheYesoptionisusedtospecifythatthepanelwillbealignedtotheselectedobject.RotationThisoptionisusedtospecifytherotationanglevalueofthepanel.JustificationThisdrop-downlistisavailableinthePROPERTIESpaletteonlywhentheNooptionisselectedintheAligntoObjectsdrop-downlist.Theoptionsinthisdrop-downlistareusedtospecifythepositionofthepanelwithrespecttotheinsertionpoint.PresetelevationTheoptionsinthisdrop-downlistareusedtosettheelevationofthepanel.Bydefault,UCSisselectedinthisdrop-downlist.ElevationThisoptionisusedtospecifythevalueofelevationfromtheselectedpreset.TheoptionsintheADVANCEDrolloutarediscussednext.SystemTheoptions in thisdrop-down list areused to specify the typeof system forwhich thepanel isbeingcreated.CreatecircuitsTheoptions in thisdrop-down list areused to specifywhether tocreateacircuit for thepanelornot.Therearetwooptionsavailableinthisdrop-downlist:YesandNo.IfyouselecttheYesoptionfromthisdrop-downlist,thenthecircuitwillalsobecreatedalongwiththepanel.CircuitSettingsOnclicking in this field, theCircuitSettings dialog boxwill be displayed, as shown inFigure 7-10.Usingtheoptionsinthisdialogbox,youcandefinevarioussettingsforthecircuit.ChoosetheOKbuttonafterdefiningthesettings.
![Page 284: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/284.jpg)
Figure7-10TheCircuitSettingsdialogbox
NameTheNameeditboxisusedtospecifythenameofthepanel.RatingThiseditboxisusedtospecifytheratingofthepanel.Voltagephase-to-neutralTheoptionsinthisdrop-downlistareusedtospecifythevoltagevaluebetweenphaselineandneutralline.
Voltagephase-to-phaseTheoptionsinthisdrop-downlistareusedtospecifythevoltagevaluebetweentwophaselines.PhasesThe options in this drop-down list are used to specifywhether the selected panel is for single phase
![Page 285: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/285.jpg)
supply or three phase supply.There are two options available in this drop-down list:1 and3. If youselect the1 option from this drop-down list, the panelwill be created for single phase supply. If youselectthe3optionfromthisdrop-downlist,thepanelwillbecreatedforthreephasesupply.WiresTheoptionsinthisdrop-downlistareusedtospecifythenumberofcablestobeattachedwiththepanelafter creation. If the1 option is selected from thePhases drop-down list, only the 1 option will beavailableintheWiresdrop-downlist.Ifthe3optionisselectedinthePhasesdrop-downlist,thenthe3and4optionswillbeavailableinthisdrop-downlist.NoteIfthe3optionisselectedinboththePhasesandtheWiresdrop-downlists,thentheVoltagephase-to-neutraleditboxwillnotbeavailableinthePROPERTIESpalette.
MaintypeThere are twooptions available in this drop-down list: theMain lugs only (MLO) andMain circuitbreaker(MCB).Theseoptionsareusedtospecifywhetherthepanelisofmainlugonlyormaincircuitbreaker.Mainsize(amps)ThiseditboxisusedtospecifythevalueofCurrent(I)runningthroughthemainsupply.IthasthesamevalueasspecifiedintheRatingeditboxofthepanel.Designcapacity(amps)Thiseditboxisusedtospecifythedesignedcapacityofthepanel.PaneltypeTheoptionsinthisdrop-downlistareusedtospecifythetypeofpaneltobeused.Therearetwooptionsavailableinthisdrop-downlist:ANSIandISO.
EnclosuretypeThiseditboxisusedtospecifythetypeofenclosureforthepanel.MountingTheoptionsinthisdrop-downlistareusedtospecifythetypeofmountingrequiredforthepanel.Therearethreeoptionsavailableinthisdrop-downlist:Surface,Recessed,andFloor.AICratingThisoptionisusedtospecifytheshortcircuitrating.Youcanspecifythemaximumvalueofcurrentthatcanflowwithoutcausingdamagetothebreaker.
![Page 286: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/286.jpg)
FedfromThisoptionisusedtospecifythesourceofpowerforthecurrentpanel.NotesThisoptionisusedtospecifyimportantnotesthataretobetakencareofwhilehandlingthepanel.DEVICEThis tool isused to insert anelectricaldevice in thedrawingarea.This tool is available in theBuildpaneloftheHometabintheRibbon.Toinsertanelectricaldevice,choosetheDevicetool;youwillbepromptedtospecifyaninsertionpointforthedevice.Also,thePROPERTIESpalettewillbedisplayed,asshowninFigure7-11.Clickinthedrawingarea;thedevicewillbeplacedatthespecifiedpoint.TheoptionsavailableinthePROPERTIESpaletteafterchoosingtheDevicetoolarediscussednext.
Figure7-11ThePROPERTIESpalettedisplayedonchoosingtheDevicetoolTheoptionsintheBASIC>Generalrolloutarediscussednext.DescriptionThisoptionisusedtoenterthedescriptionofthedevicetobeadded.StyleThisoptionisusedtoselectthetypeofdevicetobeinsertedinthedrawingarea.Toselectthetypeof
![Page 287: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/287.jpg)
device,clickinthefieldofthisoption;theSelectStyledialogboxwillbedisplayed,asshowninFigure7-12.ChoosethedesiredoptionsfromtheDrawingfileandCategorydrop-downlistsofthedialogbox;therelevantdevicesymbolswillbedisplayedinthePreviewareaofthedialogbox.Alternatively,youcansearchastylebyenteringitsnameintheSearchboxandchoosingtheGobutton.SelectthedesireddevicefromthePreviewareaofthedialogboxandchoosetheOKbutton;theselecteddevicewillgetattachedtothecursorandwillbedisplayedintheStylefieldofthePROPERTIESpalette.
Figure7-12TheSelectStyledialogboxLayoutmethodTheoptions in thisdrop-downlistareused tospecify themethodof insertionof thedevice.Therearethree options available in this drop-down list:One by one,Distance around space, andQuantityaroundspace.IfyouselecttheOnebyoneoptionfromthisdrop-downlistthenyouneedtoinsertthedevicesonebyone.
IftheDistancearoundspaceoptionisselectedthenyoucanspecifythedistancearoundtheboundarybyusing theeditboxesdisplayedbelow it.Onselecting theDistancearoundspace option, theDistancebetween and theNumber of devices edit boxes will be displayed below the option. TheDistancebetweenandtheNumberofdeviceseditboxescannotbeactivatedat thesame time.Onselecting theDistance around space option, only theDistance between edit box is activated. If you choose theQuantity around space option from the drop-down list, the Distance between edit box will bedeactivatedwhereastheNumberofdeviceseditboxwillbeactivated.Youcanspecify thenumberofdevices in theNumberofdevices edit box.Note that touseboth theDistancearound space and theQuantityaroundspaceoptions,youmusthaveaspacecreatedinthemodel.TheoptionsintheBASIC>Locationrolloutarediscussednext.AligntoobjectsTheoptionsinthisdrop-downlistareusedtospecifywhetherthedeviceistobealignedtotheselected
![Page 288: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/288.jpg)
objectornot.Therearetwooptionsavailableinthisdrop-downlist:YesandNo.ChoosetheYesoptionfromthisdrop-downlisttoalignthedevicewiththeselectedobject.Thisdrop-downlistisavailableonlyifOnebyoneisselectedfromtheLayoutMethoddropdownlistintheLayoutrollout.RotationThisoptionisusedtospecifytherotationanglevalueforthedevice.JustificationTheoptionsinthisdrop-downlistareusedtojustifythedevicewithrespecttoitsinsertionpoint.PresetElevationTheoptionsinthisdrop-downlistareusedtosetelevationofthedevice.Bydefault,UCSisselectedinthisdrop-downlist.ElevationThisoptionisusedtospecifythevalueofelevationfromtheselectedpreset.TheoptionsintheADVANCEDrolloutarediscussednext.SystemTheoptionsinthisdrop-downlistareusedtospecifythesystemtypeinwhichthedeviceisinserted.IDThisoptionisusedtoassignanIDtothecurrentdevice.InserttagTheoptionsinthisdrop-downlistareusedtospecifythetagtobeaddedtotheselecteddevice.ElectricalPropertyOnclickinginthisfield,theElectricalPropertiesdialogboxwillbedisplayed,asshowninFigure7-13.Whileaddinganewdevice,youcanchangethenumberofconnectorsandotherrelatedpropertiesbyusingtheoptionsavailableinthisdialogbox.
![Page 289: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/289.jpg)
Figure7-13TheElectricalPropertiesdialogboxCABLETRAYThistoolisusedtoaddacabletrayforsupportingthecables.Toaddacabletray,choosetheCableTraytoolfromtheBuildpanelintheHometaboftheRibbon;youwillbepromptedtospecifystartpointofthecabletray.Also,theAddCableTraysdialogboxwillbedisplayed,asshowninFigure7-14.Now,clickinthedrawingareatospecifythestartpointofthecabletray;youwillbepromptedtospecifytheend point of the cable tray. Click to specify the end point of the cable tray; youwill be prompted tospecifytheendpointofthecabletrayagain.YoucanspecifytheendpointofthenextsectionoryoucanpressENTERtoexit.
![Page 290: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/290.jpg)
Figure7-14TheAddCableTraysdialogboxTheoptionsavailableintheAddCableTraysdialogboxarediscussednext.SystemTheoptions in thisdrop-down listareused tospecify thesystemtype inwhich thecable tray isbeingadded.
ElevationYoucanspecifytheelevationofthecabletrayinthisdialogboxbyusingtheElevationdrop-downlistortheElevationeditbox.TheElevationeditboxisusedtospecifythevalueofelevationofthecabletrayfrom the reference.The options in theElevation drop-down list are used to specify reference for theelevation.The elevation value thus specified can be locked or kept unlocked by clicking on the buttonavailablenexttotheElevationeditbox.HorizontalYoucanpositionthecabletrayhorizontallywithrespecttotheinsertionpointbyusingtheJustificationdrop-down list and theOffset edit box. The options in the Justification drop-down list are used tospecifythejustificationmethodforthecabletrayinhorizontaldirection.TheOffseteditboxisusedtospecifythedistanceofthecabletrayfromthecursor.VerticalYoucanverticallyposition thecable traywith respect to the insertionpointbyusing theJustificationdrop-down list and theOffset edit box. The options in the Justification drop-down list are used tospecify the justificationmethod for the cable tray inverticaldirection.TheOffset edit box is used tospecifythedistanceofthecabletrayfromthecursor.
WidthTheWidthoptionintheAddCableTraydialogboxisusedtospecifythewidthofthecabletray.Ifyouspecify thewidthother than thepredefinedvalue, amessageboxwill bedisplayedwith themessage:Thispartisnotavailableinthesizeneeded.Wouldyouliketocreateacustomsizeofthispart?IfyouchoosetheYesbuttonfromthemessagebox,apartofcustomsizeiscreated,butifyouchoosetheNobutton;theChooseaPartdialogboxwillbedisplayed.Selecttherequiredpartfromthedialogbox.
![Page 291: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/291.jpg)
HeightTheHeightoptionintheAddCableTraydialogboxisusedtospecifytheheightofthecabletray.Youcanspecifytheheightusingthesamemethodthatwasusedforspecifyingthewidth.UseRise/RunThisradiobuttonisusedtospecifytherise/runvalueforthecabletray.Onselectingthisradiobutton,aneditboxadjacenttothisradiobuttonwillbeactivated.Youcanspecifythevalueforriseandruninthiseditbox.UseRoutingBydefault, thisradiobuttonisselectedintheLayoutMethodarea.Asaresult, theElbowAngleeditboxwillbeactivated.Youcanspecifytheelbowanglevalueinthiseditbox.ThiselevationvaluecanbelockedorkeptunlockedbyclickingonthebuttonavailablenexttotheElbowAngleeditbox.CABLETRAYFITTINGThistoolisusedtoaddauserdefinedcabletrayfitting.Tocreateacabletrayfitting,choosetheCableTrayFittingtoolfromtheBuildpanelintheHometaboftheRibbon;theAddCableTrayFittingdialogboxwillbedisplayed,asshowninFigure7-15.Bydefault,thelastusedcabletrayfittingisselectedinthisdialogbox.Select thedesiredpart from thePart tabof thedialogbox; apreviewof the selectedcabletrayfittingwillbedisplayedintherightofthedialogboxandtheselectedpartwillgetattachedtothecursor.Select thedesiredsizeof theselectedpart from thePartSizeNamedrop-down list in thedialogboxandclickinthedrawingareatoplacethecabletrayfitting.Youcancreateacabletrayfittingasaseparateentityorcanjoinitwiththecabletray.
Figure7-15TheAddCableTrayFittingsdialogbox
![Page 292: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/292.jpg)
WIREThistoolisusedtoaddawireinthedrawingarea.Todoso,choosetheWiretoolfromtheBuildpanelin theHome tab of theRibbon; you will be prompted to specify the start point of the wire and thecorrespondingPROPERTIESpalettewillbedisplayed,asshowninFigure7-16.Clickinthedrawingareatospecifythefirstpointofthewire;youwillbepromptedtospecifythesecondpointofthewire.Clicktospecifythesecondpointofthewire;thewirewillbecreated.YoucanspecifymorepointsoryoucanpressENTERtoexitthetool.
Figure7-16ThePROPERTIESpalettedisplayedonchoosingtheWiretool
TipYoucanalsoconvertalineintoawire.Todoso,selectalineandright-clickonit;ashortcutmenuwillbedisplayed.HoverthecursorovertheConvertTooptionandchoose theWireoption fromtheflyoutdisplayed;youwillbepromptedtodeleteorretainthelineaftercreatingthewire.EnterYorNaspertherequirement.TheoptionsavailableinthePROPERTIESpalette,afterchoosingtheWiretool,arediscussednext.DescriptionThisoptionisusedtospecifydescriptionaboutthewire.
![Page 293: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/293.jpg)
StyleTheoptionsinthisdrop-downlistareusedtospecifythewiretype.SegmentTheoptionsinthisdrop-downlistareusedtospecifythesegmenttypetobeusedwhilecreatingthewiresystem.Therearesixoptionsavailableinthisdrop-downlist:Line,Arc,Snake,Polyline,Chamfer,andSpline.Onchoosinganoptionfromthisdrop-downlist,thepreviewofthecorrespondingsegmenttypeisdisplayed.
HeightThisoptionisavailablebelowtheSegmentdrop-downlistonlywhentheArc,Snake,Chamfer,ortheSplineoptionisselectedintheSegmentdrop-downlist.Itisusedtospecifytheheightofthesegment.OffsetThisdrop-downlistisavailablebelowtheHeighteditboxonlywhentheArc,Snake,Chamfer,ortheSplineoptionisselectedintheSegmentdrop-downlist.Theoptionsinthisdrop-downlistareusedtospecify thealignmentof thesegment.Thereare twooptionsavailable in thisdrop-downlist:Left andRight.TheLeft option is used to align the segment to the left. TheRight option is used to align thesegmenttotheright.RadiusThisoptionisavailableonlywhenthePolylineoptionisselectedintheSegmentdrop-downlist.Thisoptionisusedtospecifytheradiusatcornersofthepolylinesegment.PresetElevationTheoptionsinthisdrop-downlistareusedtosetthevalueforelevation.Bydefault,UCSisselectedinthisdrop-downlist.ElevationThisoptionisusedtospecifythevalueofelevationfromtheselectedpreset.SystemTheoptionsinthisdrop-downlistareusedtospecifythesystemtypeinwhichthewirewillbeadded.ShowcircuitsfromthepanelsTheoptionsin thisdrop-downlistareusedtospecifywhetheryouwant todisplaythecircuitfromthepanelsornot.CircuitTheoptionsinthisdrop-downlistareusedtospecifythecircuitforwhichthewireisbeingcreated.
![Page 294: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/294.jpg)
ConnectedcircuitsThisoptionisusedtospecifythecircuitsthatareconnectedtowire.ConnectedloadThisoptionisusedtospecifythetotalloadinthecircuitconnectedtothewire.HotsizeThisoptionisusedtospecifythesizeofthehotwireinthewiringsystem.NeutralsizeThisoptionisusedtospecifythesizeoftheneutralwireinthewiringsystem.GroundsizeThisoptionisusedtospecifythesizeofthegroundwireinthewiringsystem.NewRunThis tool is used to start a new run of wire system. This tool is available at the bottom of thePROPERTIESpalette.Itwillbeactiveaftermakingonerunofwire.Onchoosingthistool,youcanstartcreatinganewwiringsystembyspecifyingthestartpoint.CONDUITTheConduittoolisusedtoaddconduitstothedrawingarea.Todoso,choosethistoolfromtheConduitdrop-down of the Build panel in the Home tab of the Ribbon; the PROPERTIES palette will bedisplayed,as shown inFigure7-17andyouwillbeprompted to specify thestartpointof theconduit.Clickinthedrawingareatospecifythestartpointoftheconduit;youwillbeagainpromptedtospecifythenextpointoftheconduit.Clicktospecifytheendpointoftheconduit;youwillbeagainpromptedtospecifythenextpointoftheconduit.YoucanspecifythenextpointoryoucanpressENTERtoexitthetool.Mostof theoptions in thispalettehavealreadybeendiscussed.Remainingoptionsarediscussednext.
![Page 295: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/295.jpg)
Figure7-17ThePROPERTIESpalettedisplayedonchoosingtheConduittoolRoutingpreferenceThe options in this drop-down list are used to specify the preferred routing system for the conduitcreation.NominalsizeThisoptionisusedtospecifythediameteroftheconduitpipe.SpecifycutlengthTheoptionsinthisdrop-downlistareusedtospecifywhethertheconduithasacutlengthornot.CutlengthThisoptionisavailableonlywhentheYesoptionisselectedintheSpecifycutlengthdrop-downlist.Itisusedtospecifythemaximumlengthofonesegmentoftheconduit.
![Page 296: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/296.jpg)
JustifyTheoptionsavailableinthisdrop-downlistareusedtospecifythejustificationmethodfortheconduit.HorizontaloffsetUsing this edit box, you can specify the value of horizontal distance from the conduit to the selectedjustificationpoint.
VerticaloffsetUsing this edit box, you can specify the value of vertical distance from the conduit to the selectedjustificationpoint.SlopeformatTheoptionsinthisdrop-downlistareusedtospecifytheformatinwhichtheslopevaluewillbeentered.There are four options available in this drop-down list: Angle (Decimal Degrees), Percentage(100%=45Degrees),Percentage(100%=90Degrees),andRisevalue/Runvalue(Meters/Meters).SlopeThiseditboxisusedtospecifythevalueofslope.Theformatoftheslopevaluespecifiedinthiseditboxwill dependon theoption selected in theSlopeformatdrop-down list. If you change the slope valuewhileaddingmoreducts,thenthefittingatjointswilladjustaccordingly.BendAngleThisdrop-downlist isusedtospecify theangleofbendthat is tobeappliedonabendwhilecreatingconduit.BendRadiusThiseditboxisusedtospecifytheradiusofbendthatistobeappliedonabendwhilecreatingconduit.ConnectionDetailsWhenyouclickinthisfield,theConnectionDetailsdialogboxwillbedisplayed,asshowninFigure7-18.Therearetworolloutsavailableinthedialogboxcontainingdetailsaboutboththeconnections.
![Page 297: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/297.jpg)
Figure7-18TheConnectionDetailsdialogbox
PreferencesWhenyouclickinthisfield,theConduitLayoutPreferencesdialogboxwillbedisplayed,asshowninFigure 7-19. The options in this dialog box are used to define the layout preferences for creating aconduit.Usingtheoptionsinthisdialogbox,youcansetthepreferencesforSlope,Elevation,Labelstyle,Flowarrowstyle,andotherparameters.
![Page 298: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/298.jpg)
Figure7-19TheConduitLayoutPreferencesdialogbox
StyleTherearetwodrop-downlistswiththenameStyle:oneintheADVANCED>LabelandFlowArrows>LabelsrolloutofthePROPERTIESpaletteandtheotherintheADVANCED>LabelandFlowArrows>FlowArrows rolloutofthePROPERTIESpalette.Theoptions in thesedrop-downlistsareused toapplystylestothelabelsandflowarrowsoftheconduit.
PARALLELCONDUITSTheParallelConduits tool isused toaddparallelconduits to thedrawingarea.Todoso,choose thistoolfromtheConduitdrop-downintheBuildpaneloftheHometabintheRibbon;youwillbepromptedtoselectbaselineobjects.Selectthebaselineobjects,refertoFigure7-20;youwillbepromptedtoselecttheparallelconduits.SelecttheconduitsparalleltotheselectedbaselineandpressENTER;youwillbepromptedtospecifythenextpointfortheconduit.Clickinthedrawingareatospecifythenextpointoftheconduit;aparallelconduitconsistingoftheselectedconduitlinesisdisplayed,asshowninFigure7-21.
Figure7-20Thebaselineobjectstobeselected
![Page 299: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/299.jpg)
Figure7-21TheparallelconduitscreatedCONDUITFITTINGTheConduitFittingtoolisusedtoaddfittingstotheconduit.Toaddaconduitfitting,choosethistoolfromtheBuildpanelintheHometaboftheRibbon;youwillbepromptedtospecifyaninsertionpoint.Also,thePROPERTIESpalettewillbedisplayed,asshowninFigure7-22.Clickinthedrawingareaoronaconduitlinetoaddtheconduitfitting.TheoptionsinthePROPERTIESpaletteafterchoosingtheConduitFittingtoolarediscussednext.
![Page 300: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/300.jpg)
Figure7-22ThePROPERTIESpalettedisplayedafterchoosingtheConduitFittingtoolDescriptionThisoptionisusedtospecifydescriptionabouttheconduitfitting.SystemTheoptionsinthisdrop-downlistareusedtospecifythesystemforwhichtheconduitisbeingadded.
PartThisoptionisusedtoselecttherequiredfittingtypetobeused.ClickinthefieldnexttothePartoptionin thePROPERTIES palette; theSelectpart dialogboxwill bedisplayed, as shown inFigure7-23.Select thedesiredpart from thedialogboxandchoose theOK button; the selectedconduit fittinggetsattachedtothecursor.Theoptionsavailableinthisdialogboxarediscussednext.
![Page 301: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/301.jpg)
Figure7-23TheSelectPartdialogboxTypeTheoptionsinthisdrop-downlistareusedtospecifytheparttypetobeusedasconduitfitting.Therearefiveoptionsavailable in thisdrop-downlist:All,ConduitBody,Elbow,Tee,andTransition.Chooseanyoftheoptionsfromthedrop-downlist:therelatedoptionsaredisplayedinthedialogbox.SubtypeTheoptions in thisdrop-down list areused tochoose the subtypesavailable for the selected type.Onchoosing a subtype from the drop-down list, the related options are displayed in theSELECTPARTFROMCATALOGareaofthedialogbox.SELECTPARTFROMCATALOGTheparts available for selected type and subtype are displayed in this area.Choose the requiredpartfromthisareaandthenchoosetheOKbuttonfromthedialogbox;theselectedpartgetsattachedtothecursor.
FILTERTheoptionsinthisareaareusedtofilterthepartsavailableforselectedtypeandsubtypedependingontheirsizeandparameters.
![Page 302: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/302.jpg)
SELECTPARTSIZETheoptionsinthisareaareusedtoselectrequiredsizeoftheselectedpart.Theoptionsdisplayedinthisarea are confined by the values selected in theFilter area of the dialog box. Select the part havingrequiredsizefromthisareaandchoosetheOKbuttonfromthisdialogbox;thepartwillgetattachedtothecursor.CurrentSizeTheoptionsinthisdrop-downlistareusedtospecifythesizefortheselectedpart.Theseoptionsarealsoavailable in theSELECTPARTSIZE area of theSelect part dialog boxwhich has been discussedearlier.NominalDiameterThiseditboxisavailableforeachconnectoraddedtothepart.Usingthiseditbox,youcanchangethenominaldiameteroftheconnector.OtherDimensionsRolloutTheoptionsinthisrolloutareusedtospecifyvariousdimensionsforthepart.Theoptionsinthisrolloutchangedependingupontheselectedpart.ElevationThiseditboxisusedtospecifythevalueofelevationfortheselectedpart.SpecifyrotationonscreenTheoptionsinthisdrop-downlistareusedtospecifywhethertherotationofthepartwillbespecifiedonthescreenorintheeditboxavailableinthePROPERTIESpalette.IfyouchoosetheNooptionfromthedrop-downlist,theRotationeditboxwillbedisplayed.RotationYoucanspecifythevalueofrotationinthiseditbox.ConnectiondetailsThisbuttonisavailableintheADVANCEDrollout.Whenyouchoosethisbutton,theConnectionDetailsdialogboxwillbedisplayed,asshowninFigure7-24.Therearetworolloutsavailableinthedialogboxcontainingthedetailsaboutboththeendsoftheconduit.
![Page 303: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/303.jpg)
Figure7-24TheConnectionDetailsdialogbox
CIRCUITMANAGERInanelectricallayout,alltheappliancesareconnectedtothepowersourceswiththehelpofacircuit.InAutoCADMEP,circuitsareusedforcalculatingcircuitloads,checkingcircuitoverloads,orcalculatingwiresizes.Therecanbemorethanonecircuitinasingleelectricallayout.Tocreateandmanagecircuitsin AutoCAD MEP, the Circuit Manager is used. To invoke the CIRCUIT MANAGER, choose theCIRCUITMANAGERtoolfromtheElectricalpanelintheAnalyzetaboftheRibbon;theCIRCUITMANAGERpalettewillbedisplayed,asshowninFigure7-25.TheoptionsavailableintheCIRCUITMANAGERpalettearediscussednext.
Figure7-25TheCIRCUITMANAGERpalette
CreateNewCircuitThisdrop-downisavailableatthebottomoftheCIRCUITMANAGERpalette.Thetoolsinthisdrop-
![Page 304: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/304.jpg)
downareusedtocreatenewcircuitstosupplypowertoappliancesdependingontherequiredload,refertoFigure7-26.Thetoolsavailableinthisdrop-downarediscussednext.
Figure7-26TheCreateNewCircuitsdrop-down
NewPower&LightingCircuitThis tool isused tocreateacircuit forpowerand lighting.Tocreate such typeofcircuits,choose theNewPower&LightingCircuittoolfromtheCreateNewCircuitsdrop-down;theAutoCADMEP-ElectricalProjectDatabase dialog boxwill be displayed, as shown inFigure7-27 and youwill bepromptedtocreateanewelectricalprojectdatabase(EPD)oropenanexistingdatabase.
Figure7-27TheAutoCADMEP-ElectricalProjectDatabasedialogboxChoose the Create a new EPD file option from the dialog box; the Save As dialog box will bedisplayed,asshowninFigure7-28.SpecifythedesiredfilenameandchoosetheSavebuttonfromthedialog box. A circuit will be created and then displayed under thePower and Lighting node in theCIRCUITMANAGERpalette.Also, therelatedparameterswillbedisplayedon therightsideof thedialogbox.Youcanchangetheparametersasperyourrequirement.
![Page 305: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/305.jpg)
Figure7-28TheSaveAsdialogbox
NewGeneralCircuitThistoolisusedtocreategeneralcircuits.Generalcircuitsareusedforgeneralapplication.Figure7-29showsacircuitcreatedbyusing theNewGeneralCircuit tool in theCIRCUITMANAGER palette.TherearefourparametersavailableintherightsideoftheCIRCUITMANAGERpaletteforageneralcircuit.Youcanchangetheseparametersasperyourrequirement.
Figure7-29TheCIRCUITMANAGERpalettewiththeGeneralcircuit
NewOtherCircuitThis tool is used to create new circuits for special purposes like a circuit to run air conditioner.TheworkingofthistoolissimilartotheNewGeneralCircuittool.CreateMultipleCircuitsThistoolisusedtocreatemultiplecircuitsatatime.Todoso,choosetheCreateMultipleCircuitstool
![Page 306: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/306.jpg)
availableatthebottomoftheCIRCUITMANAGERpalette;theCreateMultipleCircuitsdialogboxwillbedisplayed,asshowninFigure7-30.SelectthedesiredoptionsandchoosetheOKbuttonfromthedialogboxtocreatemultiplecircuits.Theoptionsavailableinthisdialogboxarediscussednext.
Figure7-30TheCreateMultipleCircuitsdialogboxPanelTheoptionsinthisdrop-downlistareusedtoselectthepaneltobecreated.Allthepanelscreatedinthecurrentdrawingaredisplayedinthisdrop-downlist.SystemTypeTheoptionsinthisdrop-downlistareusedtoselectthesystemtypeforthecircuitstobecreated.Therearethreeoptionsavailableinthisdrop-downlist:PowerandLighting,General,andOther.SystemTheoptionsinthisdrop-downlistareusedtospecifythesystemforwhichthecircuitistobecreated.The options in this drop-down list change according to the option selected in theSystemType drop-downlist.
![Page 307: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/307.jpg)
TotalnumberofslotsThisoptionisusedtospecifythenumberofslotsrequiredforcurrentelectricallayout.Youcannotchangethe value of this spinner directly.The value in this spinner is changed automatically depending on thevaluesselectedintheNumberofcircuitsspinneriftheOtheroptionortheGeneraloptionisselectedintheSystemTypedrop-downlist.IfthePowerandLightingoptionisselectedintheSystemTypedrop-downlist, thenthevaluein theTotalnumberofslotschangesaccording to thevaluesspecified in theNumberof3-polecircuits,Numberof2-polecircuits,andNumberof1-polecircuitsspinners.
Numberof3-polecircuitsThisoptionisavailableonlywhenthePowerandLightingoptionisselectedintheSystemTypedrop-downlist,refertoFigure7-30.Usingthisoption,youcanspecifythetotalnumberofcircuitsthatwillusethreepoleelectricsupply.Numberof2-polecircuitsThis option is also available only for the Power andLighting system type.Using this option, you canspecifythetotalnumberofcircuitsthatwillusethetwopoleelectricsupply.Numberof1-polecircuitsThis option is also available only for the Power andLighting system type.Using this option, you canspecifythetotalnumberofcircuitsthatwillusetheonepoleelectricsupply.VoltageTheseoptions are also activatedonlywhen thePowerandLighting option is selected in theSystemTypedrop-downlist.TheVoltageoptionsareavailablefor1-polecircuits,2-polecircuits,and3-polecircuits.Youcanchangethevalueofvoltageforaspecificcircuitbyusingthisspinner,refertoFigure7-31.
![Page 308: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/308.jpg)
Figure7-31TheCreateMultipleCircuitsdialogboxwithcircuitsselectedDescriptionforcircuitswithbreakersThiseditboxisusedtospecifythedefaultdescriptionaboutthecircuithavingcircuitbreakers.DescriptionforcircuitswithoutbreakersThiseditboxisusedtospecifythedefaultdescriptionaboutthecircuitshavingnocircuitbreaker.DeleteCircuitThistoolisusedtodeletethecircuitsthatarecreatedearlier.Todeleteacircuit,selectthecircuittobedeleted from the left area and then choose theDeleteCircuit tool from the bottom of theCIRCUITMANAGERpalette;theselectedcircuitwillbedeleted.ShowCircuitedDevicesThistoolisusedtodisplaythedevicesthatareattachedtothecurrentcircuit.Onchoosingthistool;thedevicesattachedtothecurrentcircuitarehighlightedinthedrawingarea.CircuitReport
![Page 309: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/309.jpg)
This tool is used to display a report for the current circuit containing the data related to its variousparameters.Todisplayacircuit report,choose this tool fromthebottomof theCIRCUITMANAGERpalette;theCircuitReportdialogboxwillbedisplayed,refertoFigure7-32.Thisreportconsistsofalltheinformationforacircuitsuchasload,voltage,andlength.
Figure7-32TheCircuitReportdialogbox
CutCircuitThistoolisusedtoremoveacircuitfromapanelsystemandplaceitinanotherpanelsystem.Todoso,select the circuit from one panel and choose this tool from the bottom of theCIRCUITMANAGERpalette,refertoFigure7-33.
Figure7-33TheCircuitManagerpalettewiththecircuittobeshiftedCopyCircuitThistoolisusedtocopytheselectedcircuit.Thecircuitselectediscopiedtotheclipboardandthenitcanbepastedinanyofthepanels.Tocopyacircuit,selectthecircuitfromtheleftareaoftheCIRCUITMANAGERpaletteandthenchoosetheCopyCircuittoolfromthetoolbaravailableatthebottom;thecircuitwillbecopiedtotheclipboard.PasteCircuitThis tool isused topasteanalreadycopiedcircuit.This tool isalsoused topasteacircuitcopiedbyusingtheCutCircuittoolortheCopyCircuittool.Topasteacircuit,selectthepanelinwhichyouwant
![Page 310: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/310.jpg)
tocopythecircuitandthenchoosethePasteCircuittoolfromthetoolbaravailableatthebottomoftheCIRCUITMANAGERpalette;thecircuitintheclipboardwillbepastedintheselectedpanel.CalculateWiresThistoolisusedtocalculatethesizeofthewiretobeusedintheselectedcircuit.TUTORIALTUTORIAL1Inthistutorial,youwillcreatetheelectricallayoutofanoffice,refertoFigure7-34.Youcandownloadthearchitecturalfileoftheofficefromwww.cadcim.com.Thepathofthefileis:Textbooks>CAD/CAM>AutoCADMEP>AutoCADMEP2015forDesigners>InputFiles.(Expectedtime:30min)
Figure7-34Anelectricallayoutoftheoffice
TheparametersoftheelectricaldevicesofthegivenofficearegivenintheTable7-1.
Table7-1ParametersofthedevicesThefollowingstepsarerequiredtocompletethistutorial:
![Page 311: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/311.jpg)
a.Openthedrawingdownloadedfromthewebsite.b.Addthedevicesaccordingtothelayout.c.Configurethedevicestoapplyspecificload.d.Createawiringlinebetweendevices.e.CalculateloadandwiresizeofthecircuitsDownloadingandOpeningtheDrawingFile1. Download the c07_amep_prt.zip file from the http://www.cadcim.com. The path of the file is asfollows:Textbooks>CAD/CAM>AutoCADMEP>AutoCADMEP2015forDesigners>Input
Files.2.Extractthisfiletothedesiredlocation.3.Open thedrawing filec07_amep_prt.dwg from the specified locationbydouble-clickingon it.Thedrawingfileisdisplayed,asshowninFigure7-35.
Figure7-35Architecturallayoutoftheoffice
AddingtheDevices1.OpentheElectricalworkspaceandchoosetheDevicetoolfromtheBuildpanelintheHometaboftheRibbon;thePROPERTIESpaletteisdisplayed,asshowninFigure7-36.
![Page 312: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/312.jpg)
Figure7-36ThePROPERTIESpalettedisplayedafterchoosingtheDevicetool2.ClickintheStylefieldintheBASICrolloutofthePROPERTIESpalette;theSelectStyledialogboxisdisplayed,refertoFigure7-37.
![Page 313: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/313.jpg)
Figure7-37TheSelectStyledialogbox
3.SelecttheLightingFluorescent(Global)optionfromtheDrawingfiledrop-downlist in thedialogbox and select the 1200 Long Linear Fluorescent device from the area displaying devices in thedialogbox.Now,choosetheOKbutton;thedevicegetsattachedtothecursor.
4.Placethelights,asshowninFigure7-38.
![Page 314: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/314.jpg)
Figure7-38Thedrawingafterplacinglights5.Similarly,selecttheSingleSwitchedSocketOutletandFandevicesfromthedisplayareawiththeSockets(global)andPower(global)optionsrespectivelyselectedfromtheDrawingfiledrop-downlist,andplaceitinthedrawingarea,refertoFigure7-39.
Figure7-39ThedrawingafterplacingfansandsocketsNoteThedisplayofsymbolsoftheinsertedequipmentscanbedifferentifAutoCADMEPisstartedbyselectingtheicondifferentfromtheAutoCADMEP2015-English(Global)icon.Alltheinserteddevices,includingfansandlights,willbedisplayedinmustardgreencolor.Now,youneedtoplacejunctionboxesinthedrawing.6. Choose theDevice tool from theBuild panel in theHome tab of theRibbon; thePROPERTIESpaletteisdisplayed.
7.ClickintheStylefieldofthePROPERTIESpalette;theSelectStyledialogboxwillbedisplayed.SelecttheJunctionBoxes(Global)optionfromtheDrawingfiledrop-downlist; the junctionboxesavailableinthecurrentdrawingaredisplayed.
8.SelecttheHexagon3JunctionBoxdevicefromthedevicesdisplayedandthenchoosetheOKbutton;thedevicegetsattachedtothecursor.
9.Placethejunctionboxes,asshowninFigure7-40.
![Page 315: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/315.jpg)
Figure7-40ThedrawingafteraddingthejunctionboxesConfiguringDevices1.SelectasocketfromthedrawingareaandthenselecttheSelectSimilaroptionfromtheSelectSimilardrop-downlistoftheDevicecontextual tabdisplayed in theRibbon;all thesocketsavailable in thedrawingareaareselected;thePROPERTIESpaletteisdisplayed.
2.Rightclickontheselecteditems;shortcutmenuisdisplayed.ChoosethePropertiesoptionfromtheshortcutmenu.ClickintheElectricalpropertiesfieldintheCircuitrolloutofADVANCEDrolloutinthePROPERTIESpalette;theElectricalPropertiesdialogboxisdisplayed,asshowninFigure7-41.
![Page 316: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/316.jpg)
Figure7-41TheElectricalPropertiesdialogboxNow,youneedtospecifytheparametersasperthetable.3.Selectthe230VPoweroptionfromtheSystemdrop-downlist.4.Specify300intheLoadPhase1editbox,refertoTable7-1.5.Selectthe230optionfromtheVoltagedrop-downlist.6.Similarly,selectthe1optionfromtheNumberofPolesdrop-downlistinthedialogbox.7.Specify10intheMaximumOvercurrentRating(amps)editboxinthedialogbox.8.Specify0.8inthePowerFactoreditbox.ChoosetheOKbuttontoexitthedialogbox.9.Similarly,specifytheparametersforotherdevicesaccordingtothetableintheElectricalPropertiesdialogboxbyfollowingthestepsdiscussedabove.Notethatthepowerfactorwillbesameforallthe
![Page 317: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/317.jpg)
devices.Select230VPowerforfansand230VLightingDevices(ceiling)forlightsfromtheSystempropertylistintheElectricalPropertiesdialogbox.
CreatingPanelAll thedevicesareconnected tocircuits.Thesecircuitsare joined toapanel for supply.So,youwillcreateapanelwithcircuitsinthissection.
1.ChoosethePaneltoolfromtheBuildpanelintheHometaboftheRibbon;youarepromptedtospecifyan insertion point for the panel and the PROPERTIES palette after choosing the Panel tool isdisplayed,asshowninFigure7-42.
Figure7-42ThePROPERTIESpalettedisplayedafterchoosingthePaneltool2. Choose theSurfaceDoor 3 option from the display area of theSelect Style dialog box with thePanels(global)optionselectedfromtheDrawingfiledrop-downlist tochange thePanel type in theStyleoptionundertheBasic>GeneralrolloutofthePROPERTIESpalette.SpecifythenameasMainPanelintheNameeditboxintheADVANCED>DesignDatarolloutofthePROPERTIESpalette.
3.Specify800intheRatingeditbox.
![Page 318: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/318.jpg)
4.Selectthe230optionfromtheVoltagephase-to-neutraldrop-downlist.
5.Selectthe240optionfromtheVoltagephase-to-phasedrop-downlist.6.Specifymaintypeasmaincircuitbreaker,mainsize(amps)as15,designcapacity(amps)as20,andAICratingas800inthePROPERTIESpalette.
Now,youneedtocreatecircuitsforthepanel.
7.Click in theCircuitSettings fieldof thePROPERTIESpalette; theCircuitSettings dialog box isdisplayed,asshowninFigure7-43.
Figure7-43TheCircuitSettingsdialogbox
8.MakesurethatPowerandLightingisselectedintheSystemTypedrop-downlistand230VPoweris selected in the System drop-down list. Set the value 3 in both theTotal number of slots andNumber of 1-pole circuits spinners and select the 230 option from the Voltage drop-down listsadjacenttothespinners.
![Page 319: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/319.jpg)
9.ChoosetheOKbuttonfromthedialogboxtoexit.10.Clickinthedrawingareatoplacethepanel,refertoFigure7-44.
Figure7-44Thedrawingafteraddingthepanel
AddingWires1.ChoosetheWiretoolfromtheBuildpanelintheHometaboftheRibbon;youarepromptedtospecifythe start point of thewireon an electrical device.Also, thePROPERTIES palette is displayed, asshowninFigure7-45.
![Page 320: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/320.jpg)
Figure7-45ThePROPERTIESpalettedisplayedonchoosingtheWiretool2.Click in theSystemdrop-downlist.Select the230VPower(230VPOWER)optionfromthedrop-downlist.
3.Connectallthesocketstothejunctionboxusingwires,refertoFigure7-46.MakesurethattheLineoptionisselectedintheSegmentdrop-downlist.
![Page 321: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/321.jpg)
Figure7-46Thedrawingafteraddingwirestothesockets
4.Similarly,connectall the fansand lights to the junctionboxesusing thewires, refer toFigure 7-47.Make sure that system selected for fans is 230VPower and for lights is 230V Lighting Devices(Ceiling).
Figure7-47Thedrawingafteraddingwirestolightsandfans
![Page 322: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/322.jpg)
NoteAdeviceorwirerelatedto230VPowersystemisdisplayedincyancolorandadeviceorwirerelatedto230VLightingDevices(Ceiling) isdisplayedinbrowncolorinthedrawingarea.Makesurethatallthedevicesconnectedtoacircuitareinthesamesystem.
5.Connectallthejunctionboxestothepanel,refertoFigure7-48.
Figure7-48Thedrawingafterconnectingjunctionboxestothepanel
CalculatingLoadsandWiresizes1.Tocalculatethetotalloadofallthedevicesinthedrawingarea,choosethePowerTotals tool fromtheElectricalpanelintheAnalyzetaboftheRibbon;youarepromptedtoselectthedevices.
2.SelectallthedevicesavailableinthedrawingareaandpressENTER;thePowerTotalsdialogboxisdisplayed,refertoFigure7-49.
Figure7-49ThePowerTotalsdialogbox
![Page 323: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/323.jpg)
ThetotalloadisdisplayedintheTotalLoadfieldofthedialogbox.Now,youneedtocalculatethewiresizeofthecircuit.
3.Selectallthewiresinthedrawingarea;thePROPERTIESpaletteisdisplayed.4.ChoosetheCalculatesizesforthewirebuttonavailableattherightoftheDimensionsrolloutintheADVANCED rollout of the PROPERTIES palette; the wire sizes are displayed in theHot size,Neutralsize,andGroundsizeeditboxesintheDimensionsrollout.
SavingtheDrawingFile1.ChooseSavefromtheApplicationMenutosavethedrawingfile.
SELF-EVALUATIONTESTAnswerthefollowingquestionsandthencomparethemtothosegivenattheendofthischapter:1.Alinecanbeconvertedintoawire.(T/F)2.Thecabletrayisusedtosupportthecablesinthesystem.(T/F)3. TheCreateCircuits option is available in thePROPERTIES palette displayed while creating a__________.
4.The_________isusedtocreateandmanagecircuitsinAutoCADMEP.5.InwhichofthefollowingtabsistheCircuitManagertoolavailable?(a)Home(b)Analyze(c)View(d)ManageREVIEWQUESTIONSAnswerthefollowingquestions:1.TheSpacetoolisnotavailableintheElectricalworkspace.(T/F)2.TheHairDrieroptionisnotavailableintheSelectastyledialogbox.(T/F)3.Youcanselectawiretypefromthe__________taboftheToolPalette-Electrical.4.TheCircuitReportisusedtodisplaydatarelatedtovariousparametersofa________.5.InwhichofthefollowingtoolsistheCutLengthoptionavailable?(a)Conduit(b)CableTray
![Page 324: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/324.jpg)
(c)Wire(d)PanelEXERCISEEXERCISE1Inthisexercise,youwillcreateamodelofanelectricalsystem,refertoFigure7-50.Thearchitecturaldrawingforcreatingthisexerciseisavailableatwww.cadcim.com.Downloadthec06_amep_prt.zipfilefromthehttp://www.cadcim.com.Thepathofthefileisasfollows:Textbooks>CAD/CAM>AutoCADMEP> AutoCADMEP 2015 forDesigners > Input Files. Table 7-2 contains the parameters of thedevicestobeaddedtothelayout.(Expectedtime:30min)
Figure7-50Thefinalmodel
Table7-2Parametersforthedevices
![Page 325: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/325.jpg)
AnswerstoSelf-EvaluationTest1.T,2.T,3.panel,4.CircuitManager,5.Analyze
![Page 326: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/326.jpg)
Chapter8
RepresentationandSchedules
![Page 327: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/327.jpg)
LearningObjectivesRNINGOBJECTIVESAftercompletingthischapter,youwillbeableto:•Createverticalsectionofthemodel•Createhorizontalsectionofthemodel•Createsectionlineforcreatingsectionviews•Createelevationline•Createhiddenlineprojections•Slicea3Dobjectforextractingaprofile•Createschedules•Createtables
INTRODUCTIONIn thischapter,youwill learn tocreatedifferentviewsof thebuildingmodel for representation.Theseviewsrepresenteveryminutedetailofthebuildingmodel.Youwillalsolearntocreatevariousschedulesandtablestodocumenttheequipmentrequiredforthebuilding.CREATINGVERTICALSECTIONSVertical Section of an object is created by passing a vertical plane through the objects. To create asection, choose theVerticalSection tool from theSection&Elevation panel of theHome tab in theRibbon;youwillbepromptedtospecifythestartpointofthesectionline.Clickinthedrawingareatospecifythestartpointof thesection;youwillbepromptedtospecify thenextpointof thesectionline.Click in the drawing area to specify the end point of the section line; youwill be prompted again tospecifythenextpointforthesectionline.PressENTER;youwillbepromptedtospecifythelengthoftheboundingbox.Enter thelengthof thesectionareaat thecommandbar; thesectionlinewillbecreated.Figure 8-1 shows a drawing with the section line created. The vertical extent of the object isautomaticallysetastheheightofthesection.Youcanassignauserdefinedvalueastheheight.Todoso,selectthelineandclickintheUsemodelextentsforheightfieldinthePROPERTIESpalette.SelecttheNooptionfromthedrop-downlist;theHeightandLowerextensionfieldswillbeactivatedbelowtheUsemodelextents forheight field.Click in theHeight fieldand specify thevalueof the sectionheight.YoucanalsospecifythevalueoflowerextensionintheLowerextensionfield.
![Page 328: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/328.jpg)
Figure8-1Thedrawingaftercreatingthesectionline
After specifying the section line, youwill create a sectionviewbyusing the section line.To create averticalsectionview,selectthesectionline;theBuildingSectionLinecontextualtabwillbedisplayed,asshowninFigure8-2.Theoptionsavailableinthecontextualtabarediscussednext.
Figure8-2TheBuildingSectionLinecontextualtab
EnableLiveSectionThistoolisusedtocreatelivesectionsbyusingthecurrentsectionline.Thistypeofsectionisadynamicsectionofthebuildingandgetsmodifiedasyoumodifythesectionline.Tocreatealivesection,selectthesectionlineandthenchoosetheEnableLiveSectiontoolfromtheLiveSectionpaneloftheBuildingSectionLinecontextual tabintheRibbon; the livesectionwillbecreated.Todisplay the livesectionyoumustswitchtoanyoftheisometricviewsuchasSWIsometricandNEIsometric.Figure8-3showsadrawingwiththelivesectioncreated.
![Page 329: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/329.jpg)
Figure8-3Thedrawingwithlivesectioncreated
DisableLiveSectionThis tool will get enabled only when a live section is created. This tool is used to remove the livesectionscreatedearlier.Toremovea livesection,select thesectionline thatwasusedtocreate it; theBuildingSectionLinecontextualtabwillbedisplayed.ChoosetheDisableLiveSection toolfromtheLiveSectionpanelof theBuildingSectionLinecontextual tab in theRibbon; the livesectionwillberemoved.ToggleBodyDisplayThistoolisusedtotogglethedisplayofobjectthatisnotdisplayedinthesection.
ReverseThistoolisusedtoreversethesideoftheboundingboxwithrespecttothesectionline.Toreversethesideoftheboundingbox,choosetheReversetoolfromtheModifypanelintheBuildingSectionLinecontextualtaboftheRibbon;theboundingboxwillbecreatedonthereversesideofthesectionline.GenerateSectionThis tool is used to generate section view of a buildingwith respect to the section line selected. Togenerate a section, choose theGenerateSection tool from theModify panel of theBuilding SectionLine contextual tab in theRibbon; theGenerate Section/Elevation dialog boxwill be displayed, asshowninFigure8-4.ChoosetheSelectObjectsbuttonintheSelectionSetareaofthedialogbox;youwill be prompted to select the objects that are to be included in the section view.After selecting theobject tobesectioned,pressENTER.Now,youneed todefine the typeofsection result. InAutoCADMEP, you can display two type of section results by selecting their respective radio buttons from theResultTypeareaofthedialogbox.Boththeseoptionsofgeneratingsectionviewsarediscussednext.
![Page 330: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/330.jpg)
Figure8-4TheGenerateSection/Elevationdialogbox
3DSection/ElevationObjectThisradiobuttonisusedforcreating3Dsectionviewofthebuilding.Ifyouselectthisradiobuttonwhilecreatingthesectionview,thesectionwillbecreatedthreedimensionally,asshowninFigure8-5.
![Page 331: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/331.jpg)
Figure8-5The3Dsectionviewofthebuilding
2DSection/ElevationObjectwithHiddenLineRemovalThis radiobutton isused forcreating2Dsectionviewof thebuilding.Figure8-6showsa2Dsectioncreated.
Figure8-6Thedrawingaftercreating2Dsection
CREATINGHORIZONTALSECTIONTheHorizontalSectiontoolisusedtocreateasectionofthebuildingboundedbytwohorizontalplanes.Tocreateahorizontalsection,choosetheHorizontalSectiontoolfromtheSection&ElevationpaneloftheHometabintheRibbon;youwillbepromptedtoselectacornerforhorizontalsection.Clickinthedrawingarea tospecify thefirstcornerof thesectionplane;youwillbeprompted tospecify theotherdiagonal cornerpointof the sectionplane.Click to specify thepoint;youwillbeprompted to specify
![Page 332: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/332.jpg)
elevationofthecurrentsectionplane.Entertheelevationvalueatthecommandbar;youwillbepromptedtospecifythedepthofthesection.Enterthedesiredvalueatthecommandbar;thesectionlineswillbecreated.Tocreateasection,selectthecreatedsectionlinesfromthedrawingarea;theBuildingSectionLinecontextualtabwillbedisplayedintheRibbon.ChoosetheGenerateSectiontoolfromtheModifypanel in the contextual tab; theGenerateSection/Elevation dialog boxwill be displayed.Create thesectionasdiscussedearlier.TheoptionsintheBuildingSectionLinecontextualtabhavealreadybeendiscussed.CREATINGASECTIONLINETheSectionLinetoolisusedtocreateasectionlinepassingthroughanyuserdefinedpoints.Tocreateasectionline,choosetheSectionLine toolfromtheSection&Elevationpanelof theHome tab in theRibbon; youwill be prompted to specify start point of the section line. Click in the drawing area tospecifythestartpointof thesection;youwillbepromptedtospecify thenextpointof thesectionline.Endthesectionlinebyspecifyingtheendpointofsectionline;youwillbepromptedagaintospecifythenextpointforthesectionline.PressENTERtoexitcreatingsectionline;youwillbepromptedtospecifylengthoftheboundingbox.Enterthelengthoftheboundingboxatthecommandbar;thesectionlinewillbecreated.Bydefault,modelextentisusedastheboundingboxheight.Youcanspecifytheheightoftheboundingboxasdiscussedearlier.Tocreatesectionview,select thesectionline; theBuildingSectionLinecontextualtabwillbedisplayedintheRibbon.Restoftheproceduretocreatesectionviewissameasdiscussedearlier.CREATINGELEVATIONLINETheElevationLinetoolisusedtocreateanelevationlinepassingthroughuserdefinedpoints.Tocreateanelevationline,choosetheElevationLinetoolfromtheSection&ElevationpaneloftheHometabintheRibbon;youwillbepromptedtospecifythestartpointoftheelevationline.Clickinthedrawingareato specify the start point of the elevation line; you will be prompted to specify the end point of theelevation.Clickinthedrawingareatospecifytheendpointoftheelevationline;theelevationlineandtheelevationplanewillbecreated.Theplanecreatedissquareinshape.YoucanchangethelengthofSide1andSide2byusingthecorrespondingoptionsinthePROPERTIESpalette,asshowninFigure8-7.YoucanalsochangetheanglevaluesoftheplanebyusingtheAngle1andAngle2editboxes.
![Page 333: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/333.jpg)
Figure8-7ThePROPERTIESpalette
Now,selecttheelevationline;theBuildingSectionLinecontextualtabwillbedisplayedintheRibbon.Usingtheoptionsavailableinthecontextualtab,youcancreatethesectionasdiscussedearlier.CREATINGHIDDENLINEPROJECTIONTheHiddenLineProjection tool isused to create2Dprojectionswithhiddenprojection linesof themodel.Tocreatetheprojection,choosetheHiddenLineProjectiontoolfromtheexpandedSection&Elevationpanelof theHome tab in theRibbon; youwillbeprompted to selectobjects for creatingaprojection.Selectallobjectsofthemodeltogeneratethe2DprojectionswithhiddenlinesandthenpressENTER;youwillbepromptedtospecifytheinsertionpointfortheprojection.Clickinthedrawingareatospecifytheinsertionpoint;youwillbepromptedtospecifywhethertheprojectionistobeinsertedinplanviewornot.EnterYatthecommandpromptifyouwanttoinsertitintheplanview.Otherwiseanisometricviewwillbeinsertedinthedrawing.Figure8-8showsamodelwithitshiddenlineprojection.
![Page 334: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/334.jpg)
Figure8-8Themodelwithitshiddenlineprojection
SLICINGTHEMODELTheQuickSlicetoolisusedtoextractapolylineoutlineoftheslicecreatedusingthemodel.Toextracttheoutline,choosetheQuickSlicetoolfromtheexpandedSection&ElevationpanelintheHome taboftheRibbon;youwillbepromptedtoselecttheobjectstobesliced.SelecttheobjectstobeslicedandpressENTER;youwillbepromptedtoselectfirstpointforslicing.Clickinthedrawingareatospecifythefirstpoint;youwillbepromptedtospecifythenextpointforslicing.Clicktospecifythenextpoint;theslicewillbecreatedthroughthespecifiedpoints.Figure8-9showsamodelslicedusingtheQuickSlicetool.
Figure8-9ThemodelslicedusingtheQuickSlicetool
![Page 335: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/335.jpg)
REFRESHINGSECTIONSANDELEVATIONSINABATCHTheBatchRefreshtoolisusedtorefreshall2Dsectionsandelevationscreatedinthecurrentprojectorinthespecifiedfolder.Torefreshthe2Dsectionsandelevations,choosetheBatchRefreshtoolfromtheexpanded Section & Elevation panel of the Home tab in the Ribbon; the Batch Refresh 2DSection/Elevationsdialogboxwillbedisplayed,asshowninFigure8-10.
Figure8-10TheBatchRefresh2DSection/Elevationsdialogbox
There are two radio buttons available in this dialog box: Current Project and Folder. Select theCurrentProject radio button if youwant to refresh all the 2D sections and elevations created in thecurrentproject. Ifyouwant to refreshall the2Dsectionsandelevations in thedrawingsof a specificfolder then select theFolder radio button. After selecting the desired radio button, choose theBeginbutton; all the section and elevation views available in the selected drawingswill be updated and itsstatuswillbedisplayedintheStatusareaofthedialogbox.INSERTINGDETAILCOMPONENTSThedetail components areused to representAutoCADMEPcomponentswithdetailedparameters.Toinsertdetailcomponents,choosetheDetailComponentstoolfromtheDetailspaneloftheHometabintheRibbon;theDetailComponentManagerdialogboxwillbedisplayed,asshowninFigure8-11.Intheleftareaof thisdialogbox,variouscategoriesof thedetailcomponentsaredisplayed.Clickontheplussignadjacenttothedesiredcategory;thesub-categoriesavailableinitwillbedisplayed.Clickonthe plus sign adjacent to the desired sub-category; various components in that sub-category will bedisplayed, as shown in Figure 8-12. Select a component from the list; various sizes for the selected
![Page 336: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/336.jpg)
componentwillbedisplayedinthetableavailableatthebottomofthedialogbox.Selectthedesiredsizefrom the table; the InsertComponent buttonwill be activated. Choose the InsertComponent buttonfromthedialogbox;youwillbepromptedtospecifytheinsertionpointforthecomponent.Clickonthedesiredlocationinthedrawingareatospecifytheinsertionpoint;youwillbepromptedagaintospecifytheinsertionpoint.ClicktospecifytheinsertionpointforanothercomponentifrequiredorpressENTERtoexitthetool.YoucanchangetheviewofthecomponenttobeinsertedbyusingtheoptionsintheViewdrop-downlistinthePROPERTIESpalette.
Figure8-11TheDetailComponentManagerdialogbox
![Page 337: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/337.jpg)
Figure8-12TheDetailComponentManagerdialogboxwiththecomponentselectedSomeoftheoptionsavailableintheDetailComponentManagerarediscussednext.EditDatabaseThis button is available at the right of theCurrent detail component database drop-down list. Onchoosingthisbutton,youcaneditthedatabaseavailablefordetailcomponents.Afterchoosingthisbuttonthebuttonsavailablebelowitwillbeactivated.
AddGroupThisbuttonisavailablebelowtheEditDatabasebuttonandisused toaddgroups to thedatabase.Toaddgroups,choose theAddGroup button; theAddGroup dialogboxwill bedisplayed, as shown inFigure8-13.Theoptionsavailableinthisdialogboxarediscussednext.
![Page 338: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/338.jpg)
Figure8-13TheAddGroupdialogboxGroupNameThiseditboxisusedtospecifythenameofthedetailcomponentsgroup.PathKeyTheoptionsinthisdrop-downlistareusedtoidentifythelocationofimagesanddrawingsforthisgroup.Bydefault,theSameasParentGroupoptionisselectedinthisdrop-downlist,sothepathkeyissameasfortheparentgroup.
FilterKeywordsThiseditboxisusedtospecifythekeywordsforsearchingcomponentsinthecurrentgroup.AddComponentThis button is available below theAddGroup button and is used to add components to the selectedgroup.Toaddacomponent,choosetheAddComponentbutton;theNewComponentdialogboxwillbedisplayed, as shown in Figure 8-14. The options available in theGeneral tab of this dialog box arediscussednext.
![Page 339: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/339.jpg)
Figure8-14TheNewComponentdialogboxDisplayNameThis edit box is used to specify the name of the component that will be displayed in the DetailComponentManagerdialogbox.TableNameThiseditboxisusedtospecifythenameofthesizetableofthecurrentcomponent.RecipeThis edit box is used to specify the name of the file that contains themethod for creating the currentcomponent.Fileshavingthexmlextensioncanbeinsertedinthiseditbox.UnitsTheoptionsinthisdrop-downlistareusedtospecifywhetherthecurrentunitsystemisinmmorinches.Description
![Page 340: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/340.jpg)
Thiseditboxisusedtospecifythedescriptionaboutthecomponentbeingcreated.
KeynoteThiseditboxisusedtoassignkeynotesaboutthecomponentbeingcreated.Youcanalsoassignthekeynotesby selecting them from theSelectKeynotedialogbox.TheSelectKeynote dialog boxwill bedisplayedonchoosing theSelectKeynotebuttonfromtheNewComponents dialogbox, as shown inFigure 8-15. Click on the plus sign adjacent to the desired category and then the sub-category; thekeynotesforvariouscomponents in thatsub-categorywillbedisplayed.Select thedesiredkeynoteandthenchoosetheOKbuttontoaddtheselectedkeynote.Onaddingthekeynote,thedescriptionabouttheselectedkeynotewillbedisplayedinthedisplayboxjustbelowtheKeynoteeditbox.
Figure8-15TheSelectKeynotedialogbox
FilterKeywordsThis edit box is used to specify keywords for the created component whichwill be displayed in thesearchlist.
![Page 341: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/341.jpg)
Author/ManufacturerThiseditboxisusedtospecifythenameoftheauthor/manufacturerofthecurrentcomponent.WebAddressThiseditboxisusedtospecifythewebsiteurlofthecomponenttobecreated.DateCreatedThisdisplayboxisusedtodisplaythedateonwhichthecomponentwascreated.
DateModifiedThisdisplayboxisusedtodisplaythedateonwhichthecomponentwasmodified.Ifyouhavecreatedanewcomponent,thenthecurrentdateisdisplayedinthiseditbox.IDThiseditboxisusedtoassignauniqueidentitynumbertothecurrentcomponent.Bydefault,thesystemprovidesauniquenumberinthiseditbox.AfterspecifyingthedesiredvaluesintheGeneraltab,clickontheParameterstabtodisplaytheoptionsrelated toparametersof the current component, as shown inFigure8-16.Theoptions available in theParameterstabofthedialogboxarediscussednext.
![Page 342: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/342.jpg)
Figure8-16TheNewComponentdialogboxwiththeParameterstabselected
ViewThisfieldisusedtospecifythenameoftheviewforwhichthecurrentcomponentwillbeavailable.JigtypeTheoptionsinthisdrop-downlistareusedtospecifythepatterninwhichthecurrentcomponentwillbeinsertedinthedrawing.Therearesixoptionsavailableinthisdrop-downlist:Stamp,Bookends,LinearArray,Surface,SurfaceLinetype,andSurfaceTop.LayerKeyThisfieldisusedtospecifyalayerkeyforthecurrentcomponent.Clickonthisfield;theSelectLayerKey dialog boxwill be displayed, as shown in Figure 8-17. Select a layer key from theLayerKeycolumnofthedialogboxandchoosetheOKbuttontoexitthedialogbox.TheLayerKeyoptionisalsoavailable in theHatching andLinetype rollouts of the dialog box and has the same function. TheserolloutsaredisplayeddependingontheselectionfromtheJigtypedrop-downlist.
![Page 343: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/343.jpg)
Figure8-17TheSelectLayerKeydialogboxBlockdrawinglocationTheoptions in thisdrop-down listareused to select the locationofblockdrawing for thecomponent.Select theBrowse option from the drop-down list to select a block drawing file from a user definedlocation; theSelectBlockLibrary dialogboxwill bedisplayed, as shown inFigure8-18.Select theblockdrawingandthenchoosetheOpenbuttonfromthedialogbox;theselecteddrawingwillbeusedasablockforthecurrentcomponent.
![Page 344: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/344.jpg)
Figure8-18TheSelectBlockLibrarydialogboxBlocktypeTheoptionsinthisdrop-downlistareusedtoselectthetypeofblocktobeusedforcurrentcomponentwhileinsertinginthedrawing.Therearetwooptionsavailableinthisdrop-downlist:FixedvalueandDatabase. TheFixed value option is selected if the current block is fixed. TheDatabase option isselectedifyouwanttocreatetheblockofsizesdependentontheoptionselectedinthedatabase.Block/BlockFieldThiseditboxisusedtospecifyanameforthecurrentdrawingblock.ScalingtypeTheoptionsinthisdrop-downlistareusedtospecifythetypeofscalingtobeusedforscalingthecurrentcomponent. By default, theFixed value option is selected in this drop-down list. You can select theDatabaseoptionifyouwanttochangethescalevaluedependingontheoptionselectedinthedatabase.
Scale/ScaleFieldThese edit boxes are used to specify the value of scale. If theFixed value option is selected in theScalingtypedrop-downlistthentheScaleeditboxwillbedisplayed.Youcanspecifyanintegralvaluein theScale edit box. If theDatabase option is selected in theScalingType drop-down list, then theScaleFieldeditboxwillbedisplayed.Bydefault,theS_SCALEvalueisdisplayedinthiseditbox.
![Page 345: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/345.jpg)
AllowscalingTherearetwooptionsavailableinthisdrop-downlist:YesandNo.IfyouselecttheYesoptioninthisdrop-downlist,youwillbepromptedtoscalethecomponentwhileinsertingitinthedrawing.
AllowrotationTherearetwooptionsavailableinthisdrop-downlist:YesandNo.IfyouselecttheYesoptioninthisdrop-downlist,youwillbepromptedtorotatethecomponentwhileinsertingitinthedrawing.AllowXflipTherearetwooptionsavailableinthisdrop-downlist:YesandNo.IfyouselecttheYesoptioninthisdrop-downlist,youwillbepromptedtoflipthecomponentaboutXaxiswhileinsertingitinthedrawing.AllowYflipTherearetwooptionsavailableinthisdrop-downlist:YesandNo.IfyouselecttheYesoptioninthisdrop-downlist,youwillbepromptedtoflipthecomponentaboutYaxiswhileinsertingitinthedrawing.AllowBasepointTherearetwooptionsavailableinthisdrop-downlist:YesandNo.IfyouselecttheYesoption,youwillbepromptedtospecifythebasepointforthecomponentwhileinsertingitinthedrawing.CreatenewviewThistoolisavailableatthetoprightcorneroftheNewComponentdialogboxintheParameters tab.Thistoolisusedtocreatemoreviewsofthecomponent.Tocreatemoreviews,choosetheCreatenewviewbuttonfromthedialogbox;theNewComponentViewdialogboxwillbedisplayed,asshowninFigure8-19.
Figure8-19TheNewComponentViewdialogbox
SpecifythenameoftheviewintheeditboxavailableinthisdialogboxandchoosetheOKbuttonfromthedialogbox;anewcomponentviewwiththespecifiednamewillbeaddedtotheViewdrop-downlist.RenameviewThistoolisavailablebelowtheCreatenewviewtool.Thistoolisusedtorenamethecurrentselectedviewofthecomponent.Torenametheview,choosetheRenameviewbutton;theRenameViewdialogboxwillbedisplayed,asshowninFigure8-20.SpecifythenameoftheviewandthenchoosetheOKbutton;thecurrentviewwillberenamed.
![Page 346: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/346.jpg)
Figure8-20TheRenameViewdialogbox
DeleteviewThistoolisavailablebelowtheRenameviewtool.Thistoolisusedtodeletethecurrentselectedviewof the component.To delete the current view, choose theDeleteview button; theDeleteComponentViewdialogboxwillbedisplayed,asshowninFigure8-21.ChoosetheYesbuttonifyouwanttodeletethecurrentview.ThistoolcannotbeusedtodeletethedefaultSectionview.
Figure8-21TheDeleteComponentViewdialogbox
After specifying thedesiredoptions, choose theOK button from theNewComponent dialog box; thecomponentwill be added to the selected category of components in theDetailComponentManagerdialogbox.EditThistoolisavailablebelowtheAddComponent tool.Itisusedtoeditcurrentcomponent.Toedittheselectedcomponent,choosetheEditbutton;theComponentPropertiesdialogboxwillbedisplayed,asshown inFigure8-22.Alternatively, this tool canbe accessedby right clickingon the component andselectingtheEditoptionorbyclickingthecomponentinthedatabasewhentheEditDatabaseoptionisactive.TheoptionsinthisdialogboxaresimilartothosediscussedfortheNewComponentdialogbox.This tool shows theGroupProperties when theEdit tool is selected with the group selected in theDetailComponentManager.
![Page 347: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/347.jpg)
Figure8-22TheComponentPropertiesdialogboxDeleteThisbuttonisusedtodeletetheselectedcomponentfromtheDetailComponentManagerdialogbox.Todeleteacomponent,choose theDeletebutton; theConfirmComponentDeletedialogboxwillbedisplayed,asshowninFigure8-23.ChoosetheYesbuttonfromthedialogbox;theselectedcomponentwillbedeleted.
Figure8-23TheConfirmComponentDeletedialogbox
![Page 348: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/348.jpg)
CREATINGSCHEDULESTheschedulesarethetablesthatareusedtorepresenttheinformationregardingtheselectedcomponents.Some of the schedules available in AutoCAD MEP are: Plumbing Fixture Schedule, Air TerminalDevicesSchedules,andFanSchedules.Thetoolstocreatetheseschedulesarediscussednext.
AirTerminalDevicesScheduleThis tool is available in the Schedules drop-down in theAnnotation panel of theHome tab of theRibbonwhentheHVACoptionisselectedintheWorkspaceSwitchingflyout.Tocreateanairterminaldeviceschedule,choose theAirTerminalDevicesSchedule tool from theSchedulesdrop-down; youwillbepromptedtoselectobjectsorpressENTERtoscheduleexternaldrawings.SelecttheobjectsthatyouwantinthescheduleandthenpressENTER;theschedulewillgetattachedtothecursorandyouwillbepromptedtospecifytheupperleftcornerofthetable.Clickinthedrawingareatospecifytheupperleftcorneroftheschedule;youwillbepromptedtospecifythelowerrightcorneroftheschedule.Clickinthedrawingareatospecifythelowerrightcorneroftheschedule;thetablewillbecreated,asshownin8-24.Bydefault, the?mark is displayed in all the fieldsof the table.Toupdate the entries in thisschedule,selecttheschedule;theScheduleTablecontextualtabwillbeaddedintheRibbon,asshowninFigure 8-25. Choose theAdd All Property Sets tool from theModify panel of the Schedule Tablecontextual tab in theRibbon; the fields in the tablewill display theparameters related to the selecteddevices.Theoptionsavailableinthecontextualtabarediscussednext.
Figure8-24TheAirTerminalDevicesSchedule
Figure8-25TheScheduleTablecontextualtab
GeneralPanel
![Page 349: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/349.jpg)
Thetoolsinthispanelareusedtomodifythegeneralparametersofaschedule.Theoptionsinthispanelarediscussednext.SelectSimilarThistoolisusedtoselectalltheitemsinthecurrentdrawingsimilartotheselectedone.
IsolateObjectsThe tools in this drop-downare used to display/hideobjects in thedrawing area and are discussednext.IsolateObjectsThistoolisusedtodisplayonlytheobjectsthatareselectedinthedrawing.ThistoolisavailableintheIsolateObjectsdrop-downlist.
HideObjectsThis tool is used to hide the selected object in the drawing. This tool is available in the IsolateObjectsdrop-downlist.
EndIsolationThis tool isused toend the isolation in thedrawing.This tool isavailable in theIsolateObjectsdrop-downlist.
EditStyleThetoolsinthisdrop-downareusedtoeditstylesanddefinitionsofthescheduletables.Youcanalsochangethetextstylesandpropertydataformatsusedinthescheduletables.Thetoolsavailableinthisdrop-downarediscussednext.EditStyleThis tool is used to change the style of the selected table. To change the style of the selectedschedule, choose theEdit Style tool from theEdit Style drop-down; the Schedule Table StylePropertiesdialogboxwillbedisplayed,asshowninFigure8-26.Theoptionsinthisdialogboxarediscussednext.
![Page 350: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/350.jpg)
Figure8-26TheScheduleTableStylePropertiesdialogbox
TheoptionsintheGeneraltabareusedtospecifythenameanddescriptionofthecurrenttablestyle.TheoptionsintheDefaultFormattabareusedtospecifytheformatsuchastextstyle,textheight,textalignment,andcellsizeofthetable.
TheoptionsintheAppliesTotabareusedtoselectthecategoriesforwhichthecurrentselectedstylewillbeapplied.
TheoptionsintheColumnstabareusedtoaddordeletecolumnsinthetable.
TheoptionsintheSorting/Groupingtabareusedtosortorgroupthevaluesspecifiedinthetable.
Theoptions in theLayout tabareused tochange layoutof the table.Using theseoptions,youcanchangetheformatofthetitle,columnheader,rowsheader,andsoon.
TheoptionsintheClassificationstabareusedtoclassifythevaluesinthetable.
TheoptionsintheDisplayPropertiestabareusedtoeditthedisplaystyleofthetable.Usingtheseoptions,youcanchangepropertiessuchascolorsandlayers.
TheoptionsintheVersionHistorytabareusedtodisplayoredittheversionhistoryof thecurrenttable.
![Page 351: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/351.jpg)
ScheduleTableStyleThistoolisusedtochangethestyleoftheselectedscheduletable.Tochangethestyleoftheselectedschedule table, choose theScheduleTableStyles tool from theEdit Style drop-down; theStyleManagerdialogboxwillbedisplayed,asshowninFigure8-27.
Figure8-27TheStyleManagerdisplayedonchoosingtheScheduleTableStylestool
The options in the Style Manager have already been discussed in the Schedule Table StylePropertiesdialogbox.ClassificationDefinitionThis tool is used to change the classification style used in the current table. To change theclassificationstyle,choose theClassificationDefinitions tool fromtheEditStyledrop-down; theStyleManagerwillbedisplayed,asshowninFigure8-28.SelectatypefromtheleftpaneoftheStyleManagerandtherelatedoptionswillbedisplayedintherightpaneofthedialogbox.Usingtheseoptions,youcanchangethestyleofclassificationofthecomponentsinthetable.
![Page 352: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/352.jpg)
Figure8-28TheStyleManagerdisplayedonchoosingtheClassificationDefinitionstool
PropertySetDefinitionsThis tool isused tochange thedefinitionsofproperty set for the selectedproperty.Tochange thedefinitionofpropertysets,choosethePropertySetDefinitionstoolfromtheEditStyledrop-down;theStyleManagerwill be displayed, as shown inFigure8-29.On selecting a part from the leftpane,theoptionsrelatedtotheselectedpartaredisplayedintherightareaofdialogbox.Usingtheseoptions,youcanchangethedefinitionofthepropertysetsusedinthescheduletable.
Figure8-29TheStyleManagerdisplayedonchoosingthePropertySetDefinitionstoolPropertyDataFormats
![Page 353: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/353.jpg)
Thistoolisusedtochangetheformatdataspecifiedinthescheduletable.Tochangethedataformat,choosethePropertyDataFormatstoolfromtheEditStyledrop-down;theStyleManagerdialogboxwillbedisplayed,asshowninFigure8-30.Usingtheoptionsavailableinthisdialogbox,youcanchangetheformatoftheproperties.
Figure8-30TheStyleManagerdisplayedonchoosingthePropertyDataFormatstool
TextStylesThis tool isusedtochangethetextstyle in theschedule table.Tochangethetextstyle,choosetheTextStyles tool fromtheEditStyledrop-down; theTextStyle dialogboxwill be displayed, asshown inFigure8-31.Using theoptions in thisdialogbox,youcanchange the styleof text in thetable.
![Page 354: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/354.jpg)
Figure8-31TheTextStyledialogboxCopyStyleThistoolisusedtocopythestyleofanexistingobjectandthencreateanewstylebasedonthatstyle.Tocopyastyle,choosetheCopyStyletoolfromtheGeneralpaneloftheScheduletable tab; theScheduleTableStylePropertiesdialogbox,as shown inFigure8-32.Theoptions in thisdialogboxhavealreadybeendiscussed.
Figure8-32TheScheduleTableStylePropertiesdialogbox
![Page 355: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/355.jpg)
ModifyPanelThe tools in this panel are used to modify the properties of a schedule. The tools in this panel arediscussednext.UpdateThistoolisusedtoupdatethefieldsinthetablethatarenotuptodate.
EditTableCellThistoolisusedtoeditatablecellintheschedule.Todoso,choosetheEditTableCelltool;youwillbepromptedtoselectascheduletablecell.Selectacellfromthetable;theEditReferencedPropertySetDatadialogboxwillbedisplayed,asshowninFigure8-33.Ifthedatacomesfromareferencedstyleordefinition, itwillpromptyou toedit the referenceddataas it canaffect theotherdataalso.Usingthefieldsavailableinthisdialogbox,youcanchangethepropertiesofatablecell.
Figure8-33TheEditReferencedPropertySetDatadialogbox
AddAllPropertySetsThistoolisusedtoaddallpropertysetsinthetableforwhich?markwillbedisplayedinthetable.Toaddthepropertysets,choosetheAddAllPropertySetstoolfromthecontextualtab;thepropertysetsinthetablewillbedisplayedautomatically.
ExportThistoolisusedtoexporttheselectedtableinexternalformats.Toexportatable,selectthetableandthenchoose theExport tool fromtheModifypanel in theScheduleTable tab; theExportScheduleTabledialogboxwillbedisplayed,asshowninFigure8-34.ChoosethedesiredfileformatfromtheSave As Type drop-down list in theExport Schedule Table dialog box and then choose theOKbutton;thetablewillbeexportedtotheformatselectedintheSaveAsTypedrop-downlist.Tochangethelocationofthefiletobeexported,choosetheBrowsebuttonandspecifythedesiredlocation.
![Page 356: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/356.jpg)
Figure8-34TheExportScheduleTabledialogboxConverttoTableThistoolisusedtoconvertascheduleintoatablewhichcanbeediteddirectly.Toconvertascheduleintoatable,selectthescheduleandthenchoosetheConverttoTabletoolfromtheModifypanelintheScheduleTablecontextualtab;youwillbepromptedtospecifyaninsertionpointforthetable.Clickinthedrawingareatospecifytheinsertionpoint;thetablewillbeplacedatthespecifiedpoint.Toeditanyofthecellinthetable,selectthecell;theTableCellcontextualtabwillbeaddedintheRibbon.Usingtheoptionsavailableinthistab,youcaneditthetablecells.
ScheduledObjectsPanelThetoolsinthispanelareusedtomodifytheobjectsintheschedule.Thesetoolsarediscussednext.
AddThistoolisusedtoaddanobjectintotheselectedscheduletable.Todoso,choosetheAddtool;youwillbepromptedtoselecttheobjectstobeaddedinthetable.SelecttheobjectsthatyouwanttoaddinthescheduletableandthenpressENTER;theselectedobjectswillbeaddedinthescheduletable.
RemoveThistoolisusedtoremoveanobjectfromtheselectedscheduletable.Todoso,choosetheRemovetool;youwillbepromptedtoselect theobjects toberemovedfromthetable.Select theobjects thatyou want to remove from the schedule table and then press ENTER; the selected objects will beremovedfromthescheduletable.
ReselectThistoolisusedtoclearallentriesintheselectedscheduletable.Todoso,choosetheReselecttool;youwillbepromptedtoselectthenewobjectsthatyouwanttoaddinthetable.SelecttheobjectsandthenpressENTER;theselectedobjectswillbeaddedtothescheduletableandallthepreviousentrieswillberemoved.
![Page 357: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/357.jpg)
ShowThis tool isused to show the selectedentity from the schedule table in thedrawingarea.Todo so,choose the Show tool; you will be prompted to select schedule table entity. Select the entity; theselectedentitywillbehighlightedinthedrawingarea.
FanScheduleThis tool is available in the Schedules drop-down of theAnnotation panel in theHome tab of theRibbonwhentheHVACoptionisselectedintheWorkspaceSwitchingflyout.Tocreateafanschedule,choosetheFanScheduletool;youwillbepromptedtoselecttheobjects.Theprocedureforcreatingafanscheduleissimilartotheprocedureforcreatinganairterminaldevicesschedule.VAVFanPoweredBox(ElectricHeat)ScheduleThis tool is available is the Schedules drop-down of theAnnotation panel in theHome tab of theRibbon when theHVAC option is selected in theWorkspace Switching flyout. To create a VAV fanpoweredbox(electricheat)schedule,choosetheVAVFanPoweredBox(ElectricHeat)Scheduletool;youwillbepromptedtoselecttheobjects.Theprocedureforcreatingthistypeofscheduleissimilartotheprocedureforcreatinganairterminaldevicesschedule.SpaceEngineeringScheduleThis tool is available in the Schedules drop-down of theAnnotation panel in theHome tab of theRibbon when theHVAC option is selected in theWorkspace Switching flyout. To create a spaceengineeringschedule,choosetheSpaceEngineeringSchedule tool;youwillbepromptedtoselecttheobjects.Theprocedureforcreatingaspaceengineeringscheduleissimilartotheprocedureforcreatinganairterminaldevicesschedule.DuctQuantityScheduleThis tool is available in the Schedules drop-down of theAnnotation panel in theHome tab of theRibbonwhentheHVACoptionisselectedintheWorkspaceSwitchingflyout.Tocreateaductquantityschedule, choose theDuct Quantity Schedule tool; you will be prompted to select the objects. Theprocedure for creatingaductquantity schedule is similar to theprocedure for creatinganair terminaldevicesschedule.DuctFabricationContractScheduleThis tool is available in the Schedules drop-down of theAnnotation panel in theHome tab of theRibbon when the HVAC option is selected in theWorkspace Switching flyout. To create a ductfabrication contract schedule, choose the Duct Fabrication Contract Schedule tool; you will bepromptedtoselecttheobjects.Theprocedureforcreatingaductfabricationcontractscheduleissimilartotheprocedureforcreatinganairterminaldevicesschedule.YoucancreateauserdefinedscheduleusingtheTabletool.Thistoolisdiscussednext.Table
![Page 358: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/358.jpg)
TheTabletoolisavailableinalltheworkspaces.Tocreateatable,choosethistoolfromtheScheduledrop-downintheAnnotationpaneloftheHometabintheRibbon;theInsertTabledialogboxwillbedisplayed,asshowninFigure8-35.Theoptionsinthisdialogboxarediscussednext.
Figure8-35TheInsertTabledialogboxTablestyleTheoptionsintheTablestyledrop-downlistareusedtoselectatablestyleforthecurrenttable.YoucanedittheselectedtablestylebyusingtheoptionsavailableintheTableStyledialogbox.ToinvoketheTableStyle dialogbox, choose theLaunch theTableStyledialog button adjacent to theTable styledrop-downlist;theTableStyledialogboxwillbedisplayed,asshowninFigure8-36.
![Page 359: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/359.jpg)
Figure8-36TheTableStyledialogbox
InsertoptionsTheradiobuttonsinthisareaareusedtospecifytheinsertionmethodofthetable.Therearethreeradiobuttonsavailableinthisarea:Startfromemptytable,Fromadatalink,andFromobjectdatainthedrawing(DataExtraction).IftheStartfromemptytableradiobuttonisselectedthenthetableinsertedwillbeempty.IfyouselecttheFromadatalinkradiobuttonthenthetableinsertedwillhavethedatalinkedtoanexcelsheetcreatedearlier.IftheFromobjectdatainthedrawing(DataExtraction)radiobuttonisselectedthenthetableinsertedconsistsofdataextractedbyusingtheDataExtractiondialogbox.
InsertionbehaviorTherearetworadiobuttonsavailableinthisarea:Specify insertionpointandSpecifywindow. If theSpecifyinsertionpointradiobuttonisselectedthenyouwillbepromptedtospecifytheinsertionpointfor the table. Ifyouselect theSpecifywindow radiobuttonfromtheInsertionbehavior area thenyouwillbepromptedtocreateawindowforinsertingthetable.
Column&rowsettingsTheoptionsinthisareaareusedtospecifythenumberofcolumnsandrowsforthetable.Youcanalsospecify thewidth of the column, the number of rows, and the height of the rows by using the relatedspinners.SetcellstylesTheoptionsinthisareaareusedtospecifythestylesforthecells.Bydefault,thestyleoffirstrowcellissetforTitle,cellstyleofsecondrowissetforHeaderandthecellstyleofalltheotherrowsissetforData.Pipe&FittingSchedule
![Page 360: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/360.jpg)
This tool is available in the Schedules drop-down of theAnnotation panel in theHome tab of theRibbonwhen thePiping option is selected in theWorkspace Switching flyout. To create a pipe andfitting schedule, choose thePipe&FittingSchedule tool;youwillbeprompted to select theobjects.Select the pipes and fittings. The procedure for creating a pipe and fitting schedule is similar to theprocedureforcreatinganairterminaldevicesschedule.PipeQuantityThis tool is available in the Schedules drop-down of theAnnotation panel in theHome tab of theRibbonwhenthePipingoptionisselectedintheWorkspaceSwitchingflyout.Tocreateapipequantityschedule,choosethePipeQuantitytool;youwillbepromptedtoselecttheobjects.Selectthepipesinthe drawing area. The procedure for creating a pipe quantity schedule is similar to the procedure forcreatinganairterminaldevicesschedule.MechanicalPumpScheduleThis tool is available in the Schedules drop-down of theAnnotation panel in theHome tab of theRibbonwhenthePipingoptionisselectedintheWorkspaceSwitching flyout.Tocreateamechanicalpumpschedule,choosetheMechanicalPumpScheduletool;youwillbepromptedtoselecttheobjects.Select the pumps from the drawing area. The procedure for creating a mechanical pump schedule issimilartotheprocedureforcreatinganairterminaldevicesschedule.MechanicalTankScheduleThis tool is available in the Schedules drop-down of theAnnotation panel in theHome tab of theRibbonwhenthePipingoptionisselectedintheWorkspaceSwitching flyout.Tocreateamechanicaltankschedule,choosetheMechanicalTankSchedule tool;youwillbepromptedtoselect theobjects.Selectthetanksinthedrawingarea.Theprocedureforcreatingamechanicaltankscheduleissimilartotheprocedureforcreatinganairterminaldevicesschedule.DeviceScheduleThis tool is available in the Schedules drop-down of theAnnotation panel in theHome tab in theRibbonwhen theElectricaloption is selected in theWorkspaceSwitching flyout.Tocreate adeviceschedule,choosetheDeviceScheduletool;youwillbepromptedtoselecttheobjects.Theprocedureforcreatingadevicescheduleissimilartotheprocedureforcreatinganairterminaldevicesschedule.LightingDeviceScheduleThis tool is available in the Schedules drop-down of theAnnotation panel in theHome tab of theRibbonwhentheElectricaloptionisselectedin theWorkspaceSwitching flyout.Tocreatea lightingdeviceschedule,choosetheLightingDeviceScheduletool;youwillbepromptedtoselecttheobjects.The procedure for creating a lighting device schedule is similar to the procedure for creating an airterminaldevicesschedule.Conduit&FittingScheduleThis tool is available in the Schedules drop-down of theAnnotation panel in theHome tab of theRibbonwhentheElectricaloptionisselectedin theWorkspaceSwitching flyout.Tocreateaconduit
![Page 361: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/361.jpg)
and fitting schedule, choose theConduit&FittingSchedule tool; youwill be prompted to select theobjects.Theprocedureforcreatingaconduitandfittingscheduleissimilartotheprocedureforcreatinganairterminaldevicesschedule.Electrical&MechanicalEquipmentScheduleThis tool is available in the Schedules drop-down of theAnnotation panel in theHome tab of theRibbonwhentheElectricaloptionisselectedintheWorkspaceSwitchingflyout.Tocreateanelectricalandmechanicalequipmentschedule,choosetheElectrical&MechanicalEquipmentScheduletool;youwillbepromptedtoselecttheobjects.Theprocedureforcreatinganelectricalandmechanicalequipmentscheduleissimilartotheprocedureforcreatinganairterminaldevicesschedule.3-PhaseBranchPanelScheduleThis tool is available in the Schedules drop-down of theAnnotation panel in theHome tab of theRibbonwhentheElectricaloptionisselectedintheWorkspaceSwitching flyout.Tocreatea3-phasebranchpanelschedule,choosethe3-PhaseBranchPanelScheduletool;thePanelScheduledialogboxwillbedisplayed,asshowninFigure8-37.Theoptionsinthisdialogboxarediscussednext.
Figure8-37ThePanelScheduledialogboxPanelThe options in this drop-down list are used to select the panel forwhich the panel schedule is beingcreated.
PanelscheduletablestyleTheoptionsinthisdrop-downlistareusedtospecifythestyleofpanelschedule.Therearetwooptionsavailableinthisdrop-downlist:DistributionBoardandPanel.SelecttheDistributionBoardoptionifyouwanttousethedistributionboardasthepanelscheduletablestyle.IfyouwanttousepanelaspanelscheduletablestylethenselectthePaneloptionfromthedrop-downlist.PanelschedulestylelocationTheoptionsinthisdrop-downlistareusedtospecifythelocationofpanelschedulestyle.Tospecifyauserdefined location,choose theBrowseoption from thedrop-down list; theSelect a file dialogboxwillbedisplayed,asshowninFigure8-38.Select thefileandthenchoosetheOpenbutton; thepanelschedulestyleswillbefetchedfromtheselectedfile.
![Page 362: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/362.jpg)
Figure8-38TheSelectaFiledialogboxShowpanelsfromTherearetworadiobuttonsinthisarea:CurrentdrawingandElectricalprojectdatabase.Select theCurrentdrawingradiobuttonifyouwanttousethepanelsavailableinthecurrentdrawing.Youcanalsousetheelectricalprojectdatabasefordisplayingpanel.Todoso,selecttheElectricalprojectdatabaseradiobutton;thesystemwillautomaticallydisplaythepanelsavailableintheelectricalprojectdatabase.If anelectricalprojectdatabase file ismissingorunavailable then itwillpromptyou tocreateanewEPDfileoropenanexistingEPDfile.Afterspecifyingthedesiredparametersinthedialogbox,choosetheOKbutton;thepanelschedulewillgetattachedtothecursor.Clickinthedrawingareatospecifytheinsertionpoint; the schedulewill beplacedat the specifiedpoint.Youcanedit anyof the cells in theschedulebydoubleclickingonit.1-PhaseBranchPanelScheduleThistoolisalsoavailableintheSchedulesdrop-downoftheAnnotationpanelintheHome taboftheRibbonwhentheElectricaloptionisselectedintheWorkspaceSwitching flyout.Tocreatea1-phasebranchpanelschedule,choosethe1-PhaseBranchPanelScheduletool;thePanelScheduledialogboxwillbedisplayed.Theoptionsinthisdialogboxhavealreadybeendiscussedin3-phaseBranchPanelSchedule.
DistributionBoardSchedule
![Page 363: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/363.jpg)
ThistoolisalsoavailableintheSchedulesdrop-downoftheAnnotationpanelintheHome taboftheRibbon when the Electrical option is selected in the Workspace Switching flyout. To create adistributionboard schedule, choose theDistributionBoardSchedule tool; thePanel Schedule dialogboxwillbedisplayed.Theoptionsinthisdialogboxhavealreadybeendiscussed.SwitchboardScheduleThistoolisalsoavailableintheSchedulesdrop-downoftheAnnotationpanelintheHome taboftheRibbon when the Electrical option is selected in the Workspace Switching flyout. To create aswitchboard schedule, choose theSwitchboardSchedule tool; thePanelSchedule dialogboxwill bedisplayed.Theoptionsinthisdialogboxhavealreadybeendiscussed.PanelScheduleThistoolisalsoavailableintheSchedulesdrop-downoftheAnnotationpanelintheHome taboftheRibbonwhentheElectricaloptionisselectedin theWorkspaceSwitching flyout.Select this tool; thePanelScheduledialogboxwillbedisplayedwiththePaneloptionselectedinthePanelscheduletablestyledrop-downlistbydefault.PlumbingFixtureScheduleThis tool is available in the Schedules drop-down of theAnnotation panel in theHome tab of theRibbonwhenthePlumbingoptionisselectedintheWorkspaceSwitchingflyout.Tocreateaplumbingfixtureschedule,choosethePlumbingFixtureScheduletool;youwillbepromptedtoselecttheobjects.The procedure for creating a plumbing fixture schedule is similar to the procedure for creating an airterminaldevicesschedule.PlumbingFixture&PipeConnectionScheduleThis tool is available in theSchedules drop-down iof theAnnotation panel in theHome tab of theRibbonwhenthePlumbingoptionisselectedintheWorkspaceSwitchingflyout.Tocreateaplumbingfixtureandpipeconnectionschedule,choosethePlumbingFixture&PipeConnectionSchedule tool;you will be prompted to select the objects. The procedure for creating a plumbing fixture and pipeconnectionscheduleissimilartotheprocedureforcreatinganairterminaldevicesschedule.WaterHeater(Gas)ScheduleThis tool is available in the Schedules drop-down of theAnnotation panel in theHome tab of theRibbon when thePlumbing option is selected in theWorkspace Switching flyout. To create awaterheater schedule, choose theWaterHeater (Gas) Schedule tool; you will be prompted to select theobjects.Theprocedureforcreatingawaterheater(gas)scheduleissimilartotheprocedureforcreatinganairterminaldevicesschedule.DoorScheduleThis tool is available in the Schedules drop-down of theAnnotation panel in theHome tab of theRibbonwhentheArchitectureoptionisselectedintheWorkspaceSwitching flyout.Tocreateadoorschedule,choosetheDoorScheduletool;youwillbepromptedtoselecttheobjects.Theprocedureforcreatingadoorscheduleissimilartotheprocedureforcreatinganairterminaldevicesschedule.
![Page 364: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/364.jpg)
DoorSchedule-ProjectBasedThis tool is available in the Schedules drop-down of theAnnotation panel in theHome tab of theRibbonwhentheArchitectureoptionisselectedintheWorkspaceSwitchingflyout.Tocreateaprojectbaseddoorschedule,choosetheDoorSchedule-ProjectBasedtool;youwillbepromptedtoselecttheobjects.Theprocedureforcreatingaprojectbaseddoorscheduleissimilartotheprocedureforcreatinganairterminaldevicesschedule.WindowScheduleThis tool is available in the Schedules drop-down of theAnnotation panel in theHome tab of theRibbon when the Architecture option is selected in theWorkspace Switching flyout. To create awindowschedule, choose theWindowSchedule tool;youwillbeprompted to select theobjects.Theprocedureforcreatingawindowscheduleissimilartotheprocedureforcreatinganairterminaldevicesschedule.
RoomScheduleThis tool is available in the Schedules drop-down of theAnnotation panel in theHome tab of theRibbonwhentheArchitectureoptionisselectedintheWorkspaceSwitchingflyout.Tocreatearoomschedule,choosetheWindowScheduletool;youwillbepromptedtoselecttheobjects.Theprocedureforcreatingaroomscheduleissimilartotheprocedureforcreatinganairterminaldevicesschedule.SpaceSchedule-BOMAThis tool is available in the Schedules drop-down of theAnnotation panel in theHome tab of theRibbonwhentheArchitectureoptionisselectedintheWorkspaceSwitchingflyout.Tocreateaspaceschedule, choose theSpaceSchedule -BOMA tool; youwill be prompted to select the objects. Theprocedureforcreatingaspacescheduleissimilartotheprocedureforcreatinganairterminaldevicesschedule.SpaceInventoryScheduleThis tool is available in the Schedules drop-down of theAnnotation panel in theHome tab of theRibbonwhentheArchitectureoptionisselectedintheWorkspaceSwitchingflyout.Tocreateaspaceinventory schedule, choose the Space Inventory Schedule tool; you will be prompted to select theobjects.Theprocedureforcreatingaspaceinventoryscheduleissimilartotheprocedureforcreatinganairterminaldevicesschedule.WallScheduleThis tool is available in the Schedules drop-down of theAnnotation panel in theHome tab of theRibbonwhentheArchitectureoptionisselectedintheWorkspaceSwitching flyout.Tocreateawallschedule,choosetheWallScheduletool;youwillbepromptedtoselecttheobjects.Theprocedureforcreatingawallscheduleissimilartotheprocedureforcreatinganairterminaldevicesschedule.ScheduleStyles
![Page 365: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/365.jpg)
This tool is available in the Schedules drop-down of theAnnotation panel in theHome tab of theRibbonwhentheArchitectureoptionisselectedintheWorkspaceSwitchingflyout.Thistoolisusedtoopen the Style Manager with the options related to schedule styles only. The options in the StyleManagerhavealreadybeendiscussed.TableEditingTableeditingcanbedoneafterselectingthetableschedulecreatedbytheuser.Youcaneditascheduletable in the same way as done in an Excel sheet. On selecting a cell from the table, theTable Cellcontextual tabwill be displayed in theRibbon, as shown in Figure 8-39. The options in this tab arediscussednext.
Figure8-39PartialviewoftheTableCellcontextualtab
RowsThetoolsinthispanelareusedtoaddordeleterowsfromthetable.Thetoolsavailableinthispanelarediscussednext.InsertAboveThistoolisusedtoinsertarowabovetheselectedcell.
InsertBelowThistoolisusedtoinsertarowbelowtheselectedcell.
DeleteRow(s)Thistoolisusedtodeletetherowoftheselectedcell.
ColumnsThetoolsinthispanelareusedtoaddordeletecolumnsfromthetable.Thetoolsavailableinthispanelarediscussednext.InsertLeftThistoolisusedtoinsertacolumnontheleftoftheselectedcell.
InsertRightThistoolisusedtoinsertacolumnontherightoftheselectedcell.
DeleteColumn(s)Thistoolisusedtodeletethecolumnoftheselectedcell.
Merge
![Page 366: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/366.jpg)
The tools in thispanelareused tomergeor separate thecells in the table.The toolsavailable in thispanelarediscussednext.MergeCellsThetoolsinthisdrop-downareusedtomergethecellsinthedesiredpattern.Thetoolsinthedrop-downarediscussednext.
MergeAllThistoolisusedtomergealltheselectedcellsofthetable.
MergeByRowThistoolisusedtomergealltheselectedcellsrowwise.
MergeByColumnThistoolisusedtomergealltheselectedcellscolumnwise.
UnmergeCellsThistoolisusedtoseparatethemergedcellinthetable.
CellStylesThetoolsinthispanelareusedtomanagecellstyles.Thesetoolsarediscussednext.MatchCellThistoolisusedtomatchthepropertiesofothercellstotheselectedcell.Tousethisoption,selectacellandthenchoosetheMatchCelltool;youwillbepromptedtoselectthedestinationcell.Clickinthedestinationcell;thepropertiesoftheselectedcellwillbeappliedtothedestinationcell.CellAlignmentThetoolsavailableinthisdrop-downareusedtojustifythetextinthetablecells.Thetoolsavailableinthisdrop-downarediscussednext.
TopLeftItisusedtoalignthetextinthetopleftofthecell.
TopCenterItisusedtoalignthetextinthetopcenterofthecell.
TopRightItisusedtoalignthetextinthetoprightofthecell.
MiddleLeftItisusedtoalignthetextinthemiddleleftofthecell.
MiddleCenterItisusedtoalignthetextinthemiddlecenterofthecell.
![Page 367: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/367.jpg)
MiddleRightItisusedtoalignthetextinthemiddlerightofthecell.
BottomLeftItisusedtoalignthetextinthebottomleftofthecell.
BottomCenterItisusedtoalignthetextinthebottomcenterofthecell.
BottomRightItisusedtoalignthetextinthebottomrightofthecell.
TableCellStylesTheoptions in thisdrop-down listareused toapplyacell style to theselectedcell.Thecell stylesdisplayedinthisdrop-downlistarethecellstylesavailableinthecurrenttablestyle.
CreateNewCellStyleThisoptionisusedtocreatenewcellstyles.Todoso,selecttheCreateNewCellStyleoptionfromthedrop-downlist;theCreateNewCellStyledialogboxwillbedisplayed,asshowninFigure8-40.AdefaultnameisdisplayedintheNewStyleNameeditboxofthisdialogbox.Youcanspecifythedesired name in this edit box. The options in the StartWith drop-down list are used to select atemplateforthecellstyletobecreated.
Figure8-40TheCreateNewCellStyledialogbox
After specifying the desired options, choose theContinue button; a new style will be created anddisplayedintheTableCellStylesdrop-downlist.
TableCellBackgroundColorTheoptionsinthisdrop-downlistareusedtochangethebackgroundcoloroftheselectedcell.
EditBordersThisbuttonisusedtomodifybordersoftheselectedcell.Todoso,choosetheEditBorderbutton;theCellBorderPropertiesdialogboxwillbedisplayed,asshowninFigure8-41.TheoptionsusedforeditingthebordersareshownintheBorderpropertiesarea.UsingtheoptionsavailableintheBorderpropertiesarea,youcanchangethepropertiesofborderslikelineweight,linetype,colorandsoon.To change the border type, choose the corresponding button available around the Preview area.PreviewofthechangesmadeintheselectedborderaredisplayedinthePreviewarea.Afterspecifying
![Page 368: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/368.jpg)
the desired options, choose theOK button from the dialog box; the changeswill be applied to theselectedcell.
Figure8-41TheCellBorderPropertiesdialogbox
CellFormatThe tools in this panel are used to modify the format of data to be entered in a cell. Also, you canlock/unlocktheselectedcellsbyusingthetoolsinthispanel.Thesetoolsarediscussednext.CellLockingThetoolsinthisdrop-downareusedtolock/unlocktheformat,content,orbothofacell.Thetoolsinthisdrop-downarediscussednext.UnlockedThistoolisusedtounlocktheselectedcellsothatitcanbeeditedformatwiseaswellascontentwise.
ContentLockedThistoolisusedtolockthecontentoftheselectedcellsothatitcannotbeedited.
FormatLockedThistoolisusedtolocktheformatoftheselectedcellsothatitcannotbeedited.
![Page 369: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/369.jpg)
ContentandFormatLockedThis tool isused to lock thecontentaswellas the formatof the selectedcell so that it cannotbeedited.
DataFormatTheoptionsavailableinthisdrop-downlistareusedtospecifytheformatoftheselectedcell.
InsertThetoolsavailableinthispanelareusedtoinsertvarioustypesofobjectsinthetable.Thesetoolsarediscussednext.BlockThis tool isused to insert ablock in thecurrentcell.Todoso, choose theBlock tool; the Insert aBlock in a Table Cell dialog box will be displayed, as shown in Figure 8-42. Using the optionsavailable in this dialog box, you can specify the values for the parameters such asScale,RotationAngle,andOverallcellalignmentfortheselectedblockinthecell.Also,apreviewoftheblocktobeinsertedwillbedisplayedon the right in thedialogbox.After specifying thedesiredoptions in thisdialogbox,choosetheOKbutton;theblockwillbeinsertedintheselectedcell.
Figure8-42TheInsertaBlockinaTableCelldialogbox
FieldThistoolisusedtoinsertatextfieldinthecurrentcell.Toinsertatextfield,choosetheFieldoption;theField dialog boxwill be displayed, as shown in Figure 8-43. Select a category from theFieldcategorydrop-downlistinthedialogbox;theoptionsrelatedtotheselectedcategoryaredisplayedintheFieldnameslistbox.Selectanoptionfromthislistbox;therelatedoptionswillbedisplayedintherightofthedialogbox.SpecifythedesiredoptionfromtherightareaandthenchoosetheOKbutton;thespecifiedfieldwillbeinsertedinthecurrentcell.
![Page 370: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/370.jpg)
Figure8-43TheFielddialogbox
FormulaTheoptionsavailableinthisdrop-downareusedtoapplyaformulatotheselectedcell.
ManageCellContentsThistoolisusedtomanagethedirectionandorderofthecontentintheselectedcellofthetable.Thistoolisactiveonlywhenyouinsertablockinthecell.
DataThetoolsinthispanelareusedtomanagedatalinksoftheselectedcell.Thetoolsavailableinthispanelarediscussednext.LinkCellThistoolisusedtolinktheselectedcellinthetabletoafieldintheexcelsheet.Todoso,choosetheLinkCelltoolfromthecontextualtab;theSelectaDataLinkdialogboxwillbedisplayed,asshowninFigure8-44.ClickontheCreateanewExcelDataLinknodeintheLinksareaofthedialogbox;theEnterDataLinkNamedialogboxwillbedisplayed,asshowninFigure8-45.Specifythenameof thedata link in theName edit box and then choose theOK button from the dialogbox; theNewExcelDataLinkdialogboxwillbedisplayed,asshowninFigure8-46.ClickontheBrowsebuttonnext to theBrowse for a file drop-down list in the dialog box; the Save As dialog box will be
![Page 371: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/371.jpg)
displayedandyouwillbepromptedtoopenanalreadyexistingexcelfile.SelectanalreadyexistingexcelfileandthenchoosetheOpenbuttonfromthedialogbox;theexpandedNewExcelDataLinkdialogboxwillbedisplayed,asshowninFigure8-47.
Figure8-44TheSelectaDataLinkdialogbox
Figure8-45TheEnterDataLinkNamedialogbox
![Page 372: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/372.jpg)
Figure8-46TheNewExcelDataLinkdialogbox
Figure8-47TheexpandedNewExcelDataLinkdialogboxThisdialogboxisdividedintothreeareas:File,Linkoptions,andPreview.TheoptionsintheFilearea
![Page 373: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/373.jpg)
areusedtospecifythelocationofexcelfileanditspathtype.TheoptionsintheLinkOptionsareaareused to specify thedata that is tobe linked from theexcel sheet.ThePreview area isused todisplaypreviewoftheselecteddatathatistobelinked.Afterspecifyingthedesiredsettingsinthedialogbox,choosetheOKbuttonfromthedialogboxtoapplythesettings;theSelectaDataLinkdialogboxwillbedisplayedagainwiththenewlycreateddatalinkselected.ChoosetheOKbuttonfromthedialogbox;theselectedlinkwillbeappliedtotheselectedcell.
DownloadfromSourceThistoolisavailableintheDatapaneloftheTableCellcontextualtab.Thistoolisusedtoupdatethelinkfromthesourcefile.Thistoolisactiveonlywhenyouselectalinkfromthetable.
TUTORIALTUTORIAL1In this tutorial, youwill create an air terminal devices schedule for themechanical system created inExercise1ofChapter4,asshowninFigure8-48.(Expectedtime:30min)
Figure8-48ThemechanicalsystemcreatedinChapter4
Thefollowingstepsarerequiredtocompletethistutorial:a.OpenthedrawingcreatedinExcercise1ofchapter4.b.AddtheAirterminalDeviceSchedule.c.UpdatingthePropertyDataandScheduleDetails.
![Page 374: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/374.jpg)
OpeningtheDrawingFileinHVACWorkspace1.StartAutoCADMEPandchoosetheOpentoolfromtheQuickAccessToolbar;theSelectFiledialogboxisdisplayed.
2.Select thedrawingfilecreatedinExercise1ofChapter4andthenchoosetheOpenbutton; thefilewillopenintheapplicationwindow.
3.ChoosetheWorkspaceSwitchingbuttonintheApplicationStatusBar;aflyoutisdisplayed.4.ChoosetheHVACoptionfromtheflyout;theHVACworkspaceisactivated.
AddingAirTerminalDevicesSchedule1. Choose theAirTerminalDevicesSchedule tool from theSchedule drop-down in theAnnotationpaneloftheHometabinRibbon;youarepromptedtoselecttheobjectstobeincludedintheschedule.
2.SelectalltheDiffusersandReturnAirGrillesavailableinthedrawingareaandthenpressENTER;theschedulegetsattachedtothecursor.
3. Click to specify the upper left corner of the schedule; you are prompted to specify the lower rightcorner.
4.Clicktospecifythelowerrightcorneroftheschedule;thescheduleisplacedatthespecifiedposition.Bydefault,“?”marksaredisplayedineachof thefields.Youneedtoupdatethepropertysets inthesefields.
UpdatingtheSchedule1. Select the schedule from the drawing area; the ScheduleTable contextual tab is displayed in theRibbon.
2.ChoosetheAddAllPropertySetstoolfromtheModifypanelinthecontextualtab;thepropertiesintheschedulechangeaccordingly,asshowninFigure8-49.
Figure8-49Themechanicalairterminaldevicesschedule
Youcanalsoeditthescheduletoincludemoreinformationintheblankfields.
![Page 375: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/375.jpg)
SavingtheDrawing1.ChooseSavefromtheApplicationMenutosavethedrawingfileatanappropriatelocation.
SELF-EVALUATIONTESTAnswerthefollowingquestionsandthencomparethemtothosegivenattheendofthischapter:1.Verticalsectionisasectioncreatedbyaplaneperpendiculartotheobjecttobesectioned.(T/F)2.TheGenerateSectiontoolisusedtocreatelivesectionsbyusingthecurrentsectionline.(T/F)3.Tocreateahorizontalsection,choosethe___________toolfromtheSection&ElevationpaneloftheHometabintheRibbon.
4.The__________toolisusedtoextractapolylineoutlineoftheslicecreatedthroughthemodel.5.InwhichofthefollowingpanelsistheDetailComponentstoolavailable?(a)Build(b)Details(c)Modify(d)DrawREVIEWQUESTIONSAnswerthefollowingquestions:1.TheDetailComponentstoolisnotavailableintheSchematicworkspace.(T/F)2.TheSpaceEngineeringSchedule tool is available in theSchedules drop-down in theAnnotationpaneloftheHometabintheRibbonwhentheHVACoptionisselectedintheWorkspaceSwitchingflyout.(T/F)
3.TheSpace InventorySchedule option is available in theSchedules drop-down in theAnnotationpanel of theHome tab in theRibbon when the __________ option is selected in theWorkspaceSwitchingflyout.
4.The__________toolisusedtorefreshallthe2Dsectionsandelevationscreatedinthecurrentprojectorinthespecifiedfolder.
5.Inwhichofthefollowingdialogboxes,theRecipeoptionisavailable?(a)GenerateSection/Elevation(b)BatchRefreshSection/Elevations(c)ComponentProperties(d)ScheduleTableStyleProperties
![Page 376: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/376.jpg)
EXERCISEEXERCISE1Inthisexercise,youwillcreatethe1-PhaseBranchPanelscheduleofthepanelinthedrawing,asshowninFigure8-50.ThedrawingfileiscreatedinTutorial1ofChapter7.ThescheduleisgiveninFigure8-51foryourreference.(Expectedtime:30min)
Figure8-50Themechanicalairterminaldevicesschedule
Figure8-51The1-PhaseBranchPanelscheduleforthedrawing
AnswerstoSelf-EvaluationTest
![Page 377: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/377.jpg)
1.T,2.F,3.HorizontalSection,4.QuickSlice,5.Details
![Page 378: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/378.jpg)
Chapter9
WorkingwithSchematics
![Page 379: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/379.jpg)
LearningObjectivesAftercompletingthischapter,youwillbeableto:•Understandtheuseofschematics•Addschematicsymbolstothedrawings•Createschematiclinesinthedrawing•Displayschematicrepresentationofexistingdrawing
INTRODUCTIONIn thischapter,youwill learnaboutvarious tools thatareused forcreatinga schematicdrawing forabuildingsystem.Youwillalso learn theuseofequipmentandschematic lines ina schematicdrawing.Thetools tocreateaschematicdrawingareavailable in theSchematicworkspace.Thisworkspace isdiscussednext.SCHEMATICWORKSPACETo invoke this workspace, choose the Schematic option from theWorkspace Switching flyout; theSchematicworkspacewillbeactivated.Figure9-1showspartialviewoftheRibbonintheSchematicworkspace.ThetoolstocreateaschematicdrawingareavailableintheBuildpaneloftheHometabintheRibbon.Theusageofthesetoolsarediscussednext.
Figure9-1PartialviewoftheRibbonintheSchematicworkspace
EquipmentThis tool is available in theBuild panel of theHome tab in theRibbon. This tool is used to addequipment to thedrawing.Toaddanequipment,choose theEquipment tool fromtheRibbon; theAddMulti-viewPartsdialogboxwillbedisplayed.TheoptionsinthisdialogboxarethesameasdiscussedinChapter6.
SchematicSymbolSchematicsymbolsarethesymbolicrepresentationsofphysicalobjectsrequiredinabuildingsystem.InAutoCADMEP,therearetwotypesofschematicsymbols:In-linesymbolsandEnd-of-linesymbols.TheIn-linesymbolsarethosethatcanbeaddedinbetweentheschematic line.Note thatwhenyoudeleteaschematiclineinwhichtheIn-linesymbolsareattached,thesymbolsalsogetdeletedwiththeline.TheEnd-of-linesymbolsarethosethatcanbeaddedeitheratthestartpointorattheendpointofaschematicline.Toaddaschematicsymbol,choosetheSchematicSymboltoolfromtheBuildpaneloftheHome
![Page 380: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/380.jpg)
tab in theRibbon; the symbolwill get attached to the cursor andyouwill be prompted to specify theinsertionpointforthesymbol.Also,thePROPERTIESpalettewillbedisplayed,asshowninFigure9-2.Clickinthedrawingareatoplacethesymbol.TheoptionsinthePROPERTIESpalettearediscussednext.
Figure9-2ThePROPERTIESpalettedisplayedonchoosingtheSchematicSymboltoolPROPERTIESPaletteTheoptions in thePROPERTIESpaletteareused tochange theparametersof theschematicsymbols.Theseoptionsarediscussednext.DescriptionThisfieldisavailableintheBASIC>GeneralrolloutoftheDesigntabinthePROPERTIESpalette.Whenyouclickon this field, theDescriptiondialogboxwillbedisplayed,asshowninFigure9-3.EnterdescriptionforthesymbolintheEditthedescriptionforthisobjecttextboxinthisdialogbox.ChooseOKtoexitthedialogbox.
Figure9-3TheDescriptiondialogbox
![Page 381: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/381.jpg)
StyleThisoptionisavailableintheBASIC>GeneralrolloutofthePROPERTIESpalette.Thisoptionisused to selecta schematic symbol from the listof symbolsavailable inAutoCADMEP.To select asymbol,choosetheStyleoptionfromthePROPERTIESpalette;theSelectStyledialogboxwillbedisplayed,asshowninFigure9-4.Inthisdialogbox,theoptionsintheDrawingFiledrop-downlistareusedtospecifythetemplatefileforschematicsymbols.IfyouselectanyoptionfromtheDrawingFile drop-down list, the categories available in the respective template filewillbedisplayed in theCategory drop-down list. Select the desired category from the Category drop-down list; therespectivesymbolswillbedisplayedinthedialogbox.SelectasymbolfromthedialogboxandthenchoosetheOKbuttontoexit.
Figure9-4TheSelectStyledialogbox
SystemThisdrop-downlistisavailableintheBASIC>Systemrollout.Thisdrop-downlistcontainsvarioussystemdefinitionsforbuildingsystems.Theoptionselectedinthisdrop-downlistspecifiesthesystemtowhichthesymbolbelongs.
OrientationThisdrop-downlistisavailableintheBASIC>DrawingModerollout.Theoptionsinthisrolloutareused to specify the orientation in which the symbol will be placed in the drawing. There are twooptionsavailableinthisdrop-downlist:OrthoandIsometric.TheOrthooptionisusedtoplacethesymbols in orthographicmode,while the Isometric option is used to place the symbol in isometricorientation.TheIsometricoptionisactiveonlywhenanisometricschematicsymbolisselectedintheSelectstyledialogbox.
Isoplane
![Page 382: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/382.jpg)
This drop-down list is available in the PROPERTIES palette only when the Isometric option isselectedintheOrientationdrop-downlist.Therearethreeoptionsinthisdrop-downlist:Left,Right,andTop. Select an option from this drop-down list; the symbol will be oriented along the planecorrespondingtotheselectedoption.
JustificationThisdrop-downlistisavailableintheLocationrollout.Theoptionsinthisdrop-downlistareusedtopositionthesymbolwithrespecttotheinsertionpoint.
RotationThiseditboxisavailableintheLocationrolloutfortheEnd-of-linesymbolsinorthographicmode.Torotatethesymbol,enterthedesiredvalueofrotationinthiseditbox.
RotationinisoplaneThisfieldisavailableintheLocationrolloutforthesymbolsinisometricmode.Toactivatethisfield,youneed to specify the insertionpoint for the symbol in the isometricviewmode.Thevalue in thisfieldchangesaccordingtothepositionofthecursor.
NoteIn thePROPERTIES palette, the Isometric option in theOrientationdrop-down list, the Isoplanedrop-downlist,andtheRotationeditboxwillbeavailableonlywhenyouselectasuitableschematicsymboloforthoisometrictypefromtheDrawingFiledrop-downlistoftheSelectStyledialogbox.IDThis edit box is also available in theADVANCED >Design Data rollout in the PROPERTIESpalette.YoucanassignauniqueIDtothesymbolbeinginsertedinthedrawingarea.
Afterplacingasymbolinthedrawingarea,youcanchangetheorientationofthesymboldynamically.Figure9-5showsthe2PortPneumaticValvesymbolplacedintheisometricmodewithitsorientationhandles.Thehandlesdisplayedonthesymbolsarediscussednext.
![Page 383: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/383.jpg)
Figure9-5The2PortPneumaticValvesymbolwithitsorientationhandles
RotationhandlesThesehandlesareusedtorotate thesymbol.Whenyouclickonahandle, thesymbol isrotatedwithrespecttotheinsertionpoint.
LocationhandleThishandleisusedtomodifythelocationofthesymbol.Whenyouclickonthishandleandmovethecursor,thesymbolmovesalongthecursorintheselectedisoplane.
MoveIsoplanehandleThishandleisusedtochangethelocationofthesymbolperpendiculartotheisoplaneselected.
IsometricPlanehandleThis handle is used to change the current isometric plane of the symbol. Click on this symbol toswitchbetweenLeft,Right,andTopplanes.
SchematicLineSchematic lines are used to represent various types of connections in a building system. To create aschematicline,choosetheSchematicLinetoolfromtheBuildpanelintheHometaboftheRibbon;youwillbepromptedtospecifythestartpointfortheschematicline.Also,thePROPERTIESpalettewillbedisplayed,asshowninFigure9-6.Click tospecify thestartpointof the line;youwillbeprompted tospecifythenextpointoftheschematicline.
![Page 384: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/384.jpg)
Figure9-6ThePROPERTIESpalettedisplayedonchoosingtheSchematicLinetool
Clicktospecifythesecondpointoftheline;youwillbeagainpromptedtospecifythenextpointoftheline.Click to specify the thirdpointorpressENTER toexit the tool.Except theLength editbox, theoptionsdisplayedinthePROPERTIESpaletteonchoosingtheSchematicLinetoolhavealreadybeendiscussed.
TheLengtheditboxisusedtospecifythelengthoftheschematicline.Youcannotmodifythevalueoflengthonceyouhavecreatedtheschematicline.Also,youcannotspecifythevalueoflengthdirectlyinthiseditbox.Tospecifyavalue in thiseditbox,youneed tospecify thedesiredvalue in thedynamicpromptdisplayedalongthecursorwhilecreatingtheschematicline.SchematicLineStylesWhilecreatingaschematicdiagram,youmightrequiretochangethestyleoftheschematiclines.Thestyleof schematic lines can be changed by using the Style Manager. To invoke the Style Manager formodifyingtheschematiclinestyle,choosetheSchematicLineStylestoolfromtheStyleManagerdrop-down in the Style & Display panel of theManage tab in theRibbon; the Style Manager will bedisplayed,asshowninFigure9-7.Selectalinestylefromthelistavailableontheleftinthedialogbox;theoptionsrelatedtothatlinestylewillbedisplayedontherightinthedialogbox,refertoFigure9-8.TheoptionsintheStyleManagerafterselectingalinestylearediscussednext.
Figure9-7TheStyleManagerwithschematiclinestyles
![Page 385: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/385.jpg)
Figure9-8TheStyleManagerwithoptionsrelatedtoalinestyle
GeneralTabThistabisselectedbydefaultintheStyleManager,refertoFigure9-8.Theoptionsinthistabareusedtochangethegeneralsettingsforthelinestyle.Theseoptionsarediscussednext.NameThiseditboxisusedtochangethenameoftheschematiclinestyleselected.
DescriptionThiseditboxisusedtospecifythedescriptionabouttheselectedlinestyle.
KeynoteThiseditbox isused tospecifykeynotesfor theschematic linestyle.Youcanenter thedesiredkeynotes in the edit box or you can choose theSelectKeynote button next to the edit box to select akeynotefromthelistofpredefinedkeynotes.Onchoosingthisbutton,theSelectKeynotedialogboxwillbedisplayed,refertoFigure9-9.Tospecifyanypredefinedkeynote,openthedesiredcategorybyclickingontheplussignadjacenttothecategoryanddouble-clickonthedesiredkeynote;thenameoftheselectedkeynotewillbedisplayedintheKeynoteeditbox.
![Page 386: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/386.jpg)
Figure9-9TheSelectKeynotedialogbox
ThedescriptionofthekeynoteisalsodisplayedintheeditboxavailablebelowtheKeynoteeditbox.NotesThisbuttonisusedtospecifynotesfortheselectedlinestyle.Tospecifythenotes,choosetheNotesbuttonfromthebottomoftheGeneraltab;theNotesdialogboxwillbedisplayed,asshowninFigure9-10.Therearetwotabsavailableinthisdialogbox:NotesandReferenceDocs. In theNotes tab,youcanspecifynotesregardingthe linestyle in theeditboxdisplayedbelowit.Youcanalsoaddareferencedocumenttotheselectedlinestyle.Todoso,choosetheReferenceDocstab;refertoFigure9-11.ChoosetheAddbuttonfromthedialogbox;theSelectReferenceDocumentdialogboxwillbedisplayed,asshowninFigure9-12.
![Page 387: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/387.jpg)
Figure9-10TheNotesdialogbox
Figure9-11TheNotesdialogboxwiththeReferenceDocstabchosen
![Page 388: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/388.jpg)
Figure9-12TheSelectReferenceDocumentdialogbox
Browsetothedesiredlocation,selectthedocumenttobeattached,andchoosetheOKbuttonfromthedialogbox;theReferenceDocumentdialogboxwillbedisplayed,asshowninFigure9-13.EnterthedescriptionaboutthedocumenttobeaddedintheDescriptioneditboxandthenchoosetheOKbuttonfromthedialogbox;theselectedfilewillbedisplayedinthelistofdocumentsintheNotesdialogbox.ChoosetheOKbuttonfromthedialogbox;theselectedfilewillbeaddedasnotefortheselectedlinestyle.YoucanaddmoredocumentsbychoosingtheAddbuttonfromtheNotesdialogbox.YoucaneditbychoosingtheEditbutton.Todeleteadocument,choosetheDeletebutton.
Figure9-13TheReferenceDocumentdialogbox
![Page 389: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/389.jpg)
PropertySetsThisoptionisusedtospecifypropertysetdatafortheselectedstyle.Propertysetsaretheparametersthatcanbechangedforeachinstanceoftheobjectcreatedusingthespecificstyle.
DesignationsTabThe options in this tab are used to specify designations for the schematic lines, refer to Figure 9-14.Designationsareused tocreateuniqueIDsfor theschematic lines.Tospecifydesignations,choose theNewDesignation(ID)toolfromthetab;1willbedisplayedundertheIndexcolumnofthelist.Clickinthefieldcorresponding to1 in theDesignation(ID) columnandspecify thedesireddesignation in thefield. You can also create more than one designation for a schematic line by choosing the NewDesignation(ID)tool.
Figure9-14TheStyleManagerwiththeDesignationstabchosen
AnnotationTabTheoptionsinthistabareusedtomodifyannotationstyleforaschematicline,refertoFigure9-15.Theoptionsavailableinthistabarediscussednext.
![Page 390: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/390.jpg)
Figure9-15TheStyleManagerwiththeAnnotationtabchosenCrossingsAreaThereare threebuttonsavailable in thisarea:DoNothing,OverlapGraphics, andBreakExistingLine.TheDoNothingbutton isused tocreate thecrossingat the intersectionpointof theschematiclines.TheOverlapGraphicsbuttonisusedtocreateanoverlappinggraphicattheintersectionpointoftheschematiclines.TheBreakExistingLinebuttonisusedtobreaktheexistinglineattheintersectionpoint.TheA-Break/OverlapPaperWidtheditbox,availableadjacenttotheBreakExistingLinebutton, is used to change the width of overlap or break. TheBreak/Overlap Priority edit box isavailablebelowtheA-Break/OverlapPaperWidtheditbox.Thiseditboxisusedtosetoverlaporbreakpriority.
ConnectionsAreaTheConnectionNodedrop-downlist inthisareaisusedtospecifythestyleofnodescreatedat theconnections.YoucanspecifythesizeofconnectionnodeinthePaperSizeeditbox.
Start&EndSettingsAreaTherearetwodrop-downlistsinthisarea:StartandEnd.Theoptionsinthisdrop-downlistsareusedtospecifytheshapenodescreatedatthestartandendoftheschematiclines.YoucanspecifythesizesofthenodesinthecorrespondingPaperSizeeditboxes.
DisplayPropertiesTab
![Page 391: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/391.jpg)
Theoptionsinthistabareusedtomodifythedisplayrepresentationsofschematiclines,refertoFigure9-16.Therearevarioustemplatesfordisplayrepresentationsavailableinthistab.Youcanoverrideanyoftherepresentationsbyusingtheoptionsavailableinthistab.
Figure9-16TheStyleManagerwiththeDisplayPropertiestabchosenVersionHistoryTabTheoptionsinthistabareusedtorecordthehistoryoftheselectedlinestyle,refertoFigure9-17.Youcanchecktheversionsoftheselectedlinestylewiththedateofmodificationlistedatthebottomofthedialogbox.YoucanalsoremoveanyoftheversionsbyusingtheRemovebutton.
![Page 392: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/392.jpg)
Figure9-17TheStyleManagerwiththeVersionHistorytabchosen
TherearesomecommontoolsavailableintheStyleManager tocreateoredit linestyles.Thesetoolsarediscussednext.NewDrawingThis tool isused toaddanewdrawing in theStyleManager.Youcanaddvarious line styles in thisdrawingbycopyingthem.OpenDrawingThis tool is used to add an existing drawing in the Style Manager. Various styles available in thedrawingareautomaticallyimportedintheStyleManager.CopyThistoolisusedtocopytheselectedlinestyle.Todoso,selectalinestylefromthelistattheleftintheStyleManagerandthenchoosetheCopytoolfromtheStyleManager;thestylewillbecopiedintheclipboard.PasteThistoolisusedtopastethelinestylecopiedfromthelistbyusingtheCopytool.Topastealinestyle,choosethePastetoolfromtheStyleManager;thelinestylewillbepastedintheselecteddrawing.
EditStyleThistoolisusedtoswitchtotheeditingmode.NewStyleThis tool is used to create a new line style. To do so, choose theNewStyle tool from the toolbar
![Page 393: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/393.jpg)
displayedintheStyleManager;anewlinestylewillbecreatedandaddedinthelistwiththenameNewStyle.Also,youwillbepromptedtochangethenameofthestyle.TheoptionscorrespondingtothestylewillbedisplayedattherightintheStyleManager.SetFromThistoolisusedtosettheshapeofthestylebyusinganexistingdrawingfile.
PurgeStylesThistoolisusedtoremovetheunusedstylesfromthelistdisplayedintheStyleManager.Toremovestyles, select the styles to be removed and then choose the Purge Styles tool from the toolbar; theselectedstyleswillberemovedfromthelist.ToggleViewThis tool is used to togglebetween thedisplay styles available in theStyleManager. There are twodisplay styles available in theStyleManager:Display per category andDisplay per drawing. TheDisplayperdrawingdisplaystyleisselectedbydefaultintheStyleManager.Ifthisstyleisselected,thelinestylesaredisplayedasperthedrawings.IftheDisplaypercategorystyleisselected,thestyleswillbedisplayedaccordingtotheircategories.FilterStyleTypeThis tool is used to toggle between the display styles available in theStyleManager. If this tool ischosenthenthestylescorrespondingonlytotheselectedtypewillbedisplayed.InlineEditToggleThistoolisusedtotogglebetweenthesymbolicview/listandpropertiesofalinestyle.Onchoosingthistogglebutton,theoptionsintheStyleManagerwillgetmodified,asshowninFigure9-18.
![Page 394: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/394.jpg)
Figure9-18TheViewertabdisplayedonchoosingtheInlineEditTogglebuttonfromtheStyleManager
Therearetwotabsintherightareaofthedialogbox,theViewertabandtheListtab.TheoptionsintheViewertabareusedtoviewthecurrentlinestyleinvariousorientations.OnchoosingtheList tab, theoptionsintheStyleManagerwillgetmodified,refertoFigure9-19.Also,theinformationregardingtheselectedlinestylewillbedisplayedinthistab.
![Page 395: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/395.jpg)
Figure9-19TheListtabdisplayedonchoosingtheInlineEditTogglebuttonfromtheStyleManager
SchematicRepresentationofanExistingSystemYoucandisplaytheschematicrepresentationofanysystemcreatedinotherworkspaces.Todisplaytheschematic representation, open the desired file and then click on theLevel of Details button in theDrawingStatusBar;aflyoutwillbedisplayed,asshowninFigure9-20.
Figure9-20TheflyoutdisplayedonchoosingtheLevelofDetailsbutton
ChoosetheMEPSchematicoptionfromtheflyout;thecurrentdrawingwillbedisplayedwithschematicrepresentations,refertoFigure9-21.
![Page 396: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/396.jpg)
Figure9-21TheschematicrepresentationofanHVACsystem
TUTORIALTUTORIAL1Inthistutorial,youwillcreateaschematicdiagramofacomputerlab,refertoFigure9-22. (Expectedtime:30min)
Figure9-22Theschematicrepresentationofacomputerlab
![Page 397: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/397.jpg)
Examinethemodeltodeterminetheschematicsymbolstobeadded.Thefollowingstepsarerequiredtocompletethistutorial:a.StartanewdrawinginSchematicworkspace.b.Addtheschematicsymbols.c.Changethesystemofthesymbols.d.Connectthesymbolswithschematiclines.
StartingaNewDrawingFileinSchematicWorkspace1.StartAutoCADMEP,anewdrawingfilewiththedefaultnameDrawing1isopened.2.ClickontheWorkspaceSwitchingbuttonintheApplicationStatusBar;aflyoutisdisplayed.3.ChoosetheSchematicoptionfromtheflyout;theSchematicworkspaceisactivated.
AddingSchematicSymbols1. Choose the Schematic Symbol tool from the Build panel of the Home tab in the Ribbon; thePROPERTIESpalette isdisplayed,asshowninFigure9-23.Also,youareprompted tospecify thelocationofthesymbol.
Figure9-23ThePROPERTIESpaletteafterchoosingtheSchematicSymboltool
2.Click in theStyle field of thePROPERTIES palette; theSelectStyle dialog box is displayed, as
![Page 398: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/398.jpg)
showninFigure9-24.
Figure9-24TheSelectStyledialogbox
3.SelecttheElectricalCommunications(Global)optionfromtheDrawingfiledrop-downlistandtheTelephone and Data option from the Category drop-down list; the Select Style dialog box ismodified,asshowninFigure9-25.
Figure9-25ThemodifiedSelectStyledialogbox
![Page 399: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/399.jpg)
4.SelecttheTelephonePointsymbolfromthelistdisplayedinthedialogboxandchoosetheOKbutton;thesymbolgetsattachedtothecursor.
5.Clickinthedrawingareatoplacethesymbol;youarepromptedtospecifytherotationvalue.
6. Specify the value of rotation as 0 at the command prompt; the symbol is placed at the specifiedlocation.PressESCtoexitthetool.
7. Select the symbol from the drawing area and right-click; a shortcutmenu is displayed. Choose theArraytoolfromtheBasicModifyToolsflyout.
8.ChoosetheRectangularoptionfromthecommandbar;thepreviewofthearrayoftelephonepointsisdisplayed, refer to Figure 9-26.Also, theArrayCreation contextual tab is displayed, as shown inFigure9-27.
Figure9-26Thepreviewofthearrayoftelephonepoints
Figure9-27TheArrayCreationcontextualtab
9.Specifythevalue4intheColumnseditboxand3000intheBetweeneditboxintheColumnspanelofthecontextualtab;thepreviewofthearrayisdisplayed.
10.Specifythevalue2intheRowseditboxand3000 intheBetweeneditboxintheRowspanel; thepreviewofthearrayisdisplayed,asshowninFigure9-28.
![Page 400: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/400.jpg)
11.ChoosetheCloseArraytoolfromtheClosepanelofthecontextualtab;thearrayoftelephonepointsiscreated.
12.Similarly, addother symbols according toFigure9-22.Thedrawingafter addingother symbols isdisplayed,refertoFigure9-29.
Figure9-28Thepreviewofarray
Figure9-29Thedrawingafteraddingothersymbols
Note1. Symbol for PC is available in the Equipment category of the Electrical Power (Global)drawingfileintheSelectStyledialogbox.
2. Symbol for 240v-110v Switched Socket Outlet is available in the Sockets category of theElectricalPower(Global)drawingfileintheSelectStyledialogbox.
3. Symbol for Inline Fuse Electrical is available in the Switches category of the ElectricalSchematic(Global)drawingintheSelectStyledialogbox.
ChangingtheSystemofSymbols
![Page 401: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/401.jpg)
Now,youneedtochangethesystemofsymbolsavailableinthedrawingareaaspertheirapplication.1.SelectallthesymbolsofPC,240v-110vSwitchedSocketOutlet,andInlineFuseElectricalfromthedrawing; invoke the PROPERTIES palette, the PROPERTIES palette is displayed, as shown inFigure9-30.
Figure9-30ThePROPERTIESpalette
2.SelecttheE-230VPower(230-PWR)optionfromtheSystemdrop-downlistintheSystemrolloutofthePROPERTIESpaletteandselectZ-Schematics-GfromtheLayerdrop-downlistintheGeneralrollout.ThePROPERTIESpaletteafterspecifyingtheparametersisdisplayed,asshowninFigure9-31.Afterspecifyingproperties,pressESC.
![Page 402: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/402.jpg)
Figure9-31ThePROPERTIESpaletteafterspecifyingtheparameters3. Similarly, select all the Telephone Points in the PROPERTIES palette, and then select the E-Telephone(TELEPHONE)optionfromtheSystemdrop-downlist.Also,selecttheZ-Schematics-GoptionfromtheLayerdrop-downlist.
ConnectingSymbolswithSchematicLineNow,youneedtoconnectalltheschematicsymbolswiththeirrelevantschematiclines.1. Choose the Schematic Line tool from the Build panel in the Home tab of the Ribbon; thePROPERTIESpaletteisdisplayed,asshowninFigure9-32.
![Page 403: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/403.jpg)
Figure9-32ThePROPERTIESpaletteafterchoosingtheSchematicLinetool2.Select theE-230VPower(230-PWR)option from theSystemdrop-down list and theWire optionfromtheStyledrop-downlist.
3.ClickonSchematicEndConnectorofthePCatthetop-leftinthedrawing,refertoFigure9-33; theschematiclinegetsattachedtothecursor.
Figure9-33Theschematicendconnectortobeselected4.Move the cursor towards right and select theSchematicEndConnector of the 240v-110vSwitchedSocketOutletadjacenttotheselectedPC.Similarly,connecttheInlineFuseElectricalinthedrawingarea.
5.Similarly,connectrestofthesymbols,referto9-34.
![Page 404: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/404.jpg)
Figure9-34ThedrawingafterconnectingallthesymbolsoftheElectricalPower(Global)andElectricalSchematic(Global)categories
6. Choose the Schematic Line tool again and select theE-Telephone (TELEPHONE) option fromSystemdrop-downlistinthePROPERTIESpalette;youarepromptedtospecifythestartpointoftheline.
7.ClickontheSchematicEndConnectoroftheTelephonepoint;theschematiclinegetsattachedtothecursor.
8.Connectallthetelephonepointswiththeschematiclines,asshowninFigure9-35.
Figure9-35Thedrawingafterconnectingallthetelephonepointswiththeschematiclines
SavingtheDrawingFile1.ChooseSavefromtheApplicationMenutosavethedrawingfile.
SELF-EVALUATIONTESTAnswerthefollowingquestionsandthencomparethemtothosegivenattheendofthischapter:
![Page 405: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/405.jpg)
1.Schematicsymbolsarethesymbolicrepresentationofphysicalobjectsrequiredinabuildingsystem.(T/F)
2.Whenyoudeletea schematic line inwhich the In-line symbolsareattached, the symbolsdonotgetdeletedwiththeline.(T/F)
3. The System drop-down list is available in the __________ rollout of the Design tab in thePROPERTIESpalette.
4.The__________handleisusedtomodifythelocationofthesymbol.5. Inwhich of the following drawing files, the 360Camera symbol is available in theSelect Styledialogbox?
(a)ElectricalCommunications(Global)(b)ElectricalLighting(Global)(c)MechanicalEquipment(Global)(d)ElectricalSchematic(Global)REVIEWQUESTIONSAnswerthefollowingquestions:1.TheOrthooptionisusedtoplacethesymbolsperpendiculartotheinsertionpoint.(T/F)2.ThestyleofschematiclinescanbechangedbyusingtheStyleManager.(T/F)3.The __________ option is used to select a schematic symbol from the list of symbols available inAutoCADMEP.
4.The__________optionintheLevelofDetailsflyoutisusedtodisplaytheschematicrepresentationofadrawing.
5.Inwhichofthefollowingdrawingfiles,theCardReadersymbolisavailableintheStyledialogbox?(a)ElectricalCommunications(Global)(b)ElectricalLighting(Global)(c)MechanicalEquipment(Global)(d)ElectricalSchematic(Global)EXERCISEEXERCISE1In thisexercise,youwillcreateaschematicdrawing,asshowninFigure9-36.Theschematic lineforconnectingthesymbolsshouldbeoftheE-230VPower(230-PWR)system.(Expectedtime:30min)
![Page 406: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/406.jpg)
Figure9-36SchematicdrawingforExercise1
AnswerstoSelf-EvaluationTest1.T,2.F,3.System,4.Location,5.ElectricalCommunications(Global)
![Page 407: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/407.jpg)
Chapter10
Project
![Page 408: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/408.jpg)
LearningObjectivesAftercompletingthisproject,youwillbeableto:•Createaprojectfile•Addarchitecturaldrawingtotheproject•Addmechanicalsystemtotheproject•Addelectricalsystemtotheproject•Addpipingsystemtotheproject•Addplumbingsystemtotheproject
PROJECTIn thisproject,youwillcreatecompletesystemofa forgingplant.Figure10-1shows thearchitecturaldrawingsoftheplant.Figure10-2showstheHVACdrawingsoftheplant.Figure10-3showsthepipingdrawings of the plant. Figure 10-4 shows the electrical drawings of the plant. Table 10-1 shows theparametersrequiredforvariousdevices.(Expectedtime:4hr)
![Page 409: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/409.jpg)
Figure10-1Architecturaldrawingsoftheplant
![Page 410: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/410.jpg)
Figure10-2HVACdrawingsoftheplant
![Page 411: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/411.jpg)
![Page 412: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/412.jpg)
Figure10-3Pipingdrawingsoftheplant
![Page 413: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/413.jpg)
Figure10-4Electricaldrawingsoftheplant
![Page 414: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/414.jpg)
Table10-1Theparametersrequiredforvariousdevices
Thefollowingstepsarerequiredtocompletethisproject:1.Startanewprojectfile2.Createcategoriesintheproject3.Createlevelsintheproject4.Createarchitecturaldrawings
•Createarchitecturaldrawingofgroundfloor•CreatewallsinthearchitecturaldrawingforgroundFloor•Changethedoorstyleinthearchitecturaldrawing•Createdoorsinthearchitecturaldrawingofgroundfloor•Createwindowsinthearchitecturaldrawingofgroundfloor•Createarchitecturaldrawingoffirstfloor•Createwallsinthearchitecturaldrawingforfirstfloor•Createdoorsinthearchitecturaldrawingoffirstfloor•Createwindowsinthearchitecturaldrawingoffirstfloor
5.CreateHVACdrawings•CreateHVACdrawingofgroundfloor•Importthearchitecturaldrawingofgroundfloor•Addairterminalsinthearchitecturaldrawingofgroundfloor•Createtheductlineofgroundfloor•Calculatetheductsizesofgroundfloor•Createreturnductforthegroundfloor•Createreturnductlineforthegroundfloor•Calculatetheductsizesofgroundfloor•CreateHVACdrawingoffirstfloor•Importthearchitecturaldrawingoffirstfloor•Addairterminalsinthearchitecturaldrawingoffirstfloor•Addductlinetothediffusers•Addairhandlingunit•Addreturngrillesinthearchitecturaldrawingoffirstfloor•Createreturnductlineforthefirstfloor•Calculatetheductsizesoffirstfloor
6.Createpipingdrawings•Createpipingdrawingofgroundfloor•Importthearchitecturaldrawingofgroundfloor
![Page 415: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/415.jpg)
•Addballvalvesinthearchitecturaldrawingofgroundfloor•Addpipelineinthearchitecturaldrawingofgroundfloor•Connectballvalveswiththepipeline•Createpipingdrawingoffirstfloor•Importthearchitecturaldrawingoffirstfloor•Addtankinthefirstfloor•Addpumpsinthefirstfloor•Addpipelineinthefirstfloor
7.Createelectricaldrawings•Createelectricaldrawingofgroundfloor•Importthearchitecturaldrawingofgroundfloor•Add300x1200surfacetypelightstothedrawing•Addsocketstothedrawing•Add300x600recessedlightstothedrawing•Configuredevicesofgroundfloor•Createpanelofgroundfloor•Configurecircuitsofgroundfloor•Addwiresofgroundfloor•Calculateloadandwiresizesofgroundfloor•Addtransformerandemergencygeneratortothedrawingbasedontotalload•Createelectricaldrawingoffirstfloor•Importthearchitecturaldrawingoffirstfloor•Addlightsinthedrawingoffirstfloor•Addsocketsinthedrawingoffirstfloor•Configuredevicesoffirstfloor•Createpaneloffirstfloor•Configurecircuitsoffirstfloor•Addwiresoffirstfloor•Calculateloadsandwiresizesoffirstfloor
StartingaNewProjectFile1. StartAutoCADMEPby using theAutoCADMEP2015 -English (Global) icon displayed on yourdesktop.
2.ChooseNew>ProjectfromtheApplicationMenu;theProjectBrowserisdisplayed.3.Choose theNewProject button available at the bottom of theProject Browser; theAddProjectdialogboxisdisplayed.
4.EntertheprojectnameasForgingPlantintheProjectnamefield,0001intheProjectNumberfieldand other descriptions in their respective fields.Make sure that theCreate from template projectcheckboxisclear.
5.ChoosetheOKbutton;thenewlycreatedprojectfilenameisdisplayedintheleftpaneoftheProject
![Page 416: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/416.jpg)
Browser,refertoFigure10-5.
Figure10-5TheProjectBrowser
6. Choose the Close button from the Project Browser; the PROJECT NAVIGATOR palette isdisplayedinthedrawingareaandthenewprojectgetsactivated.
CreatingCategoriesintheProjectNow,youneedtocategorizetheproject.1. To categorize a project, choose the Add Category tool from the bottom of the PROJECTNAVIGATORintheConstructstab;anewcategoryisaddedtotheConstructsnode.
2.SpecifythenameofthecategoryasArchitecturalandpressENTER.3.Similarly,addothercategoriesandnamethemasMechanical,Piping,andElectrical.CreatingLevelsintheProjectNow,youneedtocreatelevelsintheproject.1. To create levels, choose the Project tab from the PROJECT NAVIGATOR; the PROJECTNAVIGATORisdisplayed,asshowninFigure10-6.
![Page 417: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/417.jpg)
Figure10-6ThePROJECTNAVIGATORwiththeProjecttabchosen
2.ChoosetheEditLevelsbuttonfromtheLevelsrolloutofthePROJECTNAVIGATOR; theLevelsdialogboxisdisplayed,asshowninFigure10-7.
Figure10-7TheLevelsdialogbox3.Enter3000intheFloortoFloorHeightcolumncorrespondingto1intheNamecolumn.
4.ChoosetheAddLevelbuttonontherightinthedialogbox;anewlevelisaddedwiththename2tothelistdisplayedinthedialogbox.
5.ChoosetheOKbuttoninthedialogboxtoexit.IfyougetamessageboxwiththemessagethatdoyouwantAutoCADMEPtoregenerateall theviewsinthisproject,asshowninFigure10-8,choosethe
![Page 418: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/418.jpg)
Yesbuttonfromthemessagebox.
Figure10-8TheAutoCADMEPmessagebox
CreatingArchitecturalDrawingsNow,youneedtocreatearchitecturaldrawingsforthegroundfloorandfirstfloor.CreatingArchitecturalDrawingoftheGroundFloor1.SelecttheArchitecturalcategoryfromtheConstructstabinthePROJECTNAVIGATORandthenchoosetheAddConstructbuttonavailableatthebottom;theAddConstructdialogboxisdisplayed,asshowninFigure10-9.
Figure10-9TheAddConstructdialogbox
![Page 419: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/419.jpg)
2.SelecttheOpenindrawingeditorcheckboxfromthebottomofthedialogbox.3.EnterGroundFloorArchitecturalintheNamefieldofthedialogbox.4.ClickintheDescriptionfield;theDescriptiondialogboxisdisplayed,asshowninFigure10-10.
Figure10-10TheDescriptiondialogbox5.EnterthedescriptionasThisdrawingismeantforarchitecturalplanofthegroundfloorintheEditthedescriptioneditboxandthenchoosetheOKbuttonfromthedialogbox.
6.Selectthecheckboxcorrespondingtolevel1intheDivisioncolumnintheAddConstructdialogbox.Also,makesurethattheOpenindrawingeditorcheckboxisselectedandthenchoosetheOKbuttonfromthedialogbox; thedrawing isopened inAutoCADMEP.Also, theGroundFloorArchitecturaldrawingisdisplayedwithalockiconadjacenttoitinthePROJECTNAVIGATOR.
7. Choose the Workspace Switching option from the Drawing Status Bar and then choose theArchitectureoptionfromtheflyoutdisplayed;theArchitectureworkspaceisactivated.
CreatingWallsintheArchitecturalDrawing1.ChoosetheWalltoolfromtheWalldrop-downintheBuildpaneloftheHometabintheRibbon;youareprompted tospecify thestartingpointof thewall.Also, thePROPERTIES palette isdisplayed,refertoFigure10-11.
![Page 420: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/420.jpg)
Figure10-11ThePROPERTIESpalette
2.Enter thebaseheight of thewall as4000,widthas254, and set theJustify option asRight in thePROPERTIESpalette.
3.Enterthecoordinates0,0,0atthecommandbarandpressENTERtospecifythestartpoint;arubberbandwallisdisplayedwithitsotherendattachedtothecursor.
4. Press F8 towork in theORTHOMODE and specify the horizontal length of thewall 18000 at thecommandbar.Next,pressENTER.
5. Move the cursor vertically upward and specify the value 18000 at the command bar. Next, pressENTER.
6.Movethecursortowardstheleftandspecifythevalue18000atthecommandbar.Next,pressENTER.7.EnterCat thecommandprompt tocreate the lastwall.Thedrawingdisplays thearchitecturalouterboundaryoftheplant,refertoFigure10-12.
![Page 421: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/421.jpg)
Figure10-12Thearchitecturalouterboundaryoftheplant
8.Similarly,create thewalls inside theplant, as shown inFigure10-13.Fordimensionsof thewalls,refertoFigure10-1.
Figure10-13Thedrawingaftercreatingallwalls
![Page 422: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/422.jpg)
ChangingtheDoorStyleintheArchitecturalDrawing1.ChoosetheStyleManagertoolfromtheStyle&DisplaypaneloftheManagetabintheRibbon;theStyleManagerisdisplayed,asshowninFigure10-14.
Figure10-14TheStyleManager2.Clickontheplussignadjacent toArchitecturalObjectson the left in theStyleManager;a listofarchitecturalobjectsisdisplayedundertheArchitecturalObjectscategory.
3.ClickontheplussignadjacenttoDoorStyleinthelist;theStandarddoorstyleisdisplayedinthelist.4.SelecttheStandarddoorstyle; theoptionsrelatedtothedoorstylearedisplayedontherightintheStyleManager,refertoFigure10-15.
![Page 423: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/423.jpg)
Figure10-15TheStyleManagerwithdoorstyleselected5.ChoosetheDesignRules tabintheStyleManager; theoptionsrelated to theshapeof thedooraredisplayed.
6. Select theRectangular option from thePredefined drop-down list of theShape area in theStyleManager.
7.SelecttheDoubleoptionfromtheDoorTypearea.
8.ChoosetheStandardSizestab;theoptionsrelatedtothesizeofdooraredisplayedontherightintheStyleManager.
9.ChoosetheAddNewStandardSizebuttonfromtheright in theStyleManager; theAddStandardSizedialogboxisdisplayed,asshowninFigure10-16.
![Page 424: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/424.jpg)
Figure10-16TheAddStandardSizedialogbox
10.EnterthedescriptionasInnerDoorintheDescriptioneditboxofthedialogbox.11.Specify thewidthandheight as1000 and3000 in the respective fields of thedialogbox and thenchoosetheOKbutton.
12.ChoosetheAddNewStandardSizebuttonagainandcreateadoorstylewithwidthandheightas4000and3500,respectively.SpecifyMainDoorintheDescriptioneditbox.
13.ChoosetheOKbuttontoexittheStyleManager.
CreatingDoorsintheArchitecturalDrawingoftheGroundFloor1.ChoosetheDoortoolfromtheDoordrop-downintheBuildpaneloftheHometabintheRibbon;youarepromptedtospecifytheinsertionpointofthedoor.Also,thePROPERTIESpaletteisdisplayed,asshowninFigure10-17.
![Page 425: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/425.jpg)
Figure10-17ThePROPERTIESpalettedisplayedonchoosingtheDoortool2.Selectthe1000X3000optionfromtheStandardsizesdrop-downlistintheDimensionsrolloutofthePROPERTIESpalette.
3.SelecttheOffset/CenteroptionfromthePositionalongwalldrop-downlistintheLocation rolloutandspecify150intheAutomaticoffseteditbox.Clickinthedrawingarea;thedoorgetsattachedtothecursor.Addalltheinnerdoorswiththerespectivewalls,asshowninFigure10-18.PressENTERtoexitthetool.
![Page 426: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/426.jpg)
Figure10-18Thedrawingafteraddinginnerdoors
4.Again, choose theDoor tool; you are prompted to select awall or grid.Also, thePROPERTIESpaletteisdisplayed.
5.Selectthe4000X3500optionfromtheStandardsizesdrop-downlistintheDimensionsrolloutandclickinthedrawing;thedoorgetsattachedtothecursor.
6.Clickonthewallstocreatemaindoors,refertoFigure10-19.
![Page 427: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/427.jpg)
Figure10-19ThedrawingafteraddingmainandinnerdoorsCreatingWindowsintheArchitecturalDrawingoftheGroundFloor1. Choose theWindow tool from theWindow drop-down in theBuild panel of theHome tab in theRibbon; you are prompted to select awall or a grid assembly.Also, thePROPERTIES palette isdisplayed,asshowninFigure10-20.
![Page 428: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/428.jpg)
Figure10-20ThePROPERTIESpaletteonchoosingtheWindowtool2.ChoosetheOffset/CenteroptionfromthePositionalongwalldrop-downlistintheLocationrolloutofthePROPERTIESpaletteandenter0 intheAutomaticoffseteditbox.Choose thewindowsize1010X1510fromtheStandardsizesdrop-downlistintheDimensionsrollout.Also,selectYesfromtheRelativetogriddrop-downlistintheLocationrollout.
3.Clickonthewallsofthegroundfloorarchitecturaldrawingandlocatethewindowsatthecenterofthewall,showninFigure10-21.
Figure10-21Thewallstobeselectedforaddingwindows
4.Savethedrawingandcloseit.
CreatingArchitecturalDrawingofFirstFloor1.SelecttheArchitecturalcategoryfromthePROJECTNAVIGATORandchoosetheAddConstructtoolfromthebottom;theAddConstructdialogboxisdisplayed.
2.SpecifythenameasFirstFloorArchitecturalintheNameeditboxofthedialogbox.3.ClickintheDescriptionfieldandspecifythedescriptionasThisdrawingismeantforarchitecturalplanofthefirstfloorinthedialogboxdisplayed.MakesurethattheOpenindrawingeditorcheckboxisselected.
![Page 429: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/429.jpg)
4.Selectthecheckboxcorrespondingtolevel2intheDivisioncolumnoftheAddConstructdialogboxandthenchoosetheOKbuttontoexit;thedrawingisdisplayedinthedrawingeditor.MakesurethattheArchitectureoptionischosenintheWorkspaceSwitchingflyout.
CreatingWallsintheArchitecturalDrawing1.ChoosetheWalltoolfromtheWalldrop-downintheBuildpaneloftheHometabintheRibbon;youarepromptedtospecifythestartingpointofthewall.Also,thePROPERTIESpaletteisdisplayed.
2.Enter0,0,0atthecommandbartospecifythestartingpointofthewallandpressENTER.Movethecursorverticallyupwardandenter18000atthecommandprompt.
3.Movethecursortowardrightandthenenter8000atthecommandbar.4.Movethecursorverticallydownwardandthenenter9000atthecommandbar.5.Movethecursortowardrightandthenenter10000atthecommandbar.6.Move thecursorverticallydownwardandenter9000 at thecommandbar.EnterC at thecommandprompttocreatethelastwall.
Theouterboundaryofthefirstflooriscreated,refertoFigure10-22.Now,youneedtocreateroomsinthebuilding.
Figure10-22Outerboundaryofthefirstfloor
![Page 430: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/430.jpg)
7.Similarly,usingtheWalltool,createtherooms,asshowninFigure10-23andfordimension,refertoFigure10-1.
Figure10-23Drawingoffirstflooraftercreatingrooms
CreatingDoorsintheArchitecturalDrawingoftheFirstFloor1.ChoosetheDoortoolfromtheDoordrop-downintheBuildpaneloftheHometabintheRibbon;youarepromptedtoselectawalloragrid.Also,thePROPERTIESpaletteisdisplayed.
2. Specify width as 1500 in theWidth edit box and height as 3000 in theHeight edit box of theDimensionsrolloutinthePROPERTIESpalette.
3.SelecttheOffset/CenteroptionfromthePositionalongwalldrop-downlistintheLocation rolloutofthePROPERTIESpalette.
4.Clickonawall;thedoorgetsattachedtothecursorandcanmovealongthewalls.5.Clickonthewallagain;thedoorisadded.Similarly,addrestofthedoors,refertoFigure10-24.
![Page 431: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/431.jpg)
Figure10-24Drawingofthefirstflooraftercreatingdoors
CreatingWindowsintheArchitecturalDrawingoftheGroundFloor1. Choose theWindow tool from theWindow drop-down in theBuild panel of theHome tab in theRibbon; you are prompted to select awall or a grid assembly.Also, thePROPERTIES palette isdisplayed.
2.SelecttheOffset/CenteroptionfromthePositionalongwalldrop-downlistoftheLocation rolloutinthePROPERTIESpaletteandthenselect thewindowsize1010X1510 fromtheStandardsizesdrop-downlistintheDimensionsrollout.
3.Clickonthewalls,asshowninFigure10-25,toaddwindows.
![Page 432: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/432.jpg)
Figure10-25ThewallstobeselectedforaddingwindowsThedrawingafteraddingwindowsisdisplayed,asshowninFigure10-26.
![Page 433: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/433.jpg)
Figure10-26Thedrawingafteraddingwindows4.Savethedrawingandcloseit.CreatingHVACDrawingsNow, you need to createHVACdrawings for the building. For creatingHVACdrawings, you need toswitchtotheHVACworkspace.CreatingHVACDrawingoftheGroundFloor1.Select theMechanicalcategoryfromthePROJECTNAVIGATOR andchoose theAddConstructbuttonavailableatthebottom;theAddConstructdialogboxisdisplayed.
2.EnterthenameGroundFloorMechanicalintheNamefieldofthedialogbox.3.ClickintheDescriptionfield;theDescriptiondialogboxisdisplayed.
4.EnterthedescriptionasThisdrawingismeantforHVACplanofthegroundfloorandthenchoosetheOKbuttonfromthedialogbox.
5.Selectthecheckboxcorrespondingtolevel1intheDivisioncolumnandmakesurethattheOpenindrawingeditorcheckbox isselected in theAddConstructdialogbox.Next,choose theOKbuttonfromthedialogbox;thedrawingisopened.Also,theGroundFloorMechanicaldrawingisdisplayedwithalockiconadjacenttoitinthePROJECTNAVIGATOR.
6.Click on theWorkspaceSwitching option in theDrawing StatusBar and then choose theHVACoptionfromtheflyoutdisplayed.
ImportingtheArchitecturalDrawingoftheGroundFloorBeforeaddinganyHVACsystemto theproject,youneed to import thearchitecturalplanof thegroundfloor.
1.InthePROJECTNAVIGATOR,clickontheplussignadjacenttotheArchitecturalcategoryintheConstructstab;alistofarchitecturaldrawingsisdisplayed.
2. Select Ground Floor Architectural drawing from the list and drag it to the current drawing; thearchitecturaldrawingisattachedtothecurrentdrawingasanexternalreference.
AddingAirTerminalstotheArchitecturalDrawingoftheGroundFloor1.Choose theAirTerminal tool from theEquipment panel of theHome tab in theRibbon; theAddMulti-viewPartsdialogboxisdisplayed,asshowninFigure10-27.
![Page 434: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/434.jpg)
Figure10-27TheAddMulti-viewPartsdialogbox2.Clickon the+ signadjacent to theDiffusers andchoose the600x600mmSquareFacedCeilingDiffuserpartfromtheParttabofthedialogbox;thepreviewofthediffuserisdisplayedontherightinthedialogbox.
3.Selectthe600x600mmSquarePlaqueFaceCeilingDiffuser-150mmNeckoptionfromthePartSizeNamedrop-downlistatthebottomofthedialogbox.
4.Enterthevalue3200intheElevationeditbox.5.ChoosetheFlowtab;thedialogboxismodified,asshowninFigure10-28.
![Page 435: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/435.jpg)
Figure10-28TheAddMulti-viewPartsdialogboxwiththeFlowtabchosen6.Specify8intheFlow(EachTerminal)editbox.7.Placethediffuserscenteredsymmetrically,asshowninFigure10-29.
Figure10-29Thedrawingafteraddingdiffusersintheouterarea
![Page 436: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/436.jpg)
Now,youneedtoaddtheairterminalstotheoffices,havingaflowrateof2literperhour.8.Choose theAirTerminal tool from theEquipment panel of theHome tab in theRibbon; theAddMulti-viewPartsdialogboxisdisplayed.
9.Selectthe600x600mmSquareFacedCeilingDiffuserpartfromtheParttabofthedialogbox;thepreviewofthediffuserisdisplayedontherightinthedialogbox.
10.Selectthe600x600mmSquarePlaqueFaceCeilingDiffuser-150mmNeckoptionfromthePartSizeNamedrop-downlistatthebottominthedialogbox.
11.Enterthevalue3200intheElevationeditbox.
12.ChoosetheFlowtabandspecifythevalueofflowas2intheFloweditboxofthedialogbox.13.Placethediffuserssuchthattheyarecenteredsymmetricallyintheoffices,refertoFigure10-30.
Figure10-30Thedrawingafteraddingdiffusersintheoffices
CreatingtheDuctLineofGroundFloor1.ChooseToolsfromtheToolsdrop-downintheBuildpaneloftheHometabintheRibbon;theTOOLPALETTESisdisplayed.
2.ChoosethePropertiesbuttononthetopleftintheTOOLPALETTES;aflyoutisdisplayed,asshowninFigure10-31.
![Page 437: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/437.jpg)
Figure10-31ThePropertiesflyoutoftheTOOLPALETTES
3.ChoosetheHVACoptionfromtheflyout,ifitisnotalreadychosen;thetoolsrelatedtoHVACsystemaredisplayedintheTOOLPALETTES,refertoFigure10-32.
![Page 438: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/438.jpg)
Figure10-32TheTOOLPALETTES-HVAC4.Choosethe1-LinetoolfromtheTOOLPALETTES;youarepromptedtospecifythestartpointoftheduct.
5.Clickon theDuctEndConnector of the first duct at the top in theouter areaof theplant, refer toFigure10-33.
Figure10-33Theducttobeselectedforaddingductline6.Clickontheductadjacenttothepreviousonetoconnectittotheductline.Similarly,connectalltheotherductstotheductline,refertoFigure10-34.
![Page 439: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/439.jpg)
Figure10-34TheductlinecreatedbetweentheouterductsToconnecttheductsatthesameelevation,youmightneedtoswitchtoisometricviews.
7.Connectalltheductsintheofficeareatotheductatthemiddleoftheductlineusingthe1-Line tool,refertoFigure10-35.
![Page 440: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/440.jpg)
Figure10-35Addingofficeductstotheductline
8.Similarly,connectaduct line to themainduct lineforcalculating theductsizeand transforming theductlineintoductsofrequiredsizes,refertoFigure10-36.
Figure10-36Addingaductlineforloadcalculation
CalculatingtheDuctSizes
![Page 441: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/441.jpg)
1.Select theduct linecreated for loadcalculations; theDuct contextual tab is displayed, as shown inFigure10-37.
Figure10-37TheDuctcontextualtab
2.ChoosetheCalculateDuctSizes tool fromtheCalculationspanelof theDuctcontextual tab in theRibbon;theDuctSystemSizeCalculatordialogboxisdisplayed,asshowninFigure10-38.
Figure10-38TheDuctSystemSizeCalculatordialogbox3.SelecttheRoundoptionfromthefirstdrop-downlistinthe2areaofthedialogbox.
![Page 442: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/442.jpg)
4.ChoosetheStartbuttonfromthe4areaofthedialogbox;theChooseaPartdialogboxisdisplayed,asshowninFigure10-39andyouarepromptedtoselectasuitablepartfromthepartlistavailableattheleftinthedialogbox.
Figure10-39TheChooseaPartdialogboxNoteTheChooseaPartdialogboxwillbedisplayedduringtransitiononlywhenthereisanelevationorsizedifferencebetweenthetwomatingducts.5.SelectthedesiredpartfromtheleftareaofthedialogboxandchoosetheOKbuttonfromthedialogbox;thedesiredpartisaddedandtheChooseaPartdialogboxisdisplayedagain.
6.SelectthedesiredpartfromthedialogboxandchoosetheOKbutton.Repeattheproceduretillalltheparts are added; the success rateof theduct size isdisplayed in the5 areaof thedialogbox. If thesuccessrateisnot100%,thenthereisanerrorinthefittingsaddedtotheductline.
7.Tochecktheproblemsintheductline,choosetheViewEventLogbuttonfromthe5areaofthedialogbox;theEventLogdialogboxisdisplayed,refertoFigure10-40.Insuchcases,youneedtorearrangetheductsystem.TheductlineafterrearrangingisshowninFigure10-41.
![Page 443: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/443.jpg)
Figure10-40TheEventLogdialogbox
Figure10-41Theductlineafterrearrangement
8.Again,selecttheductlinecreatedforcalculatingductsizesandchoosetheCalculateDuctSizestoolfromtheDuctcontextualtab;theDuctSystemSizeCalculatordialogboxisdisplayed.
9.ChoosetheStartbuttonfromthe4areaofthedialogboxandaddthedesiredpartbyusingtheSelectaPartdialogbox; thesystemapplies thetransitionsautomaticallyandtheductsystemisdisplayed,asshowninFigure10-42.
![Page 444: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/444.jpg)
Figure10-42TheDuctsystemaftercalculatingductsizesandapplyingtransitionsCreatingReturnDuctfortheGroundFloor1.ChoosetheAirTerminaltoolfromtheEquipmentdrop-downintheBuildpaneloftheHome tab intheRibbon;theAddMulti-viewPartsdialogboxisdisplayed,asshowninFigure10-43.
Figure10-43TheAddMulti-viewPartsdialogbox
2.ClickontheplussignadjacenttoGrillesintheParttabofthedialogbox;variousgrillesavailableinAutoCADMEParedisplayed.
![Page 445: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/445.jpg)
3.SelecttheReturnAirGrillespartfromthepartlist;previewofthepartsisdisplayedintherightinthedialogbox.
4.Selectthe75X625mmReturnAirGrilleoptionfromthePartSizeNamedrop-downlist.5.Enterthevalue3600intheElevationeditboxavailableatthebottom.6.ChoosetheFlowtabandspecifythevalue8intheFlow(EachTerminal)editbox.7.Addthereturngrilles,asshowninFigure10-44.
Figure10-44ThedrawingafteraddingthereturngrillesCreatingReturnDuctLinefortheGroundFloor1. Choose the1-Line tool from theBy Shape area of theTOOLPALETTES; you are prompted tospecifythestartpointoftheductline.
2.Clickonthereturngrillandcreatetheductline,refertoFigure10-45.
![Page 446: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/446.jpg)
Figure10-45Thedrawingafterconnectingthereturngrilleswiththeductline
CalculatingtheDuctSizesforReturnGrillSystem1.Selectaductlineinthereturngrillsystem;theDuctcontextualtabisdisplayed.2. Choose theCalculateDuct Sizes tool from theCalculations panel in the contextual tab; theDuctSystemSizeCalculatordialogboxisdisplayed.MakesurethatRound isselectedinthefirstdrop-downlistofthe2areainthedialogbox.
3.ChoosetheStarttoolfromthe4areaofthedialogboxandchoosetheOKbuttonfromthesuccessivedialogboxes;theductsizesarecalculatedandtransitionisappliedautomatically.
4.ChoosetheClosebuttonfromtheDuctSystemSizeCalculatordialogboxtoexit.5.Savethedrawingandcloseit.CreatingMechanicalDrawingoftheFirstFloor1.Select theMechanicalcategoryfromthePROJECTNAVIGATOR andchoose theAddConstructbuttonavailableatthebottom;theAddConstructdialogboxisdisplayed.
2.EnterthenameFirstFloorMechanicalintheNamefieldofthedialogbox.
3.ClickintheDescriptionfield;theDescriptiondialogboxisdisplayed.
4.EnterthedescriptionasThisdrawingismeantformechanicalplanofthefirstfloorandthenchoosetheOKbuttonfromthedialogbox.
![Page 447: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/447.jpg)
5.Selectthecheckboxcorrespondingtolevel2intheDivisioncolumnintheAddConstructdialogboxandchoosetheOKbuttonfromthedialogbox;thedrawingisopened.Also,theFirstFloorMechanicaldrawingiconisdisplayedwithalocksignadjacenttoitinthePROJECTNAVIGATOR.
6.ClickontheWorkspaceSwitchingoptionintheApplicationStatusBarandchoosetheHVACoptionfromtheflyout.
ImportingtheArchitecturalDrawingoftheFirstFloorBeforeaddingamechanicalsystemtothisdrawing,youneedtofirstimportthearchitecturalplanofthefirstfloor.1.OpenthePROJECTNAVIGATORandthenclickontheplussignadjacenttoArchitecturalcategoryintheConstructstab;alistofarchitecturaldrawingsisdisplayed.
2. Select First Floor Architectural drawing from the list and drag it to the current drawing; thearchitecturaldrawingisattachedtothecurrentdrawingasanexternalreference.
AddingAirTerminalstotheArchitecturalDrawingoftheFirstFloor1.Choose theAirTerminal tool from theEquipment panel of theHome tab in theRibbon; theAddMulti-viewPartsdialogboxisdisplayed.
2.Select the600x600mmSquareFacedCeilingDiffuserpart from thePart tabof thedialogbox;previewofthediffuserisdisplayedintherightofthedialogbox.
3.Selectthe600x600mmSquarePlaqueFaceCeilingDiffuser-150mmNeckoptionfromthePartSizeNamedrop-downlistatthebottomofthedialogbox.
4.Enterthevalue3200intheElevationeditbox.5.ChoosetheFlowtab;thedialogboxismodified,asshowninFigure10-46.
![Page 448: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/448.jpg)
Figure10-46TheAddMulti-viewPartsdialogboxwiththeFlowtabchosen
6.Enterthevalueas4intheFloweditbox.7.Placethediffuserssuchthattheyarecenteredsymmetrically,asshowninFigure10-47.
Figure10-47ThedrawingafteraddingdiffusersNoteYoucanalsospecifytheElevationvalueintherespectiveeditboxoftheBASIC>LocationrolloutinthePROPERTIESpalette.
![Page 449: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/449.jpg)
AddingDuctLinetotheDiffusers1. Choose the1-Line tool from theBy Shape area of theTOOLPALETTES; you are prompted tospecifythestartpointoftheductline.
2.ClickontheDuctEndConnectorsandconnecttheductstotheductline,refertoFigure10-48.
Figure10-48Thedrawingafteraddingtheductline
AddingAirHandlingUnit1.ChoosetheAirHandlertoolfromtheEquipmentdrop-downintheBuildpaneloftheHometabintheRibbon;theAddMulti-viewPartsdialogboxisdisplayed,asshowninFigure10-49.Also,youarepromptedtospecifytheinsertionpointfortheairhandlerunit.
![Page 450: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/450.jpg)
Figure10-49TheAddMulti-viewPartsdialogbox
2.ClickontheplussignadjacenttoPackagedAirHandlingUnitinthepartlist;thelistofairhandlingunitsisdisplayed.
3.SelectAirHandlingUnit-FloorMountedFrontDischargefromthelist;previewoftheairhandlingunitisdisplayedontherightinthedialogbox.
4.Setthevalueofelevationas3200intheElevationeditboxavailableinthebottomofthedialogboxandclickinthedrawingareatoplacetheairhandlingunit,refertoFigure10-50.
Figure10-50Thedrawingafterplacingtheairhandlingunit
5.Connectthediffuserswiththeairhandlingunit,refertoFigure10-51.
![Page 451: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/451.jpg)
Figure10-51ThedrawingafterconnectingthediffuserstotheairhandlingunitAddingReturnGrillesintheArchitecturalDrawingofFirstFloor1.Choose theAirTerminal tool from theEquipment panel of theHome tab in theRibbon; theAddMulti-viewPartsdialogboxisdisplayed.Also,youarepromptedtospecifytheinsertionpointoftheairterminal.
2.ClickontheplussignadjacenttoGrillesinthepartlistandthenchoosetheReturnAirGrillespartfrom the part list; the preview of the air grilles is displayed in the right of the dialog box, refer toFigure10-52.
![Page 452: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/452.jpg)
Figure10-52TheAddMulti-viewPartsdialogbox
3. Select the 75 x 625mmReturn AirGrille option from thePart Size Name drop-down list andspecifythevalueofelevation3600intheElevationeditbox.
4.ChoosetheFlowtabandspecifythevalueforflowas4intheFlow(EachTerminal)editbox.5.Addthereturngrilles,asshowninFigure10-53.
Figure10-53Thedrawingafteraddingreturngrilles
![Page 453: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/453.jpg)
CreatingReturnDuctLinefortheFirstFloor1. Choose the1-Line tool from theBy Shape area of theTOOLPALETTES; you are prompted tospecifythestartpointoftheductline.
2.Clickonthereturngrillandcreatetheductline,refertoFigure10-54.
Figure10-54Thedrawingafteraddingductlinetothereturngrilles
CalculatingtheDuctSizes1.Selectaductlineinthediffusersystem;theDuctcontextualtabisdisplayed.2.ChoosetheCalculateDuctSizestoolfromtheCalculationspanelintheHometabintheribbon;theDuctSystemSizeCalculatordialogboxisdisplayed.
3.ChoosetheStarttoolfromthe4areaofthedialogboxandchoosetheOKbuttonfromthesuccessivedialogboxes;theductsizesarecalculatedandtransitionisappliedautomatically.
4.Choose theOK button from the successiveChooseaPart dialog boxes and then choose theClosebuttonfromtheDuctSystemSizeCalculatordialogbox;thetransitionsareappliedtotheductline,asshowninFigure10-55.
![Page 454: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/454.jpg)
Figure10-55Thedrawingafterapplyingtransitionstothediffuserductline
5.Similarly,calculatetheductsizesoftheductlinecreatedforreturnduct.Ondoingso,thedrawingisdisplayed,asshowninFigure10-56.
![Page 455: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/455.jpg)
Figure10-56Thedrawingafterapplyingtransitionstothereturngrilleductline6.Savethedrawingandcloseit.CreatingPipingDrawingsNow,youneedtocreatepipingdrawingsinthebuilding.Tocreatepipingdrawings,youneedtoswitchtothePipingWorkspace.CreatingPipingDrawingoftheGroundFloor1.SelectthePipingcategoryfromthePROJECTNAVIGATORandchoosetheAddConstructbuttonavailableatthebottom;theAddConstructdialogboxisdisplayed.
2.EnterthenameGroundFloorPipingintheNamefieldofthedialogbox.3.ClickintheDescriptionfield;theDescriptiondialogboxisdisplayed.
4.EnterthedescriptionasThisdrawingismeantforpipingplanofthegroundfloorandthenchoosetheOKbuttonfromthedialogbox.
5.Selectthecheckboxcorrespondingtothelevel1intheDivisioncolumnintheAddConstructdialogbox and choose theOK button; the drawing is opened. Also, the Ground Floor Piping drawing isdisplayedwithalockiconadjacenttoitinthePROJECTNAVIGATOR.
![Page 456: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/456.jpg)
6.Clickon theWorkspaceSwitching option in theDrawingStatusBar and choose thePiping optionfromtheflyout.
ImportingtheArchitecturalDrawingoftheGroundFloorBeforeaddinganymechanicalsystemintheproject,youneedtofirstimportthearchitecturalplanofthegroundfloor.1.OpenthePROJECTNAVIGATORandthenclickontheplussignadjacenttoArchitecturalcategoryintheConstructstab;alistofarchitecturaldrawingsisdisplayed.
2. Select Ground Floor Architectural drawing from the list and drag it into the current drawing; thearchitecturaldrawingisattachedtothecurrentdrawingasanexternalreference.
AddingBallValvesintheArchitecturalDrawingoftheGroundFloor1.ChoosetheValvetoolfromtheEquipmentpaneloftheHometabintheRibbon;theAddMulti-viewPartsdialogboxisdisplayed,asshowninFigure10-57.
Figure10-57TheAddMulti-viewPartsdialogbox
2.ClickontheplussignadjacenttoValvesundertheMechanicalnodeinthepartlistofthedialogbox;varioustypesofvalvesaredisplayedinthelist.
3. Select theBall Valve - Threaded - Nickel plated part from the list; the preview of the part isdisplayedintherightofthedialogbox,refertoFigure10-58.
![Page 457: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/457.jpg)
Figure10-58TheAddMulti-viewPartsdialogboxwiththeballvalveselected4.Selectthe40mmBallvalve-Threaded-Nickelplated(‘A’=108‘B’=161‘C’=80)optionfromthePartSizeNamedrop-downlist.
5.Specifytheelevationvalueas1000intheElevationeditbox.6.Placetheballvalvessymmetrically,asshowninFigure10-59.
Figure10-59Thedrawingafteraddingballvalves
![Page 458: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/458.jpg)
AddingPipeLineintheArchitecturalDrawingofGroundFloor1.ChoosethePipetoolfromthePipedrop-downintheBuildpaneloftheHometabintheRibbon; thePROPERTIESpaletteisdisplayed,asshowninFigure10-60.Also,youarepromptedtospecifythestartpointofthepipe.
Figure10-60ThePROPERTIESpaletteonchoosingthePipetool2.Selectthe40optionfromtheNominalSizedrop-downlist.
3.Select theYes option from theSpecify cut lengthdrop-down list; theCut length edit box is displayedbelowthedrop-downlist.
4.Specify6000intheCutlengtheditbox.5.Clickinthedrawingareaanddrawthepipeline,asshowninFigure10-61.
![Page 459: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/459.jpg)
Figure10-61Thedrawingafterdrawingthepipeline
ConnectingBallValveswiththePipeLine1.Clickontheballvalveattheleftendofthebottomrow;thevalveisdisplayedwithplussigns,refertoFigure10-62.
Figure10-62Theballvalvewithplussigns2.Clickon theplus sign, refer toFigure10-62andconnect theball valvewith thepipe line, refer toFigure10-63.
![Page 460: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/460.jpg)
Figure10-63Theballvalveafterconnectingtothepipeline
3.Similarly,connectalltheballvalvestothepipeline,refertoFigure10-64.
Figure10-64Pipingsystemafterconnectingalltheballvalvestothepipeline4.Selecttheelbowatthebottomleftcornerofthedrawingandthenclickontheplussigndisplayedon
![Page 461: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/461.jpg)
theelbow,asshowninFigure10-65;theelbowtransformsintoatee.
Figure10-65Theplussigntobeselected5.Movethecursorhorizontallytowardstheleftandspecify1000atthecommandbarandpressENTER.PressENTERagaintoexitthetool.
6.Savethedrawingandcloseit.
CreatingPipingDrawingoftheFirstFloor1.SelectthePipingcategoryfromthePROJECTNAVIGATORandchoosetheAddConstructbuttonavailableatthebottom;theAddConstructdialogboxisdisplayed.
2.EnterFirstFloorPipingintheNamefieldofthedialogbox.3.ClickintheDescriptionfield;theDescriptiondialogboxisdisplayed.
4. Enter the description This drawing is meant for piping plan of the first floor in the Edit theDescriptioneditboxandthenchoosetheOKbuttonfromthedialogbox.
5.Selectthecheckboxcorrespondingtothelevel2intheDivisioncolumnoftheAddConstructdialogboxandthenchoosetheOKbuttonfromthedialogbox;thedrawingisopenedinAutoCADMEP.Also,the First Floor Piping drawing is displayed with a lock icon adjacent to it in the PROJECTNAVIGATOR.
6.ClickontheWorkspaceSwitchingoptionintheDrawingStatusBarandthenchoosethePipingoptionfromtheflyoutdisplayed;thePipingworkspacegetsactivated.
ImportingtheArchitecturalDrawingoftheFirstFloorBeforeaddinganypipingsystemtotheproject,firstyouneedtoimportthearchitecturalplanofthefirstfloor.1.OpenthePROJECTNAVIGATORandthenclickontheplussignadjacenttoArchitecturalcategoryintheConstructstab;alistofarchitecturaldrawingsisdisplayed.
2. Select the First Floor Architectural Drawing from the list and drag it to the current drawing; thearchitecturaldrawingisattachedtothecurrentdrawingasanexternalreference.
![Page 462: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/462.jpg)
AddingTankintheFirstFloor1.ChoosetheTanktoolfromtheEquipmentpaneloftheHometabintheRibbon;theAddMulti-viewPartsdialogboxisdisplayed,asshowninFigure10-66.
Figure10-66TheAddMulti-viewPartsdialogbox2.SelecttheHorizontalStorageTankspartfromthepartlist;thepreviewofthetankisdisplayedontherightinthedialogbox.
3.Selectthe1300LiterHorizontalStorageTankoptionfromthePartSizeNamedrop-downlistandspecifythevalueofelevation0intheElevationeditbox.
4.Clickinthedrawingareatospecifytheinsertionpointofthetank,refertoFigure10-67.
![Page 463: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/463.jpg)
Figure10-67Thedrawingafteraddingthetank
AddingPumpsintheFirstFloor1.ChoosethePumpstoolfromtheEquipmentpaneloftheHometabintheRibbon;theAddMulti-viewPartsdialogboxisdisplayed.
2.SelecttheHorizontalSplitCasePumpspartfromthepartlistavailableattheleftofthedialogbox;thepreviewofthepumpisdisplayedintherightofthedialogbox.
3.Selectthe1200x600mmHorizontalSplitCasepumpoptionfromthePartSizeNamedrop-downlist and specify the value of elevation as0 in theElevation edit box available at the bottomof thedialogbox.
4.Clickinthedrawingareatospecifytheinsertionpointforthepump,refertoFigure10-68.
Figure10-68Thedrawingafteraddingpump
AddingPipeLineintheFirstFloor1.Selectthetankinthedrawingarea;plussignsaredisplayedonthetank.2.Clickontheplussignattherightofthetank;arubberbandpipegetsattachedtothecursor,refertoFigure10-69.
![Page 464: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/464.jpg)
Figure10-69Therubberbandpipeattachedtothecursor
3.ClickontheadjacentPipeEndConnectorofthepump;theChooseaPartdialogboxisdisplayed,asshowninFigure10-70.
Figure10-70TheChooseaPartdialogbox
NoteTheChooseaPart dialog boxwill be displayed onlywhen there is an elevation or size differencebetweenthetwojoiningequipments.
4.Choose theOKbutton from thedialogboxesdisplayedsuccessivelyand thenpressENTER;apipelineiscreatedbetweenthetankandthepump.
![Page 465: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/465.jpg)
5.Similarly,createthepipelineontheotherendconnectors,asshowninFigure10-71.
Figure10-71Thedrawingafteraddingpipelines6.Savethedrawingandcloseit.
CreatingElectricalDrawingsNow, you need to create electrical drawings of the building. To do so, switch to the Electricalworkspace.CreatingElectricalDrawingoftheGroundFloor1. Select theElectrical category from thePROJECTNAVIGATOR and choose theAdd Constructbuttonavailableatthebottom;theAddConstructdialogboxisdisplayed.
2.EnterGroundFloorElectricalintheNamefieldofthedialogbox.3.ClickintheDescriptionfield;theDescriptiondialogboxisdisplayed.
4.EnterthedescriptionThisdrawingismeantforelectricalplanofthegroundfloor intheEdit theDescriptioneditboxandthenchoosetheOKbuttonfromthedialogbox.
5.Selectthecheckboxcorrespondingtothelevel0intheDivisioncolumnintheAddConstructdialogboxandthenchoosetheOKbuttonfromthedialogbox;thedrawingisopenedinAutoCADMEP.Also,theGroundFloorElectrical drawing is displayedwith a lock icon adjacent to it in thePROJECTNAVIGATOR.
6.ClickontheWorkspaceSwitchingoptionintheDrawingStatusBarandselecttheElectricaloptionfromtheflyout.
ImportingtheArchitecturalDrawingoftheGroundFloor
![Page 466: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/466.jpg)
Beforeaddinganyelectricalsystemintheproject,youneedtoimportthearchitecturalplanofthegroundfloor.1.OpenthePROJECTNAVIGATORandthenclickontheplussignadjacenttoArchitecturalcategoryintheConstructstab;alistofarchitecturaldrawingsisdisplayed.
2. Select theGroundFloorArchitectural drawing from the list and drag it to the current drawing; thearchitecturaldrawingisattachedtothecurrentdrawingasanexternalreference.
Adding300X1200SurfaceTypeALightstotheDrawingNow,youneedtoaddlightstothedrawing.1. Choose theDevice tool from theBuild panel of theHome tab in theRibbon; thePROPERTIESpaletteismodified,refertoFigure10-72.
Figure10-72ThePROPERTIESpalettedisplayedonchoosingtheDevicetool
2.ClickintheStylefieldofthePROPERTIESpalette;theSelectStyledialogboxisdisplayed.3.SelecttheLightingFluorescent(Global)optionfromtheDrawingfiledrop-downlist;thelightstylesavailableinAutoCADMEParedisplayed.
4.Selectthe300X1200SurfaceTypeALightoptionfromthelightstylesandthenchoosetheOKbuttonfromthedialogbox;thelightgetsattachedtothecursor.
![Page 467: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/467.jpg)
5.Placethelightsinthedrawing,asshowninFigure10-73.
Figure10-73ThedrawingafteraddinglightsAddingSocketstotheDrawingNow,youneedtoaddsocketstothedrawing.1.ChoosetheDevicetoolfromtheBuildpanel;thePROPERTIESpaletteisdisplayed.
2.ClickintheStylefieldofthePROPERTIESpalette;theSelectStyledialogboxisdisplayed.3.Select theSockets (Global) option from theDrawingfile drop-down list; various styles of socketsavailableinAutoCADMEParedisplayedinthedialogbox.
4. Select theSingle Pole SwitchedOutlet socket style from the dialog box and then choose theOKbutton;thesocketgetsattachedtothecursor.
5.Placethesocketsalongthewall,asshowninFigure10-74.
![Page 468: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/468.jpg)
Figure10-74Thedrawingafteraddingsockets
Adding300x600RecessedLightstotheDrawingNow,youneedtoaddlightstothedrawing.1.ChoosetheDevicetoolfromtheBuildpanel;thePROPERTIESpaletteisdisplayed.
2.ClickintheStylefieldofthePROPERTIESpalette;theSelectStyledialogboxisdisplayed.3.SelecttheLightingFluorescent(Global)optionfromtheDrawingfiledrop-downlist;variousstylesoflightsavailableinAutoCADMEParedisplayedinthedialogbox.
4.Selectthe300x600RecessedLightsstylefromthedialogboxandthenchoosetheOKbutton;thelightgetsattachedtothecursor.
5.Placethelightsinthecenteroftheinnerareaofthegroundfloor,refertoFigure10-75.
![Page 469: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/469.jpg)
Figure10-75ThedrawingafteraddinglightsinthecenteroftheinnerareaConfiguringDevices1.SelectasocketfromthedrawingareaandthenselecttheSelectSimilaroptionfromtheSelectSimilardrop-downlistintheDevicecontextualtabdisplayed;allthesocketsavailableinthedrawingareaareselected.
2.Clickon theElectricalproperties field in theAdvanced rollout of thePROPERTIES palette; theElectricalPropertiesdialogboxisdisplayed,asshowninFigure10-76.Nowinthisdialogbox,youneedtospecifytheparametersthataregiveninTable10-1.
![Page 470: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/470.jpg)
Figure10-76TheElectricalPropertiesdialogbox3.Selectthe230VPoweroptionfromtheSystemdrop-downlist.4.Specifythevalue300intheLoadPhase1editbox,refertoTable10-1.
5.Selectthe230optionfromtheVoltagedrop-downlist.6.Similarly,selectthe1optionfromtheNumberofPolesdrop-downlist.7.Enter thevalueofmaximumovercurrent ratingas10 in theMaximumOvercurrentRating (amps)editbox.
8.Specifythevalueas0.8inthePowerFactoreditbox.ChoosetheOKbuttontoexitthedialogbox.
9.Similarly,specifytheparametersforotherdevicesintheElectricalPropertiesdialogboxbyusingthestepsdiscussedabove.Forparameters,refertoTable10-1.
CreatingPanelAll the devices are connected to circuits. These circuits are joined to a panel for electricity supply.
![Page 471: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/471.jpg)
Therefore,youneedtocreateapanelwithcircuitsinthissection.
1.ChoosethePaneltoolfromtheBuildpanelintheHometaboftheRibbon;youarepromptedtospecifyaninsertionpointforthepanelandthePROPERTIESpaletteisdisplayed,asshowninFigure10-77.SelecttheSurfaceDoor3stylefromtheStylefieldinthePROPERTIESpalette.
Figure10-77ThePROPERTIESpalettedisplayedonchoosingthePaneltool2.ClickintheNameeditboxintheADVANCED>DesignDatarolloutofthePROPERTIESpaletteandspecifythenameasMainPanel.
3.Specifythevalue800intheRatingeditbox.4.Selectthe230optionfromtheVoltagephase-to-neutraldrop-downlist.5.Selectthe240optionfromtheVoltagephase-to-phasedrop-downlist.6.SpecifyMaintypeasMaincircuitbreaker,Mainsize(amps)as15,Designcapacity(amps)as20,andAICratingas800inthePROPERTIESpalette.
Now,youneedtocreatecircuitsforthepanel.7. Click in theCircuit Settings field under ADVANCED > Circuits rollout of the PROPERTIESpalette;theCircuitSettingsdialogboxisdisplayed,asshowninFigure10-78.
![Page 472: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/472.jpg)
Figure10-78TheCircuitSettingsdialogbox8.Setthevalueas2intheTotalnumberofslotsandNumberof1-polecircuitsspinnersandselectthe230 option from the Voltage drop-down list adjacent to the spinner. Make sure that Power andLighting isselectedintheSystemTypedrop-downlistand230VPower isselected in theSystemdrop-downlist.
9.ChoosetheOKbuttonfromthedialogboxtoexit.10.SelecttheYesoptionfromtheCreateCircuitdrop-downlistintheAdvancedrollout.Clickinthedrawingareatoplacethepanel,refertoFigure10-79.Also,theAutoCADMEP-ElectricalProjectDatabasedialogboxisdisplayed,refertoFigure10-80.
![Page 473: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/473.jpg)
Figure10-79Thedrawingwiththepanelplaced
Figure10-80TheAutoCADMEP-ElectricalProjectDatabasedialogbox
11. Choose theCreate a new EPD file option from the dialog box and save the file at the desiredlocationwiththenamelight_panel;thepaneliscreatedatthespecifiedlocation.
12.Asexplainedinprevioussteps,place theotherpanelfor230VPower(230VPOWER)systemandrenameitasSocketsPanel,refertoFigure10-81.
![Page 474: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/474.jpg)
Figure10-81Thedrawingwithotherpanelfor230VpoweraddedConfiguringCircuits1.Select thepanel thatwas created first and then choose theCircuitManager tool from theCircuitspanel in thePanel contextual tab of theRibbon; theCIRCUITMANAGER is displayed, refer toFigure10-82.
Figure10-82TheCIRCUITMANAGER2.SpecifythenameOuterLightsinthefield1oftheNamecolumnintheCIRCUITMANAGER.3.SpecifythenameInnerLightsinthefield2oftheNamecolumnintheCIRCUITMANAGER.4.ClickontheplussignadjacenttoSocketspanelontheleftintheCIRCUITMANAGER; thelistofcircuitsavailableinthepanelisdisplayedbelowit.
![Page 475: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/475.jpg)
5.SelectPowerandLightingfromtheleftoftheCIRCUITMANAGER;thelistofcircuitsisdisplayedontheright.
6.Double-clickon1undertheNamepanelandspecifythenameasSockets.7.Double-clickintheVoltagefieldforSocketsandselectthe230optionfromthedrop-downlist.8.Selectthe230VPoweroptionfromtheSystemdrop-downlist.9.ClosetheCIRCUITMANAGERdialogbox.AddingWires1.ChoosetheWiretoolfromtheBuildpaneloftheHometabintheRibbon;youarepromptedtospecifythe start point of the wire for an electrical device and thePROPERTIES palette is displayed, asshowninFigure10-83.
Figure10-83ThePROPERTIESpalettedisplayedonchoosingtheWiretool2.Selectthe230VPower(230VPOWER)optionfromtheSystemdrop-downlist.3.SelectthePVCSingleoptionfromtheStyledrop-downlistundertheGeneralRollout.
![Page 476: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/476.jpg)
4.Connectallthesocketsusingwires,refertoFigure10-84.MakesurethattheLineoptionisselectedintheSegmentdrop-downlist.
Figure10-84Thedrawingafterconnectingsocketsusingwires5.Similarly,connectallthelightstotheotherpanelusingthe230VLightingsystem,refertoFigure10-85.MakesurethatthecircuitselectedforinnerlightsisInnerLightsandforouterlightsisOuterLights.
![Page 477: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/477.jpg)
Figure10-85ThedrawingafteraddingwirestolightsCalculatingLoadandWireSizesNow,youneedtocalculatethetotalloadoftheelectricalsystemandthewiresize.1.Choose thePowerTotals tool from theElectrical panel in theAnalyze tabof theRibbon; you arepromptedtoselectthedevices.
2.SelectallthedevicesavailableinthedrawingareaandpressENTER;thePowerTotalsdialogboxisdisplayed,refertoFigure10-86.
Figure10-86ThePowerTotalsdialogboxThetotalloadisdisplayedintheTotalLoadfieldofthedialogbox.Now,youneedtocalculatethewiresizeofthecircuit.
3. To calculate wire size, select all the wires in the drawing area; the PROPERTIES palette isdisplayed.
4. Click on the Calculate sizes for the wire button available on the right of the ADVANCED >DimensionsrolloutofthePROPERTIESpalette;thewiresizesaredisplayedintheHotsize,Neutralsize,andGroundsizeeditboxesintheDimensionsrollout.
AddingTransformerandEmergencyGeneratorAfter making calculations, the total load of the ground floor comes out to be approximately 7.3kVa.Assumingthesamecapacityforfirstfloorandconsideringthepeakloadcondition,youneedtoplaceatransformerandageneratorofcapacity15kVainthedrawingarea.1.ChoosetheEquipmenttoolfromtheEquipmentdrop-downintheBuildpaneloftheHometabintheRibbon;theAddMulti-viewPartsdialogboxisdisplayed,refertoFigure10-87.
2.ClickontheplussignadjacenttoElectricalinthepartlistavailableattheleftofthedialogbox;theelectricalequipmentaredisplayedbelowit.
3. Click on the plus sign adjacent toPowerTransformers in the part list and select theDry TypeTransformer-3-150kVapart;thepreviewofthetransformerisdisplayed,refertoFigure10-87.
![Page 478: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/478.jpg)
Figure10-87TheAddMulti-viewPartsdialogbox
4.Selectthe15kVaDryTypeTransformeroptionfromthePartSizeNamedrop-downlistavailableatthebottominthedialogboxandplacethetransformeratanappropriatedistancefromthebuildingintheouterarea,refertoFigure10-88.
Figure10-88Thedrawingafterplacingatransformer5.Similarly,placetheemergencygeneratorhavingthecorrespondingcapacityinthedrawingadjacenttothepowertransformer.
![Page 479: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/479.jpg)
6.Connectthetransformerandemergencygeneratorwiththepanels,refertoFigure10-89.
Figure10-89ThedrawingafterconnectingtransformerandgeneratortothecircuitCreatingElectricalDrawingoftheFirstFloor1. Select theElectrical category from thePROJECTNAVIGATOR and choose theAdd Constructbuttonavailableatthebottom;theAddConstructdialogboxisdisplayed.
2.ClickintheNamefieldofthedialogboxandenterthenameasFirstFloorElectrical.3.ClickintheDescriptionfield;theDescriptiondialogboxisdisplayed.
4.EnterthedescriptionThisdrawingismeantforelectricalplanofthefirstfloorandthenchoosetheOKbuttonfromthedialogbox.
5.Selectthecheckboxcorrespondingtolevel1intheDivisioncolumnoftheAddConstructdialogboxandchoosetheOKbutton; thedrawingisopenedinAutoCADMEP.Also, theFirstFloorElectricaldrawingisdisplayedwithalockiconadjacenttoitinthePROJECTNAVIGATOR.
6.ClickontheWorkspaceSwitchingoptionoftheDrawingStatusBarandchoosetheElectricaloptionfromtheflyout.
ImportingtheArchitecturalDrawingoftheFirstFloor
![Page 480: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/480.jpg)
Beforeaddinganymechanicalsystemtotheproject,youneedtofirstimportthearchitecturalplanofthefirstfloor.1.OpenthePROJECTNAVIGATORandthenclickontheplussignadjacenttoArchitecturalcategoryintheConstructstab;thelistofarchitecturaldrawingsisdisplayed.
2. Select First Floor Architectural drawing from the list and drag it to the current drawing; thearchitecturaldrawingisattachedtothecurrentdrawingasanexternalreference.
AddingLightsintheDrawingNow,youneedtoaddlightstothedrawing.1. Choose theDevice tool from theBuild panel of theHome tab in theRibbon; thePROPERTIESpaletteisdisplayed,refertoFigure10-90.
Figure10-90ThePROPERTIESpalettedisplayedonchoosingtheDevicetool2.ClickintheStylefieldofthePROPERTIESpalette;theSelectStyledialogboxisdisplayed.3.SelecttheLightingFluorescent(Global)optionfromtheDrawingfiledrop-downlist;thelightstylesavailableinAutoCADMEParedisplayed.
4. Select the 300X600RecessedLight from the light styles and then choose theOK button from thedialogbox;thelightsymbolgetsattachedtothecursor.
![Page 481: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/481.jpg)
5.Placethreeequidistantlightsineachroominthedrawing,refertoFigure10-91.
Figure10-91ThedrawingafteraddinglightsandsocketsAddingSocketsintheDrawingNow,youneedtoaddsocketstothedrawing.
1.ChoosetheDevicetoolfromtheBuildpaneloftheHometabintheribbon;thePROPERTIESpaletteisdisplayed.
2.ClickintheStylefieldofthePROPERTIESpalette;theSelectStyledialogboxisdisplayed.3.Select theSockets (Global) option from theDrawingfile drop-down list; various styles of socketsavailableinAutoCADMEParedisplayedinthedialogbox.
4. Select theSingle Pole SwitchedOutlet socket style from the dialog box and then choose theOKbutton;thesocketsymbolgetsattachedtothecursor.
![Page 482: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/482.jpg)
5.Placethesocketsalongthewall,refertoFigure10-91.
ConfiguringDevices1.SelectasocketfromthedrawingareaandthenselecttheSelectSimilaroptionfromtheSelectSimilardrop-downlistintheDevicecontextualtabdisplayed;allthesocketsavailableinthedrawingareaareselected.
2. Click in theElectrical properties field in theCircuits rollout of the PROPERTIES palette; theElectricalPropertiesdialogboxisdisplayed,asshowninFigure10-92.
Figure10-92TheElectricalPropertiesdialogbox
Now,youneedtospecifytheparametersthataregiveninTable10-1.3.Selectthe230VPoweroptionfromtheSystemdrop-downlist.4.Specifythevalue300intheLoadPhase1editbox,refertoTable10-1.
![Page 483: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/483.jpg)
5.Selectthe230optionfromtheVoltagedrop-downlist.6.Similarly,selectthe1optionfromtheNumberofPolesdrop-downlistinthedialogbox.7.Specifythevalueofmaximumovercurrentrating10intheMaximumOvercurrentRating(amps)editboxinthedialogbox.
8.Specifythevalueas0.8inthePowerFactoreditboxandthenchoosetheOKbuttontoexitthedialogbox.
9.Similarly,specifytheparametersforotherdevicesintheElectricalPropertiesdialogboxbyusingthestepsdiscussedabove.Forparameters,refertoTable10-1.
CreatingPanelAsdiscussedearlier,all thedevicesareconnected tocircuits.Thesecircuitsare joined toapanel forelectricitysupply.So,youneedtocreateapanelwithcircuitsinthissection.
1.ChoosethePaneltoolfromtheBuildpanelintheHometaboftheRibbon;youarepromptedtospecifyaninsertionpointforthepanelandthePROPERTIESpaletteisdisplayed,asshowninFigure10-93.SelecttheSurfaceDoor3stylefromtheStylefieldinthePROPERTIESpalette.
Figure10-93ThePROPERTIESpalette2.ClickintheNameeditboxoftheADVANCED>DesignDatarolloutofthePROPERTIESpaletteandspecifythenameasPanel1.
3.Specifythevalue800intheRatingeditbox.4.Selectthe230optionfromtheVoltagephase-to-neutraldrop-downlist.
![Page 484: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/484.jpg)
5.Selectthe240optionfromtheVoltagephase-to-phasedrop-downlist.6.SpecifyMaintype asMain circuitbreaker,Main size (amps) as15,Design capacity (amps) as20,andAICratingas800intheADVANCED>DesignDatarolloutinthePROPERTIESpalette.
Now,youneedtocreatecircuitsforthepanel.
7.Click in theCircuitSettings field in thePROPERTIESpalette; theCircuitSettings dialog box isdisplayed,asshowninFigure10-94.
Figure10-94TheCircuitSettingsdialogbox
8.Setthevalueas2intheTotalnumberofslotsandNumberof1-polecircuitsspinnersandselectthe230 option from the Voltage drop-down list adjacent to the spinner. Make sure that Power andLighting isselectedintheSystemTypedrop-downlistand230VPower isselected in theSystemdrop-downlist.
9.ChoosetheOKbuttonfromthedialogboxtoexit.SelecttheYesoptionfromtheCreatecircuitsdrop-downlistintheCircuitsrollout.
10. Click in the drawing area to place the panel, refer to Figure 10-95. Also, theAutoCADMEP -
![Page 485: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/485.jpg)
ElectricalProjectDatabasedialogboxisdisplayed,refertoFigure10-96.
Figure10-95Thedrawingwiththepaneltobeadded
Figure10-96TheAutoCADMEP-ElectricalProjectDatabasedialogbox11. Choose theCreate a new EPD file option from the dialog box and save the file at the desiredlocationwiththenametop_panel;thepaneliscreatedatthespecifiedlocation.
ConfiguringCircuits1.SelectthepanelcreatedandthenchoosetheCircuitManagertoolfromtheCircuitspanelinthePaneltaboftheRibbon;theCIRCUITMANAGERisdisplayed.
![Page 486: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/486.jpg)
2. Click in the field 1 in theName column of theCIRCUITMANAGER and specify the name asSockets.
3.Clickinthefield2intheNamecolumnoftheCIRCUITMANAGERandspecifythenameasLights.4. Double-click in theVoltage field for Sockets and select the 230 option from the drop-down listdisplayed.
5.Double-clickintheSystemfieldforthecircuitandselectthe230VPoweroptionfromthedrop-downlistdisplayed.
6.Double-clickintheSystemfieldforLightsandselectthe230VLightingoptionfromthedrop-downlistdisplayed.
7. Double-click in the Voltage field for Lights and select the 230 option from the drop-down listdisplayed.
TheCIRCUITMANAGERafterapplyingtheaboveconfigurationisdisplayed,asshowninFigure10-97.
Figure10-97TheCIRCUITMANAGERafterapplyingconfiguration
AddingWires1.ChoosetheWiretoolfromtheBuildpaneloftheHometabintheRibbon;youarepromptedtospecifythestartpointofthewireonanelectricaldeviceandthePROPERTIESpaletteisdisplayed,asshowninFigure10-98.
![Page 487: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/487.jpg)
Figure10-98ThePROPERTIESpalettedisplayedonchoosingtheWiretool2.Selectthe230VPower(230VPOWER)optionfromtheSystemdrop-downlist.3.SelectthePVCSingleoptionfromtheStyledrop-downlist.
4.Connectallthesocketstothepanelusingwire,refertoFigure10-99.MakesurethattheLineoptionisselectedintheSegmentdrop-downlist.
![Page 488: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/488.jpg)
Figure10-99Thedrawingafteraddingallthesocketswiththepanel
5.Similarly,connectall the lights to thepanelusing the230VLightingsystem, refer toFigure10-100.MakesurethatthecircuitselectedforlightsisLights.
![Page 489: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/489.jpg)
Figure10-100Thedrawingafteraddinglightstothepanel
CalculatingLoadsandWireSizes1.Choose thePowerTotals tool from theElectrical panel in theAnalyze tabof theRibbon; you arepromptedtoselectthedevices.
2.SelectallthedevicesavailableinthedrawingareaandpressENTER;thePowerTotalsdialogboxisdisplayed,refertoFigure10-101.
Figure10-101ThePowerTotalsdialogboxThetotalloadisdisplayedintheTotalLoadfieldofthedialogbox.Now,youneedtocalculatethewiresizeforthecircuit.
![Page 490: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/490.jpg)
3. To calculate wire size, select all the wires in the drawing area; the PROPERTIES palette isdisplayed.
4. Choose the Calculate sizes for the wire button available at the right of the ADVANCED >Dimensions rolloutofthePROPERTIESpalette; thecalculatedwiresizesaredisplayed in theHotsize,Neutralsize,andGroundsizeeditboxesintheDimensionsrollout.
5.Saveandclosethedrawing.
![Page 491: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/491.jpg)
OtherPublicationsbyCADCIMTechnologiesThe following is the list of some of the publications by CADCIM Technologies. Please visitwww.cadcim.comforthecompletelisting.ANSYSTextbooks•ANSYSWorkbench14.0:ATutorialApproach•ANSYS11.0forDesignersAutodeskInventorTextbooks•AutodeskInventor2015forDesigners,15thEdition•AutodeskInventor2014forDesigners•AutodeskInventor2013forDesigners•AutodeskInventor2012forDesignersSolidEdgeTextbooks•SolidEdgeST6forDesigners,11thEdition•SolidEdgeST5forDesigners•SolidEdgeST4forDesignersNXTextbooks•NX9.0forDesigners,13thEdition•NX8.5forDesigners•NX8forDesigners•NX7forDesignersAutoCADTextbooks•AutoCAD2015:AProblemSolvingApproach,BasicandIntermediate,21stEdition•AutoCAD2015:AProblemSolvingApproach,3DandAdvanced,21stEditionAutoCADMEPTextbooks•AutoCADMEP2014forDesignersSolidWorksTextbooks•SolidWorks2014forDesigners,12thEdition•SolidWorks2014:ATutorialApproach•SolidWorks2013forDesigners•SolidWorks2012:ATutorialApproach•SolidWorks2012forDesigners•LearningSolidWorks2011:AProjectbasedApproachCATIATextbooks
![Page 492: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/492.jpg)
•CATIAV5-6R2013forDesigners,11thEdition•CATIAV5-6R2012forDesigners•CATIAV-5R21forDesigners•CATIAV-5R20forDesignersCreoParametricandPro/ENGINEERTextbooks•CreoParametric2.0forDesigners•CreoParametric1.0forDesigners•Pro/ENGINEERWildfire5.0forDesigners•Pro/ENGINEERWildfire4.0forDesignersAutodeskAliasTextbooks•LearningAutodeskAliasDesign2015,3rdEdition•LearningAutodeskAliasDesign2012•LearningAutodeskAliasDesign2010AutoCADLTTextbooks•AutoCADLT2014forDesigners•AutoCADLT2013forDesignersAutoCADElectricalTextbooks•AutoCADElectrical2014forElectricalControlDesigners•AutoCADElectrical2013forElectricalControlDesignersEdgeCAMTextbooks•EdgeCAM11.0forManufacturersAutodeskRevitArchitectureTextbooks•AutodeskRevitArchitecture2015forArchitectsandDesigners,11thEdition•AutodeskRevitArchitecture2014forArchitectsandDesigners•AutodeskRevitArchitecture2013forArchitectsandDesigners•AutodeskRevitArchitecture2012forArchitectsandDesignersAutodeskRevitStructureTextbooks•ExploringAutodeskRevitStructure2015,5thEdition•ExploringAutodeskRevitStructure2014•ExploringAutodeskRevitStructure2013•ExploringAutodeskRevitStructure2012AutoCADCivil3DTextbooks•ExploringAutoCADCivil3D2015,5thEdition•ExploringAutoCADCivil3D2014•ExploringAutoCADCivil3D2013•AutoCADCivil3D2012
![Page 493: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/493.jpg)
AutoCADMap3DTextbooks•ExploringAutoCADMap3D2015,5thEdition•ExploringAutoCADMap3D2014•ExploringAutoCADMap3D20133dsMaxDesignTextbooks•Autodesk3dsMaxDesign2015:ATutorialApproach,15thEdition•Autodesk3dsMaxDesign2014:ATutorialApproach•Autodesk3dsMaxDesign2013:ATutorialApproach•Autodesk3dsMaxDesign2012:ATutorialApproach3dsMaxTextbooks•Autodesk3dsMax2015:AComprehensiveGuide,15thEdition•Autodesk3dsMax2014:AComprehensiveGuide•Autodesk3dsMax2013:AComprehensiveGuidePaperCraftBook•Constructing3-DimensionalModels:APaper-CraftWorkbookAutoCADTextbooksAuthoredbyProf.ShamTickooandPublishedbyAutodeskPress•AutoCAD:AProblem-SolvingApproach:2013andBeyond•AutoCAD2012:AProblem-SolvingApproach•AutoCAD2011:AProblem-SolvingApproach•AutoCAD2010:AProblem-SolvingApproach•CustomizingAutoCAD2010TextbooksAuthoredbyCADCIMTechnologiesandPublishedbyOtherPublishers3DStudioMaxandVIZTextbooks•Learning3dsMax:ATutorialApproach,Release4Goodheart-WilcoxPublishers(USA)•Learning3DStudioVIZ:ATutorialApproachGoodheart-WilcoxPublishers(USA)•Learning3DStudioR4:ATutorialApproachGoodheart-WilcoxPublishers(USA)3dsMaxTextbook•3dsMax2008:AComprehensiveGuide(SerbianEdition)MikroKnjigaPublishingCompany,SerbiaSolidWorksTextbooks•SolidWorks2008forDesigners(SerbianEdition)MikroKnjigaPublishingCompany,Serbia•SolidWorks2006forDesigners(RussianEdition)
![Page 494: AutoCAD MEP 2015 for Designers](https://reader036.vdocuments.net/reader036/viewer/2022082211/563db944550346aa9a9baa3f/html5/thumbnails/494.jpg)
PiterPublishingPress,Russia•SolidWorks2006forDesigners(SerbianEdition)MikroKnjigaPublishingCompany,Serbia•SolidWorks2006forDesigners(JapaneseEdition)MikioObi,JapanNXTextbooks•NX6forDesigners(KoreanEdition)Onsolutions,SouthKorea•NX5forDesigners(KoreanEdition)Onsolutions,SouthKoreaPro/ENGINEERTextbooks•Pro/ENGINEERWildfire4.0forDesigners(KoreanEdition)HongReungSciencePublishingCompany,SouthKorea•Pro/ENGINEERWildfire3.0forDesigners(KoreanEdition)HongReungSciencePublishingCompany,SouthKoreaAutoCADTextbooks•AutoCAD2006(RussianEdition)PiterPublishingPress,Russia•AutoCAD2005(RussianEdition)PiterPublishingPress,Russia•AutoCAD2000Fondamenti(ItalianEdition)•AutoCAD2000TecnicheAvanzate(ItalianEdition)•AutoCAD2000(ChineseEdition)ComingSoonfromCADCIMTechnologies•NXNastran9.0forDesigners•SOLIDWORKS2015:ATutorialApproach•ExploringPrimaveraP6V8.1•ExploringBentleySTAADProV8iOnlineTrainingProgramOfferedbyCADCIMTechnologiesCADCIM Technologies provides effective and affordable virtual online training on animation,architecture,andGISsoftwares,computerprogramminglanguages,andComputerAidedDesignandManufacturing(CAD/CAM)softwarepackages.Thetrainingwillbedelivered‘live’viaInternetatanytime,anyplace,andatanypacetoindividuals,studentsofcolleges,universities,andCAD/CAMtrainingcenters.Formoreinformation,pleasevisitthefollowinglink:http://www.cadcim.com